Compass Diversified Holdings
Annual Report to Our Owners
2
Letter to Shareowners
4
2012 Highlights
5
Our Companies
10
CODI Governance
12
CODI Information
13
Financial Review
On The Right Track
Compass DiversifieD HolDings (“CoDi”) offers sHareowners an opportunity to own
profitable miDDle market businesses witH leaDing market positions in tHe branDeD
proDuCts anD niCHe inDustrial inDustries.
we own Controlling interests in all of our subsiDiaries, enabling us to take a foCuseD
anD proaCtive approaCH to managing tHem in orDer to Create value for our sHareowners.
we are exCeeDingly DisCiplineD witH respeCt to Due DiligenCe, valuation, terms anD niCHe
market leaDersHip wHen iDentifying potential new subsiDiaries.
our sHareowners Deserve – anD we Deliver – an extraorDinarily HigH level of transparenCy
in our finanCial reporting anD governanCe proCesses.
as of DeCember 31, 2012, CoDi’s branDeD proDuCts anD niCHe inDustrial groups eaCH
ConsisteD of four Diverse subsiDiaries. we believe tHat tHese businesses will Continue
to proDuCe stable anD growing CasH flows, allowing us to invest in tHeir long-term
growtH anD to make CasH Distributions to our sHareowners.
1
LETTER TO SHAREOWNERS
2
Dear Fellow Shareowners,
2012 was an outstanding year for Compass Diversified Holdings. Our group of subsidiary
companies has never been stronger, led by the growth of our Branded Products group coupled
with the stability of our Niche Industrial group. Within our Niche Industrial group, we consummated
the acquisition of Arnold Magnetic Technologies. In addition, we completed the sale of HALO
Holding Corporation. With the re-pricing and expansion of our credit facilities, we have ample
liquidity and a conservative balance sheet. Our share price increased 18.7% and we paid $1.44/
share in distributions. Thus, in 2012 we created value for our shareowners and are well
positioned and poised to pursue continued growth in 2013 and beyond.
We remain focused in our efforts to not only manage and grow our existing subsidiaries, but also
to acquire additional subsidiaries at favorable valuations and terms that possess the
characteristics inherent in our existing group which allow them each to be niche market leaders.
The specific attributes include, but are not limited to: an outstanding in-place management
team whom we can work along side ; ma rke t s hare le a de rs hip; con sistent f in a ncial
outperformance relative to peers; brand strength; manufacturing expertise; and proprietary
products, technology or processes. In addition, we seek companies that operate in industries
with positive long-term dynamics where there are opportunities to enhance results. Taken
together, these attributes provide an existing or potential subsidiary with what we commonly
In 2012 we created value
for our shareowners and
are well positioned and
refer to as ‘a reason to exist’. When a company has a reason to exist, a true
void would exist in its market if that company were to disappear. We work
diligently on your behalf to ensure that our existing subsidiaries retain, and
new subsidiaries possess, a reason to exist.
Our focus in 2012 remained consistent with prior years – to work with our
poised to pursue continued
subsidiaries to provide reliable results and to execute our growth strategy
growth in 2013 and beyond.
in a disciplined manner. We believe that we have achieved these objectives.
We also believe that the re-pricing and expansion of our credit facility in
2012 demonstrates the capital markets’ continued support of CODI and that
with each successful year of operations their support will only increase as
we consistently prove the strength of our business model.
Our Branded Products group, which represents two-thirds of our consolidated EBITDA, drove
our performance in 2012. Each of these subsidiaries – CamelBak, Ergobaby, Fox and Liberty
Safe – possess extraordinary brand strength, innovative new products and passionate customers,
which led to growth in consolidated revenue and EBITDA of 18.0% and 24.2%, respectively.
In addition, consolidated EBITDA margin increased 1.0%. We are thrilled with the
performance of our Branded Products group and believe that each subsidiary
in this group is capable of continuing to grow and gaining market share in 2013.
Our Niche Industrial group, which represents one-third of our consolidated
EBITDA, performed in line with our expectations and generated solid,
predictable results. The subsidiaries – Advanced Circuits, American Furniture,
Arnold Magnetic Technologies and Tridien Medical – serve a diverse group
of end-markets, possess leading manufacturing capabilities and operate in
industries that we expect to perform solidly over the long term. In 2012,
although consolidated revenue and EBITDA declined 4.6% and 1.0%, respectively, the consolidated
EBITDA margin for the group increased 0.4% as the subsidiaries continued to drive operational
efficiencies. We are pleased with the performance our Niche Industrial group, particularly when
considered in the context of the uncertain macroeconomic and political environment that
impacted the group in 2012.
As we enter 2013, we believe that all of our subsidiaries are on the right track and well positioned
within their respective markets to sustain their solid performance and execute on their growth
plans. Our primary objectives will be to build each of our subsidiaries and to carefully deploy
our capital into accretive new platform and add-on acquisitions. Similar to last year, the 2013
economic outlook is uncertain. However, we remain confident that our subsidiaries will
continue to successfully execute on their business plans and generate the strong, consistent
results that you have become accustomed to seeing. We are also cautiously optimistic that we
can add to our group of subsidiaries in the coming year.
I would like to thank our employees, subsidiary management teams and our board of directors
for their unwavering commitment to CODI. CODI’s ability to create value for our shareowners
is directly attributable to their passion and talent. I also want to thank you, our shareowners, for
your support and trust. It is an honor for all of us at CODI to work on your behalf.
Very Truly Yours,
Alan B. Offenberg
Chief Executive Officer
3
2012 HIGHLIGHTS
CODI acquires
Arnold Magnetic Technologies
for $130.5 million
CODI completes the sale of
HALO Branded Solutions
CODI outperforms the indices
e
c
n
a
m
r
o
f
r
e
p
t
u
o
e
v
i
t
e
l
e
r
4
43.8%
46.1%
59.7%
20.7%
16.4%
19.7%
15.0%
19.0%
15.7%
vs. DJia
vs. nasdaq
vs. s&p 500
Advanced Circuits/John Yacoub, CEO
Arnold Magnetic Technologies/Tim Wilson, CEO
American Furniture/Al Wiygul, CEO
CamelBak/Sally McCoy, CEO
OUR COMPANIES
5
Ergobaby/Bill Chiasson, CEO
Fox/Larry Enterline, CEO
Liberty Safe/Kim Waddoups, CEO
Tridien Medical/Vince Costantino, CEO
Headquartered in Aurora,
Colorado, and founded in
1989, Advanced Circuits is the
preeminent North American
manufacturer of quick-turn,
prototype and production
rigid printed circuit boards
(“PCBs”). Customers include
research and development
professionals from corpora-
tions and academic institu-
tions in the United States and
Canada. Advanced Circuits is
able to meet its over 10,000
c u s t o m e r s ’ d e m a n d s f o r
responsiveness, quality and
timely delivery by shipping
high quality, custom PCBs in
as little as 24 hours. To learn
more about Advanced Circuits,
please visit:
www.4pcb.com
6
i nDu s t r i a l pr oDuCt s
is a
Headquartered in Rochester,
New York, and founded in
1 8 9 5 , A r n o l d M a g n e t i c
leading
Technologies
g l o b a l m a n u f a c t u r e r o f
e n g i n e e r e d p e r m a n e n t
m a g n e t s a n d p r e c i s i o n
magnetic assemblies that are
mission critical
in motors,
generators, sensors and other
systems and components.
With facilities in the United
States, the United Kingdom,
S w i t z e r l a n d a n d C h i n a ,
Arnold serves thousands of
c u s t o m e r s w o r l d w i d e i n
diverse end markets including
a e r o s p a c e a n d d e f e n s e ,
energy, automotive, medical
and industrial. To learn more
about Arnold, please visit:
www.arnoldmagnetics.com
H e a d q u a r t e r e d i n E c r u ,
Mississippi, and founded in
1998, American Furniture is
a leading manufacturer of
upholstered furniture targeted
at the promotional segment
of the furniture industry.
American Furniture offers
a broad product line of
s t a t i o n a r y a n d m o t i o n
furniture, including sofas,
loveseats, sectionals, recliners
and accessor y p rod uct s .
American Furniture’s mer-
chandising strategy focuses
o n a l i m i t e d n u m b e r o f
popular, high volume styles
and colors adapted from
proven designs. To learn more
about American Furniture,
please visit:
www.americanfurn.net
i nDu s t r i a l pr oDuCt s
7
Headquartered in Coral
Springs, Florida, and founded
in 2006, Tridien is focused on
the design and manufacture
of medical support surfaces
and devices designed to treat
and prevent various types of
ulcers, frequently formed on
immobile patients. Tridien
offers its customers a full
spectrum of powered and
static support surfaces based
on both polyurethane foam
and air based technologies.
Tridien maintains manufac-
turing operations throughout
the United States to better
serve its national customer
base. To learn more about
Tridien, please visit:
www.tridien.com
Headquartered in Petaluma,
California, and founded in
1989, CamelBak is a designer
of hydration packs, reusable
BPA-free water bottles, per-
formance hydration acces-
sories and specialized gloves
for outdoor, recreation and
military use. The company’s
reputation as an innovator
of best-in-class personal
h y d r a t i o n p r o d u c t s h a s
enabled CamelBak to establish
preferred partnerships with
leading national retailers,
s p o r t i n g g o o d s s t o r e s ,
i n d e p e n d e n t a n d c h a i n
specialty retailers and the U.S.
military. To learn more about
CamelBak, please visit:
www.camelbak.com
8
br a nDeD pr oDuCt s
Headquartered in Scotts
V a l l e y , C a l i f o r n i a , a n d
founded in 1974, Fox is a
leading designer, manufac-
turer and marketer of high-
end suspension products for
mountain bikes, all-terrain
vehicles, snowmobiles and
other off-road vehicles. Fox
b o t h a c t s a s a t i e r o n e
supplier to
leading action
sport original equipment
manufacturers and provides
a f t e r m a r k e t p r o d u c t s t o
retailers and distributors.
To learn more a b o u t F o x ,
please visit:
www.ridefox.com
Headquartered in Los Angeles,
California, and founded in
2003, Ergobaby is a premier
d e s i g n e r , m a r k e t e r a n d
distributor of babywearing
products, travel systems
and accessories. Ergobaby
products are sold through
approximately 900 retailers
in the United States and 20
countries internationally. The
company also designs and
markets a premium brand of
strollers under the Orbit Baby
name. Ergobaby’s reputation
f o r p r o d u c t i n n o v a t i o n ,
reliability and safety has led
to numero us awards and
accolades. To learn more
about Ergobaby, please visit:
www.ergobabycarriers.com
br a nDeD pr oDuCt s
9
Headquartered in Payson,
Utah, and founded in 1988,
Liberty Safe
is a designer
and manufacturer of home
and gun safes. Products are
marketed under the Liberty®
brand, as well as a portfolio
of licensed and private label
brands, including Remington®,
Cabela’s® and John Deere®.
The Company’s products are
the market share leader and
are sold in various sporting
goods, farm and fleet and
home improvement retailers.
Liberty also has the largest
independent dealer network
in the industry. To learn more
about Liberty Safe, please
visit:
www.libertysafe.com
CODI GOVERNANCE
Board of Directors
sean Day has served as chairman of the board of directors
of the Company since April 2006. Mr. Day is the president
of Seagin International and was the chairman of our
manager’s predecessor from 1999 to 2006. Previously,
Mr. Da y was with Navios Corporat i on an d C it i cor p
Venture Capital. Mr. Day is currently the chairman of the
boards of directors of Teekay Corporation; Teekay Off-
shore GP LLC, the general partner of Teekay Offshore
Partners LP; Teekay GP L.L.C., the general partner of
Teekay LNG Partners LP; Teekay Tankers Limited and a
member of the board of directors of Kirby Corporation,
all NYSE listed companies. Mr. Day is a graduate of the
University of Capetown and Oxford University.
Jim bottiglieri has served as a director of the Company
since December 2005, as well as its chief financial officer
since its inception on November 18, 2005. Mr. Bottiglieri
has also been an executive vice president of our manager
since 2005. Previously, Mr. Bottiglieri was the senior vice
president/controller of WebMD Corporation. Prior to that,
Mr. Bottiglieri was with Star
G a s C o r p o r a t i o n a n d a
predecessor firm
to KPMG
LLP. Mr. Bottiglieri serves as a
director for three of our sub-
sidiary companies: American
Furniture Manufacturing, Inc.,
Arnold Magnetic Technologies
Corporation, and CamelBak
Products, LLC. Mr. Bottiglieri
also serves on the board of
directors and is the chairman
of the audit committee of
Horizon Technology Finance
Corporation, a NASDAQ listed
company. Mr. Bottiglieri is a graduate of Pace University.
gordon burns has served as a director of the Company
since May 2008. Mr. Burns has been a private investor since
1998. Previously he was responsible for investment banking
at UBS Securities and before that was a managing director
at Salomon Brothers Inc. Mr. Burns is a graduate of Yale
University and the Harvard Business School. Mr. Burns
served on the board of directors of Aztar Corporation, a
NYSE listed company, from 1998 through 2007.
Harold edwards has served as a director of the Company
since April 2006. Mr. Edwards has been the president and chief
executive officer of Limoneira Company, a NASDAQ listed
company, since November 2004. Previously, Mr. Edwards was
the president of Puritan Medical Products, a division of Airgas
Inc. Prior to that, Mr. Edwards held management positions
with Fisher Scientific International, Inc., Cargill, Inc., Agribrands
International and the Ralston Purina Company. Mr. Edwards
is currently a member of the boards of directors of Limoneira
Company and Calavo Growers, Inc., which is also a NASDAQ
listed company. Mr. Edwards is a graduate of Lewis and Clark
College and The Thunderbird School of Global Management.
gene ewing has served as a director of the Company since
April 2006. Mr. Ewing has been the managing member of
Deeper Water Consulting, LLC, a private wealth and business
consulting company since March, 2004. Previously, Mr.
Ewing was with the Fifth Third Bank. Prior to that, Mr.
Ewing was a partner at Arthur Andersen LLP. Mr. Ewing is a
member of the board of directors and serves on the audit
committee and compensation committee of Darling Inter-
national Inc., a NYSE listed company, a private trust com-
pany located in Wyoming and a private consulting company
located in California. Mr. Ewing is also on advisory boards
for the business schools at Northern Kentucky University
and the University of Kentucky. Mr. Ewing is a graduate of
the University of Kentucky.
mark lazarus has served as a director of the Company since
April 2006. Mr. Lazarus has been the president and chairman
of NBCUniversal Sports Group
since May 2011. Previously,
Mr. Lazarus was a senior sports
adviser for Comcast Corporation,
a NASDAQ
listed company,
since December 2010 and the
president, media and market-
ing, of CSE, a sports and enter-
tainment company from 2008
through 2010 and the presi-
dent of Turner Entertainment
Group
through
from 2003
2008. Prior to that, Mr. Laza-
rus served in a variety of other
roles for Turner Broadcasting
and also worked for Backer, Spielvogel, Bates, Inc. and NBC
Cable. Mr. Lazarus is a graduate of Vanderbilt University.
Mr. Lazarus served on the board of directors of Cincinnati
Bell, a NYSE listed company, from 2009 through 2011.
alan offenberg has served as a director and chief executive
officer of the Company since February 2011. Mr. Offenberg
has also been a partner of our manager and its predecessor
since 1998. Previously, Mr. Offenberg was with Trigen
Energy, Creditanstalt-Bankverein and GE Capital. Mr.
Offenberg currently serves as a director for seven of our
subsidiary companies: Advanced Circuits, Inc., American
Furniture Manufacturing, Inc., Anodyne Medical Device, Inc.
(doing business as Tridien Medical), Arnold Magnetic
Technologies Corporation, CamelBak Products, LLC, The
Ergo Baby Carrier, Inc., and Liberty Safe and Security
Products, Inc. Mr. Offenberg serves as the chairman of
American Furniture Manufacturing, Inc., CamelBak Products,
LLC and Liberty Safe and Security Products, Inc. Mr. Offenberg
is a graduate of Tulane University and the Northeastern
University Graduate School of Business.
10
Committees
The Company’s
operating agreement
gives our board the
authority to delegate
its powers to committees
appointed by the board.
All of our standing
committees are
comprised solely of
independent directors.
We have three
standing committees
- the audit committee,
the compensation
committee and
the nominating
and corporate
governance committee.
the audit Committee is comprised entirely of independent directors who meet the
independence requirements of the New York Stock Exchange and includes at least one
“audit committee financial expert,” as required by applicable SEC regulations. The audit
committee is responsible for, among other things:
• retaining and overseeing our independent accountants;
• assisting the Company’s board of directors in its oversight of the integrity of our
financial statements, the qualifications, independence and performance of our
independent auditors and our compliance with legal and regulatory requirements;
• reviewing and approving the plan and scope of the internal and external audit;
• pre-approving any non-audit services provided by our independent auditors;
• approving the fees to be paid to our independent auditors;
• reviewing with our chief executive officer and chief financial officer and independent
auditors the adequacy and effectiveness of our internal controls;
• preparing the audit committee report to be filed with the SEC; and
• reviewing and assessing annually the audit committee’s performance and the
adequacy of its charter.
Messrs. Burns, Ewing, and Edwards serve on our audit committee, and the board has
determined that Mr. Ewing qualifies as an audit committee financial expert as defined by
the SEC.
the Compensation Committee is comprised entirely of independent directors who meet
the independence requirements of the New York Stock Exchange. The responsibilities of
the compensation committee include:
• reviewing our manager’s performance of its obligations under the management
services agreement;
• reviewing the remuneration of our manager and approving the reimbursement paid
to our manager for the compensation of its financial staff;
• determining the compensation of our independent directors;
• granting rights to indemnification and reimbursement of expenses to our manager;
and
• making recommendations to the Board regarding equity-based and incentive
compensation plans, polices and programs.
Messrs. Edwards, Ewing and Lazarus serve on our compensation committee.
the nominating & Corporate governance Committee is comprised entirely of indepen-
dent directors who meet the independence requirements of the New York Stock
Exchange. The nominating and corporate governance committee is responsible for,
among other things:
• recommending the number of directors to comprise the board of directors;
• identifying and evaluating individuals qualified to become members of the board of
directors and soliciting recommendations for director nominees from the chairman
and chief executive officer of the company;
• recommending to the board of directors the directors’ nominees for each annual
shareholders’ meeting;
• recommending to the board of directors the candidates for filling vacancies that may
occur between annual shareholders’ meetings;
• reviewing independent director compensation and board processes, self-evaluations
and polices;
• overseeing compliance with our code of ethics and conduct by our officers and
directors; and
• monitoring developments in the law and practice of corporate governance.
Messrs. Lazarus, Burns, and Edwards serve on our nominating and corporate governance
committee.
11
CODI INFORMATION
$1.44
$1.42
$1.36
$1.36
total
Distributions
paid
since
ipo
$8.52
$1.32
$1.23
$0.40
2006
2007 2008 2009
2010 2011 2012
Distributions paid since ipo
12
trading
Our stock trades on the NYSE under the symbol “CODI”. During fiscal year 2012, the highest and lowest
trading prices per share were $15.58 and $12.12, respectively. As of December 31, 2012, we had 48,300,000
shares outstanding that were held by approximately 20,000 beneficial holders.
Distributions
Our board of directors declared distributions of $1.44 per share for the year ended December 31, 2012.
The declaration and payment of any distribution is subject to a decision by our board of directors. In
making such a decision, our board will take into account such matters as general business conditions, our
specific financial condition, results of operations and capital requirements, as well as any other factors
that it deems relevant.
tax reporting
CODI shareholders receive their tax information on a Form K-1. We endeavor to provide this tax information
as early as possible, and made information for tax year 2012 available for our shareholders as of February
28, 2013. Tax information is both mailed to shareholders and is available on our website. We expect the
items of income reported on Form K-1 to our shareholders to remain fairly limited, and to include interest
income, dividend income, capital gains, interest expense and other expense.
website
CODI’s website is www.compassdiversifiedholdings.com. On our website, shareholders can find our
press releases, documents filed with the SEC, investor events, and tax reporting, as well as information on
our corporate governance policies and procedures, subsidiary companies, and board of directors.
13
UNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D.C. 20549
(cid:59)
(cid:134)
ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
Form 10-K
For the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012
or
TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
For the transition period from to
Commission File Number: 001-34927
Compass Diversified Holdings
(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)
Delaware
(Jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)
57-6218917
(I.R.S. Employer Identification No.)
Commission File Number: 001-34926
Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC
(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)
Delaware
(Jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)
20-3812051
(I.R.S. Employer Identification No.)
Sixty One Wilton Road
Second Floor
Westport, CT
(Address of principal executive offices)
06880
(Zip Code)
(203) 221-1703
(Registrants’ telephone number, including area code)
Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:
Title of Each Class
Shares representing beneficial interests in Compass Diversified Holdings
(“trust shares”)
Name of Each Exchange on Which Registered
New York Stock Exchange
Securities registered pursuant to Section 12 (g) of the Act: None
Indicate by check mark if the registrants are collectively a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act. Yes (cid:134) No (cid:59)
Indicate by check mark if the registrants are collectively not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the ct. Yes (cid:134) No (cid:59)
Indicate by check mark whether the registrants (1) have filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of
1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrants were required to file such reports), and (2) have been subject to
such filing requirements for the past 90 days. Yes (cid:59) No (cid:134)
Indicate by check mark whether the registrants have submitted electronically and posted on their corporate website, if any, every Interactive Data
File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for
such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files). Yes (cid:59) No (cid:134)
Indicate by check mark if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405 of Regulation S-K is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to
the best of registrants’ knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-K or any
amendment to this Form 10-K. (cid:134)
Indicate by check mark whether the registrants are collectively a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer or a smaller
reporting company. See the definitions of “large accelerated filer”, “accelerated filer” and “smaller reporting company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange
Act. (Check one): Large accelerated filer (cid:134) Accelerated filer (cid:59) Non-accelerated filer (cid:134) Smaller reporting company (cid:134)
Indicate by check mark whether the registrants are collectively a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act). Yes (cid:134) No (cid:59)
The aggregate market value of the outstanding shares of trust stock held by non-affiliates of Compass Diversified Holdings at June 30, 2012 was
$550,707,370 based on the closing price on the New York Stock Exchange on that date. For purposes of the foregoing calculation only, all directors
and officers of the registrant have been deemed affiliates. There were 48,300,000 shares of trust stock without par value outstanding at February 25,
2013.
Documents Incorporated by Reference
Certain information in the registrant’s definitive proxy statement to be filed with the Commission relating to the registrant’s 2012 Annual Meeting of
Stockholders is incorporated by reference into Part III.
1
Table of Contents
PART I
Item 1.
Item 1A.
Item 1B.
Item 2.
Item 3.
Item 4.
PART II
Item 5.
Item 6
Item 7.
Item 7A.
Item 8.
Item 9.
Item 9A
Item 9B.
PART III
Item 10.
Item 11.
Item 12.
Item 13.
Item 14.
PART IV
Item 15.
Business
Risk Factors
Unresolved Staff Comments
Properties
Legal Proceedings
Mine Safety Disclosures
Market for Registrant’s Common Equity, Related Stockholder Matters and Issuer
Purchases of Equity Securities
Selected Financial Data
Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of
Operations
Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk
Financial Statements and Supplementary Data
Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial
Disclosure
Controls and Procedures
Other Information
Directors, and Executive Officers and Corporate Governance
Executive Compensation
Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related
Stockholder Matters
Certain Relationships and Related Transactions and Director Independence
Principal Accountant Fees and Services
Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules
Page
5
66
83
84
86
87
88
92
94
135
136
137
138
139
140
140
140
140
140
141
2
In reading this Annual Report on Form 10-K, references to:
NOTE TO READER
• the “Trust” and “Holdings” refer to Compass Diversified Holdings;
• “businesses”, “operating segments”, “subsidiaries” and “reporting units” all refer to, collectively, the
businesses controlled by the Company;
• the “Company” refer to Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC;
• the “Manager” refer to Compass Group Management LLC (“CGM”);
• the “initial businesses” refer to, collectively, Staffmark Holdings, Inc., Crosman Acquisition
Corporation, Compass AC Holdings, Inc. and Silvue Technologies Group, Inc.;
• the “2007 acquisitions” refer to, collectively, the acquisitions of Aeroglide Corporation, HALO Branded
Solutions and American Furniture Manufacturing;
• the “2008 acquisitions” refer to, collectively, the acquisitions of Fox Factory Inc. and Staffmark
Investment LLC;
• the “2010 acquisitions” refer to, collectively, the acquisitions of Liberty Safe and Security Products, LLC
and Ergobaby Carrier, Inc.;
• the “2011 acquisition” refer to the acquisition of CamelBak Products, LLC;
• the “2012 acquisition” refer to the acquisition of Arnold Magnetic Technologies;
• the “2007 disposition” refer to the sale of Crosman Acquisition Corporation;
• the “2008 dispositions” refer to, collectively, the sales of Aeroglide Corporation and Silvue Technologies
Group, Inc.;
• the “2011 disposition” refer to the sale of Staffmark Holdings, Inc.;
• the “2012 disposition” refer to the sale of HALO Branded Solutions.;
• the “Trust Agreement” refer to the amended and restated Trust Agreement of the Trust dated as of
April 25, 2007;
• the “Prior Credit Agreement” refer to the Credit Agreement with a group of lenders led by Madison
Capital, LLC which provided for a “Prior Revolving Credit Facility” and a “Prior Term Loan Facility”;
• the “Credit Facility” refer to the Credit Facility with a group of lenders led by TD Securities (USA) LLC
(“TD Securities”) which provides for a Revolving Credit Facility and a Term Loan Facility;
• the “Revolving Credit Facility” refer to the $290 million Revolving Credit Facility provided by the
Credit Facility that matures in December 2016;
• the “Term Loan Facility” refer to the $252.5 million Term Loan Facility, as of December 31, 2012,
provided by the Credit Facility that matures in December 2017;
• the “LLC Agreement” refer to the second amended and restated operating agreement of the Company
dated as of January 9, 2007; and
• “we”, “us” and “our” refer to the Trust, the Company and the businesses together.
3
Statement Regarding Forward-Looking Disclosure
This Annual Report on Form 10-K, including the sections entitled “Risk Factors,” “Management’s Discussion and
Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and “Business,” contains forward-looking statements.
We may, in some cases, use words such as “project,” “predict,” “believe,” “anticipate,” “plan,” “expect,”
“estimate,” “intend,” “should,” “would,” “could,” “potentially,” or “may” or other words that convey uncertainty of
future events or outcomes to identify these forward-looking statements. Forward-looking statements in this Annual
Report on Form 10-K are subject to a number of risks and uncertainties, some of which are beyond our control,
• our ability to successfully operate our businesses on a combined basis, and to effectively integrate and improve any
future acquisitions;
• our ability to remove our Manager and our Manager’s right to resign;
• our trust and organizational structure, which may limit our ability to meet our dividend and distribution policy;
• our ability to service and comply with the terms of our indebtedness;
• our cash flow available for distribution and our ability to make distributions in the future to our shareholders;
• our ability to pay the management fee, profit allocation when due and pay the put price if and when due;
• our ability to make and finance future acquisitions;
• our ability to implement our acquisition and management strategies;
• the regulatory environment in which our businesses operate;
• trends in the industries in which our businesses operate;
• changes in general economic or business conditions or economic or demographic trends in the United States and
other countries in which we have a presence, including changes in interest rates and inflation;
• environmental risks affecting the business or operations of our businesses;
• our and our Manager’s ability to retain or replace qualified employees of our businesses and our Manager;
• costs and effects of legal and administrative proceedings, settlements, investigations and claims; and
• extraordinary or force majeure events affecting the business or operations of our businesses.
including, among other things:
Our actual results, performance, prospects or opportunities could differ materially from those expressed in or
implied by the forward-looking statements. A description of some of the risks that could cause our actual results to
differ appears under the section “Risk Factors”. Additional risks of which we are not currently aware or which we
currently deem immaterial could also cause our actual results to differ.
In light of these risks, uncertainties and assumptions, you should not place undue reliance on any forward-looking
statements. The forward-looking events discussed in this Annual Report on Form 10-K may not occur. These
forward-looking statements are made as of the date of this Annual Report. We undertake no obligation to publicly
update or revise any forward-looking statements to reflect subsequent events or circumstances, whether as a result
of new information, future events or otherwise, except as required by law.
4
ITEM 1. BUSINESS
PART I
Compass Diversified Holdings, a Delaware statutory trust (“Holdings”, or the “Trust”), was incorporated in
Delaware on November 18, 2005. Compass Group Diversified Holdings, LLC, a Delaware limited liability
Company (the “Company”), was also formed on November 18, 2005. The Trust and the Company (collectively
“CODI”) were formed to acquire and manage a group of small and middle-market businesses headquartered in
North America. The Trust is the sole owner of 100% of the Trust Interests, as defined in our LLC Agreement, of
the Company. Pursuant to the LLC Agreement, the Trust owns an identical number of Trust Interests in the
Company as exist for the number of outstanding shares of the Trust. Accordingly, our shareholders are treated as
beneficial owners of Trust Interests in the Company and, as such, are subject to tax under partnership income tax
provisions.
The Company is the operating entity with a board of directors whose corporate governance responsibilities are
similar to that of a Delaware corporation. The Company’s board of directors oversees the management of the
Company and our businesses and the performance of Compass Group Management LLC (“CGM” or our
“Manager”). Our Manager is the sole owner of our Allocation Interests, as defined in our LLC Agreement.
Overview
We acquire controlling interests in and actively manage businesses that we believe operate in industries with long-
term macroeconomic growth opportunities, and that have positive and stable cash flows, face minimal threats of
technological or competitive obsolescence and have strong management teams largely in place.
Our unique public structure provides investors with an opportunity to participate in the ownership and growth of
companies which have historically been owned by private equity firms, wealthy individuals or families. Through
the acquisition of a diversified group of businesses with these characteristics, we also offer investors an opportunity
to diversify their own portfolio risk while participating in the ongoing cash flows of those businesses through the
receipt of distributions.
Our disciplined approach to our target market provides opportunities to methodically purchase attractive businesses
at values that are accretive to our shareholders. For sellers of businesses, our unique structure allows us to acquire
businesses efficiently with little or no financing contingencies and, following acquisition, to provide our businesses
with substantial access to growth capital.
We believe that private company operators and corporate parents looking to sell their businesses may consider us an
attractive purchaser because of our ability to:
(cid:120) provide ongoing strategic and financial support for their businesses;
(cid:120) maintain a long-term outlook as to the ownership of those businesses where such an outlook is required for
maximization of our shareholders’ return on investment; and
(cid:120) consummate transactions efficiently without being dependent on third-party financing on a transaction-by-
transaction basis.
In particular, we believe that our outlook on length of ownership and active management on our part may alleviate
the concern that many private company operators and parent companies may have with regard to their businesses
going through multiple sale processes in a short period of time. We believe this outlook both reduces the risk that
businesses may be sold at unfavorable points in the overall market cycle and enhances our ability to develop a
comprehensive strategy to grow the earnings and cash flows of our businesses, which we expect will better enable
us to meet our long-term objective of paying distributions to our shareholders and increasing shareholder value.
5
Finally, we have found that our ability to acquire businesses without the cumbersome delays and conditions typical
of third party transactional financing can be very appealing to sellers of businesses who are interested in
confidentiality and certainty to close.
We believe our management team’s strong relationships with industry executives, accountants, attorneys, business
brokers, commercial and investment bankers, and other potential sources of acquisition opportunities offer us
substantial opportunities to assess small to middle market businesses that may be available for acquisition. In
addition, the flexibility, creativity, experience and expertise of our management team in structuring transactions
allows us to consider non-traditional and complex transactions tailored to fit a specific acquisition target.
In terms of the businesses in which we have a controlling interest as of December 31, 2012, we believe that these
businesses have strong management teams, operate in strong markets with defensible market niches and maintain
long standing customer relationships. We believe that the strength of this model, which provides for significant
industry, customer and geographic diversity, has become even more apparent in the current challenging economic
environment.
2012 Highlights
Acquisition of Arnold Magnetics
On March 5, 2012, we purchased a 96.6% controlling interest (on a primary and fully diluted basis) in Arnold
Magnetics, with headquarters in Rochester, NY. Arnold Magnetics has an operating history of more than 100 years
and is a leading global manufacturer of engineered magnetic solutions for a wide range of specialty applications and
end-markets, including energy, medical, aerospace and defense, consumer electronics, general industrial and
automotive. From its nine manufacturing facilities located in the United States, the United Kingdom, Switzerland
and China, the company produces high performance permanent magnets, flexible magnets and precision foil
products that are mission critical in motors, generators, sensors and other systems and components. Based on its
long-term relationships, Arnold Magnetics has built a diverse and blue-chip customer base totaling more than 2,000
clients worldwide.
The purchase price, including proceeds from non-controlling interests, was approximately $130.5 million
(excluding acquisition-related costs) and was based on a total enterprise value of $124.2 million and included
approximately $6.3 million in cash and working capital. Acquisition related costs were approximately $4.8 million.
We funded the acquisition through available cash on hand and a draw of $25 million on our Revolving Credit
Facility. Arnold’s management and certain other investors invested in the transaction alongside us, collectively
representing approximately 3.4% in initial non-controlling interest on a primary and fully diluted basis. CGM acted
as an advisor to us in the transaction and received fees and expense payments totaling approximately $1.2 million.
Preferred Stock Redemption
On March 6, 2012, we redeemed CamelBak’s 11% convertible preferred stock for $45.3 million plus accrued
dividends of $2.7 million, from an affiliate of CGI Magyar Holdings LLC, CODI’s largest shareholder. The
redemption was funded with available cash on hand.
Debt Re-pricing
On April 2, 2012, we exercised our option for an incremental term loan in the amount of $30 million. The
incremental term loan was issued at 99% of par value and increased the term loans outstanding under the Credit
Facility from approximately $224.4 million to approximately $254.4 million. In addition, in connection with the
option we reduced the margin on Term Loan Facility LIBOR Loans from 6.00% to 5.00%, Base Rate Loans from
5.00% to 4.00% and reduced the LIBOR floor from 1.50% to 1.25%. We paid an amendment fee of approximately
$2.2 million, and incurred additional fees and expenses of approximately $0.6 million. Net proceeds from this
incremental term loan were used to reduce outstanding loans on the Revolving Credit Facility.
Sale of HALO
On May 1, 2012, we sold all of the issued and outstanding capital stock of HALO to Candlelight Investment
Holdings, Inc. The total enterprise value received for HALO was $76.5 million.
6
At the closing, we received approximately $66.0 million in cash in respect of our debt and equity interests in HALO
and for the payment of accrued interest and fees after payments to non-controlling shareholders and payment of all
transaction expenses. We received an additional approximately $0.8 million in 2012 that were held in escrow. The
net proceeds were used to repay outstanding debt under our Revolving Credit Facility. We recorded a loss on the
sale of HALO of $0.5 million.
2012 Distributions
For the 2012 fiscal year we declared and paid distributions to our shareholders totaling $1.44 per share.
The following is a brief summary of the businesses in which we own a controlling interest at December 31, 2012:
Advanced Circuits
Compass AC Holdings, Inc. (“Advanced Circuits” or “ACI”), headquartered in Aurora, Colorado, is a provider of
prototype, quick-turn and production rigid printed circuit boards, or “PCBs”, throughout the United States. PCBs
are a vital component of virtually all electronic products. The prototype and quick-turn portions of the PCB
industry are characterized by customers requiring high levels of responsiveness, technical support and timely
delivery. We made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in Advanced Circuits, on May 16, 2006, for
approximately $81.0 million. We currently own 69.4% of the outstanding stock of Advanced Circuits on a primary
and fully diluted basis.
American Furniture
AFM Holding Corporation (“American Furniture” or “AFM”) headquartered in Ecru, Mississippi, is a leader in the
manufacturing of low-cost upholstered stationary and motion furniture, including sofas, loveseats, sectionals,
recliners and complementary products to the promotional furniture market. We made loans to and purchased a
controlling interest in AFM on August 31, 2007 for approximately $97.0 million. We currently own approximately
99.9% of AFM’s outstanding stock on a primary basis and fully diluted basis.
Arnold
AMT Acquisition Corporation (“Arnold” or “Arnold Magnetics”), headquartered in Rochester, NY, with nine
additional facilities worldwide, is a manufacturer of engineered, application specific permanent magnets. Arnold
Magnetics products are used in applications such as general industrial, reprographic systems, aerospace and
defense, advertising and promotional, consumer and appliance, energy, automotive and medical technology. Arnold
Magnetics is the largest U.S. manufacturer of engineered magnets as well as only one of two domestic producers to
design, engineer and manufacture rare earth magnetic solutions. We made loans to, and purchased a controlling
interest in Arnold on March 5, 2012 for approximately $122.4 million. We currently own 96.7% of the outstanding
stock of Arnold on a primary basis and 87.6% on a fully diluted basis.
CamelBak
CamelBak Products LLC (“CamelBak”), headquartered in Petaluma, California, is a diversified hydration and
personal protection platform offering products for outdoor, recreation and military applications. CamelBak offers a
broad range of recreational / military hydration packs, reusable water bottles, specialized military gloves and
performance accessories. We made loans to, and purchased a controlling interest in, CamelBak on August 24, 2011
for approximately $211.6 million. We currently own 89.9% of the outstanding stock of CamelBak on a primary
basis and 79.7% on a fully diluted basis.
Ergobaby
Ergobaby Carrier, Inc. (“Ergobaby”), headquartered in Los Angeles, California, is a premier designer, manufacturer
and distributor of baby wearing products, stroller travel systems and accessories. Ergobaby's reputation for product
innovation, reliability and safety has led to numerous awards and accolades from consumer surveys and
publications. Ergobaby offers a broad range of wearable baby carriers, stroller travel systems and related products
that are sold through more than 600 retailers and web shops in the United States and internationally. We made
loans to, and purchased a controlling interest in, Ergobaby on September 16, 2010 for approximately $85.2 million.
We currently own 81.1% of the outstanding stock of Ergobaby on a primary basis and 77.1% on a fully diluted
basis.
7
Fox
Fox Factory Holding Corp. (“Fox”) headquartered in Scotts Valley, California, is a designer, manufacturer and
marketer of high end suspension products for mountain bikes and power sports, which includes; all-terrain vehicles,
snowmobiles and other off-road vehicles. Fox acts both as a tier one supplier to leading action sports original
equipment manufacturers (“OEM”) and provides after-market products to retailers and distributors (“Aftermarket”).
Fox’s products are recognized as the industry’s performance leaders by retailers and end-users alike. We made
loans to and purchased a controlling interest in Fox on January 4, 2008, for approximately $80.4 million. We
currently own 75.8% of the outstanding common stock on a primary basis and 70.6% on a fully diluted basis.
Liberty Safe
Liberty Safe and Security Products, Inc. (“Liberty Safe” or “Liberty”), headquartered in Payson, Utah, is a designer,
manufacturer and marketer of premium home and gun safes in North America. From it’s over 200,000 square foot
manufacturing facility, Liberty produces a wide range of home and gun safe models in a broad assortment of sizes,
features and styles. We made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in Liberty Safe on March 31, 2010 for
approximately $70.2 million. We currently own 96.2% of the outstanding stock of Liberty Safe on a primary basis
and 86.7% on a fully diluted basis.
Tridien
Anodyne Medical Device, Inc. (“Anodyne”, which was rebranded as “Tridien” in September 2010) headquartered
in Coral Springs, Florida, is a leading designer and manufacturer of powered and non-powered medical therapeutic
support services and patient positioning devices serving the acute care, long-term care and home health care
markets. Tridien is one of the nation’s leading designers and manufacturers of specialty therapeutic support
surfaces and is able to manufacture products in multiple locations to better serve a national customer base. We
made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in Tridien from CGI on August 1, 2006 for approximately $31.0
million. We currently own 81.3% of the outstanding capital stock on a primary basis and 67.4% on a fully diluted
basis.
Our businesses also represent our operating segments. See “ – Our Businesses” and “Note E – Operating Segment
Data” to our Consolidated Financial Statements for further discussion of our businesses as our operating segments.
Tax Reporting
Information returns will be filed by the Trust and the Company with the IRS, as required, with respect to income,
gain, loss, deduction and other items derived from the company’s activities. The Company has and will file a
partnership return with the IRS and intends to issue a Schedule K-1 to the trustee. The trustee intends to provide
information to each holder of shares using a monthly convention as the calculation period. For 2012, and future
years, the Trust has, and will continue to file a Form 1065 and issue Schedule K-1 to shareholders. For 2012, we
delivered the Schedule K-1 to shareholders within the same time frame as we delivered the schedule to shareholders
for the 2011 and 2010 taxable year. The relevant and necessary information for tax purposes is readily available
electronically through our website. Each holder will be deemed to have consented to provide relevant information,
and if the shares are held through a broker or other nominee, to allow such broker or other nominee to provide such
information as is reasonably requested by us for purposes of complying with our tax reporting obligations.
WHERE YOU CAN FIND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
We have filed with the SEC Forms S-1 and S-3 under the Securities Act, and Forms 10-Q, 10-K, and 8-K under the
Exchange Act, which include exhibits, schedules and amendments. In addition, copies of such reports are available
free of charge that can be accessed indirectly through our website http://www.compassdiversifiedholdings.com and
are available as soon as reasonably practicable after such documents are electronically filed or furnished with the
SEC.
8
Public
Shareholders
83.6%
16.4%
CGI1
CGI Magyar
Holdings LLC
CGI Seagin
Holdings LLC5
Non-managing
Member
Allocation Interests4
Sostratus LLC2
“Sostratus”
Non-managing
Member
Management
Services Agreement
Compass Group
Management LLC 3
“Manager”
Compass
Diversified
Holdings
“Trust”
Trust Interests
Compass Group
Diversified
Holdings LLC
“Company”
Controlling
Equity Interests
ACI
AFM
Arnold
CamelBak
Ergobaby
Fox
Liberty
Tridien
(1) CGI and its affiliates beneficially own approximately 16.4% of the Trust shares and is our single largest
holder. Mr. Offenberg is not a director, officer or member of CGI or any of its affiliates.
(2) Owned by members of our Manager.
(3) Mr. Offenberg is a partner of this entity.
(4)
The Allocation Interests, which carry the right to receive a profit allocation, represent less than 0.1%
equity interest in the Company.
(5) Mr. Day is a non-managing member.
9
Our Manager
Our Manager, CGM, has been engaged to manage the day-to-day operations and affairs of the Company and to
execute our strategy, as discussed below. Our management team has worked together since 1998. Collectively,
our management team has extensive experience in acquiring and managing small and middle market businesses.
We believe our Manager is unique in the marketplace in terms of the success and experience of its employees in
acquiring and managing diverse businesses of the size and general nature of our businesses. We believe this
experience will provide us with an advantage in executing our overall strategy. Our management team devotes a
majority of its time to the affairs of the Company.
We have entered into a management services agreement (the “Management Services Agreement”) pursuant to
which our Manager manages the day-to-day operations and affairs of the Company and oversees the management
and operations of our businesses. We pay our Manager a quarterly management fee for the services it performs on
our behalf. In addition, our Manager receives a profit allocation with respect to its Allocation Interests in us. See
Part III, Item 13 “Certain Relationships and Related Transactions” for further descriptions of the management fees
and profit allocation to be paid to our Manager. In consideration of our Manager’s acquisition of the Allocation
Interests, we entered into a Supplemental Put agreement with our Manager pursuant to which our Manager has the
right to cause us to purchase its Allocation Interests upon termination of the Management Services Agreement. Our
Manager owns 100% of the Allocation Interests of the Company, for which it paid $0.1 million.
The Company’s Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer are employees of our Manager and have been
seconded to us. Neither the Trust nor the Company has any other employees. Although our Chief Executive
Officer and Chief Financial Officer are employees of our Manager, they report directly to the Company’s board of
directors. The management fee paid to our Manager covers all expenses related to the services performed by our
Manager, including the compensation of our Chief Executive Officer and other personnel providing services to us.
The Company reimburses our Manager for the salary and related costs and expenses of our Chief Financial Officer
and his staff, who dedicate substantially all of their time to the affairs of the Company.
See Part III, Item 13, “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions and Director Independence”.
Market Opportunity
We acquire and actively manage small and middle market businesses. We characterize small to middle market
businesses as those that generate annual cash flows of up to $60 million. We believe that the merger and
acquisition market for small to middle market businesses is highly fragmented and provides opportunities to
purchase businesses at attractive prices. We believe that the following factors contribute to lower acquisition
multiples for small and middle market businesses:
•
•
•
•
there are fewer potential acquirers for these businesses;
third-party financing generally is less available for these acquisitions;
sellers of these businesses frequently consider non-economic factors, such as continuing board membership
or the effect of the sale on their employees; and
these businesses are less frequently sold pursuant to an auction process.
We believe that opportunities exist to augment existing management at such businesses and improve the
performance of these businesses upon their acquisition. In the past, our management team has acquired businesses
that were owned by entrepreneurs or large corporate parents. In these cases, our management team has frequently
found that there have been opportunities to further build upon the management teams of acquired businesses beyond
those in existence at the time of acquisition. In addition, our management team has frequently found that financial
reporting and management information systems of acquired businesses may be improved, both of which can lead to
improvements in earnings and cash flow. Finally, because these businesses tend to be too small to have their own
corporate development efforts, we believe opportunities exist to assist these businesses as they pursue organic or
external growth strategies that were often not pursued by their previous owners.
10
Our Strategy
We have two primary strategies that we use in order to provide distributions to our shareholders and increase
shareholder value. First, we focus on growing the earnings and cash flow from our businesses. We believe that the
scale and scope of our businesses give us a diverse base of cash flow upon which to further build. Second, we
identify, perform due diligence on, negotiate and consummate additional platform acquisitions of small to middle
market businesses in attractive industry sectors in accordance with acquisition criteria established by the board of
directors
Management Strategy
Our management strategy involves the proactive financial and operational management of the businesses we own in
order to pay distributions to our shareholders and increase shareholder value. Our Manager oversees and supports
the management teams of each of our businesses by, among other things:
•
•
•
•
recruiting and retaining talented managers to operate our businesses using structured incentive
compensation programs, including minority equity ownership, tailored to each business;
regularly monitoring financial and operational performance, instilling consistent financial discipline, and
supporting management in the development and implementation of information systems to effectively
achieve these goals;
assisting management in their analysis and pursuit of prudent organic growth strategies;
identifying and working with management to execute attractive external growth and acquisition
opportunities;
• assist management in controlling and right-sizing overhead costs, particularly in the current challenging
economic environment; and
•
forming strong subsidiary level boards of directors to supplement management in their development and
implementation of strategic goals and objectives.
Specifically, while our businesses have different growth opportunities and potential rates of growth, we expect our
Manager to work with the management teams of each of our businesses to increase the value of, and cash generated
by, each business through various initiatives, including:
• making selective capital investments to expand geographic reach, increase capacity, or reduce
manufacturing costs of our businesses;
•
•
•
investing in product research and development for new products, processes or services for customers;
improving and expanding existing sales and marketing programs;
pursuing reductions in operating costs through improved operational efficiency or outsourcing of certain
processes and products; and
•
consolidating or improving management of certain overhead functions.
In terms of the difficult economic environment we are currently facing, we and each of our subsidiary management
teams have been, and will continue to be, intensely focused on performance and cost control measures through this
economic cycle.
Our businesses typically acquire and integrate complementary businesses. We believe that complementary
acquisitions will improve our overall financial and operational performance by allowing us to:
11
•
•
•
•
•
leverage manufacturing and distribution operations;
leverage branding and marketing programs, as well as customer relationships;
add experienced management or management expertise;
increase market share and penetrate new markets; and
realize cost synergies by allocating the corporate overhead expenses of our businesses across a larger
number of businesses and by implementing and coordinating improved management practices.
We incur third party debt financing almost entirely at the Company level, which we use, in combination with our
equity capital, to provide debt financing to each of our businesses and to acquire additional businesses We believe
this financing structure is beneficial to the financial and operational activities of each of our businesses by aligning
our interests as both equity holders of, and lenders to, our businesses, in a manner that we believe is more efficient
than our businesses borrowing from third-party lenders.
Acquisition Strategy
Our acquisition strategy involves the acquisition of businesses that we expect to produce stable and growing
earnings and cash flow. In this respect, we expect to make acquisitions in industries other than those in which our
businesses currently operate if we believe an acquisition presents an attractive opportunity. We believe that
attractive opportunities will continue to present themselves, as private sector owners seek to monetize their interests
in longstanding and privately-held businesses and large corporate parents seek to dispose of their “non-core”
operations.
Our ideal acquisition candidate has the following characteristics:
(cid:120)
is an established North American based company;
(cid:120) maintains a significant market share in defensible industry niche (i.e., has a “reason to exist”);
(cid:120)
(cid:120)
has a solid and proven management team with meaningful incentives;
has low technological and/or product obsolescence risk; and
(cid:120) maintains a diversified customer and supplier base.
We benefit from our Manager’s ability to identify potential diverse acquisition opportunities in a variety of
industries. In addition, we rely upon our management team’s experience and expertise in researching and valuing
prospective target businesses, as well as negotiating the ultimate acquisition of such target businesses. In particular,
because there may be a lack of information available about these target businesses, which may make it more
difficult to understand or appropriately value such target businesses, on our behalf, our Manager:
•
•
•
•
•
•
engages in a substantial level of internal and third-party due diligence;
critically evaluates the management team;
identifies and assesses any financial and operational strengths and weaknesses of the target business;
analyzes comparable businesses to assess financial and operational performances relative to industry
competitors;
actively researches and evaluates information on the relevant industry; and
thoroughly negotiates appropriate terms and conditions of any acquisition.
12
The process of acquiring new businesses is both time-consuming and complex. Our management team historically
has taken from two to twenty-four months to perform due diligence, negotiate and close acquisitions. Although our
management team is always at various stages of evaluating several transactions at any given time, there may be
periods of time during which our management team does not recommend any new acquisitions to us. Even if an
acquisition is recommended by our management team, our board of director’s may not approve it.
Upon acquisition of a new business, we rely on our manager’s experience and expertise to work efficiently and
effectively with the management of the new business to jointly develop and execute a successful business plan.
We believe, due to our financing structure, in which both equity and debt capital are raised at the Company level,
allowing us to acquire businesses without transaction specific financing is conducive to our ability to consummate
transactions that may be attractive in both the short- and long-term.
In addition to acquiring businesses, we sell businesses that we own from time to time when attractive opportunities
arise that outweigh the value that we believe we will be able to bring such businesses consistent with our long-term
investment strategy. As such, our decision to sell a business is based on our belief that doing so will increase
shareholder value to a greater extent than through our continued ownership of that business. Upon the sale of a
business, we may use the proceeds to retire debt or retain proceeds for acquisitions or general corporate purposes.
We do not expect to make special distributions at the time of a sale of one of our businesses; instead, we expect to
pay shareholder distributions over time through the earnings and cash flows of our businesses.
Since our inception in May 2006, we have recorded gains on sales of our businesses of approximately $198 million.
We sold Crosman in January 2007, Aeroglide and Silvue in June 2008, Staffmark in 2011 and HALO in 2012. We
sold Crosman, our majority owned recreational products company for approximately $143 million and our net
proceeds and gain on sale were approximately $110 million and $36 million, respectively. We sold Aeroglide, our
majority owned designer and manufacturer of industrial drying and cooling equipment for approximately $95
million and our net proceeds and gain on sale were approximately $78 million and $34 million, respectively. We
sold Silvue, our majority owned developer and producer of proprietary, high performance liquid coating systems for
approximately $95 million and our net proceeds and gain on sale were approximately $64 million and $39 million,
respectively. We sold Staffmark, our majority-owned provider of temporary staffing solutions subsidiary for
approximately $295 million and our net proceeds and gain on sale were approximately $217 million and $89
million, respectively We sold HALO, our majority owned fulfillment provider of promotional items for $76.5
million and our net proceeds upon sale were approximately $66.0 million and our loss on sale was approximately
$0.5 million.
Strategic Advantages
Based on the experience of our management team and its ability to identify and negotiate acquisitions, we believe
we are well-positioned to acquire additional businesses. Our management team has strong relationships with
business brokers, investment and commercial bankers, accountants, attorneys and other potential sources of
acquisition opportunities. In addition, our management team also has a successful track record of acquiring and
managing small to middle market businesses in various industries. In negotiating these acquisitions, we believe our
management team has been able to successfully navigate complex situations surrounding acquisitions, including
corporate spin-offs, transitions of family-owned businesses, management buy-outs and reorganizations.
Our management team has a large network of approximately 2,000 deal intermediaries who we expect to expose us
to potential acquisitions. Through this network, as well as our management team’s proprietary transaction sourcing
efforts, we have a substantial pipeline of potential acquisition targets. Our management team also has a well-
established network of contacts, including professional managers, attorneys, accountants and other third-party
consultants and advisors, who may be available to assist us in the performance of due diligence and the negotiation
of acquisitions, as well as the management and operation of our acquired businesses.
Finally, because we intend to fund acquisitions through the utilization of our Revolving Credit Facility, we expect
to minimize the delays and closing conditions typically associated with transaction specific financing, as is typically
13
the case in such acquisitions. We believe this advantage can be a powerful one, especially in a tight credit
environment, and is highly unusual in the marketplace for acquisitions in which we operate.
Valuation and Due Diligence
When evaluating businesses or assets for acquisition, our management team performs a rigorous due diligence and
financial evaluation process. In doing so, we evaluate the operations of the target business as well as the outlook for
the industry in which the target business operates. While valuation of a business is, by definition, a subjective
process, we define valuations under a variety of analyses, including:
•
•
•
•
discounted cash flow analyses;
evaluation of trading values of comparable companies;
expected value matrices; and
examination of recent transactions.
One outcome of this process is a projection of the expected cash flows from the target business. A further outcome
is an understanding of the types and levels of risk associated with those projections. While future performance and
projections are always uncertain, we believe that with detailed due diligence, future cash flows will be better
estimated and the prospects for operating the business in the future better evaluated. To assist us in identifying
material risks and validating key assumptions in our financial and operational analysis, in addition to our own
analysis, we engage third-party experts to review key risk areas, including legal, tax, regulatory, accounting,
insurance and environmental. We also engage technical, operational or industry consultants, as necessary.
A further critical component of the evaluation of potential target businesses is the assessment of the capability of the
existing management team, including recent performance, expertise, experience, culture and incentives to perform.
Where necessary, and consistent with our management strategy, we actively seek to augment, supplement or replace
existing members of management who we believe are not likely to execute our business plan for the target business.
Similarly, we analyze and evaluate the financial and operational information systems of target businesses and,
where necessary, we enhance and improve those existing systems that are deemed to be inadequate or insufficient to
support our business plan for the target business.
Financing
We have a Credit Facility with a group of lenders led by TD Securities that we entered into on October 27, 2011
and amended on April 2, 2012. The Credit Facility provides for a Revolving Credit Facility totaling $290.0 million,
subject to borrowing base restrictions, and a Term Loan Facility totaling $255 million. The Term Loan Facility
requires quarterly payments of $0.6 million, with a final payment of the outstanding principal balance on October
27, 2017. The Revolving Credit Facility matures on October 27, 2016.
The Credit Facility provides for letters of credit under the Revolving Credit Facility in an aggregate face amount not
to exceed $100 million outstanding at any time. At no time may the (i) aggregate principal amount of all amounts
outstanding under the Revolving Credit Facility, plus (ii) the aggregate amount of all outstanding letters of credit,
exceed the borrowing availability under the Credit Facility. At December 31, 2012, we had outstanding letters of
credit totaling approximately $1.8 million. The borrowing availability under the Revolving Credit Facility at
December 31, 2012 was approximately $264.2 million.
The Credit Facility is secured by all of the assets of the Company, including all of its equity interests in, and loans
to, its subsidiaries. (See Note I to the consolidated financial statements for more detail regarding our Credit
Facility).
We intend to finance future acquisitions through our Revolving Credit Facility, cash on hand and, if necessary,
additional equity and debt financings. We believe, and it has been our experience, that having the ability to finance
our acquisitions with the capital resources raised by us, rather than negotiating separate third party financing
specifically related to the acquisition of individual businesses, provides us with an advantage in acquiring attractive
14
businesses by minimizing delay and closing conditions that are often related to acquisition-specific financings. In
this respect, we believe that in the future, we may need to pursue additional debt or equity financings, or offer
equity in Holdings or target businesses to the sellers of such target businesses, in order to fund multiple future
acquisitions.
Our Businesses
Advanced Circuits
Overview
Advanced Circuits, headquartered in Aurora, Colorado, is a provider of prototype, quick-turn and production rigid
PCBs, throughout the United States. Advanced Circuits also provides its customers with assembly services in order
to meet its customers’ complete PCB needs. The prototype and quick-turn portions of the PCB industry are
characterized by customers requiring high levels of responsiveness, technical support and timely delivery. Due to
the critical roles that PCBs play in the research and development process of electronics, customers often place more
emphasis on the turnaround time and quality of a customized PCB than on the price. Advanced Circuits meets this
market need by manufacturing and delivering custom PCBs in as little as 24 hours, providing customers with over
98% error-free production and real-time customer service and product tracking 24 hours per day. In each of the
years 2012, 2011 and 2010, approximately 60%, 63% and 64% of Advanced Circuits’ sales were derived from
highly profitable prototype and quick-turn production PCBs. Advanced Circuits’ success is demonstrated by its
broad base of over 11,000 customers with which it does business throughout the year. These customers represent
numerous end markets, and for each of the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, no single customer
accounted for more than 2% of net sales. Advanced Circuits’ senior management, collectively, has approximately
90 years of experience in the electronic components manufacturing industry and closely related industries.
For the full fiscal years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, Advanced Circuits had net sales of
approximately $84.1 million, $78.5 million and $74.5 million, respectively and operating income of $24.0 million,
$26.6 million and $20.4 million, respectively. Advanced Circuits had total assets of $91.4 million, $88.7 million
and $92.0 million at December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively. Net sales from Advanced Circuits
represented 9.5%, 12.9%, and 14.8% of our consolidated net sales for the years 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.
History of Advanced Circuits
Advanced Circuits commenced operations in 1989 through the acquisition of the assets of a small Denver based
PCB manufacturer, Seiko Circuits. During its first years of operations, Advanced Circuits focused exclusively on
manufacturing high volume, production run PCBs with a small group of proportionately large customers. In 1992,
after the loss of a significant customer, Advanced Circuits made a strategic shift to limit its dependence on any one
customer. As a result, Advanced Circuits began focusing on developing a diverse customer base, and in particular,
on providing research and development professionals at equipment manufacturers and academic institutions with
low volume, customized prototype and quick-turn PCBs.
In 1997, Advanced Circuits increased its capacity and consolidated its facilities into its current headquarters in
Aurora, Colorado. In 2003, to support its growth, Advanced Circuits expanded its PCB manufacturing facility by
approximately 37,000 square feet or approximately 150%.
In March 2010, Advanced Circuits acquired Circuit Express, Inc. (“CEI”) for approximately $16.1 million. Based
in Tempe, Arizona and founded in 1987, CEI focuses on quick-turn and prototype manufacturing of rigid PCBs
primarily for the aerospace and defense related industry customers. CEI also specializes in expedited delivery in as
fast as 24 hours. CEI reported net sales of approximately $16.4 million in 2010 and $18.7 million for the full fiscal
2011 year.
On May 23, 2012, Advanced Circuits acquired Universal Circuits for approximately $2.3 million. Universal
Circuits supplies PCBs to major military, aerospace, and medical original equipment manufacturers and contract
15
manufacturers. UCI's Minnesota facility meets certain Department of Defense clearance requirements and is noted
for custom and advanced technologies. Universal Circuits’ sales are primarily in the long-lead sector.
We purchased a controlling interest in Advanced Circuits on May 16, 2006.
Industry
The PCB industry, which consists of both large global PCB manufacturers and small regional PCB manufacturers,
is a vital component to all electronic equipment supply chains, as PCBs serve as the foundation for virtually all
electronic products, including cellular telephones, appliances, personal computers, routers, switches and network
servers. PCBs are used by manufacturers of these types of electronic products, as well as by persons and teams
engaged in research and development of new types of equipment and technologies.
In contrast to global trends, however, production of PCBs in North America has declined since 2000 and is expected
to grow slightly over the next several years according to the IPC 2010 Analysis. The rapid decline in United States
production was caused by (i) reduced demand for and spending on PCBs following the technology and telecom
industry decline in early 2000; and (ii) increased competition for volume production of PCBs from Asian
competitors benefiting from both lower labor costs and less restrictive waste and environmental regulations. While
Asian manufacturers have made large market share gains in the PCB industry overall, prototype and quick-turn
production, some of the more complex volume production and military production have remained strong in the
United States.
Both globally and domestically, the PCB market can be separated into three categories based on required lead time
and order volume:
•
Prototype PCBs — These PCBs are typically manufactured for customers in research and development
departments of original equipment manufacturers, or OEMs, and academic institutions. Prototype PCBs are
manufactured to the specifications of the customer, within certain manufacturing guidelines designed to
increase speed and reduce production costs. Prototyping is a critical stage in the research and development
of new products. These prototypes are used in the design and launch of new electronic equipment and are
typically ordered in volumes of 1 to 50 PCBs. Because the prototype is used primarily in the research and
development phase of a new electronic product, the life cycle is relatively short and requires accelerated
delivery time frames of usually less than five days and very high, error-free quality. Order, production and
delivery time, as well as responsiveness with respect to each, are key factors for customers as PCBs are
indispensable to their research and development activities.
• Quick-Turn Production PCBs — These PCBs are used for intermediate stages of testing for new products
prior to full scale production. After a new product has successfully completed the prototype phase,
customers undergo test marketing and other technical testing. This stage requires production of larger
quantities of PCBs in a short period of time, generally 10 days or less, while it does not yet require high
production volumes. This transition stage between low-volume prototype production and volume
production is known as quick-turn production. Manufacturing specifications conform strictly to end
product requirements and order quantities are typically in volumes of 10 to 500. Similar to prototype
PCBs, response time remains crucial as the delivery of quick-turn PCBs can be a gating item in the
development of electronic products. Orders for quick-turn production PCBs conform specifically to the
customer’s exact end product requirements.
• Volume Production PCBs — These PCBs, which we sometimes refer to as “long lead” and “sub-
contract” are used in the full scale production of electronic equipment and specifications conform strictly to
end product requirements. Volume Production PCBs are ordered in large quantities, usually over 100 units,
and response time is less important, ranging between 15 days to 10 weeks or more.
These categories can be further distinguished based on board complexity, with each portion facing different
competitive threats. Advanced Circuits competes largely in the prototype and quick-turn production portions of the
North American market, which have not been significantly impacted by the Asian based manufacturers due to the
16
quick response time required for these products. Management believes the North American PCB market is
estimated to be approximately $3.5 billion in 2012.
Several significant trends are present within the PCB manufacturing industry, including:
•
•
•
Increasing Customer Demand for Quick-Turn Production Services — Rapid advances in technology
are significantly shortening product life-cycles and placing increased pressure on OEMs to develop new
products in shorter periods of time. In response to these pressures, OEMs invest heavily in research and
development, which results in a demand for PCB companies that can offer engineering support and quick-
turn production services to minimize the product development process.
Increasing Complexity of Electronic Equipment — OEMs are continually designing more complex and
higher performance electronic equipment, requiring sophisticated PCBs. To satisfy the demand for more
advanced electronic products, PCBs are produced using exotic materials and increasingly have higher layer
counts and greater component densities. Maintaining the production infrastructure necessary to
manufacture PCBs of increasing complexity often requires significant capital expenditures and has acted to
reduce the competitiveness of local and regional PCB manufacturers lacking the scale to make such
investments.
Shifting of High Volume Production to Asia — Asian based manufacturers of PCBs are capitalizing on
their lower labor costs and are increasing their market share of volume production of PCBs used, for
example, in high-volume consumer electronics applications, such as personal computers and cell phones.
Asian based manufacturers have been generally unable to meet the lead time requirements for prototype or
quick-turn PCB production or the volume production of the most complex PCBs. This “off shoring” of
high-volume production orders has placed increased pricing pressure and margin compression on many
small domestic manufacturers that are no longer operating at full capacity. Many of these small producers
are choosing to cease operations, rather than operate at a loss, as their scale, plant design and customer
relationships do not allow them to focus profitably on the prototype and quick-turn sectors of the market.
Products and Services
A PCB is comprised of layers of laminate and contains patterns of electrical circuitry to connect electronic
components. Advanced Circuits typically manufactures 2 to 20 layer PCBs, and has the capability to manufacture
up even higher layer PCBs. The level of PCB complexity is determined by several characteristics, including size,
layer count, density (line width and spacing), materials and functionality. Beyond complexity, a PCB’s unit cost is
determined by the quantity of identical units ordered, as engineering and production setup costs per unit decrease
with order volume, and required production time, as longer times often allow increased efficiencies and better
production management. Advanced Circuits primarily manufactures lower complexity PCBs.
To manufacture PCBs, Advanced Circuits generally receives circuit designs from its customers in the form of
computer data files emailed to one of its sales representatives or uploaded on its interactive website. These files are
then reviewed to ensure data accuracy and product manufacturability. While processing these computer files,
Advanced Circuits generates images of the circuit patterns that are then physically developed on individual layers,
using advanced photographic processes. Through a variety of plating and etching processes, conductive materials
are selectively added and removed to form horizontal layers of thin circuits, called traces, which are separated by
insulating material. A finished multilayer PCB laminates together a number of layers of circuitry. Vertical
connections between layers are achieved by metallic plating through small holes, called vias. Vias are made by
highly specialized drilling equipment capable of achieving extremely fine tolerances with high accuracy.
Advanced Circuits assists its customers throughout the life-cycle of their products, from product conception through
volume production. Advanced Circuits works closely with customers throughout each phase of the PCB
development process, beginning with the PCB design verification stage using its unique online FreeDFM.com tool,
FreeDFM.comTM, which was launched in 2002, enables customers to receive a free manufacturability assessment
report within minutes, resolving design problems that would prohibit manufacturability before the order process is
completed and manufacturing begins. The combination of Advanced Circuits’ user-friendly website and its design
verification tool reduces the amount of human labor involved in the manufacture of each order as PCBs move from
17
Advanced Circuits’ website directly to its computer numerical control, or CNC, machines for production, saving
Advanced Circuits and customers cost and time. As a result of its ability to rapidly and reliably respond to the
critical customer requirements, Advanced Circuits generally receives a premium for their prototype and quick-turn
PCBs as compared to volume production PCBs.
Advanced Circuits manufactures all high margin prototypes and quick-turn orders internally but often utilizes
external partners to manufacture production orders that do not fit within its capabilities or capacity constraints at a
given time. As a result, Advanced Circuits constantly adjusts the portion of volume production PCBs produced
internally to both maximize profitability and ensure that internal capacity is fully utilized.
The following table shows Advanced Circuits’ gross revenue by products and services for the periods indicated:
Gross Sales by Products and Services(1)
Year Ended December 31,
2011
2010
2012
Prototype Production ...........................................................................
Quick-Turn Production ........................................................................
Volume Production (including assembly) ...........................................
Third Party ..........................................................................................
Total ....................................................................................................
(1) As a percentage of gross sales, exclusive of sale discounts.
28.4%
31.9%
38.1%
1.6%
100.0%
29.3%
33.6%
35.5%
1.6%
100.0%
28.9%
32.6%
36.1%
2.4%
100.0%
Competitive Strengths
Advanced Circuits has established itself as a leading provider of prototype and quick-turn PCBs in North America
and focuses on satisfying customer demand for on-time delivery of high-quality PCBs. Advanced Circuits’
management believes the following factors differentiate it from many industry competitors:
• Numerous Unique Orders Per Day — For the year ended December 31, 2012, Advanced Circuits
received on average approximately 300 customer orders per day. Due to the large quantity of orders
received, Advanced Circuits is able to combine multiple orders in a single panel design prior to production.
Through this process, Advanced Circuits is able to reduce the number of costly, labor intensive equipment
set-ups required to complete several manufacturing orders. As labor represents the single largest cost of
production, management believes this capability gives Advanced Circuits a unique advantage over other
industry participants. Advanced Circuits maintains proprietary software that maximizes the number of
units placed on any one panel design. A single panel set-up typically accommodates 1 to 12 orders.
Further, as a “critical mass” of like orders is required to maximize the efficiency of this process,
management believes Advanced Circuits is uniquely positioned as a low cost manufacturer of prototype and
quick-turn PCBs.
• Diverse Customer Base — Advanced Circuits possesses a customer base with little industry or customer
concentration exposure. During fiscal year ended December 31, 2012, Advanced Circuits did business with
over 11,000 customers and added over 170 new customers per month. For each of the years ended
December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, no customer represented over 2% of net sales.
• Highly Responsive Culture and Organization — A key strength of Advanced Circuits is its ability to
quickly respond to customer orders and complete the production process. In contrast to many competitors
that require a day or more to offer price quotes on prototype or quick-turn production, Advanced Circuits
offers its customers quotes within seconds and the ability to place or track orders any time of day. In
addition, Advanced Circuits’ production facility operates three shifts per day and is able to ship a
customer’s product within 24 hours of receiving its order.
•
Proprietary FreeDFM.com Software — Advanced Circuits offers its customers unique design
verification services through its online FreeDFM.com tool. This tool, which was launched in 2002, enables
customers to receive a free manufacturability assessment report, within minutes, resolving design problems
18
before customers place their orders. The service is relied upon by many of Advanced Circuits’ customers
to reduce design errors and minimize production costs. Beyond improved customer service, FreeDFM.com
has the added benefit of improving the efficiency of Advanced Circuits’ engineers, as many routine design
problems, which typically require an engineer’s time and attention to identify, are identified and sent back
to customers automatically.
• Established Partner Network — Advanced Circuits has established third party production relationships
with PCB manufacturers in North America and Asia. Through these relationships, Advanced Circuits is
able to offer its customers a complete suite of products including those outside of its core production
capabilities. Additionally, these relationships allow Advanced Circuits to outsource orders for volume
production and focus internal capacity on higher margin, short lead time, production and quick-turn
manufacturing.
Business Strategies
Advanced Circuits’ management is focused on strategies to increase market share and further improve operating
efficiencies. The following is a discussion of these strategies:
•
Increase Portion of Revenue from Prototype and Quick-Turn Production — Advanced Circuits’
management believes it can grow revenues and cash flow by continuing to leverage its core prototype and
quick-turn capabilities. Over its history, Advanced Circuits has developed a suite of capabilities that
management believes allow it to offer a combination of price and customer service unequaled in the market.
Advanced Circuits intends to leverage this factor, as well as its core skill set, to increase net sales derived
from higher margin prototype and quick-turn production PCBs. In this respect, marketing and advertising
efforts focus on attracting and acquiring customers that are likely to require these premium services. And
while production composition may shift, growth in these products and services is not expected to come at
the expense of declining sales in volume production PCBs, as Advanced Circuits intends to leverage its
extensive network of third-party manufacturing partners to continue to meet customers’ demand for these
services.
• Acquire Customers from Local and Regional Competitors — Advanced Circuits’ management believes
the majority of its competition for prototype and quick-turn PCB orders comes from smaller scale local and
regional PCB manufacturers. As an early mover in the prototype and quick-turn sector of the PCB market,
Advanced Circuits has been able to grow faster and achieve greater production efficiencies than many
industry participants. Management believes Advanced Circuits can continue to use these advantages to
gain market share. Further, Advanced Circuits continues to enter into prototype and quick-turn
manufacturing relationships with several subscale local and regional PCB manufacturers. Management
believes that while many of these manufacturers maintain strong, longstanding customer relationships, they
are unable to produce PCBs with short turn-around times at competitive prices. As a result, Advanced
Circuits sees an opportunity for growth by providing production support to these manufacturers or direct
support to the customers of these manufacturers, whereby the manufacturers act more as a broker for the
relationship.
• Remain Committed to Customers and Employees — Advanced Circuits has remained focused on
providing the highest quality products and services to its customers. We believe this focus has allowed
Advanced Circuits to achieve its outstanding delivery and quality record. Advanced Circuits’ management
believes this reputation is a key competitive differentiator and is focused on maintaining and building upon
it. Similarly, management believes its committed base of employees is a key differentiating factor.
Advanced Circuits currently has a profit sharing program and tri-annual bonuses for all of its employees.
Management also occasionally sets additional performance targets for individuals and departments and
establishes rewards, such as lunch celebrations or paid vacations, if these goals are met. Management
believes that Advanced Circuits’ emphasis on sharing rewards and creating a positive work environment
has led to increased loyalty. As a result, Advanced Circuits plans on continuing to focus on similar
programs to maintain this competitive advantage.
19
Research and Development
Advanced Circuits engages in continual research and development activities in the ordinary course of business to
update or strengthen its order processing, production and delivery systems. By engaging in these activities,
Advanced Circuits expects to maintain and build upon the competitive strengths from which it benefits currently.
Research and development expenses were not material in each of the years 2012, 2011 and 2010.
Customers
Advanced Circuits’ focus on customer service and product quality has resulted in a broad base of customers in a
variety of end markets, including industrial, consumer, telecommunications, aerospace/defense, biotechnology and
electronics manufacturing. These customers range in size from large, blue-chip manufacturers to small, not-for-
profit university engineering departments. The following table sets forth management’s estimate of Advanced
Circuits’ approximate customer breakdown by industry sector for the fiscal years ended December 31, 2012, 2011
and 2010:
Industry Sector
Electrical Equipment and Components ...................
Measuring Instruments ............................................
Electronics Manufacturing Services ........................
Engineer Services ....................................................
Industrial and Commercial Machinery ....................
Business Services ....................................................
Wholesale Trade-Durable Goods ............................
Educational Institutions ...........................................
Transportation Equipment .......................................
All Other Sectors Combined ...................................
Total .......................................................................
2012 Customer
Distribution
28%
8%
20%
5%
12%
1%
1%
10%
9%
6%
100%
2011 Customer
Distribution
30%
8%
19%
8%
10%
1%
1%
8%
9%
6%
100%
2010 Customer
Distribution
29%
10%
18%
10%
6%
1%
1%
7%
8%
10%
100%
Management estimates that over 90% of its orders are generated from existing customers. Moreover, approximately
two-thirds of Advanced Circuits’ orders in each of the years 2012, 2011 and 2010 were delivered within five days
(not including CEI orders.)
Sales and Marketing
Advanced Circuits has established a “consumer products” marketing strategy to both acquire new customers and
retain existing customers. Advanced Circuits uses initiatives such as direct mail postcards, web banners, aggressive
pricing specials and proactive outbound customer call programs as part of this strategy. Advanced Circuits spends
approximately 1% of net sales each year on its marketing initiatives and advertising and has 57 employees
dedicated to its marketing and sales efforts. These individuals are organized geographically and each is responsible
for a region of North America. The sales team takes a systematic approach to placing sales calls and receiving
inquiries and, on average, will place over 250 outbound sales calls and receive approximately 140 inbound phone
inquiries per day. Beyond proactive customer acquisition initiatives, management believes a substantial portion of
new customers are acquired through referrals from existing customers. In addition, other customers are acquired
over the internet where Advanced Circuits generates over 90% of its orders from its website.
Once a new client is acquired, Advanced Circuits offers an easy to use customer-oriented website and proprietary
online design and review tools to ensure high levels of retention. By maintaining contact with its customers to
ensure satisfaction with each order, Advanced Circuits believes it has developed strong customer loyalty, as
demonstrated by over 90% of its orders being received from existing customers. Included in each customer order is
an Advanced Circuits pre-paid “bounce-back” card on which a customer can evaluate Advanced Circuits’ services
and send back any comments or recommendations. Each of these cards is read by senior members of management,
and Advanced Circuits adjusts its services to respond to the requests of its customer base.
Substantially all revenue is derived from sales within the United States.
20
Advanced Circuits, due to the volume of prototype and quick turn sales, had a negligible amount in firm backlog
orders at December 31, 2012 and 2011.
Competition
There are currently an estimated 250 active domestic PCB manufacturers. Advanced Circuits’ competitors differ
amongst its products and services.
Competitors in the prototype and quick-turn PCBs production industry include larger companies as well as small
domestic manufacturers. The two largest independent domestic prototype and quick-turn PCB manufacturers in
North America are TTM Technologies, Inc. and Viasystems Group, Inc. Though each of these companies produces
prototype PCBs to varying degrees, in many ways they are not direct competitors with Advanced Circuits. In recent
years, each of these firms has primarily focused on producing boards with greater complexity in response to the off
shoring of low and medium layer count technology to Asia. Compared to Advanced Circuits, prototype and quick-
turn PCB production accounts for much smaller portions of each of these firm’s revenues. Further, these
competitors often have much greater customer concentrations and a greater portion of sales through large
electronics manufacturing services intermediaries. Beyond large, public companies, Advanced Circuits’
competitors include numerous small, local and regional manufacturers, often with revenues under $20 million that
have long-term customer relationships and typically produce both prototype and quick-turn PCBs and production
PCBs for small OEMs and EMS companies. The competitive factors in prototype and quick-turn production PCBs
are response time, quality, error-free production and customer service. Competitors in the long lead-time
production PCBs generally include large companies, including Asian manufacturers, where price is the key
competitive factor.
New market entrants into prototype and quick-turn production PCBs confront substantial barriers including
significant investments in equipment, highly skilled workforce with extensive engineering knowledge and
compliance with environmental regulations. Beyond these tangible barriers, Advanced Circuits’ management
believes that its network of customers, established over the last two decades, would be very difficult for a
competitor to replicate.
Suppliers
Advanced Circuits’ raw materials inventory is small relative to sales and must be regularly and rapidly replenished.
Advanced Circuits uses a just-in-time procurement practice to maintain raw materials inventory at low levels.
Additionally, Advanced Circuits has established consignment relationships with several vendors allowing it to pay
for raw materials as used. Because it provides primarily lower-volume quick-turn services, this inventory policy
does not hamper its ability to complete customer orders. Raw material costs constituted approximately 20%, 17.8%
and 17.9% of net sales for each of the fiscal years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.
The primary raw materials that are used in production are core materials, such as copper clad layers of glass and
chemical solutions, and copper and gold for plating operations, photographic film and carbide drill bits. Multiple
suppliers and sources exist for all materials. Adequate amounts of all raw materials have been available in the past,
and Advanced Circuits’ management believes this will continue in the foreseeable future. Advanced Circuits works
closely with its suppliers to incorporate technological advances in the raw materials they purchase. Advanced
Circuits does not believe that it has significant exposure to fluctuations in raw material prices. The fact that price
is not the primary factor affecting the purchase decision of many of Advanced Circuits’ customers has allowed
management to historically pass along a portion of raw material price increases to its customers. Advanced Circuits
does not knowingly purchase material originating in the Democratic Republic of the Congo or adjoining countries.
Intellectual Property
Advanced Circuits seeks to protect certain proprietary technology by entering into confidentiality and non-
disclosure agreements with its employees, consultants and customers, as needed, and generally limits access to and
distribution of its proprietary information and processes. Advanced Circuits’ management does not believe that
patents are critical to protecting Advanced Circuits’ core intellectual property, but, rather, its effective and quick
21
execution of fabrication techniques, its website FreeDFM.comTM and its highly skilled workforce are the primary
factors in maintaining its competitive position.
Advanced Circuits uses the following brand names: FreeDFM.comTM, 4pcb.comTM, 4PCB.comTM, 33each.comTM,
barebonespcb.comTM and Advanced CircuitsTM. These trade names have strong brand equity and are material to
Advanced Circuits’ business.
Regulatory Environment
Advanced Circuits’ manufacturing operations and facilities are subject to evolving federal, state and local
environmental and occupational health and safety laws and regulations. These include laws and regulations
governing air emissions, wastewater discharge and the storage and handling of chemicals and hazardous substances.
Management believes that Advanced Circuits is in compliance, in all material respects, with applicable
environmental and occupational health and safety laws and regulations. New requirements, more stringent
application of existing requirements, or discovery of previously unknown environmental conditions may result in
material environmental expenditures in the future. Advanced Circuits has been recognized three times for
exemplary environmental compliance as it was awarded the Denver Metro Wastewater Reclamation District Gold
Award for the seven of the last ten years.
Employees
As of December 31, 2012, Advanced Circuits employed 517 persons. Of these employees, there were 57 in sales
and marketing. None of Advanced Circuits’ employees are subject to collective bargaining agreements. Advanced
Circuits believes its relationship with its employees is good.
American Furniture
Overview
American Furniture, headquartered in Ecru, Mississippi, is a manufacturer of upholstered furniture sold to large-
scale furniture distributors and retailers. American Furniture operates almost exclusively in the promotional
upholstered segment of the furniture industry which is characterized by affordable prices, standard designs and
immediate availability to retail consumers. American Furniture was founded in 1998. American Furniture’s
products are adapted from established designs in the following categories: (i) stationary, (ii) motion, (iii) recliner
and (iv) other related products including accent tables and rugs. American Furniture’s products are manufactured
from common components and offer proven select fabric options, providing manufacturing efficiency and resulting
in limited design risk.
For the full fiscal years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, American Furniture had net sales of
approximately $91.5 million, $105.3 million and $136.9 million, respectively, and operating losses of $1.5 million,
$35.2 million and $37.1 million, respectively. American Furniture had total assets of $32.3 million, $30.0 million
and $78.4 million at December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively. Net sales from American Furniture
represented 10.3%, 17.4% and 27.1% of our consolidated net sales for the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011
and 2010, respectively.
History of American Furniture
American Furniture was founded in 1998 with an exclusive focus on promotional upholstered furniture, offering a
unique value proposition combining consistent high-quality, attractively priced products and 48-hour quick-ship
service. AFM began operations with four assembly lines housed in a 60,000 sq. ft. facility. By 2002, American
Furniture had achieved revenues in excess of $120 million and grew operations into a 600,000 sq. ft. facility in
Houlka, MS. In 2004, American Furniture was sold by its founder to a group of private investors who installed a
new management structure and hired a new executive team and grew American Furniture’s administrative
infrastructure in order to build a solid foundation to support future growth. In 2005, American Furniture
aggressively pursued Asian sourcing for fabrics and other assorted materials. Today American Furniture is a
22
leading manufacturer of promotional upholstered furniture operating from an approximately 1.1 million sq. ft.
manufacturing and warehouse facility.
For the year ended December 31, 2011 net sales at American Furniture declined $31.6 million, which represents a
23% decline over 2010 sales. In addition, write downs to goodwill, other intangible assets and property, and
equipment totaled $27.8 million and $38.8 million in the years 2011 and 2010, respectively. In all cases, the write
downs were triggered by a significant deterioration in American Furniture’s operations and profitability caused by
the unprecedented drop in the promotional furniture market and demand for its product. The combination of
increased unemployment, together with significant decreases in home purchases, availability of consumer credit and
rising fuel costs has created the worst market for promotional furniture sales over the last two years than has been
experienced over the last two decades.
During 2011, American Furniture implemented a revised standard costing system which required American
Furniture to reclassify certain costs between cost of sales and selling, general and administrative expenses. The
change in format consists of reclassifying the trucking fleet expenses from selling, general and administrative
expenses into cost of sales, as well as re-classifying certain manufacturing related expenses included in rent,
insurance, utilities and workers comp from selling, general and administrative costs to cost of sales. Management
believes that the format of reporting cost of sales together with the revised standard costing system and the
revaluation of standard costs allows management to react timely to changes in supply costs, product demand and
overall price structure going forward, which in turn eliminated the accumulation of lower margin product and allow
for more advantageous product procurement and the proper utilization of available assets. In addition, American
Furniture enlisted the assistance of an outside consulting firm in 2011 to assist them in right-sizing its operations in
order to operate more efficiently and respond to the significantly changed promotional furniture marketplace. To
that end, American Furniture has outsourced the majority of delivery and its trucking operations as well as sub-
contracted its frame cutting process during 2012.
We acquired a controlling interest in American Furniture on August 31, 2007.
Industry
AFM is a manufacturer of upholstered furniture serving the promotional segment of the U.S. furniture industry.
Overall conditions for the furniture industry have been difficult over the past two years. New housing starts are
down significantly and consumers continue to be faced with general economic uncertainty fueled by deteriorating
consumer credit markets, rising fuel costs and lagging consumer confidence as a result of erratic financial markets.
All of this has significantly impacted big ticket consumer purchases such as furniture over the last several years.
AFM participates largely in the promotional upholstered furniture industry. Within the U.S. residential retail
furniture marketplace, products are typically positioned in the “promotional”, “good”, “better”, or “best” category.
The scale of the categories is intended to reflect an increasing level of quality, appearance and corresponding price.
At the wholesale level, the promotional segment of the upholstered furniture industry we believe accounts for over
$3 billion in sales. Promotional upholstered furniture manufacturers typically offer a limited range of products in a
discrete number of styles and/or designs, allowing immediate delivery to retail customers at well-established retail
price points. Specifically, promotional upholstered furniture is generally priced by product at the retail level from
$199 for recliners and up to $1,500 for motion sectionals.
The popularity of promotional furniture is attributable to (i) the segment’s consistent product quality (based on
focused manufacturing on a few key furniture pieces), and (ii) its value pricing, which appeals to the broadest cross-
section of the furniture consumers.
AFM competes exclusively in the promotional segment, selling upholstered furniture in both the stationary and
motion categories. In the retail furniture landscape, promotional furniture can be a growing catalyst of floor traffic
and sales volumes for mass market furniture retailers. Recurring promotional programs have often become core to
retailer strategies given its immediate availability to customers and just-in-time strategies employed within the
industry which limit retailer inventory requirements.
23
Within the wholesale market, wholesale shipments from Asian suppliers, we believe, have grown steadily as a
percent of total wholesale shipments. Asian upholstered imports have grown significantly in the past ten years. We
believe their impact on AFM has been far less than the industry as a whole within the promotional upholstered
furniture, due to the low price points and resulting shipping costs as a percent of a piece’s total value.
Off-shore Imports
Furniture manufactured in Asia emerged as an important driver of the U.S. residential furniture market beginning in
the mid-1990s. While off-shore manufacturers, particularly Chinese and Vietnamese manufacturers, have affected
the entire industry, the import trend, has impacted different segments of the industry at varying levels.
Case-goods and metal furniture have proven to be more susceptible to Asian competition than upholstered furniture,
due to the stack ability and assembly characteristics, resulting in efficient freight consolidation. Upholstered
furniture cannot be broken down and shipped efficiently to the U.S. such that the resulting freight costs tend to
outweigh the labor and material savings achieved through offshore manufacturing. As a result, domestic
upholstered manufacturers have largely managed to compete effectively against Asian competitors when compared
to other segments of the furniture industry. In addition, manufacturers in the promotional segment of the
upholstered industry are even further insulated from offshore competition due not only to overall freight costs but
also freight costs when compared to wholesale price of the product together with the prolonged lead-times to
retailers and end customers in a market segment characterized by very short lead-times and immediate delivery to
the end consumer.
Retail price points in the promotional segment of the upholstered industry range from $199 - $1,500, whereas
shipping costs from Asia on a per piece basis are generally in excess of $100 per piece ($3,000 - $4,000) per
standard 40 foot container not including domestic shipping and insurance costs.
In addition to the increased cost, lead times also hinder Asian manufacturers’ ability to effectively compete in the
promotional upholstered industry. As mentioned previously, retailers use promotional furniture to drive store traffic
and provide immediate delivery to the end-user of value-priced, quality upholstered furniture products. AFM aims
to ship customer orders 48 hours following receipt of an order with delivery occurring 1 – 3 days later depending on
the customers’ location within the U.S. Asian manufacturers typically require at least 50 days (or 7 – 8 weeks
depending on business days) from order receipt to customer delivery, resulting in a significant amount of increased
inventory management and advertising planning in order to effectively source upholstered product from overseas
manufacturers.
Products and Services
AFM manufactures two basic categories of promotional upholstered products, stationary and motion. Stationary
products include sofas, loveseats and sectionals, these products accounted for approximately 72%, 75% and 70% of
sales in fiscal 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively. Motion products include single rocking recliner chairs, sofas with
reclining end seats, loveseats with seats that rock together or separately and reclining sectionals with storage
compartments. Motion and reclining products contributed approximately 27%, 23% and 25% of fiscal 2012, 2011
and 2010 gross sales, respectively. Beginning in 2005, AFM added a line of imported rugs and accent tables to its
product mix to provide customers with complimentary accessory offering to AFM’s core furniture lines. For 2012,
2011 and 2010, accent tables and other miscellaneous revenue accounted for less than 2% of gross sales. AFM’s
core product offerings with average retail prices are summarized below:
25 styles of stationary sofas, loveseats and chairs - $299 - $499
10 styles of recliners - $199 - $399
5 styles of motion sofas - $499 - $599
6 styles of stationary sectionals - Up to $799
1 style of motion sectional - $999 - $1,399
AFM’s products utilize common components and frames with limited fabric options, allowing AFM to reproduce
established styles at value prices. Since its inception, AFM has continuously introduced new styles which typically
replace older designs and are primarily slight variations to existing products. AFM builds its products to stock and
maintains adequate inventory levels to facilitate shipment to customers on time. AFM’s quick-ship strategy allows
24
customers to better manage inventory and product promotions, yet maintain the ability to provide immediate
availability to retail customers, a key attribute within the promotional furniture segment of the furniture industry.
Product Development
AFM can re-engineer a new design, create a prototype and begin to solicit customer feedback within two weeks.
AFM carefully controls its product line such that new styles typically replace older designs. As a result, AFM
requires up to 120 days to wind-down a discontinued line and beginning shipping truckload quantities of new
designs to customers.
Manufacturing
AFM utilizes an assembly-line manufacturing process with a four day production cycle divided into four functions,
cutting, sewing, backfill and upholstery. Employees are specialized by function and are compensated on a piece-
rate basis. The limited number of styles and designs minimizes scheduling and line changes and each function is
simplified by the use of common components. AFM uses one standard seat spring, one standard back spring and
one standard cushion in each category of upholstery. AFM’s piece-rate compensation plan and streamlined
manufacturing process combine to give AFM a low cost structure. Prior to 2009, American Furniture utilized pre-
assembled cut and sewn fabric kits for approximately 20% of its upholstered furniture. These fabric kits replace the
cutting and sewing function in the manufacturing process. Over the several years AFM has increased the use of
these fabric kits and as of December 31, 2012 virtually all of the upholstered furniture that it manufactures used the
imported cut and sewn fabric kit. The use of these fabric kits reduces the labor component related to the cutting and
sewing process in-house. Theses fabric kits are imported from Asia. American Furniture also eliminated its in-
house frame cutting operations in 2012 and currently 100% of the frames for upholstered furniture are cut by third
party providers.
AFM currently delivers the majority of its products through third-party freight service providers. Freight costs are
generally paid by the customer, including fuel surcharges. AFM utilized third-party freight providers for
approximately 80% of its customer shipments in 2011 and 2010 compared to approximately 50% or lower in prior
years. We estimate that this saved approximately $1.0 million in 2010 and 2011 in overall freight costs when this
strategy was first instituted. American Furniture eliminated its in-house trucking operations in 2012.
Competitive Strengths
We believe that AFM is among the lowest-cost domestic manufacturers of promotional upholstered furniture. AFM
maintains a competitive cost basis through an assembly-line production model and build-to-stock strategy.
Specifically, AFM generates economies of scale through:
(cid:120)
Long runs of a limited number of standardized frames;
The application of common components throughout the entire production line; and
(cid:120)
(cid:120) A standard offering of only two to four fabric options per frame.
In addition, management has aligned AFM’s high-volume manufacturing strategy with a piece-rate incentive
structure for its direct labor force. This structure drives workforce productivity. The incentive system also provides
floor personnel with the opportunity to earn annual compensation at or above local standards, thereby facilitating
AFM’s recruiting and retention efforts.
AFM’s efficient build-to-stock manufacturing operation facilitates AFM’s strategy of offering its customers on –
time shipment of product. In turn, AFM’s customers are able to offer their retail customers quality, value-priced,
upholstered furniture for immediate delivery upon the day of sale, while only maintaining limited quantities of
product inventory.
AFM serves a diverse base of approximately 700 customers. Within its broader customer base, AFM specifically
targets independent furniture retailers at the national, multi-regional and regional levels. AFM’s value proposition
and the ability to ship most products within 48 hours, is highly valued by this segment of the marketplace that
focuses broadly on demographic segments that demand immediate delivery of popular styles at competitive prices.
25
Barriers to Significant Asian Competition
The availability of low-cost Asian products has had a far-reaching impact on the broader home furnishings market
in the United States over the past ten years, contrasted to manufacturers serving other segments. Until recently,
AFM has had minimal exposure to off-shore competition due to the following:
(cid:120) AFM’s efficient, low-cost production model;
(cid:120) Mass retailers’ short lead-time demands and unwillingness to accept excess inventory risk; and
(cid:120) High costs (e.g., freight, damage, shrink) of shipping upholstered furniture direct from Asia.
Recently, we have begun to see more competition in the motion product category from imported Asian product.
These products typically offer customers better value in terms of construction and price when compared to our
motion product. Our margin for motion product has typically been less than stationary.
Business Strategies
•
Increase profit with new and existing customers - While AFM currently supplies many of the top
furniture retailers, AFM believes it can further augment its customer base and is pursuing new business
opportunities with selected national and regional furniture retailers, as well as in other channels, including
Rent-To-Own (“RTO”) and mass merchandisers. In addition, many existing customers currently purchase
only a portion of AFM’s product line, representing an opportunity for AFM to increase sales to existing
customers by augmenting customers’ entire promotional product line. In order to focus additional attention
to major customers and expand product–line sell-through to these customers, AFM added significant
infrastructure to its sales and marketing organization since 2005, increasing its sales representative network
while also subdividing sales territories to allow representatives to focus more closely on the expansion of
existing relationships and the addition of new customers.
• Product development - AFM’s merchandising strategy focuses on satisfying the changing needs of
retailers and consumers in a manner that meets AFM’s production strategy. AFM’s management and sales
staff monitor the furniture market to identify new trends and popular styles at higher price points. AFM
subsequently ensures that it can cost effectively replicate a new style with standardized components and
limited cover options, after which AFM will build a prototype to determine if the product can be
reproduced at acceptable margin levels.
• Pursue cost savings initiatives - Aggressively pursue expense reduction in the manufacturing process and
overhead areas, cost cutting programs and cash preservation initiatives throughout all parts of its business.
• Reduce the number of SKUs – American Furniture manufactures a limited number of SKUs in three
categories: stationary, recliners and motion. The strategy has been to continually manage the number of
groups or styles in each category so that the combined active style SKU count does not exceed 500.
• Revise kit purchasing – American Furniture, with the help of an outside consultant, has revised the
manner in which it orders fabric kits to provide a more efficient flow of kits and reduce the possibility of
obsolescence. A process has been developed taking into account rate of sale, sales order rate, customer
projections, current inventory levels, delivery lead times and safety stock for each individual SKU. A
review is completed no less than weekly by SKU and orders are placed accordingly. Managing this process
ties kit acquisition more closely to actual production needs and either increases or decreases the quantity of
kits based on demand for the particular SKU.
• Monetize excess stock – During 2012, American Furniture aggressively moved to reduce excess levels of
finished goods and raw materials. This has been done through a series of product promotions that have
been successful while not impairing the sales of the current product line. The company developed a new
system to monitor each category on an ongoing basis to more quickly identify potential slow-down in
specific SKU activity. This process has been integrated with the kit purchasing procedure mentioned
above.
26
Customers
AFM serves a base of approximately 700 customers comprised of retailers and distributors at the regional, multi-
regional and national levels. In 2012, 2011 and 2010, AFM’s top 20 customers accounted for approximately 67%,
66% and 67%, respectively, of AFM’s total sales. In 2012 two customers (Value City and Big Lots) each accounted
for approximately 12% of gross sales.
Sales and Marketing
AFM has a sales force consisting of independent, outside representatives that exclusively sell AFM’s products in an
assigned geographic territory of up to six states. Sales representatives are compensated on a 100% commission
basis. AFM maintains two permanent showrooms in High Point, NC and Tupelo, MS, host cities for furniture
industry trade shows (High Point in April and October and Tupelo in January and August).
American Furniture’s business is seasonal. Net sales have historically been higher in the period of January through
April of each fiscal year. We believe this seasonality is due in part to consumer demand increasing resulting from
income tax refunds. Substantially all revenue is derived from sales within the United States.
Marketing at the retail level is typically handled by AFM’s customers. AFM does not advertise specific products on
its own, but provides product information and pictures for retailers to include in newspaper and various insert
advertisements. AFM’s products are typically included in retailers’ recurring promotional programs as the products
drive floor traffic and sales volume due to low price points.
American Furniture had approximately $5.4 million and $8.4 million in firm backlog orders at December 31, 2012
and 2011, respectively.
Competition
AFM competes with selected large national manufacturers that produce and sell promotional products. However,
promotional upholstered furniture often represents only a small percentage of revenue for these participants. Also,
large diversified manufacturers tend not to place specific emphasis on developing quick-ship capabilities
specifically for their promotional offerings. Therefore, AFM competes primarily with several smaller
manufacturers that are typically thinly-capitalized, family owned businesses that we believe do not have the
capacity, manufacturing capabilities, sourcing expertise or access to capital in order to build critical production
volumes. Competition within the segment is largely based on value and delivery lead times, as opposed to product
differentiation, providing AFM and its quick-ship capabilities with a key competitive advantage within the industry.
AFM’s primary competitors include United Furniture Industries, Albany Industries and Hughes Furniture, Ashley
Furniture and Affordable Furniture.
Suppliers
AFM’s top supplier, Independent Furniture Supply (“Independent”), was 50% owned by Mr. Thomas, AFM's
former CEO. Mr. Thomas divested his interests in Independent in November 2012. AFM does not have long-term
supply contracts with Independent or any other supplier. A majority of AFM’s domestic suppliers are located near
AFM due to a concentration of furniture manufacturers in northeastern Mississippi. Several of AFM’s key raw
materials, including lumber, plywood and polyfoam, are sourced locally with alternative suppliers available at
competitive prices, if necessary. In order to continually manage material costs, AFM actively sources products
from Asia. AFM imports legs, show wood, accent tables and the majority of its fabric from China-based suppliers.
The prices charged by manufacturers of products such as petro-chemicals and wire rod, which are the primary
materials purchased by our suppliers of foam and drawn wire effect the ongoing cost of our raw materials. Raw
material cost as a percentage of sales was approximately 67%, 69% and 62% in 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.
Regulatory Environment
AFM’s manufacturing operations, facilities and operations are subject to evolving federal, state and local
environmental and occupational health and safety laws and regulations. Such laws and regulations govern air
27
emissions, wastewater discharge and the storage and handling of chemicals and hazardous substances. AFM
believes that it is in compliance, in all material respects, with applicable environmental and occupational health and
safety laws and regulations. New requirements, more stringent application of existing requirements, or discovery of
previously unknown environmental conditions could result in material environmental expenditures in the future.
Employees
As of December 31, 2012, American Furniture employed 484 persons. Of these employees, 425 were in
production, shipping and purchasing with the remainder serving in executive, administrative office and other
capacities. None of AFM’s employees are subject to collective bargaining agreements. We believe that AFM’s
relationship with its employees is good.
Arnold
Overview
Founded in 1895 and now headquartered in Rochester, New York, Arnold Magnetic Technologies Corporation is a
manufacturer of engineered, application specific magnet solutions. Arnold manufactures a wide range of permanent
magnets and precision magnetic assemblies with facilities in the United States, the United Kingdom, Switzerland
and China. Arnold has hundreds of customers in its primary markets including aerospace and defense, consumer,
industrial, medical, automotive as well as oil and gas exploration. Arnold is the largest and, we believe, most
technically advanced U.S. manufacturer of engineered magnets. Arnold is one of two domestic producers to design,
engineer and manufacture rare earth magnetic solutions. Arnold serves customers and generates revenues via three
business units:
• PMAG – Permanent Magnet and Assemblies Group- High performance magnets and assemblies for
precision motors/generators, Hall Effect sensor and beam focusing applications. PMAG also manufactures
assemblies for the reprographic industry used in printing and copying systems.
• Rolled Products - Ultra thin gauge metal strip and foil products utilizing magnetic and non-magnetic
alloys
• Flexmag™ - Flexible bonded magnets for specialty advertising, industrial and medical applications.
Arnold operates a 70,000 sq. ft. manufacturing assembly and distribution facility in Rochester, New York with nine
additional facilities worldwide in countries including the UK, Switzerland and China. The Company employs a total
of approximately 750 people.
For the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012, (from date of acquisition), Arnold had net sales of approximately
$104.2 million and an operating loss of $0.5 million. Arnold had total assets of $155.9 million at December 31,
2012. Net sales from Arnold (from acquisition date to December 31, 2012) represented 11.8% of our consolidated
net sales.
History of Arnold
Arnold was founded in 1895 as the Arnold Electric Power Station Company. Arnold began producing AlNiCo
permanent magnets in its Marengo, Illinois facility in the mid-1930s. In 1946, Allegheny Ludlum Steel Corporation
(Allegheny) purchased Arnold, and over the next few years began production of several additional magnetic product
lines under license agreement with the Western Electric Company. In 1970, Arnold acquired Ogallala Electronics,
which manufactured high power coils and electromagnets.
SPS Technologies (SPS), at the time a publicly traded company, purchased Arnold Engineering Company from
Allegheny in 1986. Under SPS, Arnold made a series of acquisitions and partnerships to expand its portfolio and
geographic reach. At the end of 2003, Precision Castparts, also a publicly traded company acquired SPS. In January
2005, Audax, a Boston-based private equity firm acquired Arnold from Precision Castparts.
In February 2007, Arnold Magnetic Technologies completed the acquisition of Precision Magnetics with operations
in Sheffield, England; Lupfig, Switzerland; and Wayne, New Jersey. The Wayne, New Jersey facility was relocated
28
to Rochester, NY later that year. In addition, Arnold’s Lupfig, Switzerland operation is a joint venture partner with
a Chinese rare earth producer. The joint venture manufactures RECOMA® Samarium Cobalt blocks for the Asian
market.
Industry
Permanent Magnets
There exists a broad range of permanent magnets which include Rare Earth Magnets and magnets made from
specialty magnetic alloys. Magnets produced from these materials may be sliced, ground, coated and magnetized to
customer requirements. Those industry players with the broadest portfolio of these magnets, such as Arnold,
maintain a significant competitive advantage over competitors as they are able to offer one-stop shop capabilities to
customers.
Rare Earth Magnets
(cid:120) Samarium Cobalt (SmCo) –SmCo magnets are typically used in critical applications that require corrosion
resistance or high temperature stability, such as motors, generators, actuators and sensors. Arnold markets
its SmCo magnets under the trade name of RECOMA ®.
Neodymium (Neo) – Neo magnets offer the highest magnetic energy level of any material in the market.
Applications include motors and generators, VCM’s, magnetic resonance imaging, sensors and
loudspeakers.
(cid:120)
Other Permanent Magnet Types
(cid:120) AlNiCo – The AlNiCo family of magnets remains a preferred material for many mission critical
applications. Its favorable linear temperature characteristics, high magnetic flux density and good corrosion
resistance are ideally suited for use in applications requiring magnetic stability.
(cid:120)
(cid:120) Hard Ferrite – Hard ferrite (ceramic) magnets were developed as a low cost alternative to metallic magnets
(steel and AlNiCo). Although they exhibit lower energy when compared to other materials available today
and are relatively brittle, ferrite magnets have gained acceptance due to their low price per magnetic output.
Injection Molded – Injection molded magnets are a composite of various types of resin and magnetic
powders. The physical and magnetic properties of the product depend on the raw materials, but are
generally lower in magnetic strength and resemble plastics in their physical properties. However, a major
benefit of the injection molding process is that magnet material can be injection or over-molded,
eliminating subsequent manufacturing steps.
Magnetic Assemblies- Arnold offers complex, customized value added magnetic assemblies. These assemblies are
used in devices such as motors, generators, beam focusing arrays, sensors, and solenoid actuators. Magnetic
assembly production capabilities include magnet fabrication, machining, encapsulation or sleeving, balancing, and
field mapping.
Precision Strip and Foil
Precision rolled thin metal foil products are manufactured from a wide range of materials for use in applications
such as transformers, motor laminations, honeycomb structures, shielding, and composite structures. These products
are commonly found in security tags, medical implants, aerospace structures, batteries and speaker domes. Arnold
has the expertise and capability to roll, anneal, slit and coat a wide range of materials to extremely thin gauges (2.5
microns) and exacting tolerances.
Flexible Magnets
Flexible magnet products span the range of applications from advertising (refrigerator magnets) to medical
applications (surgical drapes) to sealing and holding applications (door gaskets).
Products and Services
PMAG
Arnold’s Precision Magnets and Assemblies (PMAG) segment is a leading global manufacturer of precision
magnetic assemblies and high-performance magnets. The segment’s products include tight tolerance assemblies
consisting of many dozens of components and employing RECOMA® SmCo, Neo, and AlNiCo magnets. These
29
products are sold to a wide range of industries including aerospace and defense, alternative energy (hybrids/wind),
automotive, medical, oil and gas, and general industrial.
PMAG is Arnold’s largest business unit representing approximately70% of Arnold sales on an annualized basis
(including Reprographics) with a global footprint including manufacturing facilities in the U.S., U.K., Switzerland,
and China.
PMAG - Products and Applications:
(cid:120) High precision magnetic rotors for use in electric motors and generators. Typically used in demanding
applications such as aerospace, oil and gas exploration, energy recovery systems and under the hood
automotive
(cid:120) Sealed pump couplings
(cid:120) Beam focusing assemblies such as traveling wave tubes
(cid:120) Oil & Gas NMR tools as well as pipeline inspection and down hole power generation
(cid:120) Hall affect sensor systems
Arnold’s reprographics unit, which is part of the PMAG segment, produces systems and components for copier
systems. The business unit’s state-of-the-art, high-volume precision magnetic assembly facility produces over 150,000
assemblies per year. The reprographics unit utilizes components produced by the Flexmag segment.
Reprographics - products and applications:
(cid:120) Complex, multi-component, high-accuracy copier assemblies
(cid:120) Toner rolls
(cid:120) Toner and fuser assemblies
Rolled products
Arnold’s rolled products segment manufactures precision thin strip and foil products from an array of materials and
represents approximately 10% of Arnold sales on an annualized basis. The rolled products segment serve the
aerospace & defense, power transmission, alternative energy (hybrids, wind, battery, solar), medical, security, and
general industrial end-markets. With top-of-the-line equipment ( Sendzimir mills ) and superior engineering, rolled
products has developed unique processing capabilities that allow it to produce foils and strip with precision and quality
that are unmatched in the industry (down to 1/10th thickness of a human hair). In addition, the segment’s facility is
capable of increasing production from current levels with its existing equipment and is, we believe, well-positioned to
realize future growth with little incremental investment required.
Rolled products - Products and Applications:
(cid:120) Electrical steels for hybrid propulsion systems, electric motors, and micro turbines
(cid:120) Security and product ID tags
(cid:120) Honeycomb structures for aerospace applications
(cid:120)
(cid:120) Batteries
(cid:120) Military countermeasures
Irradiation windows
Flexmag
Arnold is one of two North American manufacturers of flexible rubber magnets for specialty advertising, medical,
and reprographic applications. Flexmag represents approximately 20% of Arnold sales on an annualized basis. It
primarily sells its products to specialty advertisers and original equipment manufacturers. With highly automated
manufacturing processes, Flexmag can accommodate customer’s required short lead times. Flexmag benefits from
a loyal customer base and significant barriers to entry in the industry. Flexmag’s success is driven by superior
customer service, and proprietary formulations offering enhanced product performance.
Flexmag - products and applications:
(cid:120) Extruded and calendared flexible rubber magnets with optional laminated printable substrates
(cid:120) Retail displays
(cid:120) Seals and enclosures
30
(cid:120) Signage for various advertising and promotions
Competitive Strengths
Competitive Landscape
The specialty magnets industry is highly fragmented, creating a competitive landscape with a variety of magnetic
component manufacturers. However, few have the breadth of capabilities that Arnold possesses. Manufacturers
compete on the basis of technical innovation, co-development capabilities, time-to-market, quality, geographic reach
and total cost of ownership. Industry competitors relevant to Arnold’s served markets range from large multinational
manufacturers to small, regional participants. Given these dynamics, we believe the industry will likely favor
players that are able to achieve vertical integration and a diversification of offerings across a breadth of products
along with magnet engineering and design expertise.
Barriers to Entry
(cid:120) Low Substitution Risk – Arnold’s solutions are typically specified into its customers’ program designs
through a co-development and qualification process that often takes 6-18 months. Arnold’s customers are
typically contractors and component manufacturers whose products are integrated into end-customers’
applications. The high cost of failure, relatively low proportionate cost of magnets to the final product,
sometimes lengthy testing and qualification process, and substantial upfront co-engineering investment
required, represent significant barriers to customers changing solution providers such as Arnold.
(cid:120) Equipment and Processing – Arnold’s existing base of production equipment has a significant estimated
replacement cost. A new entrant could require as much as 2-3 years of lead time to match the process
performance requirements, customization of equipment and material formulations necessary to effectively
compete in the specialty magnet industry. Further, given the program nature of a majority Arnold’s sales,
management estimates that it could take 5-10 years to build a sufficient book of business and base of
institutional knowledge to generate positive cash flow out of a new manufacturing plant.
Competition
Management believes the following companies represent Arnold’s top competitors:
(cid:120) Thomas & Skinner
(cid:120) Magnum Magnetics
(cid:120) Electron Energy
(cid:120) Vacuumschmelze Gruner, Germany-based
Business Strategies
Engineering and Product Development
Arnold’s engineers work closely with the customer to co-develop a product or process to provide system solutions,
representing a significant competitive advantage. The Company’s engineering expertise is leveraged by the state-of-
the-art Technology Center working together with the various business units located in North America, Europe and
Asia Pacific. This cooperative engineering effort allows Arnold to support customers and projects on a global basis.
Arnold’s engineers work with customers on a global basis to optimize designs, guide material choices, and create
magnetic models resulting in Arnold’s products being specified into customer designs.
Arnold has a talented and experienced engineering staff of design and application experts, quality personnel and
technicians. Included in this team are engineers with backgrounds in materials science, physics, and metallurgical
engineering. Other members of the team bring backgrounds in ceramics, mechanical engineering, chemical
engineering and electrical engineering.
Arnold continues to be an industry leader with regard to new product formulations and innovations. As evidence of
this, the Company currently relies on a deep portfolio of “trade secrets” and internal intellectual property. Arnold
continuously endeavors to introduce magnet solutions that exceed the performance of current offerings and meet
customer design specifications.
31
Growth in Arnold’s business is primarily focused in three areas:
(i) Growing market share in existing end-markets and geographies
(ii) Developing new products and technologies
(iii) Completing opportunistic acquisitions
Existing End-Markets and Geographies
Oil & Gas
Arnold currently provides magnets and precision assemblies for use in oil and gas exploration and production,
applications which typically require exceptional collaboration and co-development with its customers. The
Company supplies products used in applications such as a new oil well shutoff valve, a new down-hole logging
while drilling tool, and a down-hole magnetic transfer coupling. Other applications for which the Company is
actively involved include pipeline inspection, wireless tomography tools, and chip collection.
Power Transmission
The Company’s Rolled Products segment supplies grain-oriented silicon steel produced with proprietary methods
for use in transformers and inductors. These cores allow for the production of very efficient transformers and
inductors while minimizing size. In addition, the Company's magnet solutions can be found in advanced automatic
circuit re-closer solutions that substantially reduce the stress on system components on the grid. Arnold's solutions
are also present in new power storage systems. The permanent magnet bearings used in new designs improve the
efficiency of the flywheel energy storage system.
Automotive
In the automotive sector, the Company is selling magnets and magnetic assemblies primarily to Tier 1 and 2
companies. It is estimate that the current automobile contains over 50 magnetic systems, and this number is
expected to grow due to vehicle electrification initiatives in order to meet increasing fuel efficiency standards.
Typical applications include magnets for Hall Effect sensors that are used in braking, passenger restraint, and
steering and engine control systems. Emerging magnetic applications include electric traction drives, regenerative
braking systems, starter generators, and electric turbo charging. The auto industry continues to adopt increasingly
sophisticated technology to reduce vehicle weight and improve fuel efficiency. As much of this technology utilizes
magnetic systems, the Company expects to benefit from this trend.
Aerospace and Defense
In the aerospace and defense sector, the Company is selling magnets, magnetic assemblies and ultra-thin foil
solutions. Specifically, in the aerospace industry, Arnold's assemblies have been designed into products, which
enables the Company to benefit from the market growth and a healthy flow of business based on current airframe
orders. Through its OEM customers, essentially all new commercial aircraft placed in service contain assemblies
produced by Arnold. Arnold’s sales to large aerospace and defense manufactures includes magnetic assemblies
used in applications such as motors and generators, actuators, trigger mechanisms, and guidance systems, as well as
magnets for these and other uses. In addition it sells its ultra-thin foil for use in military countermeasures,
honeycomb structures, brazing alloys, and motor laminations.
General Industrial
Within the industrial sector Arnold provides magnet assemblies as well as magnets for custom made motor systems.
These include stepper motors, pick and place robotic systems, and new designs that are increasingly being required
by regulation to meet energy efficiency standards. An example is a motor utilizing Arnold’s bonded magnets for use
in commercial refrigeration systems. Arnold also produces magnetic couplings for seal-less pumps used in chemical
and oil & gas applications that allow chemical companies to meet environmental requirements.
Medical
Within the medical sector, Arnold provides magnetic assemblies, magnets, flexible magnets, and ultrathin foils. Its
magnet assemblies and magnets are critical parts of motor systems for dental instruments as well as saws and
grinders. Magnet assemblies are also provided for skin expansion systems, shunt valves, and position sensors. In
addition, its Rolled Products business unit is providing a specialty alloy for advanced breast cancer treatment.
32
New Products & Technologies
Flexcoat – EZ™ (Flexmag)
Flexcoat - EZ™ is a patent pending technology launched in April 2010. The product was engineered to eliminate the
issues associated with the conventional flexible magnetic product laminated with a printable surface. The solution is
a printable coating that is applied to the magnet, which replaces substrates such as vinyl and paper that are currently
adhered to the base magnet material. This results in a printed magnet that is now completely recyclable and is easier
to process.
Research and Development
Arnold has a core research and development team, which has collectively over 30 years of combined industry
experience. In addition to the core engineering group, a large number of other Arnold staff members assigned to the
business units contribute to the research and development effort at various stages. Product development also
includes collaborating with customers and field testing. This feedback helps ensure products will meet the
company’s demanding standards of excellence as well as the constantly changing needs of end users. Arnold’s
research and development activities are supported by state-of-the-art engineering software design tools, integrated
manufacturing facilities and a performance testing center equipped to ensure product safety, durability and superior
performance.
Customers
Arnold’s focus on customer service and product quality has resulted in a broad base of customers in a variety of end
markets. Products are used in applications such as general industrial, reprographic systems, aerospace & defense,
advertising and promotion, consumer and appliance, energy, automotive and medical.
The following table sets forth management’s estimate of Arnold’s approximate customer breakdown by industry
sector for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012 and 2011:
2012 Customer
Distribution
Industry Sector
30 %
General industrial……………………………….
15%
Aerospace and defense ............................................
12%
Advertising and promotion .....................................
5%
Consumer and appliance .........................................
7%
Energy .....................................................................
4%
Automotive .............................................................
Medical ...................................................................
3%
Reprographic ........................................................... 21%
3%
All Other Sectors Combined ...................................
100%
Total .......................................................................
2011 Customer
Distribution
25%
15%
14%
5%
5%
4%
4%
26%
2%
100%
Arnold has a large and diverse, blue-chip customer base. With the exception of Xerox, no other customer
represents greater that 10% of the company’s annual revenue. Sales to Arnold’s top ten customers were 31%, 35%
and 38% of total sales for the date of acquisition through December 31, 2012 and the years ended December 31,
2011 and 2010, respectively.
Sales and Marketing
PMAG - Arnold’s PMAG segment supports a global team of direct sales and marketing professionals and critical
design and application engineers. The PMAG sales force is organized for regional coverage with a focus on sales in
U.S., Europe, and South East Asia. Arnold serves over 500 active customers globally. As the majority of revenues
are project based in the PMAG business unit, technical sales are critical to the segment’s success. Arnold’s highly-
33
qualified application engineers are often integrated into its customers’ product design, planning, and implementation
phases, offering the most cost effective solution for demanding clients. The resulting intimate customer relationships
yield a high close rate, with revenue achieved primarily after the prototype phase.
Rolled Products – Similar to the Company’s PMAG segment, the vast majority of Rolled Products’ sales are
technically driven engineered solutions. These teams communicate closely in order to take advantage of potential
cross-selling opportunities. Approximately 75% of sales are domestic, with the balance of sales to Western Europe.
Flexmag Products - The Flexmag business segment services over 300 customers globally. Its sales force is
comprised of seven total sales professionals and supported by seven design and application engineers. This segment
is primarily book/bill and has limited revenue subject to long-term purchase commitments.
The following table sets forth Arnold’s net sales by geographic location for the fiscal years ended December 31,
2012 and 2011:
Geographic location
2012
2011
North America……………………………….
Europe ....................................................................
Asia Pacific ............................................................
All Other Locations Combined ..............................
Total .......................................................................
56%
34%
8%
2%
100%
55%
35%
8%
2%
100%
Arnold had firm backlog orders totaling $35 million at December 31, 2012.
Suppliers
Raw materials utilized by the Company include nickel and cobalt, stainless steel shafts, Inconel sleeves, adhesives,
laminates, aluminum extrusions and binders. Although the Company considers its relationships with vendors to be
strong, Arnold’s management team also maintains a variety of alternative sources of comparable quality, quantity
and price. The management team therefore believes that it is not dependent upon any single vendor to meet its
sourcing needs. Arnold is generally able to pass through material costs to its customers and believes that in the event
of significant price increases by vendors that it could pass the increases to its customers.
Intellectual Property
The Company currently relies on a deep portfolio of “trade secrets” and internal intellectual property.
Patents
Arnold currently has thirteen patents and one in process; over half of the patents were granted in the U.S. with the
remaining patents granted in European countries such as Germany, Great Britain, France and the Netherlands. Ten
of the patents are related to methods of making magnetic strips. In 2004, the company was granted a patent related
to a thermally-stable, high-temperature, SmCo molding compound. The most recent pending patents are related to
the methods of production involving flexible magnets having a printable surface as well as shaped field magnets
Trademarks
Arnold currently has 86 trademarks, 12 of which are in the U.S. The most notable trademarked items are the
following: “RECOMA”, “PLASTIFORM”, “FLEXMAG” & “ARNOLD”. Application dates for various
trademarks date back to as early as 1961.
34
Regulatory Environment
Arnold’s domestic manufacturing and assembly operations and its facilities are subject to evolving Federal, state
and local environmental and occupational health and safety laws and regulations. These include laws and
regulations governing air emissions, wastewater discharge and the storage and handling of chemicals and hazardous
substances. Arnold’s foreign manufacturing and assembly operations are also subject to local environmental and
occupational health and safety laws and regulations. Management believes that Arnold is in compliance, in all
material respects, with applicable environmental and occupational health and safety laws and regulations. New
requirements, more stringent application of existing requirements, or discovery of previously unknown
environmental conditions could result in material environmental expenditures in the future.
Arnold is a major producer of both Samarium Cobalt permanent magnets under its brand name RECOMA® and
Alnico (in both cast and sintered forms). Both materials from Arnold meet the current Berry Amendment or
Defense Acquisition Regulations Systems (DFARS) requirements per clauses 252.225.7014 252.225.7014 further
described under 10 U.S.C. 2533b. This provision covers the protection of strategic materials critical to national
security. These magnet types are considered "specialty metals" under these regulations.
Employees
Arnold is led by a capable management team of industry veterans that possess a balanced combination of industry
experience and operational expertise. The current senior management team has approximately 100 years of
cumulative experience with an average tenure of approximately 16 years at Arnold. Current management has
implemented numerous operational, strategic, and financial initiatives over the past several years, including almost
100 unique lean initiatives and kaizen events.
Arnold employs approximately 750 hourly and salaried employees located throughout North America, Europe and
Asia. Arnold’s employees are compensated at levels commensurate with industry standards, based on their
respective position and job grade.
The Company’s workforce is non-union except for approximately 70 hourly employees at its Marengo, Illinois
facilities, which are represented by the International Association of Machinists (IAM). Arnold enjoys good labor
relations with its employees and union and has a three year contract in place with the IAM, which will expire in June
of 2013.
CamelBak
Overview
CamelBak, headquartered in Petaluma, California, is a diversified hydration and personal protection platform,
offering Products for outdoor, recreation and military applications. CamelBak offers a broad range of recreational /
military hydration packs, reusable water bottles, specialized military gloves and performance accessories. As the
leading supplier of hydration products to specialty outdoor, cycling and military retailers, CamelBak maintains
the #1 market share position in domestic recreational markets (80%-85%), per management estimates, for
hands-free hydration packs and the #1 market share position for reusable water bottles in specialty channels
(30%) per management estimates. CamelBak is also the hydration pack of choice for the warfighter, with an
estimated 85% market share in post-issue hydration packs. Over its more than 20-year history, CamelBak has
developed a reputation as the preferred supplier for the hydration needs of the most demanding athletes and
warfighters. Across its markets, CamelBak is respected for its innovation, leadership and authenticity.
For the fiscal years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011, CamelBak contributed net sales of approximately $157.6
million and $42.7 million, respectively, and operating income of $25.5 million in 2012 and an operating loss of $6.8
million in 2011. CamelBak had total assets of $259.1 million and $262.0 million at December 31, 2012 and 2011,
respectively. Net sales from CamelBak represented 17.8% of our consolidated net sales in the year ended December
31, 2012 and 7.0% of our consolidated net sales in 2011 (from acquisition date).
History of CamelBak
Founded in 1989 and headquartered in Petaluma, California, the company initially gained a following among
35
mountain bikers in the early 1990’s through its first product, the ThermoBak™. As the company grew among this
base of users, its products continued to gain acceptance within other arenas where participants needed easy access to
water to achieve optimal performance in their activity.
The hands-free feature of CamelBak’s products proved to be appealing to outdoor sports enthusiasts and
critical to others, including the U.S. Military. After successfully developing the hands-free hydration category, the
company in 2006, recruited new management, including industry veteran and Board member Sally McCoy in the
role of CEO, and acquired Southwest Motorsports (since rebranded CamelBak Gloves). With a strong market
presence in hydration packs, the management team focused on continued expansion into adjacent markets and
developing and executing on a consistent strategy of innovation. Since this time, CamelBak has steadily grown
sales and earnings and has enhanced its relationships with suppliers to strengthen its supply chain,
reengineered its product distribution capabilities and tightly controlled operating expenses to match the needs of
the business.
In 2006, CamelBak expanded its recreational business into the fast growing bottle category. The company’s initial
launch of the innovative Better Bottle™ was followed by numerous successful bottle product introductions for
everyday users, road cyclists, kids and recreational enthusiasts, including eddy™ and the podium collection .
CamelBak was first to market with an entirely BPA-free plastic bottle product line.
We purchased a majority interest in CamelBak on August 24, 2011.
Industry
Recreation Market - With over 100 million participants, the outdoor recreational activity market represents a large,
attractive and stable group of consumers. CamelBak’s legacy products have historically been focused on a subset of
this group, consisting of cyclists, mountain bikers and other passionate outdoor enthusiasts who tend to be loyal and
consistent buyers of premium and performance-enhancing offerings. CamelBak’s core customers are typically
outdoor enthusiasts who exhibit very high participation rates and frequent purchasing behavior. In addition to
CamelBak’s legacy consumer group, the company has increasingly used its brand authenticity, credibility and
broadening product portfolio to reach athletes in adjacent sporting activities.
Long-term growth in the hydration and personal protection industry is driven by a number of factors. Consumer
recognition of personal hydration’s importance to health and well-being has been a growing and enduring trend,
reflected by the proliferation of bottled water and functional beverages. The importance of water as a healthy choice
has become even more prominent as a key component to healthy living. Further, people are increasingly aware of
the effects of even minimal dehydration on multiple functions of the body, including brain function, digestion,
metabolism and skin health. CamelBak’s products have proven their ability to provide greater hydration. An
independent study conducted by Pepperdine University found that people utilizing CamelBak’s Bite Valve™
technology consume 24% more than those using single serving disposable bottled water or less innovative products.
In addition, recently there has been a reduction in disposable bottled water consumption in the U.S., primarily as a
result of price and the wide-spread awareness of the negative environmental impact of disposable water bottles.
According to the Beverage Marketing Corporation, the economy was the primary cause of the decrease in U.S.
disposable bottled water sales in 2008 and 2009. With respect to the environment, the disposable water bottle’s
environmentally harmful lifecycle is generating significant backlash. The reliance on oil in the production and
transportation of the bottles and the fact that over two-thirds of bottles are not recycled is driving consumers to seek
alternatives to disposable bottles. Further, there are a number of government mandates forcing the elimination of
disposable bottles. Nationwide, local governments are enacting these curbs to combat the cost and waste of
disposable bottles. In recent years, governments of all levels have received scrutiny for fiscal irresponsibility and a
number of municipalities have launched initiatives focused on curbing disposable water bottles in their
communities. In 2006, a San Francisco investigation revealed that the city spent over $500,000 per year on bottled
water. This revelation triggered a nationwide analysis of government spending on bottled water with public funds.
U.S. Government & Military Market - The military acquisition process has responded to the demands of
modern warfare which require forces to be more agile and flexible than ever before. This trend has been highlighted
by the increased use of multiple funding and procurement mechanisms such as Rapid Fielding Initiatives (“RFI”)
36
and Joint Urgent Operational Needs Statement (“JUONS”). These programs provide funding for mission critical
operational needs such as IED detection and defeat and lifesaving warfighter equipment purchases without the
normal bid and proposal process that can take months and even years to get equipment in the hands of the end user.
In addition to responsive procurement contracts such as the RFI, the military has continued a gradual
decentralization of purchasing which allows decision makers closer to the front line to select what specific items
need to be acquired for a unit. Unit and individual equipment purchases are made primarily through U.S.
Government Services Administration (“GSA”) contracts or at military exchange and supply locations. Warfighters
and their families frequently purchase supplemental gear that is superior to standard issue products. CamelBak is
well positioned to benefit from continued decentralized purchasing.
The U.S. defense budget has increased dramatically in the last decade in response to terrorism attacks at home and
increased state and non-state threats abroad. Since 1998, Department of Defense (“DoD”) spending has increased
over 90% primarily as a result of the two major wars in Iraq and Afghanistan. The 2012 DoD budget requested
$531 billion in base spending with an additional $115 billion in overseas contingency operations (“OCO’) spending.
By way of comparison, 2011’s budget was $687 billion, with a $528 billion base budget and the remaining $159
billion used for OCO. The reduced request for OCO is the direct result of reductions in troop deployment in Iraq
and Afghanistan.
Recently, the DoD released its 2013 budget request which calls for a decrease in base budget spending to
$525.4 billion, with an additional $88.5 billion dedicated to OCO. The budget estimates released, forecast a
negative 0.3% real growth rate for the base budget from 2013 – 2017.
Products and Services
CamelBak focuses on offering high quality, industry leading hydration and performance equipment. The
company’s products fall into four key categories:
Hydration Packs - CamelBak’s heritage and legacy is in hydration packs and the company maintains the broadest
and deepest line of packs in the industry. CamelBak’s core hydration product consists primarily of an easily
cleaned and filled polyurethane reservoir, a connecting tube and a self-sealing mouthpiece, or “bite-valve,” which
facilitates simple and intuitive drinking. The CamelBak hydration system allows users to conveniently carry one to
three liters of water, which can be easily accessed without interruption of the user’s task or activity. The system is
most often sold as an integrated backpack or waist-pack, which is uniquely designed for a specific use, such as
biking, running or military applications. Hydration packs represented 50% and 44% of CamelBak’s gross sales in
the twelve months ended December 31, 2012 and 2011, respectively.
Recreation Packs
Having created the hands-free hydration category, CamelBak continues to be the dominant market leader in the
recreational sector since its inception. After starting with a mountain biking product, CamelBak developed a host of
other types of biking hydration packs that are designed to match specific types of biking. The company sells classic
cycling packs that are lightweight and streamlined. CamelBak also sells larger more durable packs designed for
long off-road rides and a Downhill/Freeride line designed for specific types of mountain biking activities. By
starting with a focused line and expanding it to cover many different types of biking activities, CamelBak has
created the deepest, broadest line of hydration packs in the industry.
As CamelBak extended its packs to cover different biking niches, top athletes from other outdoor sports began
to clamor for product. To meet this demand, the company has created lines that cater to the diverse set of outdoor
athletes:
(cid:120) Hike / Alpine consists of lightweight packs with extra back panel padding and air flow for breathability
Ski / Snowboard has attachments for helmets, boards and shovels
(cid:120)
(cid:120) Multi-sport are ultra-light and include wearable hydration units for use in almost any athletic activity
Run includes hip packs designed to hold as many as four water bottles in a remarkably stable set up
(cid:120)
These customized solutions have all been developed with an eye towards enhancing the performance of each
activity’s respective athletes. That customization is part of the innovative difference that allows CamelBak to
37
differentiate itself in a competitive market.
Military Packs
CamelBak sells a wide selection of category leading military packs. Management estimates the company has in
excess of 85% market share in post-issue military hydration packs. It is also one of only a few brands sold to U.S.
Military personnel that is allowed to prominently display the brand name on the outside of the product. The packs
include features such as easy armor integration and extreme durability appropriate for use in the harshest conditions.
Bottles - In 2006, CamelBak parlayed its credibility in hands-free hydration and expanded into bottles. The
company introduced the Better Bottle™, subsequently replaced by eddy™, incorporated a number of features
that quickly established it as a best-in-class hydration solution. These features include: (i) the patented
spill-proof Bite Valve, (ii) the first insulated stainless steel water bottle and (iii) in 2008, the first all BPA-free
line of plastic water bottles.
The success of the Better Bottle™ led the company to design a complete line of bottles that would mirror the pack
line’s legacy of customization. CamelBak developed a line for children, which included bite valves that have to be
removed from the inside of the bottle to prevent choking. The company also released the Podium® insulated and
non-insulated line, which includes features such as the patented Jet Valve™.
The company’s bottle offering has continued to evolve to meet the specific demands of consumers. These
demands have included activity-based needs such as customized cycling bottles. They have also included health
concerns, including the consumer backlash against BPA. CamelBak recognized this concern early and became the
first to offer an entire line of BPA-free hard plastic bottles in May of 2008.
The company’s bottle offering Groove™, provides users the ability to filter water in any place at any time
through its integrated straw assembly. Users simply fill the bottle with tap water, screw the cap on and start
sipping. The integrated plant-based carbon filter reduces chlorine taste and odors found in tap water thus improving
taste and eliminating the desire to purchase disposable bottles of water. Bottles represented approximately 34% and
31% of CamelBak’s gross sales for the twelve months ended December 31, 2012 and 2011, respectively.
Gloves - The evolution of CamelBak gloves parallels that of the pack business in the Government / Military
channel. Initially created for pit crews in the auto racing market, members of elite squads who became aware of the
product were impressed with its dexterity and durability. Following this unofficial endorsement, members of the
U.S. Armed Forces began requesting CamelBak gloves. The gloves are highly-technical and difficult to produce,
with some styles requiring 44 individual pieces for the assembly of the final product. Today, CamelBak gloves are
exclusively a Government / Military product, as their technical characteristics exceed that which a non-military user
would desire. Gloves represented approximately 6% and 14% of the company’s gross sales for the twelve months
ended December 31, 2012 and 2011, respectively. The reduction in Glove sales over the past two years is consistent
with the reduction of deployed troops.
Accessories - CamelBak offers various accessories to complement its hydration systems. Accessories are available
for each product line and include items that are made to enhance hydration performance and others for
maintenance or replacement parts.
CamelBak’s goal is to reinvent the way that individual athletes, warfighters and every day users hydrate and
perform. To that aim, the company has developed a number of products that help to further enhance the already
innovative way that its products deliver water:
• Elixir is a flavored electrolyte tablet that is designed to work in concert with CamelBak’s reservoirs.
Elixir improves alertness and hydration.
• All Clear is a water purification solution that is integrated with CamelBak’s bottles.
CamelBak products are known for their high quality and durability. The company provides products to help
maintain this durability and offers replacement parts in the rare instance that the products cease to perform at the
optimal levels:
38
• Reservoir cleaning kits are designed to optimally clean the reservoirs that are inside of each pack. Properly
cleaning and drying the reservoirs promotes longevity.
• Replacement reservoirs are made for each pack. This ensures that in the rare case that a reservoir
must be replaced, the athlete or warfighter does not need to replace the entire pack but can easily swap
out the necessary components. Many users also like to have multiple reservoirs.
In addition to recreational accessories, the company offers a specialized line associated with its military products.
These accessories help enhance the performance of military products by adding resistance to chemical and
biological agents or allowing connection to standard issue gas masks. For example, the HydroLink allows
warfighters to replace their bite valve with a connector, allowing them to hydrate while wearing their gas mask.
Accessories accounted for approximately 10% and 11% of CamelBak’s gross sales for the twelve months ended
December 31, 2012 and 2011, respectively.
Competitive Strengths
Leading Brand Recognition & Market Share - CamelBak believes it has a #1 market share in the following areas:
(i) recreational hands- free hydration packs, (ii) reusable water bottles for specialty channels and (iii) post-issue
hydration packs for the U.S. military. The company enjoys outstanding awareness and a reputation for superior
performance with consumers, retailers and warfighters. For example, within the Armed Forces, CamelBak is one
of only a few companies allowed to prominently display its brand name on active military products.
Preferred Partner - CamelBak is a preferred partner to leading retailers and the military. The company is a
supplier to leading national specialty and sporting goods retailers, including REI, EMS, Dick’s Sporting Goods
and The Sports Authority. In addition, CamelBak does business in over 400 military retail exchanges.
Business Strategies
Introducing Technically Superior Products in Core Categories - The company’s core categories include hydration
packs, bottles and warfighter protection products, and CamelBak’s mission is to continuously reinvent the way
people hydrate and perform. To meet this goal, the company will continue to create innovative, technical
solutions that exceed the demands of its customers. The company’s product pipeline for its core customers remains
robust.
Expanding Product Suite in Everyday Hydration to Reach New Customers and Channels - The CamelBak brand
is synonymous with personal hydration, and this credibility grants the company permission to enter broader
aspects of hydration. The company is committed to continuing to broaden its portfolio of personal hydration
solutions to reach new customers, and, under the leadership of Ms. McCoy, has proven that it can extend its
brand beyond hard -co r e athletes. For example, the company has successfully reached new consumers and
channels through its water bottle product line, which offers the features desired by its core customer base of
performance athletes to the everyday customer shopping at Target. As the company continues to expand its
relevance to everyday users, its authenticity will allow the company to enter other areas such as purification and
other products.
Broadening International Opportunities - Management believes there is significant potential to expand its
international sales in the consumer market. Currently, CamelBak’s recreational business is sold through a
network of approximately 65 foreign distributors. With improved distribution in the recreational market, the
company would have a number of opportunities to expand throughout Europe, Asia and South America.
Penetrating Select Areas of Specialty Retail – CamelBak aspires to build a product portfolio that shapes the way
consumers and warfighters perform across all activities. To that aim, CamelBak has made significant strides
introducing new products that target activities outside of its core biking and hiking audience. Past examples
include multi-sport enthusiasts and runners. The company targeted the multi-sport category with highly- functional
wearable hydration, which consists of a wearable shirt with built in hydration pack that allows enthusiasts to hydrate
hands-free without a traditional pack.
CamelBak keeps an open dialogue with the athletes it endorses and is thus able to gain real-time feedback on the
39
products it produces. By learning the needs of these consumers and others, CamelBak is able to identify other areas
to develop ground-breaking solutions. As CamelBak continues to innovate and create new products to serve
the needs of more diverse consumers, it will further grow sales to these retailers. As a sports subculture brand,
CamelBak is able to migrate to different activities without losing the authenticity and credibility it has developed
as a leading product innovator. As examples, skiers and kayakers alike have adopted the brand as their own
without even realizing that other sports enthusiasts have done the same.
CamelBak launched its own direct to consumer E-Commerce site during the fourth quarter of 2012.The site initially
offered bottles and accessories along with water packs. In 2013 the site is expected to expand and will offer more
hydration packs which will coincide with CamelBak’s annual pack launch.
Research and Development
CamelBak’s hydration products are among the most technically advanced and rigorously engineered in their
markets. They are specifically designed to function and perform under diverse and extreme conditions. CamelBak’s
research and development effort is at the core of its strategy of product innovation and market leadership.
CamelBak’s products feature a combination of innovative design, high-quality materials, and superb functionality
and performance elements and are recognized as being the leaders or among the leaders in all of the market
segments in which they participate.
CamelBak has a robust core research and development team, which has collectively over 36 years of combined
industry experience. In addition to the core engineering group, a large number of other CamelBak staff members,
who also use the company’s products, contribute to the research and development effort at various stages. Product
development also includes collaborating with customers and field testing. This feedback helps ensure products will
meet the company’s demanding standards of excellence as well as the constantly changing needs of end users.
CamelBak’s research and development activities are supported by state-of-the-art engineering software design tools,
integrated manufacturing facilities and a performance testing center equipped to ensure product safety, durability
and superior performance. The testing center collects data and tests products prior to and after commercial
introduction. Research and development costs (from the date of acquisition) totaled $3.0 million and $0.8 million
during the years 2012 and 2011, respectively.
Customers and Distribution channels
CamelBak offers a unique value p r o p o s i t i o n f o r i t s c u s t o m e r s . As an innovative subculture sports brand,
CamelBak has the authenticity and credibility to defend market share, command premium prices and leverage into
new categories. The brand strength allows retailers to hold prices and thus protect margins. Further, the company’s
“Got Your Bak” lifetime warranty speaks to the level of quality and customer service offered. The company’s
products, which are sold domestically and internationally, are segmented into two major end markets: Recreational
and Government/Military. CamelBak’s powerful product distribution network is comprised of long-standing,
entrenched relationships with a diversified set of customers. CamelBak’s top ten customers comprised
approximately 4 9 % a n d 52% of gross sales in the year ended December 31, 2012 and 2011, respectively, with
no single customer accounting for greater than 9% of gross sales.
Recreational Distribution- CamelBak markets its hydration and performance products to several channels in the
recreational market. Management estimates that the company currently holds in excess of 85% of the market
share of the hands-free hydration market. A share this large demonstrates the strength of the brand and the
credibility that the products have with consumers. CamelBak invented the category in 1989 and although
competitors have introduced a number of similar products, the company has held on to its base.
Recreational–Domestic Distribution: The Recreational–Domestic Division is focused on product distribution
through a variety of retail accounts in the United States. Particular emphasis is placed on premium active lifestyle
retailers across a broad spectrum of channels, including camping/outdoor, bike, natural foods, housewares,
hunting/fishing, paddle sports and surf/skate.
The division manages approximately 2,600 retail customers with over 9,500 retail storefronts. Current distribution
channels range from specialty bicycle, outdoor, paddle sports, hunting stores and catalogs to large outdoor and
sporting goods chains that reach the broader market. Importantly, the company has selectively expanded and
40
diversified its distribution channels over time. Today, notable customers include REI, Dick’s Sporting Goods,
EMSTarget, Whole Foods Market, Academy and The Sports Authority.
The company’s entrance into the reusable bottle category in 2006 resulted in a notable broadening of distribution, as
the company made the decision to strategically expand into new channels. The company felt it was important to
reach an even broader consumer base to further its vision of “obsoleting” bottled water as the most common way to
hydrate. The bottle business has also enabled CamelBak to achieve penetration in the college and corporate
sponsorship markets.
Recreational–International Distribution: The Recreational–International division
focused on product
distribution through outdoor, sporting goods and specialty retailers that are managed through local distributors
focused on premier retail accounts. The company maintains an office in Europe to provide oversight of distributor
performance, market intelligence and limited supplemental marketing support, including event staffing, trade show
management, athlete sponsorships, public relations and market/product intelligence gathering. Order scheduling,
fulfillment and logistics support for the company’s international operations are provided from CamelBak’s
Petaluma headquarters.
is
Key international markets include the United Kingdom, Germany, France, Australia, Japan, Canada, Norway and
Korea. As is the case in the United States, the CamelBak brand is widely recognized and respected by
enthusiasts and maintains a dominant market share.
Military–Retail Exchange Distribution - Military retail exchanges, including the Army and Air Force Exchange
Service (“AAFES”), the Navy Exchange Service Command (“NEXCOM”) and the Marine Corps
Exchange (“MXC”), are essentially large retail chains serving the military community. Military personnel,
veterans and their families are strongly incentivized to shop at exchanges given that the store markup is
typically less than the off base markup from other retailers, exchanges do not charge sales tax and a portion of
the exchanges’ earnings often go towards funding expenditures related to the military’s morale, welfare and
recreation. Furthermore, the exchanges provide an added benefit to consumers, given the convenience they provide
to troops deployed in nearby locations.
The military retail exchanges represent large distribution platforms extending across many different countries.
CamelBak sells through o v e r 400 locations. CamelBak pioneered the adoption of hands-free hydration systems
by U.S. and foreign militaries and is today, we believe, the preferred brand of warfighters. As a result, CamelBak
has dominant market share throughout the military retail channel. CamelBak is one of AAFES largest vendors and
has a strong, long-term relationship with the retailer.
Government / Military Distribution - In the Government / Military division, CamelBak sells products and
accessories related to both hydration and performance. CamelBak continues to expand its Government /
Military market by increasing penetration into foreign governments and militaries. A key component of U.S.
foreign policy is the replacement of some deployed troops with those of foreign militaries. CamelBak’s success in
the U.S. Military carries tremendous credibility abroad, which has enabled the company to achieve meaningful
adoption outside the U.S.
Domestic Government / Military Distribution - CamelBak sells its products through a range of domestic
Government / Military channels:
(cid:120) GSA: The GSA provides a channel for all federal government agencies and government end-users to
procure items easily. All products sold through the GSA must be pre-approved to get listed on GSA
schedules. Once products are listed, thousands of Government / Military units and agencies purchase
through this channel knowing that all pricing and legal obligations have already been negotiated and
approved.
(cid:120) Direct Department of Defense Procurement: The U.S. Military will, from time to time, request for proposal
a large amount of a given product. In addition, this request can oftentimes require that the product be
manufactured with domestic content and other various specific rules. As it relates to CamelBak’s business,
the company calls such direct contracts “DFAR” business. This is patterned after the Defense Federal
Acquisition Regulation (“DFAR”) set of rules used by the government. Selling through the direct
41
government channel entails abiding by specific sourcing guidelines and responding to a solicitation.
Typically, a branch of the military will identify a need, issue a solicitation and multiple parties will bid to
win the contract. While these orders are intermittent and often large, CamelBak has developed a strong
supply chain to deal with these types of orders.
(cid:120)
International Government / Military Distribution - International Sales in the Government / Military is
driven by ordinary replenishment and large solicitations that occur on an irregular basis to meet the
equipment needs of each individual country. CamelBak has consistently participated in these solicitations
with significant historical success.
Sales and Marketing
CamelBak approaches marketing from a unique point of view that is meant to inspire customers. CamelBak is
engaged in small endorsement deals that provide gear to actual users as well as athletes who bike, climb and hike
professionally as opposed to entering into large multi-year contracts. Second, the company’s marketing campaign
uses photographs and videos shot from a user’s perspective. This photographic style encourages the consumers
viewing the ad to imagine they are engaging in the activity shown. This experience serves to promote the
inspirational nature of CamelBak’s brand by “liberating people to go further.”
Marketing - CamelBak uses a “two pronged” approach to marketing:
(cid:120) CamelBak has set out to aggressively pursue new users and expand its customer base while
remaining true to its authentic, innovative ideals. Given the customization that has occurred across the
company’s product lines, CamelBak created a unique, highly targeted marketing plan to acquire new users
for specific products. In the case of Groove™, CamelBak set out to expand its customer base of 25-
45 year old women. To that end, the company designed print and web ads with a message that appeals
more directly to this group and placed these advertisements in the appropriate women’s lifestyle
magazines. The company also has a strong presence on the internet and uses instructional videos
and direct marketing through social media sites such as Facebook.
(cid:120) CamelBak also makes a point to continue cultivating the passionate consumer base that already admires
and respects the company and its products. A recent example is the release of the Antidote™ Reservoir.
The company uses a unique marketing approach for different target users. Since these products are geared
towards passionate outdoor athletes, CamelBak placed ads in forums including: (i) bicycling and mountain
bike magazines, (ii) backpacking and hiking magazines and (iii) internet and social media sites that cater
to active men and women.
Sales Organization - CamelBak’s in-house sales team consists of dedicated sales people and customer service
employees. The sales organization is strategically aligned by product category/sales cha nnel . The sales managers
split coverage for major national accounts with one team responsible for maintaining and growing sales to
established channels and the other for business to larger national retailers and natural foods stores. With an average
tenure of 5 years with the company, CamelBak’s sales team maintains enduring and entrenched relationships with
each of its customers.
The Recreational–Domestic division manages customers through both an in- house sales management staff and a
network of sales agencies consisting of a number of independent sales representatives. The Recreational–
International division manages its international customers through local distributors focused on premier retail
accounts. The company maintains an office in Europe with two employees to provide oversight.
CamelBak had sales backorders totaling $29.3 million and $29.4 million At December 31, 2012 and 2011,
respectively.
Competition
CamelBak pioneered the hydration category with the introduction of the hydration pack more than 20 years ago.
CamelBak’s brand admiration and customer loyalty, which are driven by its innovative products, have allowed the
42
company to continuously defend its market position in packs. These traits also allowed the company to
successfully enter the bottle category where it holds a leading market position.
A summary of CamelBak’s competitors in hydration packs, bottles and reservoirs is listed below:
CamelBak Recreational Competitors
Hydration Packs
Bottles
Osprey
The North Face
DaKine
Nalgene
SIGG
Nathan Performance Gear
Polar
Kleen Kanteen
Contigo
Reservoirs
Platypus
Hydrapak
Source
Across its military product set, CamelBak competes against a wide variety of industry players which include large
prime and tier two defense companies, small and mid-sized companies specializing in warfighter equipage and
companies focused predominantly on the consumer or materials market with a limited number of defense
product offerings. CamelBak is recognized as a high-end supplier in each of its product categories (hydration
and gloves). Management believes CamelBak is the leading supplier of post-issue hydration packs with over 85%
of the market share and among the leading providers of specialized tactical gloves which are worn by some of the
most elite users in the world.
Suppliers
CamelBak’s product manufacturing is based on a dual strategy of in-house manufacturing and strategic
alliances with select sub-contractors and vendors. CamelBak operates a scalable, low-cost supply chain, sourcing
materials and employing contract manufacturers from across the Asia-Pacific region, the U.S. and Puerto Rico.
Once manufactured, products are shipped directly from overseas manufacturers to CamelBak’s distribution center
in San Diego for receiving and stocking and thereafter distributed to retail locations or third-party distributors.
CamelBak has developed an efficient and low-cost supply chain. The company’s deep understanding of military
procurement requirements has allowed it to build a flexible network of vendors to reliably meet large military
orders on short notice and to shift orders to vendors to be compliant with military requirements for its products.
While striving to maximize the profitability of its products, the company is also keenly aware of its corporate
responsibility and, thus, holds itself and its vendors to the highest supply chain practices. As a result of the
company’s dedication to superior supply chain and manufacturing practices, the U.S. Military’s GSA named
CamelBak the “Green Contractor of the Year” in 2009 and “MAS Contractor of the year in 2011”.
In recent years, the company has streamlined its operating expenses, tightening cost controls and maintaining a cost
structure more in line with the size of its platform. Additionally, the company has driven cost improvements by
negotiating prices with vendors using an “open book” policy, in which each vendor’s profit margins, labor rates and
material costs are agreed to upfront. This allows the company’s operations group to negotiate reductions in
component prices from raw material manufacturers resulting in cost savings that are passed through to CamelBak.
The company’s primary raw materials are fabric, resin, polyurethane film and various resins for which the
company and/or its supplier partners receive multiple shipments per week. The company purchases its materials
from a combination of domestic and foreign suppliers.
Intellectual Property
Hydration priorities include easy cleaning and filling, freshness and taste, durability, temperature, water purity,
leak-proof products and sustainability, all of which improve a customer’s overall hydration experience or enable the
customer to perform at high levels. As a reflection of this focus, CamelBak holds 39 active patents and 16 pending
patent applications.
43
Regulatory Environment
Management is not aware of any existing, pending or contingent liabilities that could have a material adverse
effect on the company’s business. The company is proactive regarding regulatory issues and is in compliance
with all relevant regulations. Management is not aware of any potential environmental issues.
Employees
As of December 31, 2012, CamelBak employed approximately 297 persons. None of CamelBak’s employees are
subject to collective bargaining agreements. CamelBak’s relationship with its employees is good.
Ergobaby
Overview
Ergobaby, headquartered in Los Angeles, California, is a premier designer, marketer and distributor of baby
wearing products, stroller travel systems and accessories. Ergobaby offers a broad range of wearable baby carriers,
stroller travel systems and related products that are sold through more than 650 retailers and web shops in the
United States and internationally in about 50 countries.
Ergobaby’s reputation for product innovation, reliability and safety has led to numerous awards and accolades from
consumer surveys and publications, including babycenter, Parenting Magazine, Pregnancy magazine and Wired
magazine.
For the fiscal years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, Ergobaby had net sales (from the date of acquisition)
of approximately $64.0 million, $44.3 million and $12.2 million, respectively. Ergobaby had operating income
totaling $10.9 million and $7.9 million in the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011, respectively, and an
operating loss of $2.4 million from its date of acquisition through December 31, 2010. Ergobaby had total assets of
$117.7 million, $118.4 million and $95.7 million at December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively. Ergobaby’s
net sales represented 7.2% and 7.3% of our consolidated net sales for the year ended December 31, 2012 and 2011
and 2.4% of our consolidated net sales for the year ended December 31, 2010 (from acquisition date).
History of Ergobaby
Ergobaby was founded in 2003 by Karin Frost, who designed baby carriers following the birth of her son. The
product line has since expanded into seven primary product lines: the Original, Designer, Organic, Sport,
Performance, Travel, and Options carriers with multiple style variations. In its second year of operations, Ergobaby
sold 10,500 baby carriers and by 2012 sold over 890,000 in the year. In order to support the rapid growth, in 2007,
Ergobaby made a strategic decision to establish an operating subsidiary (“EBEU”) in Hamburg, Germany. We
purchased a majority interest in Ergobaby on September 16, 2010.
On November 18, 2011 Ergobaby acquired Orbit Baby for approximately $17.5 million. Founded in 2004 and
based in Newark, California, Orbit Baby produces and markets a premium line of stroller travel systems, including
car seats, strollers and bassinets that are interchangeable using a patented hub ring.
Both brands are well regarded in the infant and juvenile industry. Ergobaby was named to the “20 Best Products in
the Last 20 Years” by Parenting Magazine (2007), and continues to be recognized for its quality evident by recently
being named babycenters’ 2012 “Moms’ Pick” for best Baby Carrier. While The Orbit Baby Infant System has
received vast honors, including, 2007 iParenting Media Award for Best Product, Baby Gizmo's Editor's Choice
2012, babble.com favorite Car Seats 2012, She Knows Parenting Stroller Award 2011, and lilsugar Best Stroller of
2010.
44
Industry
Ergobaby competes in the large and expanding infant and juvenile products industry. The industry exhibits little
seasonality and is somewhat insulated from overall economic trends, as parents view spending on children as
largely non-discretionary in nature. Consequently, parents spend consistently on their children, particularly on
durable items, such as car seats, strollers, baby carriers, and related items that are viewed as necessities. Further, an
emotional component is often a factor in parents’ purchasing decisions, as parents desire to purchase the best and
safest products for their children. As a result, parents spend from $8,480 to $23,690 on their child on an annual
basis for related housing, food, transportation, clothes, healthcare, daycare and other items, depending on age of the
child & annual income. On average, households spent from 12-25 percent of their before-tax income on a child,
according to the USDA's most recent report (May 2011). Similar patterns are seen in other counties around the
world. According to a Mintel report published in March 2010, estimated 2010 retail dollars spent on baby durables
reached approximately $10.3 billion in the U.S., up compared to approximately $9.5 billion in 2004, with a
considerably larger market worldwide. The U.S. retail market is expected to continue its growth trajectory through
2014 with an anticipated market size of approximately $12.0 billion.
Demand drivers fueling the growing spending on infant and juvenile products include favorable demographic
trends, such as (i) an increasing number of births worldwide; (ii) a high percentage of first time births; (iii) an
increasing age of first time mothers and a large percentage of working mothers with increased disposable income;
and (iv) an increasing percentage of single child households and two-family households.
Given that the child’s safety is paramount, many parents do not want to compromise a baby or child’s safety by
purchasing secondhand products to save money. In many cases, when purchasing secondhand, the parent does not
know key facts about the product they are buying, such as the age of the product, history of the item, or potential
recalls by the manufacturer. Furthermore, the safety standards for the product may have changed since the version
being resold, resulting in a product that does not meet the most rigorous safety standards. Consequently, as parents
consider purchases of important necessities such as baby durables, they typically favor new products. According to
Mintel Research, approximately 83% of baby carrier purchases were first-time purchases, with the remainder being
either purchased second hand or borrowed.
Safety influences not only whether parents purchase new or used products, but also which brands parents choose,
which consequently impacts pricing and competition within the infant and juvenile products market. In purchases of
baby durables, parents often seek well-known brands that offer a sense of comfort regarding a product’s reliability
and safety. As a result, brand name and safety certifications can serve as a barrier to entry for competition in the
market, as well as allow well-known brands such as Ergobaby to charge a premium.
Wearable Carriers and Baby Wearing Trends -
Within the broader market for infant and juvenile products, Ergobaby operates specifically within the market for
child mobility and transport products. According to the Juvenile Products Manufacturers Association (“JPMA”),
reported child mobility and transport manufacturer dollar sales, which includes sales of carriers, strollers, travel
systems, and related products, totaled approximately $349.1 million in the U.S. in 2009. Penetration of baby
carriers currently trails that of strollers, car seats, and other infant and juvenile products. JPMA manufacturer sales
growth from 2008 to 2009 suggests that the soft carrier segment is growing more rapidly than other infant and
juvenile product categories, with 7.8% unit growth and dollar growth. Comparatively, stroller shipments and
convertible car seat shipments decreased 1.6% and 8.3%, respectively, over the same period
Management believes that continued growth within the market for wearable baby carriers is driven by several
trends, including (i) lower relative penetration of baby carriers versus other infant and juvenile products; (ii)
favorable demographics; (iii) increasing focus on the popularity of baby wearing; and (iv) convenience and mobility
of wearable products.
Products and Services
Ergobaby- Baby Carriers
Ergobaby has two main baby carrier product lines: baby carriers and accessories. Ergobaby’s baby carrier design
supports a natural sitting position for babies, eliminating compression of the spine and hips that can be caused by
45
unsupported suspension. The baby carrier also balances the baby's weight to parents' hips and shoulders, and
alleviates physical stress for the parent. The organic carrier line uses 100% organic cotton from India. Additional
accessories are provided to complement the baby carriers.
Within the carrier category, Ergobaby sells seven primary product lines: the Original, Designer, Organic, Sport,
Performance, Travel, and Options carriers and; within each line, Ergobaby offers multiple style variations.
Amongst the carrier category, Original carriers represented 48% of 2012 and 39% of 2011 carrier sales,
respectively, and Organic carriers represented 22% and 37%, of 2012 and 2011 carrier sales, respectively, with all
other carriers representing the remaining sales in each year. Carrier sales were approximately $44.6 million; $37.8
million and $30.0 million in the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively, and represented
approximately 70% of total sales in 2012, and 86% of total sales in 2011 and 2010.
Within the accessories category, Ergobaby sells twelve primary product lines: back packs, bibs, changing pads,
chest strap, doll carrier, front pouch, hood replacement, Infant Insert, papoose coat, teething pads, waist extension
and a weather cover. Within each line, Ergobaby offers multiple style variations including color and organic/non-
organic fabric. The Infant Insert is the largest sales component of the accessory category, representing more than
half of total accessory sales for 2010 and 2011. Accessory sales were $6.0 million, $6.5 million and $4.4 million
and represented approximately 9%, 15% and 13% of total sales in 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.
Ergobaby’s core baby carrier product offerings with average retail prices are summarized below:
(cid:120)
(cid:120)
(cid:120)
(cid:120)
6 styles of baby carriers — $115 — $195
1 style of organic carrier in 7 colors — $135 — $160
5 styles of Infant Inserts — $25 — $38
12 different accessory products — $10 — $64
Orbit Baby Infant Systems
The Orbit Baby Infant System has three main product groups: stroller travel systems, product extensions and
accessories.
The Orbit Baby Stroller Travel System is a three-piece kit that includes an infant car seat, car seat base, and stroller.
Unlike traditional infant travel systems, the Orbit Stroller Travel System's unique docking technology, or
“SmartHubTM”, allows for easy interchange of four different seats, including the Infant Car Seat, Stroller Seat,
Bassinet, and Toddler Car Seat.
The Orbit Baby car seat base (which stays in the car when not in use) is touted as the easiest, quickest base to safely
install. The base's patent-pending StrongArmTM technology allows a secure installation in 60 seconds and easily
docks the car seat from almost any angle, allowing the parent to ergonomically transport the child.
The Orbit Baby Infant Car Seat is the common "plug-in" for the three-in-one system and can be moved effortlessly
from the car seat base to the stroller. As a result of the SmartHub technology, Orbit is the only infant car seat that
ergonomically rotates for simple docking and undocking to and from the car and stroller.
The third member of the Stroller Travel System is Orbit's modern and easy-to-use stroller. As is the case with the
car seat base, the circular SmartHub allows the infant car seat to dock on the stroller from any angle, and with 360
degree rotation, the baby can face rear, forward, or sideways to view the world from different perspectives.
Orbit Baby offers product extensions including additional seats and strollers, including the Double Helix, to
accommodate growing children and families.
Orbit Baby also offers a wide range of accessories including the Sidekick Stroller Board, Stroller Panniers, Weather
Pack, Color Pack, Footmuffs, Stroller Travel Bag and Baby Gear Spa Kit.
Orbit Baby’s core product offerings, extensions and accessories and suggested retail prices are below:
(cid:120) Stroller Travel System (includes Infant Car Seat, Car Seat Base, Stroller)- $940
(cid:120) Stroller - $280-$750
46
(cid:120) Car Seats and Car Seat Base - $380- $440
(cid:120) Bassinet Cradle - $295
(cid:120) Accessories - $50-$195
Competitive Strengths
Ergobaby Carriers are known for their unsurpassed comfort - Ergobaby’s superior design results in improved
comfort for both parent and baby. Parents are comfortable because baby’s weight is evenly distributed between the
hips and shoulders while baby sits ergonomically in a natural sitting position. The concept of baby carrying has
increased in popularity in the U.S. as parents recognize the emotional and functional benefits of carrying their baby.
Consumers continually cite the comfort, design, and convenient “hands free” mobility the Ergobaby carrier offers as
key purchasing criteria.
Orbit Baby Innovation - With 14 patents and 10 patents pending, Orbit Baby offers a complete child travel system,
from stroller to car seat and beyond. A favorite with moms and dads alike, the integrated Orbit Baby system is
designed to take your child everywhere with unprecedented ease and style. With an emphasis on advanced safety
and engineering, Orbit Baby is continually recognized for its innovation, ergonomic design and environmentally
friendly focus. Orbit Baby applies hands-on experience and extensive research to create products that are elegantly
simple, intuitive to use, and unsurpassed in real-world safety.
Business Strategy
Increase Penetration of Current U.S. Distribution Channels - Ergobaby continues to benefit from steady
expansion of the market for wearable baby carriers and related accessories in the U.S. and internationally. Going
forward, Ergobaby will continue to leverage and expand the awareness of its outstanding brands (both Ergobaby
and Orbit Baby) in order to capture additional market share in the U.S., as parents increasingly recognize the
enhanced mobility, convenience, and the ability to remain close to the child that Ergobaby carriers enable. The
company currently markets its products to consumers in the U.S. through brick-and-mortar retailers, including
specialty boutiques; online web shops; and directly through its website. Management has developed a targeted
strategy to increase its penetration of these currently underpenetrated distribution channels that includes: (i)
improved retain presence, including new packaging and in-store support materials; (ii) improving the effectiveness
of marketing programs including utilization of social sites, digital marketing, and improved consumer engagement,
and (iii) development of new products and designs.
Cultivate Attractive New Distribution Channels - In addition to its existing retail customer base, comprised
primarily of small specialty retail stores and boutiques, there are numerous other retail channels that offer
tremendous growth opportunities for Ergobaby products. Specifically, management recently began targeting several
types of retailers as the company continues its growth trajectory, including (i) multi-store maternity and infant and
juvenile products chains; (ii) on-line retailers; (iii) organic and natural specialty retailers; (iv) department stores; and
(v) mass retailers.
International Market Expansion - Testimony to the global strength of its lifestyle brand, Ergobaby derives nearly
58% of its sales from international markets. Similar to the U.S., Ergobaby can continue to leverage its brand equity
in the international markets it currently serves to aggressively drive future growth, as well as expand its
international presence into new regions. The market for the company’s products abroad continues to grow rapidly,
in part due to the growth in the number of births worldwide and the fact that in many parts of Europe and Asia, the
concept of baby wearing is a culturally entrenched form of infant and child transport.
New Product Development - Management believes Ergobaby has an opportunity to leverage its unique, authentic
lifestyle brand and expand its product line.
Since its founding in 2003, the company has successfully introduced new carrier products to maintain innovation,
uniqueness, and freshness within its product line. Specifically, 20 new SKUs were added in 2012, 23 new SKU’s
added in 2011 and 22 new SKU’s added in 2010. These product introductions include both evolutionary product
47
introductions, such as new colors and patterns for the company’s current carriers and associated products, as well as
entirely new product categories. Major recent new product introductions include the Ergobaby infant insert
Heart2Heart, which modifies the Ergobaby carrier to provide additional support for a baby’s developing spine.
Additionally, in 2010, Ergobaby launched the Performance carrier and the Option carrier, the latter which allows
the consumer to customize the look of the carrier with optional colored fabrics and designs. In 2011, Ergobaby
launched the Daypack which is a hybrid of a Backpack and Diaper Bag that snaps around the Ergobaby Carrier
straps to provide a comfortable, hands-free way to tote the day’s supplies in addition to all of your baby essentials.
In 2012 Ergobaby introduced the Stowaway Carrier, and a designer carrier collection to include a matching diaper
bag. The Stowaway Carrier has the padded straps and waist belt that make all Ergobaby carriers comfortable, yet
easily folds into its own front pouch for compact storage.
Orbit Baby was founded in 2004 using its original design of the Orbit Infant System which is a three-piece kit that
includes a base, infant car seat, and stroller, using the unique docking technology, (“SmartHub”). Since then, Orbit
Baby has successfully introduced the Orbit Bassinet Cradle, and various accessories that has increased its versatility
and kept them trend forward. In 2012, Orbit Baby introduced the Double Helix Stroller Frame, Orbit Baby’s
complete double stroller solution. The innovative design features a narrow frame with front and back rotating seats.
With two SmartHub rings parents have the option to use any existing Orbit Baby seat.
Customers
Ergobaby primarily sells its products through brick-and-mortar retailers, online retailers and distributors and derives
approximately 58% of its sales from outside of the U.S. Within the U.S., Ergobaby sells its products through over
650 brick-and-mortar retail customers and small infant and juvenile products chains, representing an estimated
2,000 retail doors. Ergobaby products are sold through its German based subsidiary, Ergobaby Europe, which
services brick-and-mortar retailers and online retailers in Germany and France as well as services a network of
distributors located in the United Kingdom, Austria, Finland, Russia, Switzerland, Belgium, the Netherlands,
Sweden, Norway, Spain, Denmark, Italy, Turkey and the Ukraine. Sales to customers outside of the U.S. and
European markets are predominantly serviced through distributors granted rights, though not necessarily exclusive,
to sell within a specific geographic region.
Sales & Marketing
Within the U.S., Ergobaby directly employ sales professionals and utilizes independent sales representatives
assigned to differing U.S. territories managed by in-house sales professionals. Independent salespeople in the U.S.
are paid on a commission basis based on customer type and sales territory.
In Europe, Ergobaby directly employs its salespeople. In Europe, salespeople are paid a base salary and a
commission on their sales, which is standard in that territory. Ergobaby Europe handles all Ergobaby distributor
orders within the European countries including Russia and Ukraine; all other orders are handled through Ergobaby’s
U.S. offices.
Ergobaby has implemented a multi-faceted marketing plan which includes (i) targeted print advertising; (ii) online
marketing efforts, including online advertisement, search engine optimization and social networking efforts; (iii)
increasing tradeshow attendance; and (iv) increasing promotional activities.
Ergobaby had approximately $10.0 million and $3.5 million in firm backlog orders at December 31, 2012 and 2011,
respectively.
Competition
The infant and juvenile products market is fragmented, with a few larger manufacturers and marketers with
portfolios of brands and a multitude of smaller, private companies with relatively targeted product offerings.
Within the infant and juvenile products market, Ergobaby's Carriers primarily compete with companies that market
wearable baby carriers. Within the wearable baby carrier market, several distinct segments exist, including (i) slings
48
and wraps; (ii) soft-structured baby carriers; and (iii) hard frame baby carriers.
The primary global competitors in this segment are Baby Bjorn and Manduca, which also market products in the
premium price range. Especially in the US, Ergobaby also competes with several smaller companies that have
developed wearable carriers, such as Beco, Boba, and L’il Baby. Within the soft-structured baby carrier segment,
Ergobaby benefits from strong distribution, good word of mouth, and the functionality of the design.
The Orbit Baby Infant System principally competes with the following premium brand stroller manufacturers:
(cid:120) Chicco
(cid:120) Bugaboo
(cid:120) Maclaren
(cid:120) Baby Trend
(cid:120) Stokke
(cid:120) Quinny Baby
(cid:120) UPPAbaby
Suppliers
Ergobaby sources its products from China, Vietnam and India. In 2012, Ergobaby began sourcing non-organic
carriers and accessories from a manufacturing facility in Vietnam. China and Vietnam accounted for approximately
69% of Ergobaby’s purchases in 2012. Ergobaby partnered with a manufacturer located in India in 2009, which
manufactures Ergobaby’s organic carriers and accessories, and represented approximately 31% of Ergobaby’s
purchases in 2012. Ergobaby’s manufacturers in China, Vietnam and India have the additional capacity to
accommodate Ergobaby’s projected growth.
Intellectual Property
Ergobaby maintains a utility patent on its standard carrier, which was filed in 2003 and issued January 29, 2009.
Notwithstanding this patent, Ergobaby primarily depends on brand name recognition and premium product offering
to differentiate itself from competition. Ergobaby also maintains three utility patents for its Orbit Baby SmartHub
technology.
Regulatory Environment
Management is not aware of any existing, pending, or contingent liabilities that could have a material adverse effect
on the company’s business. The company is proactive regarding regulatory issues and is in compliance with all
relevant regulations. Ergobaby maintains adequate product liability insurance coverage and to date has not incurred
any losses. Management is not aware of any potential environmental issues.
Employees
As of December 31, 2012 Ergobaby employed 86 persons in 6 locations. None of Ergobaby’s employees are
subject to collective bargaining agreements. We believe that Ergobaby’s relationship with its employees is good.
Fox
Overview
Fox, headquartered in Scotts Valley, California, is a branded action sports company that designs, manufactures and
markets high-performance suspension products and components for mountain bikes, snowmobiles, motorcycles, all-
terrain vehicles (“ATVs”), and other off-road vehicles.
Fox’s products are recognized by manufacturers and consumers as being among the most technically advanced
suspension products currently available in the marketplace. Fox’s technical success is demonstrated by its
49
dominance of award winning performances by professional athletes utilizing its suspension products. As a result,
Fox’s suspension components are incorporated by OEM customers on their high-performance models at the top of
their product lines. OEMs leverage the strength of Fox’s brand to maintain and expand their own sales and margins.
In the Aftermarket segment, customers seeking higher performance select Fox’s suspension components to enhance
their existing equipment.
Fox sells to over 175 OEM and over 7,800 Aftermarket customers across its market segments. In each of the years
2012, 2011 and 2010, approximately 81%, 80% and 78% of gross sales were to OEM customers with the remaining
sales to Aftermarket customers. Fox’s senior management, collectively, has over 100 years of experience in the
suspension design and manufacturing industry and other closely related industries.
For the fiscal years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, Fox had net sales of approximately $235.9 million,
$197.7 million, and $171.0 million and operating income of $26.2 million, $22.6 million and $19.6 million,
respectively. Fox had total assets of $142.8 million, $130.0 million and $130.8 million at December 31, 2012, 2011
and 2010, respectively. Fox’s net sales represented 26.7%, 32.6%, and 33.9% of our consolidated net sales for the
years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.
History of Fox
Fox was founded by Bob Fox in 1974 when, having participated in motocross racing, he sought to create a racing
suspension shock that performed better than existing coil spring shocks. Working in a friend’s garage, Mr. Fox
created the “Fox Air-Shox”. The product was successful and within two years it was used to win the U.S. 500cc
National Motocross Championship.
In 1978, Fox began producing high performance suspension products for off-road and motorcycle racing. From
1978 to 1983, Fox suspension users won the 500cc Grand Prix (motocross), Baja 1000 (off-road), AMA Super Bike
(motorcycle road racing) and Indy 500 (auto racing) generating greater market awareness for the Fox brand
especially among racing enthusiasts.
As Fox grew, the company applied the same core suspension technologies developed for motocross racing to other
categories. In 1987, Fox entered the snowmobile market. By 1993, Fox began supplying the mountain bike industry
with rear shocks before offering front fork suspensions in 2001. Fox entered the ATV and other off-road markets in
the mid-1990s.
We purchased a majority interest in Fox on January 4, 2008.
Industry
Fox provides suspension products for mountain biking and powered vehicles, such as, snowmobiles, all-
terrain/utility vehicles, motorcycling/motocross and off-road/specialty vehicles. Over the last three fiscal years
mountain biking has represented approximately 67%, 69% and 75%, of Fox’s gross sales and powered vehicles
have represented the remainder of gross sales. Fox has focused on the performance and racing segments of the
markets noted below, which are considerably smaller than the entire markets.
Mountain Biking - In 2011, the North American bike market generated over $6.0 billion of sales according to the
National Bicycle Dealers Association. Mountain bike related sales accounted for approximately 23% of this total
according to U.S. Department of Commerce statistics, Gluskin Townley Estimates. These sales were primarily
conducted through three channels: mass merchants, chain sporting goods and Independent Bike Dealers (IBDs).
These channels are differentiated by the price, quality and selection of the mountain bikes they offer, with the IBD
segment, in which Fox competes, consisting of premium priced and highly technical performance bikes.
Mountain biking enthusiasts typically have strong preferences concerning not only the OEM brand but also for the
components used by OEM manufacturers. Shocks, forks, wheels and drive-trains strongly influence customers’
buying decisions. OEMs have formed partnerships with premium component manufacturers having strong brands in
order to generate increased sales of their fully assembled bikes. Fox’s components are generally selected by OEMs
50
participating in the IBD segment and by Aftermarket consumers seeking increased performance characteristics
which is a small portion of the total market
Snowmobiles – In 2011, management estimates that the North American market for new snowmobiles was $1.4
billion. Snowmobiling can be segmented into the following categories: performance/crossover snowmobiles used
for a variety of activities including racing; touring/utility snowmobiles that are more comfortable and often seat two
people; mountain snowmobiles that are performance-oriented, focusing on vertical geography; trail snowmobiles
that are primarily used for riding groomed and un-groomed trails; and youth snowmobiles. Fox provides suspension
products in each of these categories.
As a way to stimulate demand for new snowmobiles and entice customers to purchase more premium priced
snowmobiles, OEMs will select Fox shocks. Additionally, OEMs offer the Fox’s shock absorbers as upgrades on
less expensive models. Aftermarket customers will select Fox components for increased performance
characteristics.
All-Terrain Vehicles – In 2011, the North American ATV market was $2.6 billion according to management’s
estimates. The market for all-terrain vehicles (ATVs) and utility vehicles can be divided into four segments:
Recreation/Utility ATVs that are primarily used for trail riding, hunting and farming; Sport ATVs that are high
performance, two-wheel drive machines used for racing and aggressive trail riding; Youth ATVs; and Side-by-Side
ATVs. Fox develops and sells shocks into the performance and racing sport, youth and side-by-side sub-segments
of the ATV market.
Similar to the snowmobile industry, OEMs will stimulate demand for new ATVs and entice customers to purchase
more premium priced ATVs by selecting Fox’s shocks for their premium models. Additionally, OEMs offer the
company’s shock absorbers as upgrades on less expensive models. Aftermarket sales are comprised of customers
seeking enhanced performance characteristics.
Motorcycles/Motocross - In 2011, the North American sales of motorcycles was $4.5 billion according to
management estimates. The motorcycle market consists of all classes of on-road and off-road motorcycles. There
are three main categories: On-highway motorcycles that are primarily used on paved roads; Dual motorcycles that
are used for both on and off-road activities; and Off-highway motorcycles that are only certified for off-road use.
The Off-road category is further segmented into motocross, off-road which includes youth motocross and youth off-
road. Currently, OEM needs for suspension products are largely filled by captive suppliers in this category. As
such, Fox has focused on the Aftermarket performance racing segments which is considerably smaller than entire
motorcycle market. Aftermarket sales are comprised of customers seeking enhanced performance characteristics.
Off-Road Vehicles– In 2011, the North American retail sales of specialty automotive products were $30 billion
according to the Specialty Equipment Market Association. Off-road vehicles can be divided into five segments:
off-road trucks, buggies, sand buggies, rock crawlers and lifted trucks. Consumers in the truck, buggy, sand buggy
and rock crawler categories range from serious racers and enthusiasts to individuals involved primarily in
recreational activities. The lifted truck segment, which consists of vehicles that in many cases never leave the
highway, is divided generally by price point. Fox’s products target the high-end price point for each of these five
segments. Off-road vehicles are generally customized vehicles with Aftermarket components unlike OEM vehicles
although some OEM manufacturers are offering limited edition vehicles. Fox primarily sells to Aftermarket
consumers seeking increased performance characteristics but has begun some limited sales to OEM manufacturers.
FOX also provides suspension to the U.S. Government either directly or through tier one manufacturers.
Products and Services
Fox designs and manufactures suspension products that dissipate the energy and force generated by various ride
sport activities. A suspension product allows wheels to move up and down to absorb bumps and shocks while
keeping the tires in contact with the ground for better control. Fox’s products use adjustable suspension, progressive
spring rates, and low weight combined with structural rigidity. Fox suspension products improve user control for
greater performance while maximizing comfort levels.
51
Each suspension product built at Fox’s manufacturing facilities is assembled according to precise specifications at
multiple stages throughout the assembly process to ensure consistently high performance levels and customer
satisfaction. Finished parts are built in multiple assembly cells and on an assembly line using precise tooling to
ensure manufacturing consistency and product functionality. Fox has developed a number of highly sophisticated
assembly machines to ensure consistent high quality.
Competitive Strengths
Proprietary Engineering Expertise – Fox maintains a broad base of technical innovation and design that has been
developed over the past 38 years. Fox’s technical expertise enables the development and production of some of the
most advanced suspension products available in the market. With its history of innovation and design, Fox has
created a deep portfolio of key intellectual property related to suspension technology and applications.
Highly Recognizable Brand – Driven by a long history of innovation, Fox has created a highly respected and well-
known brand for advanced suspension products. A product branded with the FOX logo represents the highest level
of technical performance for enthusiasts and professionals who require suspension systems capable of handling
demanding conditions. The FOX logo is prominently displayed on all of Fox’s products and provides a halo effect
for complementary products.
Strong Blue-Chip Customer Relationships – Given the long history of performance for Fox’s suspension products,
OEM customers seeking the highest level of quality and technical features for suspension have developed strong
long-term relationships with the company.
Business Strategies
Expand Revenues from Powered Vehicles Business – Fox’s focus on developing premier suspension technologies
continues to create complementary opportunities across this segment.
Continue to Expand Aftermarket Sales – The sale of Aftermarket parts typically carries higher gross margins than
a similar OEM sale. Fox is further investing in its Aftermarket sales infrastructure to foster sales growth in 2013 and
beyond. One of the simplest and most effective ways for customers to improve their performance is the purchase
and installation of an aftermarket Fox suspension product when compared to the expense of purchasing an entirely
new platform.
International Growth – Due to the successful efforts of Fox’s operations teams, distribution to foreign OEMs and
distributors is well-established. By selectively increasing infrastructure and honing its focus on identified
opportunities, Fox plans to continue its international sales growth. Further, management plans include investigation
of other international market opportunities, such as Asian and South American markets. International sales
aggregated $149.6 million, $129.9 million and $113.6 million in fiscal 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.
Pursue New Market Trends and Opportunities – New trends in action sports can lead to significant market
opportunities. Fox’s close association with racing and its professionals allows it to see new trends as they emerge.
Depending on the trend, Fox will develop new products that address these needs.
Fox established a manufacturing operation in Taiwan during 2012 and intends to capitalize on new opportunities in
Taiwan, as many of Fox’s customers are in Asia.
Research and Development
We believe Fox’s products are among the most technically advanced and rigorously engineered in their markets.
They are specifically designed to function and perform under diverse and extreme conditions. Fox’s research and
development effort is at the core of its strategy of product innovation and market leadership. Fox’s products feature
a combination of innovative design, high-quality materials, and superb functionality and are recognized as being the
leaders or among the leaders in all of the market segments in which they participate.
52
Fox has a robust core research and development team, which has a significant amount of industry experience. In
addition to the core engineering group, a large number of other Fox staff members, who also use the company’s
products, contribute to the research and development effort at various stages. This may take the form of initial
brainstorming sessions or ride testing products in development. Product development also includes collaborating
with customers, field testing by sponsored race teams and working with grass roots riders. This feedback helps
ensure products will meet the company’s demanding standards of excellence as well as the constantly changing
needs of professional and recreational end users.
Fox’s research and development activities are supported by state-of-the-art engineering software design tools,
integrated manufacturing facilities and a performance testing center equipped to ensure product safety, durability
and superior performance. The testing center collects data and tests products prior to and after commercial
introduction. Suspension products undergo a variety of rigorous performance and accelerated life tests. The
research and development portion of our total engineering costs totaled $5.7 million, $5.1 million and $4.2 million
in each of the years 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.
Customers
Fox’s reputation for product quality, durability and technical excellence has resulted in a customer base that
includes some of the world’s leading OEMs and a loyal following of knowledgeable and experienced end users.
Fox’s OEM customers are market leaders in their respective categories, and help define, as well as respond to,
consumer trends in their respective industries. These customers provide exceptional market support for Fox by
including the company’s products on their highest-performing models. OEMs will often use Fox’s components to
improve the marketability and demand of their own products.
Fox sells to over 175 OEM customers and over 7,800 Aftermarket customers across its market segments. One
customer accounted for approximately 7.0%, 8.1% and 11.0% of net sales for the years ended December 31, 2012,
2011 and 2010, respectively. Fox’s top 10 customers accounted for approximately 51.1%, 51.6% and 53.2% of net
sales in 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively. International sales totaled $149.6 million, $129.9 million and $113.6
million in each of the years 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively. Sales attributable to countries outside the United
States are based on shipment location. The international sales amounts provided do not necessarily reflect the end
customer location as many of our products are assembled at international locations with the ultimate customer
located in the United States.
Sales and Marketing
Fox employs a number of dedicated sales professionals. Each sales person is fully dedicated to servicing either
OEM or Aftermarket customers ensuring that Fox’s customers receive only the most capable person to address their
unique needs. Fox strongly believes that providing the best service to its end customers is essential in maintaining
its reputational excellence in the marketplace. The sales force receives training on the latest Fox products and
technologies in addition to attending trade shows to increase its market knowledge.
The primary goal of the marketing program is to strengthen and promote the FOX brand in the marketplace. Fox
increases brand awareness and equity with through a number of marketing channels including: advertisements in
publications and websites; team and individual sponsorships; support and promotion at outdoor events; trade shows;
website development; and dealer support.
Fox’s business is somewhat seasonal. Historically, net sales and earnings are highest during the third quarter. We
believe this seasonality is due to delivery of new products containing our shocks related to the new bike season.
Fox had approximately $43.0 million and $37.0 million in firm backlog orders at December 31, 2012 and 2011,
respectively.
Competition
Competition in the high-end performance segment of the suspension market revolves around technical features,
performance and durability, customer service, price and reliable order execution. While price is a factor in all
53
purchasing decisions, we believe customers consider Fox’s products to be an outstanding value proposition given
their significant performance and other attributes.
Fox competes with several large suspension providers as well as numerous small manufacturers who provide
branded and unbranded products. These competitors can be segmented into the following categories:
Mountain Biking – Fox competes with several companies that manufacture front and rear mountain bike
suspension products. Management believes these include RockShox (a subsidiary of SRAM Corporation), Tenneco
Marzocchi S.r.l. (a subsidiary of Tenneco Inc.), Manitou (a subsidiary of HB Performance Systems), SR Suntour
and DT Swiss (a subsidiary of Vereinigte Drahtwerke AG).
Snowmobiles – Within the snowmobile market, Management believes its main competitor is KYB (Kayaba
Industry Co., Ltd.). Other suppliers include Öhlins Racing AB, Walker Evans Racing, Works Performance
Products and Penske Racing Shocks / Custom Axis, Inc.
All-Terrain Vehicles – A large percentage of the shocks supplied to OEM ATV manufacturers are the result of
either long-term supplier relationships or captive business units associated with a specific OEM. Alternatively, ATV
manufacturers source suspensions from a variety of suspension manufacturers depending on the final application
and performance requirements.
Fox’s management believes its primary competitor outside of captive OEM suppliers is ZF Sachs (ZF
Friedrichshafen AG) and Walker Evans Racing. Aftermarket shocks are available from large OEMs plus a number
of primarily Aftermarket suppliers including Elka Suspension Inc., Öhlins Racing AB, Works Performance
Products and Penske Racing Shocks / Custom Axis, Inc.
Off-Road Vehicles – Within the off-road vehicle category, Fox competes with both branded and unbranded
competitors. The two largest competitors to Fox in management’s opinion are ThyssenKrupp Bilstein Suspension
GmbH (“Bilstein”) and King Shock Technology, Inc. (“King Shock”). Other competitors include Icon Vehicle
Dynamics, Sway-A-Way, Pro Comp Suspension and Rancho (Tenneco).
Suppliers
Fox works closely with its supply base, and depends upon certain suppliers to provide raw inputs, such as forgings
and castings and molded polymers that have been optimized for weight, structural integrity, wear and cost. Fox
typically has no firm contractual sourcing agreements with these suppliers other than purchase orders.
Depending on component requirements, raw material inputs go through a combination of machining processes
including computer numeric control machines, drill stations and lathes. Fox utilizes manufacturing models and
workflow analysis tools to minimize bottlenecks and maximize capital asset utilization. After initial machining,
components are then outsourced to specialized manufacturers for plating, grinding, anodizing and honing.
Fox’s primary raw materials used in production are aluminum and magnesium. Fox uses multiple suppliers for these
raw materials and believes that these raw materials are in adequate supply and are available from many suppliers at
competitive prices. Prices for these materials have been increasing but the company is implementing sourcing
strategies and value engineering initiatives to offset them.
Intellectual Property
Fox relies upon a combination of patents, trademarks, trade names, licensing arrangements, trade secrets, know-how
and proprietary technology in order to secure and protect its intellectual property rights.
Fox’s in-house intellectual property department and in-house counsel diligently protect its new technologies with
patents and trademarks and vigorously defend against patent infringement lawsuits. Fox currently owns 31 patents
on proprietary technologies for shock absorbers and front fork suspension products and has an additional 78 patent
pending applications at the U.S. and European Patent Offices. Fox’s patent portfolio makes it an impediment to
competitors to introduce products with comparable features.
54
Regulatory Environment
Fox’s manufacturing and assembly operations, its facilities and operations are subject to evolving federal, state and
local environmental and occupational health and safety laws and regulations. These include laws and regulations
governing air emissions, wastewater discharge and the storage and handling of chemicals and hazardous substances.
Management believes that Fox is in compliance, in all material respects, with applicable environmental and
occupational health and safety laws and regulations. New requirements, more stringent application of existing
requirements, or discovery of previously unknown environmental conditions could result in material environmental
expenditures in the future.
Additionally, Fox is subject to the jurisdiction of the United States Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC)
and other federal, state and foreign regulatory bodies. Under CPSC regulations, a manufacturer of consumer goods
is obligated to notify the CPSC, if, among other things, the manufacturer becomes aware that one of its products has
a defect that could create a substantial risk of injury. If the manufacturer has not already undertaken to do so, the
CPSC may require a manufacturer to recall a product, which may involve product repair, replacement or refund.
Fox has never had any of its products recalled.
Employees
As of December 31, 2012, Fox employed approximately 534 persons. None of Fox’s employees are subject to
collective bargaining agreements. We believe that Fox’s relationship with its employees is good.
Liberty Safe
Overview
Liberty Safe, headquartered in Payson, Utah and founded in 1988, is the premier designer, manufacturer and
marketer of home, gun and office safes in North America. From its over 204,000 square foot manufacturing facility,
Liberty Safe produces a wide range of home, office and gun safe models in a broad assortment of sizes, features and
styles ranging from an entry level product to good, better and best products. Products are marketed under the
Liberty Safe brand, as well as a portfolio of licensed and private label brands, including Remington, Cabela’s and
John Deere. Liberty Safe’s products are the market share leader and are sold through an independent dealer network
(“Dealer sales”) in addition to various sporting goods and home improvement retail outlets (“Non-Dealer sales” or
“National sales”). Liberty Safe has the largest independent dealer network in the industry.
Approximately 60% of Liberty Safe’s sales are Non-Dealer sales and 40% are Dealer sales.
For the fiscal years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, Liberty Safe had net sales of approximately $91.6
million, $82.2 million and $49.0 million (from its acquisition date), respectively, and operating income of $6.0
million, $4.3 million in the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 respectively, and an operating loss of $0.8
million in 2010. Liberty Safe had total assets of $82.4 million, $85.9 million and $83.3 million at December 31,
2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively. Net sales from Liberty Safe represented 10.4%, 13.6% and 9.7% of our
consolidated net sales for the year ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010 (from acquisition date), respectively.
History of Liberty Safe
The Liberty Safe brand and its leading market share has been built over a 24 year history of superior product
quality, engineering and design innovation, and leading customer service and sales support. Liberty Safe has a long
history of continuous improvement and innovative approaches to sales and marketing, product development and
manufacturing processes. Significant investments over the last five years have solidified Liberty Safe’s reputation
for providing substantial value to retailers and enhanced its long-standing position as the leading producer of
premium home, office and gun safes.
55
Liberty Safe started operations in 1988 and throughout 1991 and 1992, increased its distribution capabilities,
establishing a regional sales force model to better serve the Dealer channel. This expanded sales coverage gave
Liberty Safe the needed organizational structure to provide ready support and products nationwide, helping to
establish its reputation for service to its customers. On the strength of its growing reputation and national sales
presence, Liberty Safe achieved the status of the #1 selling safe company in America in 1994, according to Sargent
and Greenleaf data, the major lock supplier to the industry, a position that it has maintained to this day. In 2001,
Liberty Safe opened its current 204,000 square foot state-of-the-art facility in Payson, UT and consolidated all of its
manufacturing and distribution operations to a centralized location. As the only facility in the industry utilizing
significant automation and a streamlined roll-form manufacturing process, it represented a significant step forward
when compared to the production capabilities of its competitors. Incremental investments following the
consolidation have solidified Liberty Safe’s position as the pre-eminent low-cost and most efficient domestic
manufacturer.
Beginning in 2007, Liberty Safe reorganized its manufacturing process, retooled its product line for increased
standardization throughout the production process and realigned employee incentives to increase labor efficiency.
These improvements enabled Liberty Safe to shift from build-to-stock production to build-to-order with shorter lead
time requirements, greater labor efficiency and reduced working capital.
During 2011 Liberty Safe constructed a new production line that has allowed Liberty to build entry level safe
products in- house. This product was previously sourced from an Asian manufacturer. The production line began
operations in February 2012 and Liberty is currently manufacturing two different models of safes on this line which
translates into five new SKUs. Liberty invested over $9.0 million to build the line. This investment in production
capacity now makes Liberty Safe the largest manufacturer of home, office and gun safes in the world. This added
investment in capacity in the U.S. will allow Liberty Safe to provide shorter lead times and competitive pricing to
its North American customer base. This will allow Liberty safe to capture additional market share, growing its
revenue base and adding more margin dollars to the bottom line. In addition, Liberty Safe will be able to reduce its
investment in inventory by no longer having to rely upon long lead times and the inaccuracies of forecasting.
We purchased a majority interest in Liberty Safe on March 31, 2010.
Industry
Liberty Safe competes in the broadly defined North American safe industry which includes fire and document safes,
media and data safes, depository safes, gun safes and cabinets, home safes and hotel safes. According to Global
Industry Analysts, (“GIA”) March 2008 report, the global safe industry was estimated to be approximately $2.9
billion of wholesale sales in 2008, and grew consistently at an estimated CAGR of 4.3% from 2000 to 2009.
Consistent growth has been one of the defining characteristics of this industry, and GIA anticipates it will continue
at a rate of 4.4% from 2009 through 2015.
Products & Services
Liberty Safe offers home, office and gun safes with minimum retail prices ranging from $400 to $8,000.
Liberty Safe produces 39 home and gun safe models with the most varied assortment of sizes, feature upgrades,
accessories and styling options in the industry. Liberty Safe’s premium home and gun safe product line covers sizes
from 12 cu. ft. to 50 cu. ft. with smaller sizes available for its personal home safe. Liberty Safe markets its products
under Company-owned brands and a portfolio of licensed and private label brands, including Remington, Cabela’s,
John Deere and others. Liberty Safe also sells commercial safes, vault doors and a number of accessories and
options. The overwhelming majority of revenue is derived from the sales of safes.
Competitive Strengths
#1 Premium Home and Gun Safe Brand with Strong Momentum in the Market - Liberty Safe achieved the status
of #1 selling safe company in America in 1994 (per statistics provided by Sargent & Greenleaf, the primary lock
supplier to the industry) and maintains this prominent position today. The market for premium home and gun safes
56
is highly fragmented, and management estimates that Liberty Safe’s net sales are over twice those of its next largest
competitor in the category. Liberty Safe continues to gain market share from the various smaller participants who
lack the distribution and sales and marketing capabilities of Liberty Safe.
State-of-the-Art and Scalable Operations - Over the past five years, management has constructed a highly scalable
operational platform and infrastructure that has positioned Liberty Safe for substantial sales growth and enhanced
profitability in the coming years. Under current ownership, the company has transitioned itself from a
manufacturing oriented operating culture to a demand-based, sales-oriented organization. The company’s strategic
transition required the implementation of a demand-based sales and operating platform, which included (i) new
equipment to drive automation and capacity improvements; (ii) reengineered product lines and production processes
to drive efficiency through greater standardization in production; and (iii) new employee incentives tied to labor
efficiency, which has improved worker performance as well as employee attitude. These initiatives are enhanced by
an experienced senior executive team, a balanced sourcing and in-house manufacturing production strategy,
advanced distribution capabilities and sophisticated IT systems. Liberty has combined its demand-based sales and
operating initiatives with upgraded production equipment to drive multiple operational improvements. Since 2007,
the company has reduced its lead times from 4 – 6 weeks to approximately seven days. These shorter production
cycles coupled with better demand forecasting have significantly reduced working capital needs for the business by
reducing domestic inventory from approximately 7,000 units to 3,000 units since 2007. Improved automation and
workflow organization have decreased labor hours over 20% per safe from 8.3 in 2005 to 6.3 in 2012 for rolled steel
safes. These recent initiatives combined with the company’s cumulative historical investments in operational
capabilities have created a lasting competitive advantage over its smaller competitors, who utilize labor-intensive
operations and lack the company’s lean manufacturing culture.
Historically, Liberty Safe maintained an optimal mix of in-house and Asian-sourced manufacturing in order to
improve its ability to meet customer inventory needs. Beginning in 2012 Liberty Safe began manufacturing entry
level safes that were previously sourced from an Asian manufacturer, on its new production line. As a result, over
90% of Liberty Safe products will now be made in the U.S. The average labor hours per entry level safe on this
new production line is two hours. The increased capacity also positions Liberty Safe to grow its revenue base by
more than was otherwise possible and profit from the product produced when compared to the all-in cost of the
Asian sourced product.
The company has leased for the past ten years a manufacturing and distribution facility in Payson, Utah that
represents the most scalable domestic facility in the industry. The company’s multi-faceted production capabilities
allow for substantial flexibility and scalable capacity, thus assuring a level of supply chain execution far superior to
any of its competitors.
Reputation for High Quality Products - Liberty Safe is passionate about offering only the highest quality products
on a consistent basis, which over the years has gained it an enviable reputation and a key point of differentiation
from its competitors. Liberty Safe distinguishes its products through tested security and fire protection features and
industry leading design focused on functionality and aesthetics. The design of its safes meet rigorous internal
benchmarks for security and fire protection, with most receiving certification from Underwriters Laboratory, Inc.
(“UL”), the leading product safety standard certification, for its security capabilities. Additionally, Liberty Safe’s
investment in accessories and feature options have made Liberty safes the most visually appealing and functional in
the industry, while providing more customized solutions for retailers and consumers.
Trusted Supplier to National Retailer and Dealer Accounts - Liberty Safe's comprehensive, high-quality product
offering and sophisticated sales and marketing programs have made it a critical supplier to a diverse group of
national accounts and dealers. Initially a key supplier primarily to the dealer channel, it has expanded its business
with national accounts, such as Gander Mountain, Cabela’s and Lowe’s. Liberty Safe provides a superior value
proposition as a supplier for its national retailers and dealers via its well-recognized brands, lifetime product
warranty, tailored merchandising, category management solutions and superior supply chain execution. Further,
Liberty Safe’s products generate more profitable floor-space, with both high absolute gross profit and retail margins
over 30%. High retail profitability plus increased inventory turns has entrenched Liberty Safe as a key partner in
customers’ success in the safe category. As a core element of building its relationships, Liberty Safe has invested
significantly in making its retailers better salespeople through a proprietary suite of training tools, including in-store
training, new product demonstrations, online education programs and sales strategy literature.
57
Business Strategies
Liberty has experienced strong historical growth while executing on multiple new sales and operational initiatives,
positioning it to continue to increase its scale and improve profitability. Liberty’s growth strategy is rooted in the
sales and marketing and operational initiatives that have spurred its expansion into new accounts and increased
penetration of existing accounts. Liberty has significant opportunity in its existing channels to continue to build
upon its already strong market share. In addition to growth within its current channels, Liberty’s core competencies
can be successfully applied to ventures in the broader security equipment market. Liberty has explored certain of
these opportunities, but due to the prioritization of operational initiatives and expansion opportunities within
existing channels, they have not been aggressively pursued. Potential near-to-medium term areas for expansion of
Liberty’s platform include:
(cid:120) Expand Liberty’s product line into the broader home and office safe market through current customers or
new distribution strategies;
(cid:120) Enter the military secure enclosures market;
(cid:120) Further develop international distribution by entering new countries and expanding current limited
presence in Canada, Mexico and Europe;
(cid:120) Enter the residential security market through a strategic partnership with a provider of residential security
service solutions to provide a more complete physical and electronic security solution; and
(cid:120) Acquire businesses within the premium home and gun safe industry and/or leverage Liberty’s platform into
new products or channels
(cid:120) Offer additional accessory products to existing distribution networks
Customers
Liberty Safe prides itself on its ability to provide high-quality, innovative products and industry-leading customer
service. As a result, it has fostered long-term relationships with leading national retailers (National or Non-Dealer)
as well as numerous Dealers, enabling Liberty Safe to achieve considerable brand awareness and channel exposure.
Traditionally, the Dealer channel has accounted for the majority of the Liberty Safe’s net sales, but through
significant investment in its national accounts sales and marketing efforts, Liberty Safe has also become the leading
supplier to National accounts. Expansion into National accounts is part of Liberty Safe’s strategy to reach a broader
customer base and more varied demographics. National account customers include sporting goods retailers, farm &
fleet retailers, home improvement retailers and club retailers. As of December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, Liberty
Safe had 16, 16 and 22 National account customers, respectively, that are estimated to have accounted for
approximately 57% of net sales.
Dealer customers include local hunting and fishing stores, hardware stores and numerous other local, independent
store models. As of December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, there were 343, 325 and 322 Dealers that accounted for
43%, 39% and 38% of net sales, respectively.
Cabela’s, Liberty Safe’s largest customer accounted for approximately 15.0%, 13.2% and 15.2% of net sales in
2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.
Sales & Marketing
Liberty Safe possesses robust sales and marketing capabilities in the safe industry. Liberty Safe utilizes separate
sales teams for National accounts and Dealers, which enables it to provide more focused and effective strategies to
manage and develop relationships within different channels. Liberty Safe has made significant recent investments in
the development of a comprehensive sales and marketing program including merchandising, sales training and
tools, promotions and supply chain management. Through these various initiatives, Liberty Safe offers highly
adaptable programs to suit the varying needs of its retailers. This has enabled Liberty Safe to become a key supplier
across diverse channels. Liberty Safe began advertising nationally on the Glen Beck show in the second half of
2010. This advertising has been highly successful and Liberty has continued this advertising in 2011 and 2012.
58
Liberty Safe’s comprehensive service offering makes it uniquely suited to service national retailers in a variety of
channels. Liberty Safe has designed a Store-within-a-Store program and a more comprehensive Safe Category
Management program to build relationships and increase its importance to retailers. Primarily utilized with sporting
goods retailers, the Store-within-a-Store concept successfully integrates the effective sales strategies of its dealers
for selling a high-price point, niche product into a larger store format. Centered on communicating the benefits of its
products to customers, the program enables retailers to more effectively up-sell customers through a good-better-
best merchandising platform, increasing margin and inventory turns for its retailers. Liberty’s Safe Category
Management program builds on the Store-within-a-Store concept to provide greater sales and marketing control and
more complete inventory management solutions. This program facilitates Liberty Safe becoming the sole supplier to
retailers, providing large incremental expansion and stronger relationships at accounts. No other market participant
has the capabilities to provide a comprehensive suite of customer service solutions to national retailers, such as
customized SKU programs, a Store-within-a-Store program and a Safe Category Management program.
Competition
Liberty Safe is the premier brand in the premium home and gun safe industry, with an estimated 34% market share
in the category, two times the next competitor. Liberty is in a class by itself when it comes to manufacturing
technology and efficiency and supply chain capabilities. Competitors are generally more heavily focused on either
smaller, sourced safes or large, domestically produced safes. Competitive domestic manufacturers run “blacksmith”
type factories that are small, inefficient and require a tremendous amount of manual labor that produces inconsistent
product. In addition, many of Liberty’s competitors are directly tied to a third-party brand, such as Browning,
Winchester or RedHead / Bass Pro.
Liberty competes with other safe manufacturers based on price, breadth of product line, technology, product supply
chain capabilities and marketing capabilities.
Channel diversity in the premium home and gun safe industry is rare, with most companies having greater
concentration in either the dealer channel or national accounts, but rarely having the supply chain capabilities or
sales and marketing programs to service both channels effectively. Major competitors have limited sales and
marketing departments and programs, making it difficult for them to expand sales and gain market share.
Suppliers
Liberty’s primary raw materials are steel, sheetrock, wood, locks, handles and fabric, for which it receives multiple
shipments per week. Materials, on average, account for approximately 65% of the total cost of a domestically
produced safe, with steel accounting for approximately 55% of material costs. Liberty purchases its materials from a
combination of domestic and foreign suppliers. Historically, Liberty Safe has been able to pass on raw material
price increases to its customers.
Liberty purchased over 29 million pounds of steel in 2012 primarily from domestic suppliers, using contracts that
lock in prices two to three quarters in advance. Liberty Safe purchases coiled and flat steel in gauges from four to
14. Liberty Safe specifies rigorous requirements related to surface and edge finish and grain direction. All steel
products are checked to ASTM specification and dimensional tolerances before entering the production process.
Liberty Safe had approximately $13.2 million and $8.1 million in firm backlog orders at December 31, 2012 and
2011, respectively.
Intellectual Property
Liberty Safe relies upon a combination of patents and trademarks in order to secure and protect its intellectual
property rights.
Liberty Safe currently owns 25 trademarks and 2 patents on proprietary technologies for safe products.
59
Research and Development
Liberty’s approach to R&D and innovation drives customer satisfaction and differentiation from competitive
products. Liberty is the engineering and design leader in its sector, due to a history of first-to-market features and
standard-setting design improvements. The Company’s proactive solicitation of feedback and constant interaction
with consumers and retail customers across diverse channels and geographies enables the Company to stay at the
forefront of customer demands. The Company’s approach to product development increases the likelihood of
market acceptance by creating products that are more relevant to consumers’ demands. Research and development
costs were $0.8 million, $0.7 million and $0.1 million in 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.
The below charts represents some of the recent innovations in product design (and functionality) that have come
about from the Company’s dedication to R&D:
Product
Function / benefit
Cool Pocket™
Integrated lighting system
Palusol™ Heat activated door
Liberty Tough Doors™
Marble gloss powder coat paint
4-in-1 Flex™ storage system
Door panels
Keeps documents 50% cooler than rest of safe
Automatic on/off interior lights
Seal expands to 7 times its size in a fire
Enhanced protection against side bolt prying
Provides smooth glass finish
Adjustable shelving configurations
Pocket variety to store handguns and other items
In addition to product enhancements, new products, such as the Fatboy® Series, have been launched from Liberty’s
commitment to R&D.
Based on consumer feedback, Liberty saw demand for safes that were capable of holding more valuables within the
safe but at a lower price point than Liberty’s current large safe models. Within 3 months of conception, the
Company introduced the successful Fatboy® series in February 2010. The Fatboy® and Fatboy Jr.® models, which
are wider and deeper than traditional safes, were a natural complement to Liberty’s current products, targeted at a
specific customer need. The introduction and success of the Fatboy® series demonstrates Liberty’s proven ability
to recognize market opportunities, engineer a responsive product and execute market delivery. Beginning in 2012
Liberty Safe will introduce five new SKUs, manufactured on its new production line, with a unique locking system
to service the entry level safe market.
Regulatory Environment
Liberty Safes’ management believes that Liberty Safe is in compliance, in all material respects, with applicable
environmental and occupational health and safety laws and regulations.
Employees
Liberty Safe is led by a highly knowledgeable management team of sporting goods and consumer products industry
veterans that possess a balanced combination of industry experience and functional expertise. The majority of the
team members have worked together since 2000.
As of December 31, 2012, Liberty Safe had 342 full-time employees and 113 temporary employees. The
Company’s labor force is non-union. Management believes that Liberty Safe has an excellent relationship with its
employees.
60
Tridien
Overview
Tridien, headquartered in Coral Springs, Florida, is a leading designer and manufacturer of powered and non-
powered medical therapeutic support surfaces and patient positioning devices serving the acute care, long-term care
and home health care markets. Tridien is one of the nation’s leading designers and manufacturers of specialty
therapeutic support surfaces with manufacturing operations in multiple locations to better serve a national customer
base.
Tridien, together with its subsidiary companies, provides customers the opportunity to source leading surface
technologies from the designer and manufacturer.
Tridien develops products both independently and in partnership with large distribution intermediaries. Medical
distribution companies then sell or rent the therapeutic support surfaces, sometimes in conjunction with bed frames
and accessories to one of three end markets: (i) acute care, (ii) long term care and (iii) home health care. The level
of sophistication largely varies for each product, as some patients require simple foam mattresses (“non-powered”
support surfaces) while others may require electronically controlled, low air loss, lateral rotation, pulmonary
therapy or alternating pressure surfaces (“powered” support surfaces). The design, engineering and manufacturing
of all products are completed in-house (with the exception of a select group of products, which are manufactured in
Taiwan) and are FDA compliant.
For the fiscal years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, Tridien had net sales of approximately $55.9
million, $55.9 million and $61.1 million, and operating income of $3.7 million, $5.0 million and $8.0 million,
respectively. Tridien had total assets of $44.5 million, $42.8 million and $44.2 million at December 31, 2012, 2011
and 2010, respectively. Net sales from Tridien represented 6.3%, 9.2% and 12.1% of our consolidated net sales for
fiscal years 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.
History
Tridien was initially formed in February 2006 by CGI and Hollywood Capital, Inc., a private investment
management firm led by Tridien’s former Chief Executive Officer, to acquire AMF and SenTech, located in
Corona, CA and Coral Springs, FL, respectively. AMF Support Surfaces, Inc. is a leading manufacturer of non-
powered mattress systems, seating cushions and patient positioning devices. SenTech is a leading designer and
manufacturer of advanced electronically controlled, powered, alternating pressure, pulmonary therapy, low air loss
and lateral rotation specialty support surfaces for the wound care industry. Prior to its acquisition, SenTech had
established a premium brand as a result of its proprietary technologies, in the less price sensitive therapeutic market
while AMF competed primarily in the preventive care market.
On October 5, 2006, Tridien acquired the patient positioning device business of Anatomic Concepts. The acquired
operations were merged into Tridien’s operations. Anatomic is a leading supplier of operating suite patient
positioning devices and support surfaces focused on the price sensitive long term care and home healthcare markets.
On June 27, 2007, Tridien purchased PrimaTech, a lower price-point distributor of powered medical support
surfaces to the long term care and home healthcare markets. PrimaTech’s products are predominately designed in
the U.S. and manufactured pursuant to an exclusive manufacturing agreement with an FDA registered
manufacturing partner located in Taiwan.
In October 2009, Tridien and Hollywood Capital, Inc. terminated their management services agreement which
provided for, among other things, two principals of Hollywood Capital, Inc., resigning from their roles of Chief
Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer of Tridien. Upon termination of the agreement, Tridien appointed a
new Chief Executive Officer and a new Chief Financial Officer.
We purchased a controlling interest in Tridien from CGI on August 1, 2006.
61
Industry
The medical support surfaces industry is fragmented and comprised of many small participants and niche
manufacturers. Tridien’s consolidation platform allows customers to source all leading support surface technologies
for the acute care, long term care and home health care from a single source. Tridien is a vertically integrated
company with engineering, design and research, manufacturing and support performed in house to quickly bring
new, innovative products and technologies to market while maintaining high quality standards in its manufacturing
process.
Immobility caused by injury, old age, chronic illness or obesity is the main cause for the development of pressure
ulcers. In these cases, the person lying in the same position for a long period of time puts pressure on the bony
prominence of the body surface. This pressure, if continued for a sustained period, can close blood capillaries that
provide oxygen and nutrition to the skin. Over a period of time, these cells deprived of oxygen, begin to break
down and form sores. In addition to constant or excessive pressure, other contributing factors to the development of
pressure ulcers include heat, moisture, friction and sheer, or pull on the skin due to the underlying fabric.
The prevalence rate of pressure ulcers in acute care facilities has been seen as high as 34%, with costs of treatment
as high as $70,000 per ulcer, causing an estimated burden of an additional 22 million Medicare hospital days.
Further it has been reported that another 2% to 28% of all nursing home patients suffer from pressure ulcers. We
believe that providing the right therapeutic support surfaces is a necessary intervention for these ulcers.
Management believes the need for medical support surfaces will continue to grow due to several favorable
demographic and industry trends including the increasing incidence of obesity in the United States, increasing life
expectancies and an increasing emphasis on prevention of pressure ulcers by hospitals and long term care facilities.
According to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, between the years 1980 and 2000, obesity rates more
than doubled among adults in the United States. Studies have shown that this increase in obesity has been a key
factor in rising medical costs over the last 15 years. According to one study done at Emory University, increases in
obesity rates have accounted for 27% of the increase in health care spending between 1987 and 2001. As an
individual’s weight increases, so too does the probability that the individual will become immobile and, according
to studies performed at the University of North Carolina, greater than 40% of obese adults aged 54 to 73 were at
least partially immobile. As individuals become less mobile, they are more likely to require either preventative
mattresses to better disperse weight and reduce pressure areas or therapeutic mattresses to shift weight and pressure.
Similar to how obesity increases the occurrence of immobility, so too does an aging society. As life expectancy
expands in the U.S. due to improved health care and nutrition, so too does the probability that an individual will be
immobile for a portion of their lives. In addition, as individual’s age, skin becomes more susceptible to breakdown
increasing the likelihood of developing pressure ulcers.
Beyond favorable demographic trends, Tridien’s management believes healthcare institutions are placing an
increased emphasis on the prevention of pressure ulcers. According to Medicare guidelines, hospitals are no longer
able to be reimbursed for the treatment of in-house acquired wounds, resulting in continued focus by hospitals in
preventing and treating such wounds. The end result is that if an at-risk patient develops pressure ulcers while at
the hospital; the hospital is required to bear the cost of healing. As a result of increasing litigation and the high cost
of healing pressures ulcers, healthcare institutions are now focusing on using pressure relief equipment to reduce the
incidence of in-house acquired pressure ulcers.
Products and Services
Specialty beds, mattress replacements and mattress overlays (i.e. therapeutic surfaces) are the primary products
currently available for pressure relief and pressure reduction to treat and prevent decubitus ulcers. The market for
specialty beds and therapeutic surfaces include the acute care centers, long-term care centers, nursing home centers
and home healthcare settings. Medical therapeutic surfaces are designed to have preventative and/or therapeutic
uses. The basic product categories are as follows:
(cid:120) Powered Support Surfaces: Mattresses which can be used for therapy or prevention and are typically
manufactured using an electronic power source with air cylinders or a combination of air cylinders and foam
and provide Alternating Pressure, Low Air Loss, or Lateral Rotation. Alternating Pressure Systems are
62
designed to inflate alternate cylinders while contiguous cylinders deflate in an alternating pattern. The
alternating inflation and deflation prevents sustained pressure on an area of skin by shifting pressure from
one area to another. This type of therapy provides movement under the patient’s skin to eliminate both
excessive and constant pressure, the leading cause of pressure ulcers. The powered control unit provides
automatic changes in the distribution of air pressure. Tridien’s Alternating Pressure Systems in the SenTech
line incorporate its intellectual property in the way these automatic changes take place. This patented
technology allows for a more comfortable surface with aggressive therapeutic alternating pressure. Another
typical type of powered surface is Lateral Rotation which can aid in laterally turning a patient to reduce risks
associated with fluid building up in a patient’s lungs. A feature often found in Powered Surfaces is Low Air
Loss that allows air to flow from the mattress to address the moisture and temperature environment on the
patient’s skin, contributing factors to pressure ulcers. Tridien currently produces patented designs for the
performance of both Alternating Pressure and Low Air Loss mattress systems which management believes
provides the optimum healing therapy for the patient. Powered support surfaces are typically used in acute
care settings and when more aggressive therapy is needed. Powered Support Surfaces represented
approximately 18.7% of net sales in 2012 and 19.6% of net sales in 2011 and 2010.
(cid:120) Non-Powered Support Surfaces: Consists of mattresses which have no powered elements. Their support
material can be composed of foam, air, water, gel or a combination of these. In the case of water, air or gel
materials, they are held in place with containment bladders. Non-powered mattress replacement systems
help redistribute a patient’s body weight to lessen forces on pressure points by envelopment into the surface.
These products address the excessive pressure under a patient, but do not address the constant pressure
applied to an area. Non-powered surfaces are generally used for prevention rather than treatment and
currently comprise the majority of support surfaces. Currently Tridien manufactures a broad range of non-
powered mattress systems using air, foam and gel. Non- powered support surfaces represented 53.6%, 53.1%
and 53.2% of net sales in each of the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.
(cid:120) Positioning devices: Positioning devices are used to position patients for procedures as well as to minimize
the likelihood of developing a pressure ulcer during those procedures. Tridien offers a complete range of
foam positioning devices. Patient positioning devices represented 27.7%, 27.3% and 25.6% of net sales in
each of the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.
Competition
The competition in the medical support surfaces market is based predominantly on product performance, features,
price and durability. Other factors may include the technological ability of a manufacturer to customize their
product offering to meet the needs of large distributors. Tridien competes with manufacturers of varying sizes who
then sell predominantly through distributors to the acute care, long term care and home health care markets.
Specific competitors include, Span America and other smaller competitors. Tridien differentiates itself from these
competitors based on its patented technologies, quality of the products it manufacturers as well as its design and
engineering capabilities to produce a full spectrum of surfaces that provide the greatest therapeutic outcome for
every price point. While many competitors specialize in the production of a single type of support surface, and
often outsource certain manufacturing as skills required to develop and manufacture products vary by materials
used, Tridien is able to offer its customers a full spectrum of support surfaces nationwide.
Span America Medical Systems (NASDAQ: SPAN): ($76 million in fiscal 2012 sales) Span America’s medical
division includes the sales of skin care products, bedside mats, and foam mattress overlays and replacement
mattresses, including the PressureGuard therapeutic mattress, Span-Aid patient positioners (used to elevate and
support body parts) and Dish pressure-relief seat cushions to aid wound healing. Span America reported that
approximately 30% of their revenue in 2012 was attributed to their therapeutic support surface segment. Span
America also supplies safety catheters and makes specialty packaging products for use in outdoor furniture.
Business Strategies
Tridien’s management is focused on strategies to grow revenues, improve operating efficiency and improving gross
margins. Of particular note, Tridien has completed four acquisitions since its inception and has achieved numerous
benefits to this consolidation within the support surfaces industry. The following is a discussion of these strategies:
63
Offer customers high quality, consistent product, on a national basis – Products produced by Tridien and its
competitors are typically bulky in nature and may not be conducive to shipping. Management believes that many of
its competitors do not have the scale or resources required to produce support surfaces for national distributors and
believes that customers value manufacturers with the scale and sophistication required to meet these needs. Tridien
offers its customers the highest standards of quality through its robust Quality Management Systems. All Tridien
facilities are ISO 13485 registered.
(cid:120) Leverage scale to provide industry leading research and development – Medical therapeutic surfaces are
becoming increasingly technologically advanced. Tridien’s management believes that many smaller
competitors do not have the resources required to effectively meet the changing needs of their customers and
believes that increased scale and investments in engineering and technology will allow it to better serve its
customers through industry leading research, technology and development.
(cid:120) Pursue cost savings through scale purchasing and operational improvements – Many of the products
used to manufacture medical support surfaces are standard in nature and management believes that increased
scale achieved through acquisitions will allow it to benefit from lower cost of materials and therefore lower
cost of sales.
Research and Development
Tridien develops surfaces both independently and in partnership with large distribution intermediaries. Initial steps
of product development are typically made independently. Larger distribution market participants will typically
require further product development testing to ensure mattress systems have the desired properties while smaller
distributors will tend to buy more standardized products, especially on the non-powered products. Tridien has
dedicated professionals, including individuals focused on process engineering, design engineering, and electrical
engineering, working on the development of the company’s next generation of therapeutic surfaces and is currently
investing in its future focus of advanced wound care technologies.
Tridien is working to develop the next generation of products in surfaces. The new product development process often
requires 2 to 6 months for prevention products and 12 to 24 months for treatment products, of research, engineering
and testing cooperation. Tridien will provide technical support and repair services for its products as well, a
differentiating characteristic valued by its customers. The expected increase in spending will allow Tridien to focus
on the next generation products. During the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, Tridien incurred $2.1
million, $1.8 million and $1.3 million, respectively, in research and development costs.
Sales and Marketing
Support surfaces are primarily sold through distributors, who either rent or sell to acute care (hospitals) facilities,
long term care facilities and home health care organizations. The acute care distribution market for support surfaces
is dominated by large suppliers such as Stryker Corporation and Hill-Rom Holdings Inc. Other national distributors
usually provide specific types of support surface technology. Beyond national distribution intermediaries there are
numerous smaller more regional distributors who will purchase support surfaces developed by Tridien as certain
brand lines are known in the market as providing proven therapy.
Tridien has developed a full range of support surface products that are sold or rented to healthcare distributors and
occasionally sold directly to the end customer. Tridien also provides technical support and repair services for its
products, an offering valued by all customers. While contracts with large distributors typically do not include
minimum purchase orders, agreements typically call for rolling forecasts of orders to be given at the end of each
month for the following three months.
Customers
During the fourth quarter of 2010 two of Tridien’s largest customers merged. The combined entity accounted for
33.4%, 38.2% and 39.1% of gross sales in 2012., 2011 and 2010, respectively. Another customer accounted for
26.0%, 25.2% and 24.0% of sales in 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively. Approximately 66.6%, 64.1% and 63.5%
64
of Tridien’s sales have been to its three largest customers in 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively. Tridien’s top ten
customers accounted for 79.7%, 84.5% and 82.8% of gross sales in 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.
Substantially all revenue is derived from sales within the United States.
Tridien had approximately $2.4 million and $1.6 million in firm backlog orders at December 31, 2012 and 2011,
respectively.
Suppliers
Tridien’s two primary raw materials used in manufacturing are polyurethane foam and fabric (primarily nylon and
polycarbonate fabrics). Among Tridien’s largest raw material suppliers are Foamex International, Inc., Dartex
Coatings, Inc. and Uretek, LLC. Tridien uses multiple suppliers for foam and fabric and believes that these raw
materials are in adequate supply and are available from many suppliers at competitive prices. We expect these costs,
particularly those related to polyurethane foam to increase during fiscal 2012 due to recent trends in related
commodity prices. Actions taken by manufacturers of petro-chemical commodities such as capacity reductions
could influence price changes from our supplier. The cost of raw materials as a percentage of sales was
approximately 48% of gross sales in fiscal 2012, 48% of gross sales in fiscal 2011 and 46% of gross sales in fiscal
2010.
Intellectual Property
Tridien has 12 patents issued, filed from 1996 to 2005, and has 12 filed and pending patents.
Regulatory Environment
The FDCA, and regulations issued or proposed there under, provide for regulation by the Food and Drug
Administration (FDA) of the marketing, manufacture, labeling, packaging and distribution of medical devices,
including Tridien’s products. These regulations require, among other things that medical device manufacturers
register with the FDA, list devices manufactured by them, and file various inspections by regulatory authorities and
must comply with good manufacturing practices as required by the FDA and state regulatory authorities. Tridien’s
management believes that the company is in substantial compliance with all applicable regulations.
Employees
As of December 31, 2012, Tridien employed 284 persons in all its locations together with 77 temporary employees.
None of Tridien’s employees are subject to collective bargaining agreements. We believe that Tridien’s relationship
with its employees is good.
65
ITEM 1A - RISK FACTORS
Risks Related to Our Business and Structure
We are a Company with limited history and may not be able to continue to successfully manage our businesses
on a combined basis.
We were formed on November 18, 2005 and have conducted operations since May 16, 2006. Although our
management team has extensive experience in acquiring and managing small and middle market businesses, our
failure to continue to develop and maintain effective systems and procedures, including accounting and financial
reporting systems, to manage our operations as a consolidated public company, may negatively impact our ability to
optimize the performance of our Company, which could adversely affect our ability to pay distributions to our
shareholders. In addition, in that case, our consolidated financial statements might not be indicative of our financial
condition, business and results of operations.
Our future success is dependent on the employees of our Manager and the management teams of our businesses,
the loss of any of whom could materially adversely affect our financial condition, business and results of
operations.
Our future success depends, to a significant extent, on the continued services of the employees of our Manager,
most of whom have worked together for a number of years. While our Manager will have employment agreements
with certain of its employees, including our Chief Financial Officer, these employment agreements may not prevent
our Manager’s employees from leaving or from competing with us in the future. Our Manager does not have an
employment agreement with our Chief Executive Officer.
The future success of our businesses also depends on their respective management teams because we operate our
businesses on a stand-alone basis, primarily relying on existing management teams for management of their day-to-
day operations. Consequently, their operational success, as well as the success of our internal growth strategy, will
be dependent on the continued efforts of the management teams of the businesses. We provide such persons with
equity incentives in their respective businesses and have employment agreements and/or non-competition
agreements with certain persons we have identified as key to their businesses. However, these measures may not
prevent the departure of these managers. The loss of services of one or more members of our management team or
the management team at one of our businesses could materially adversely affect our financial condition, business
and results of operations.
We face risks with respect to the evaluation and management of future platform or add-on acquisitions.
A component of our strategy is to continue to acquire additional platform subsidiaries, as well as add-on businesses
for our existing businesses. Generally, because such acquisition targets are held privately, we may experience
difficulty in evaluating potential target businesses as the information concerning these businesses is not publicly
available. In addition, we and our subsidiary companies may have difficulty effectively managing or integrating
acquisitions. We may experience greater than expected costs or difficulties relating to such acquisition, in which
case, we might not achieve the anticipated returns from any particular acquisition, which may have a material
adverse effect on our financial condition, business and results of operations.
We may not be able to successfully fund future acquisitions of new businesses due to the lack of availability of
debt or equity financing at the Company level on acceptable terms, which could impede the implementation of
our acquisition strategy and materially adversely impact our financial condition, business and results of
operations.
In order to make future acquisitions, we intend to raise capital primarily through debt financing at the Company
level, additional equity offerings, the sale of stock or assets of our businesses, and by offering equity in the Trust or
our businesses to the sellers of target businesses or by undertaking a combination of any of the above. Since the
timing and size of acquisitions cannot be readily predicted, we may need to be able to obtain funding on short notice
to benefit fully from attractive acquisition opportunities. Such funding may not be available on acceptable terms. In
66
addition, the level of our indebtedness may impact our ability to borrow at the Company level. Another source of
capital for us may be the sale of additional shares, subject to market conditions and investor demand for the shares
at prices that we consider to be in the interests of our shareholders. These risks may materially adversely affect our
ability to pursue our acquisition strategy successfully and materially adversely affect our financial condition,
business and results of operations.
While we intend to make regular cash distributions to our shareholders, the Company’s board of directors has
full authority and discretion over the distributions of the Company, other than the profit allocation, and it may
decide to reduce or eliminate distributions at any time, which may materially adversely affect the market price for
our shares.
To date, we have declared and paid quarterly distributions, and although we intend to pursue a policy of paying
regular distributions, the Company’s board of directors has full authority and discretion to determine whether or not
a distribution by the Company should be declared and paid to the Trust and in turn to our shareholders, as well as
the amount and timing of any distribution. In addition, the management fee, profit allocation and put price will be
payment obligations of the Company and, as a result, will be paid, along with other Company obligations, prior to
the payment of distributions to our shareholders. The Company’s board of directors may, based on their review of
our financial condition and results of operations and pending acquisitions, determine to reduce or eliminate
distributions, which may have a material adverse effect on the market price of our shares.
We will rely entirely on receipts from our businesses to make distributions to our shareholders.
The Trust’s sole asset is its interest in the Company, which holds controlling interests in our businesses. Therefore,
we are dependent upon the ability of our businesses to generate earnings and cash flow and distribute them to us in
the form of interest and principal payments on indebtedness and, from time to time, dividends on equity to enable
us, first, to satisfy our financial obligations and, second to make distributions to our shareholders. This ability may
be subject to limitations under laws of the jurisdictions in which they are incorporated or organized. If, as a
consequence of these various restrictions, we are unable to generate sufficient receipts from our businesses, we may
not be able to declare, or may have to delay or cancel payment of, distributions to our shareholders.
We do not own 100% of our businesses. While the Company is to receive cash payments from our businesses
which are in the form of interest payments, debt repayment and dividends, if any dividends were to be paid by our
businesses, they would be shared pro rata with the minority shareholders of our businesses and the amounts of
dividends made to minority shareholders would not be available to us for any purpose, including Company debt
service or distributions to our shareholders. Any proceeds from the sale of a business will be allocated among us
and the minority shareholders of the business that is sold.
The Company’s board of directors has the power to change the terms of our shares in its sole discretion in ways
with which you may disagree.
As an owner of our shares, you may disagree with changes made to the terms of our shares, and you may disagree
with the Company’s board of directors’ decision that the changes made to the terms of the shares are not materially
adverse to you as a shareholder or that they do not alter the characterization of the Trust. Your recourse, if you
disagree, will be limited because our Trust Agreement gives broad authority and discretion to our board of directors.
However, the Trust Agreement does not relieve the Company’s board of directors from any fiduciary obligation that
is imposed on them pursuant to applicable law. In addition, we may change the nature of the shares to be issued to
raise additional equity and remain a fixed-investment trust for tax purposes.
Certain provisions of the LLC Agreement of the Company and the Trust Agreement make it difficult for third
parties to acquire control of the Trust and the Company and could deprive you of the opportunity to obtain a
takeover premium for your shares.
The amended and restated LLC Agreement of the Company, which we refer to as the LLC Agreement, and the
amended and restated Trust Agreement of the Trust, which we refer to as the Trust Agreement, contain a number of
67
provisions that could make it more difficult for a third party to acquire, or may discourage a third party from
acquiring, control of the Trust and the Company. These provisions include, among others:
•
restrictions on the Company’s ability to enter into certain transactions with our major shareholders, with the
exception of our Manager, modeled on the limitation contained in Section 203 of the Delaware General
Corporation Law, or DGCL;
• allowing only the Company’s board of directors to fill newly created directorships, for those directors who
are elected by our shareholders, and allowing only our Manager, as holder of the Allocation Interests, to fill
vacancies with respect to the class of directors appointed by our Manager;
•
•
requiring that directors elected by our shareholders be removed, with or without cause, only by a vote of
85% of our shareholders;
requiring advance notice for nominations of candidates for election to the Company’s board of directors or
for proposing matters that can be acted upon by our shareholders at a shareholders’ meeting;
• having a substantial number of additional authorized but unissued shares that may be issued without
shareholder action;
• providing the Company’s board of directors with certain authority to amend the LLC Agreement and the
Trust Agreement, subject to certain voting and consent rights of the holders of trust interests and Allocation
Interests;
• providing for a staggered board of directors of the Company, the effect of which could be to deter a proxy
contest for control of the Company’s board of directors or a hostile takeover; and
•
limitations regarding calling special meetings and written consents of our shareholders.
These provisions, as well as other provisions in the LLC Agreement and Trust Agreement may delay, defer or
prevent a transaction or a change in control that might otherwise result in you obtaining a takeover premium for
your shares.
We may have conflicts of interest with the noncontrolling shareholders of our businesses.
The boards of directors of our respective businesses have fiduciary duties to all their shareholders, including the
Company and noncontrolling shareholders. As a result, they may make decisions that are in the best interests of
their shareholders generally but which are not necessarily in the best interest of the Company or our shareholders. In
dealings with the Company, the directors of our businesses may have conflicts of interest and decisions may have to
be made without the participation of directors appointed by the Company, and such decisions may be different from
those that we would make.
Our third party credit facility exposes us to additional risks associated with leverage and inhibits our operating
flexibility and reduces cash flow available for distributions to our shareholders.
At December 31, 2012, we had approximately $252.2 million outstanding under our Term Loan Facility and $24.0
million outstanding under our Revolving Credit Facility. We expect to increase our level of debt in the future. The
terms of our Revolving Credit Facility contains a number of affirmative and restrictive covenants that, among other
things, require us to:
• maintain a minimum level of cash flow;
• leverage new businesses we acquire to a minimum specified level at the time of acquisition;
• keep our total debt to cash flow at or below a ratio of 3.5 to 1; and
68
• make acquisitions that satisfy certain specified minimum criteria.
If we violate any of these covenants, our lender may accelerate the maturity of any debt outstanding and we may be
prohibited from making any distributions to our shareholders. Such debt is secured by all of our assets, including the
stock we own in our businesses and the rights we have under the loan agreements with our businesses. Our ability to
meet our debt service obligations may be affected by events beyond our control and will depend primarily upon
cash produced by our businesses. Any failure to comply with the terms of our indebtedness could materially
adversely affect us.
Changes in interest rates could materially adversely affect us.
Our Credit Facility bears interest at floating rates which will generally change as interest rates change. We bear the
risk that the rates we are charged by our lender will increase faster than the earnings and cash flow of our
businesses, which could reduce profitability, adversely affect our ability to service our debt, cause us to breach
covenants contained in our Revolving Credit Facility and reduce cash flow available for distribution, any of which
could materially adversely affect us.
[
We may engage in a business transaction with one or more target businesses that have relationships with our
officers, our directors, our Manager or CGI, which may create potential conflicts of interest.
We may decide to acquire one or more businesses with which our officers, our directors, our Manager or CGI have
a relationship. While we might obtain a fairness opinion from an independent investment banking firm, potential
conflicts of interest may still exist with respect to a particular acquisition, and, as a result, the terms of the
acquisition of a target business may not be as advantageous to our shareholders as it would have been absent any
conflicts of interest.
We are exposed to risks relating to evaluations of controls required by Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of
2002.
We are required to comply with Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002. While we have concluded that at
December 31, 2012, we have no material weaknesses in our internal controls over financial reporting we cannot
assure you that we will not have a material weakness in the future. A “material weakness” is a control deficiency, or
combination of significant deficiencies that results in more than a remote likelihood that a material misstatement of
the annual or interim financial statements will not be prevented or detected. If we fail to maintain a system of
internal controls over financial reporting that meets the requirements of Section 404, we might be subject to
sanctions or investigation by regulatory authorities such as the SEC or by the New York Stock Exchange.
Additionally, failure to comply with Section 404 or the report by us of a material weakness may cause investors to
lose confidence in our financial statements and our stock price may be adversely affected. If we fail to remedy any
material weakness, our financial statements may be inaccurate, we may not have access to the capital markets, and
our stock price may be adversely affected
CGI may exercise significant influence over the Company.
CGI, through a wholly owned subsidiary, owns 7,931,000 or approximately 16.4% of our shares and may have
significant influence over the election of directors in the future.
If, in the future, we cease to control and operate our businesses, we may be deemed to be an investment company
under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended.
Under the terms of the LLC Agreement, we have the latitude to make investments in businesses that we will not
operate or control. If we make significant investments in businesses that we do not operate or control or cease to
operate and control our businesses, we may be deemed to be an investment company under the Investment
Company Act of 1940, as amended, or the Investment Company Act. If we were deemed to be an investment
69
company, we would either have to register as an investment company under the Investment Company Act, obtain
exemptive relief from the SEC or modify our investments or organizational structure or our contract rights to fall
outside the definition of an investment company. Registering as an investment company could, among other things,
materially adversely affect our financial condition, business and results of operations, materially limit our ability to
borrow funds or engage in other transactions involving leverage and require us to add directors who are independent
of us or our Manager and otherwise will subject us to additional regulation that will be costly and time-consuming.
Risks Relating to Our Manager
Our Chief Executive Officer, directors, Manager and management team may allocate some of their time to other
businesses, thereby causing conflicts of interest in their determination as to how much time to devote to our
affairs, which may materially adversely affect our operations.
While the members of our management team anticipate devoting a substantial amount of their time to the affairs of
the Company, only Mr. James Bottiglieri, our Chief Financial Officer, devotes substantially all of his time to our
affairs. Our Chief Executive Officer, directors, Manager and members of our management team may engage in
other business activities. This may result in a conflict of interest in allocating their time between our operations and
our management and operations of other businesses. Their other business endeavors may be related to CGI, which
will continue to own several businesses that were managed by our management team prior to our initial public
offering, or affiliates of CGI as well as other parties. Conflicts of interest that arise over the allocation of time may
not always be resolved in our favor and may materially adversely affect our operations. See the section entitled
“Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions” for the potential conflicts of interest of which you should be
aware.
Our Manager and its affiliates, including members of our management team, may engage in activities that
compete with us or our businesses.
While our management team intends to devote a substantial majority of their time to the affairs of the Company,
and while our Manager and its affiliates currently do not manage any other businesses that are in similar lines of
business as our businesses, and while our Manager must present all opportunities that meet the Company’s
acquisition and disposition criteria to the Company’s board of directors, neither our management team nor our
Manager is expressly prohibited from investing in or managing other entities, including those that are in the same or
similar line of business as our businesses. In this regard, the management services agreement and the obligation to
provide management services will not create a mutually exclusive relationship between our Manager and its
affiliates, on the one hand, and the Company, on the other.
Our Manager need not present an acquisition or disposition opportunity to us if our Manager determines on its
own that such acquisition or disposition opportunity does not meet the Company’s acquisition or disposition
criteria.
Our Manager will review any acquisition or disposition opportunity presented to the Manager to determine if it
satisfies the Company’s acquisition or disposition criteria, as established by the Company’s board of directors from
time to time. If our Manager determines, in its sole discretion, that an opportunity fits our criteria, our Manager will
refer the opportunity to the Company’s board of directors for its authorization and approval prior to the
consummation thereof; opportunities that our Manager determines do not fit our criteria do not need to be presented
to the Company’s board of directors for consideration. If such an opportunity is ultimately profitable, we will have
not participated in such opportunity. Upon a determination by the Company’s board of directors not to promptly
pursue an opportunity presented to it by our Manager in whole or in part, our Manager will be unrestricted in its
ability to pursue such opportunity, or any part that we do not promptly pursue, on its own or refer such opportunity
to other entities, including its affiliates.
70
We cannot remove our Manager solely for poor performance, which could limit our ability to improve our
performance and could materially adversely affect the market price of our shares.
Under the terms of the management services agreement, our Manager cannot be removed as a result of
underperformance. Instead, the Company’s board of directors can only remove our Manager in certain limited
circumstances or upon a vote by the majority of the Company’s board of directors and the majority of our
shareholders to terminate the management services agreement. This limitation could materially adversely affect the
market price of our shares.
If the management services agreement is terminated, our Manager, as holder of the Allocation Interests in the
Company, has the right to cause the Company to purchase such Allocation Interests, which may materially
adversely affect our liquidity and ability to grow.
If the management services agreement is terminated at any time other than as a result of our Manager’s resignation
or if our Manager resigns on any date that is at least three years after the closing of our initial public offering, our
Manager will have the right, but not the obligation, for one year from the date of termination or resignation, as the
case may be, to cause the Company to purchase the Allocation Interests for the put price. If our Manager elects to
cause the Company to purchase its Allocation Interests, we are obligated to do so and, until we have done so, our
ability to conduct our business, including incurring debt, would be restricted and, accordingly, our liquidity and
ability to grow may be adversely affected.
Our Manager can resign on 90 days’ notice and we may not be able to find a suitable replacement within that
time, resulting in a disruption in our operations that could materially adversely affect our financial condition,
business and results of operations as well as the market price of our shares.
Our Manager has the right, under the management services agreement, to resign at any time on 90 days’ written
notice, whether we have found a replacement or not. If our Manager resigns, we may not be able to contract with a
new manager or hire internal management with similar expertise and ability to provide the same or equivalent
services on acceptable terms within 90 days, or at all, in which case our operations are likely to experience a
disruption, our financial condition, business and results of operations as well as our ability to pay distributions are
likely to be adversely affected and the market price of our shares may decline. In addition, the coordination of our
internal management, acquisition activities and supervision of our businesses is likely to suffer if we are unable to
identify and reach an agreement with a single institution or group of executives having the expertise possessed by
our Manager and its affiliates. Even if we are able to retain comparable management, whether internal or external,
the integration of such management and their lack of familiarity with our businesses may result in additional costs
and time delays that could materially adversely affect our financial condition, business and results of operations.
The liability associated with the supplemental put agreement is difficult to estimate and may be subject to
substantial period-to-period changes, thereby significantly impacting our future results of operations.
The Company will record the supplemental put agreement at its fair value at each balance sheet date by recording
any change in fair value through its income statement. The fair value of the supplemental put agreement is largely
related to the value of the profit allocation that our Manager, as holder of Allocation Interests, will receive. The
valuation of the supplemental put agreement requires the use of complex financial models, which require sensitive
assumptions and estimates. If our assumptions and estimates result in an over-estimation or under-estimation of the
fair value of the supplemental put agreement, the resulting fluctuation in related liabilities could cause a material
adverse effect on our future results of operations.
We must pay our Manager the management fee regardless of our performance.
Our Manager is entitled to receive a management fee that is based on our adjusted net assets, as defined in the
management services agreement, regardless of the performance of our businesses. The calculation of the
management fee is unrelated to the Company’s net income. As a result, the management fee may incentivize our
Manager to increase the amount of our assets, for example, the acquisition of additional assets or the incurrence of
third party debt rather than increase the performance of our businesses.
71
[
We cannot determine the amount of the management fee that will be paid over time with any certainty.
The management fee paid to CGM for the year ended December 31, 2012, was $17.8 million. The management fee
is calculated by reference to the Company’s adjusted net assets, which will be impacted by the acquisition or
disposition of businesses, which can be significantly influenced by our Manager, as well as the performance of our
businesses and other businesses we may acquire in the future. Changes in adjusted net assets and in the resulting
management fee could be significant, resulting in a material adverse effect on the Company’s results of operations.
In addition, if the performance of the Company declines, assuming adjusted net assets remains the same,
management fees will increase as a percentage of the Company’s net income.
We cannot determine the amount of profit allocation that will be paid over time with any certainty.
We cannot determine the amount of profit allocation that will be paid over time with any certainty. Such
determination would be dependent on the potential sale proceeds received for any of our businesses and the
performance of the Company and its businesses over a multi-year period of time, among other factors that cannot be
predicted with certainty at this time. Such factors may have a significant impact on the amount of any profit
allocation to be paid. Likewise, such determination would be dependent on whether certain hurdles were surpassed
giving rise to a payment of profit allocation. Any amounts paid in respect of the profit allocation are unrelated to the
management fee earned for performance of services under the management services agreement.
The fees to be paid to our Manager pursuant to the management services agreement, the offsetting management
services agreements and transaction services agreements and the profit allocation to be paid to our Manager, as
holder of the Allocation Interests, pursuant to the LLC Agreement may significantly reduce the amount of cash
available for distribution to our shareholders.
Under the management services agreement, the Company will be obligated to pay a management fee to and, subject
to certain conditions, reimburse the costs and out-of-pocket expenses of our Manager incurred on behalf of the
Company in connection with the provision of services to the Company. Similarly, our businesses will be obligated
to pay fees to and reimburse the costs and expenses of our Manager pursuant to any offsetting management services
agreements entered into between our Manager and one of our businesses, or any transaction services agreements to
which such businesses are a party. In addition, our Manager, as holder of the Allocation Interests, will be entitled to
receive profit allocations and may be entitled to receive the put price. While it is difficult to quantify with any
certainty the actual amount of any such payments in the future, we do expect that such amounts could be
substantial. See the section entitled “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions” for more information
about these payment obligations of the Company. The management fee, profit allocation and put price will be
payment obligations of the Company and, as a result, will be paid, along with other Company obligations, prior to
the payment of distributions to shareholders. As a result, the payment of these amounts may significantly reduce the
amount of cash flow available for distribution to our shareholders.
Our Manager’s influence on conducting our operations, including on our conducting of transactions, gives it the
ability to increase its fees, which may reduce the amount of cash flow available for distribution to our
shareholders.
Under the terms of the management services agreement, our Manager is paid a management fee calculated as a
percentage of the Company’s adjusted net assets for certain items and is unrelated to net income or any other
performance base or measure. Our Manager, controls, may advise us to consummate transactions, incur third party
debt or conduct our operations in a manner that, in our Manager’s reasonable discretion, are necessary to the future
growth of our businesses and are in the best interests of our shareholders. These transactions, however, may
increase the amount of fees paid to our Manager. Our Manager’s ability to increase its fees, through the influence it
has over our operations, may increase the compensation paid by our Manager. Our Manager’s ability to influence
the management fee paid to it by us could reduce the amount of cash flow available for distribution to our
shareholders.
72
Fees paid by the Company and our businesses pursuant to transaction services agreements do not offset fees
payable under the management services agreement and will be in addition to the management fee payable by the
Company under the management services agreement.
The management services agreement provides that our businesses may enter into transaction services agreements
with our Manager pursuant to which our businesses will pay fees to our Manager. See the section entitled “Certain
Relationships and Related Party Transactions” for more information about these agreements. Unlike fees paid
under the offsetting management services agreements, fees that are paid pursuant to such transaction services
agreements will not reduce the management fee payable by the Company. Therefore, such fees will be in excess of
the management fee payable by the Company.
The fees to be paid to our Manager pursuant to these transaction service agreements will be paid prior to any
principal, interest or dividend payments to be paid to the Company by our businesses, which will reduce the amount
of cash flow available for distributions to shareholders.
Our Manager’s profit allocation may induce it to make suboptimal decisions regarding our operations.
Our Manager, as holder of 100% of the Allocation Interests in the Company, will receive a profit allocation based
on ongoing cash flows and capital gains in excess of a hurdle rate. In this respect, a calculation and payment of
profit allocation may be triggered upon the sale of one of our businesses. As a result, our Manager may be
incentivized to recommend the sale of one or more of our businesses to the Company’s board of directors at a time
that may not be optimal for our shareholders.
The obligations to pay the management fee and profit allocation, including the put price, may cause the
Company to liquidate assets or incur debt.
If we do not have sufficient liquid assets to pay the management fee and profit allocation, including the put price,
when such payments are due, we may be required to liquidate assets or incur debt in order to make such payments.
This circumstance could materially adversely affect our liquidity and ability to make distributions to our
shareholders.
Risks Related to Taxation
Our shareholders will be subject to tax on their share of the Company’s taxable income, which taxes or taxable
income could exceed the cash distributions they receive from the Trust.
For so long as the Company or the Trust (if it is treated as a tax partnership) would not be required to register as an
investment company under the Investment Company Act of 1940 and at least 90% of our gross income for each
taxable year constitutes ‘‘qualifying income’’ within the meaning of Section 7704(d) of the Internal Revenue Code
of 1986, as amended (the ‘‘Code’’), on a continuing basis, we will be treated, for U.S. federal income tax purposes,
as a partnership and not as an association or a publicly traded partnership taxable as a corporation. In that case our
shareholders will be subject to U.S. federal income tax and, possibly, state, local and foreign income tax, on their
share of the Company’s taxable income, which taxes or taxable income could exceed the cash distributions they
receive from the Trust. There is, accordingly, a risk that our shareholders may not receive cash distributions equal
to their portion of our taxable income or sufficient in amount even to satisfy their personal tax liability those results
from that income. This may result from gains on the sale or exchange of stock or debt of subsidiaries that will be
allocated to shareholders who hold (or are deemed to hold) shares on the day such gains were realized if there is no
corresponding distribution of the proceeds from such sales, or where a shareholder disposes of shares after an
allocation of gain but before proceeds (if any) are distributed by the Company. Shareholders may also realize
income in excess of distributions due to the Company’s use of cash from operations or sales proceeds for uses other
than to make distributions to shareholders, including funding acquisitions, satisfying short- and long-term working
capital needs of our businesses, or satisfying known or unknown liabilities. In addition, certain financial covenants
with the Company’s lenders may limit or prohibit the distribution of cash to shareholders. The Company’s board of
directors is also free to change the Company’s distribution policy. The Company is under no obligation to make
73
distributions to shareholders equal to or in excess of their portion of our taxable income or sufficient in amount even
to satisfy the tax liability that results from that income.
All of the Company’s income could be subject to an entity-level tax in the United States, which could result in a
material reduction in cash flow available for distribution to holders of shares of the Trust and thus could result
in a substantial reduction in the value of the shares.
We do not expect the Company to be characterized as a corporation so long as it would not be required to register as
an investment company under the Investment Company Act of 1940 and 90% or more of its gross income for each
taxable year constitutes “qualifying income.” The Company expects to receive more than 90% of its gross income
each year from dividends, interest and gains on sales of stock or debt instruments, including principally from or
with respect to stock or debt of corporations in which the Company holds a majority interest. The Company intends
to treat all such dividends, interest and gains as “qualifying income.”
If the Company fails to satisfy this “qualifying income” exception, the Company will be treated as a corporation for
U.S. federal (and certain state and local) income tax purposes, and would be required to pay income tax at regular
corporate rates on its income. Taxation of the Company as a corporation could result in a material reduction in
distributions to our shareholders and after-tax return and, thus, could likely result in a reduction in the value of, or
materially adversely affect the market price of, the shares of the Trust.
A shareholder may recognize a greater taxable gain (or a smaller tax loss) on a disposition of shares than
expected because of the treatment of debt under the partnership tax accounting rules.
We may incur debt for a variety of reasons, including for acquisitions as well as other purposes. Under partnership
tax accounting principles (which apply to the Company), debt of the Company generally will be allocable to our
shareholders, who will realize the benefit of including their allocable share of the debt in the tax basis of their
investment in shares. At the time a shareholder later sells shares, the selling shareholder’s amount realized on the
sale will include not only the sales price of the shares but also the shareholder’s portion of the Company’s debt
allocable to his shares (which is treated as proceeds from the sale of those shares). Depending on the nature of the
Company’s activities after having incurred the debt, and the utilization of the borrowed funds, a later sale of shares
could result in a larger taxable gain (or a smaller tax loss) than anticipated.
Our structure involves complex provisions of U.S. federal income tax law for which no clear precedent or
authority may be available. Our structure also is subject to potential legislative, judicial or administrative change
and differing interpretations, possibly on a retroactive basis.
The U.S. federal income tax treatment of holders of the Shares depends in some instances on determinations of fact
and interpretations of complex provisions of U.S. federal income tax law for which no clear precedent or authority
may be available. You should be aware that the U.S. federal income tax rules are constantly under review by
persons involved in the legislative process, the IRS, and the U.S. Treasury Department, frequently resulting in
revised interpretations of established concepts, statutory changes, revisions to regulations and other modifications
and interpretations. The IRS pays close attention to the proper application of tax laws to partnerships. The present
U.S. federal income tax treatment of an investment in the Shares may be modified by administrative, legislative or
judicial interpretation at any time, and any such action may affect investments and commitments previously made.
For example, changes to the U.S. federal tax laws and interpretations thereof could make it more difficult or
impossible to meet the qualifying income exception for us to be treated as a partnership for U.S. federal income tax
purposes that is not taxable as a corporation, affect or cause us to change our investments and commitments, affect
the tax considerations of an investment in us and adversely affect an investment in our Shares. Our organizational
documents and agreements permit the Board of Directors to modify our operating agreement from time to time,
without the consent of the holders of Shares, in order to address certain changes in U.S. federal income tax
regulations, legislation or interpretation. In some circumstances, such revisions could have a material adverse
impact on some or all of the holders of our Shares. Moreover, we will apply certain assumptions and conventions in
an attempt to comply with applicable rules and to report income, gain, deduction, loss and credit to holders in a
manner that reflects such holders’ beneficial ownership of partnership items, taking into account variation in
ownership interests during each taxable year because of trading activity. However, these assumptions and
74
conventions may not be in compliance with all aspects of applicable tax requirements. It is possible that the IRS will
assert successfully that the conventions and assumptions used by us do not satisfy the technical requirements of the
Code and/or Treasury regulations and could require that items of income, gain, deductions, loss or credit, including
interest deductions, be adjusted, reallocated, or disallowed, in a manner that adversely affects holders of the Shares.
Risks Relating Generally to Our Businesses
The recent disruption in the overall economy and the financial markets will adversely impact our business.
Many industries, including our businesses, have been affected by current economic factors, including the significant
deterioration of global economic conditions, declines in employment levels, and shifts in consumer spending
patterns. The recent disruptions in the overall economy and volatility in the financial markets have greatly reduced,
and may continue to reduce, consumer confidence in the economy, negatively affecting consumer spending, which
could be harmful to our financial position. Disruptions in the overall economy may also lead to a lower collection
rate on billings as consumers or businesses are unable to pay their bills in a timely fashion. Decreased cash flow
generated from our products may adversely affect our financial position and our ability to fund our operations. In
addition, macro-economic disruptions, as well as the restructuring of various commercial and investment banking
organizations, could adversely affect our ability to access the credit markets. The disruption in the credit markets
may also adversely affect the availability of financing to support our strategy for growth through future acquisitions.
There is a risk that government responses to the disruptions in the financial markets will not restore consumer
confidence, stabilize the markets, or increase liquidity and the availability of credit.
Impairment of our intangible assets could result in significant charges that would adversely impact our future
operating results.
We have significant intangible assets, including goodwill with an indefinite life, which are susceptible to valuation
adjustments as a result of changes in various factors or conditions. The most significant intangible assets on our
balance sheet are goodwill, technologies, customer relationships and trademarks we acquired when we acquired our
businesses. Customer relationships are amortized on a straight line basis based upon the pattern in which the
economic benefits of customer relationships are being utilized. Other identifiable intangible assets are amortized on
a straight-line basis over their estimated useful lives. We assess the potential impairment of goodwill and indefinite
lived intangible assets on an annual basis, as well as whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the
carrying value may not be recoverable. We assess definite lived intangible assets whenever events or changes in
circumstances indicate that the carrying value may not be recoverable.
Factors that could trigger impairment include the following:
• significant underperformance relative to historical or projected future operating results;
• significant changes in the manner of or use of the acquired assets or the strategy for our overall
business;
• significant negative industry or economic trends;
• significant decline in our stock price for a sustained period;
• changes in our organization or management reporting structure could result in additional
reporting units, which may require alternative methods of estimating fair values or greater
desegregation or aggregation in our analysis by reporting unit; and
• a decline in our market capitalization below net book value.
As of December 31, 2012, we had identified indefinite lived intangible assets with a carrying value in our financial
statements of $132.4 million, and goodwill of $257.5 million.
75
Further adverse changes in the operations of our businesses or other unforeseeable factors could result in an
impairment charge in future periods that would impact our results of operations and financial position in that period.
Our businesses are subject to unplanned business interruptions which may adversely affect our performance.
Operational interruptions and unplanned events at one or more of our production facilities, such as explosions, fires,
inclement weather, natural disasters, accidents, transportation interruptions and supply could cause substantial
losses in our production capacity. Furthermore, because customers may be dependent on planned deliveries from us,
customers that have to reschedule their own operations due to our delivery delays may be able to pursue financial
claims against us, and we may incur costs to correct such problems in addition to any liability resulting from such
claims. Such interruptions may also harm our reputation among actual and potential customers, potentially resulting
in a loss of business. To the extent these losses are not covered by insurance, our financial position, results of
operations and cash flows may be adversely affected by such events.
Our businesses rely and may rely on their intellectual property and licenses to use others’ intellectual property,
for competitive advantage. If our businesses are unable to protect their intellectual property, are unable to obtain
or retain licenses to use other’s intellectual property, or if they infringe upon or are alleged to have infringed
upon others’ intellectual property, it could have a material adverse effect on their financial condition, business
and results of operations.
Each businesses’ success depends in part on their, or licenses to use others’, brand names, proprietary technology
and manufacturing techniques. These businesses rely on a combination of patents, trademarks, copyrights, trade
secrets, confidentiality procedures and contractual provisions to protect their intellectual property rights. The steps
they have taken to protect their intellectual property rights may not prevent third parties from using their intellectual
property and other proprietary information without their authorization or independently developing intellectual
property and other proprietary information that is similar. In addition, the laws of foreign countries may not protect
our businesses’ intellectual property rights effectively or to the same extent as the laws of the United States.
Stopping unauthorized use of their proprietary information and intellectual property, and defending claims that they
have made unauthorized use of others’ proprietary information or intellectual property, may be difficult, time-
consuming and costly. The use of their intellectual property and other proprietary information by others, and the use
by others of their intellectual property and proprietary information, could reduce or eliminate any competitive
advantage they have developed, cause them to lose sales or otherwise harm their business.
Our businesses may become involved in legal proceedings and claims in the future either to protect their intellectual
property or to defend allegations that they have infringed upon others’ intellectual property rights. These claims and
any resulting litigation could subject them to significant liability for damages and invalidate their property rights. In
addition, these lawsuits, regardless of their merits, could be time consuming and expensive to resolve and could
divert management’s time and attention. The costs associated with any of these actions could be substantial and
could have a material adverse effect on their financial condition, business and results of operations.
The operations and research and development of some of our businesses’ services and technology depend on the
collective experience of their technical employees. If these employees were to leave our businesses and take this
knowledge, our businesses’ operations and their ability to compete effectively could be materially adversely
impacted.
The future success of some of our businesses depends upon the continued service of their technical personnel who
have developed and continue to develop their technology and products. If any of these employees leave our
businesses, the loss of their technical knowledge and experience may materially adversely affect the operations and
research and development of current and future services. We may also be unable to attract technical individuals with
comparable experience because competition for such technical personnel is intense. If our businesses are not able to
replace their technical personnel with new employees or attract additional technical individuals, their operations
may suffer as they may be unable to keep up with innovations in their respective industries. As a result, their ability
to continue to compete effectively and their operations may be materially adversely affected.
76
If our businesses are unable to continue the technological innovation and successful commercial introduction of
new products and services, their financial condition, business and results of operations could be materially
adversely affected.
The industries in which our businesses operate, or may operate, experience periodic technological changes and
ongoing product improvements. Their results of operations depend significantly on the development of
commercially viable new products, product grades and applications, as well as production technologies and their
ability to integrate new technologies. Our future growth will depend on their ability to gauge the direction of the
commercial and technological progress in all key end-use markets and upon their ability to successfully develop,
manufacture and market products in such changing end-use markets. In this regard, they must make ongoing capital
investments.
In addition, their customers may introduce new generations of their own products, which may require new or
increased technological and performance specifications, requiring our businesses to develop customized products.
Our businesses may not be successful in developing new products and technology that satisfy their customers’
demand and their customers may not accept any of their new products. If our businesses fail to keep pace with
evolving technological innovations or fail to modify their products in response to their customers’ needs in a timely
manner, then their financial condition, business and results of operations could be materially adversely affected as a
result of reduced sales of their products and sunk developmental costs. These developments may require our
personnel staffing business to seek better educated and trained workers, who may not be available in sufficient
numbers.
Our businesses could experience fluctuations in the costs of raw materials as a result of inflation and other
economic conditions, which fluctuations could have a material adverse effect on their financial condition,
business and results of operations.
Changes in inflation could materially adversely affect the costs and availability of raw materials used in our
manufacturing businesses, and changes in fuel costs likely will affect the costs of transporting materials from our
suppliers and shipping goods to our customers, as well as the effective areas from which we can recruit temporary
staffing personnel. For example, for Advanced Circuits, the principal raw materials consist of copper and glass and
represent approximately 20% of net sales in 2012. Prices for these key raw materials may fluctuate during periods
of high demand. The ability by these businesses to offset the effect of increases in raw material prices by increasing
their prices is uncertain. If these businesses are unable to cover price increases of these raw materials, their
financial condition, business and results of operations could be materially adversely affected.
Our businesses do not have and may not have long-term contracts with their customers and clients and the loss
of customers and clients could materially adversely affect their financial condition, business and results of
operations.
Our businesses are and may be, based primarily upon individual orders and sales with their customers and clients.
Our businesses historically have not entered into long-term supply contracts with their customers and clients. As
such, their customers and clients could cease using their services or buying their products from them at any time and
for any reason. The fact that they do not enter into long-term contracts with their customers and clients means that
they have no recourse in the event a customer or client no longer wants to use their services or purchase products
from them. If a significant number of their customers or clients elect not to use their services or purchase their
products, it could materially adversely affect their financial condition, business and results of operations.
Our businesses are and may be subject to federal, state and foreign environmental laws and regulations that
expose them to potential financial liability. Complying with applicable environmental laws requires significant
resources, and if our businesses fail to comply, they could be subject to substantial liability.
Some of the facilities and operations of our businesses are and may be subject to a variety of federal, state and
foreign environmental laws and regulations including laws and regulations pertaining to the handling, storage and
transportation of raw materials, products and wastes, which require and will continue to require significant
expenditures to remain in compliance with such laws and regulations currently in place and in the future.
77
Compliance with current and future environmental laws is a major consideration for our businesses as any material
violations of these laws can lead to substantial liability, revocations of discharge permits, fines or penalties. Because
some of our businesses use hazardous materials and generate hazardous wastes in their operations, they may be
subject to potential financial liability for costs associated with the investigation and remediation of their own sites,
or sites at which they have arranged for the disposal of hazardous wastes, if such sites become contaminated. Even
if they fully comply with applicable environmental laws and are not directly at fault for the contamination, our
businesses may still be liable. Costs associated with these risks could have a material adverse effect on our
financial condition, business and results of operations.
Defects in the products provided by our companies could result in financial or other damages to their customers,
which could result in reduced demand for our companies’ products and/or liability claims against our
companies.
As manufacturers and distributors of consumer products, certain of our companies are subject to various laws, rules
and regulations, which may empower governmental agencies and authorities to exclude from the market products
that are found to be unsafe or hazardous. Under certain circumstances, a governmental authority could require our
companies to repurchase or recall one or more of their products. Additionally, laws regulating certain consumer
products exist in some cities and states, as well as in other countries in which they sell their products, where more
restrictive laws and regulations exist or may be adopted in the future. Any repurchase or recall of such products
could be costly and could damage the reputation of our companies. If any of our companies were required to
remove, or voluntarily remove, their products from the market, their reputation may be tarnished and they may have
large quantities of finished products that they cannot sell. Additionally, our companies may be subject to
regulatory actions that could harm their reputations, adversely impact the values of their brands and/or increase the
cost of production.
Our companies also face exposure to product liability claims in the event that one of their products is alleged to
have resulted in property damage, bodily injury or other adverse effects. Defects in products could result in
customer dissatisfaction or a reduction in, or cancellation of, future purchases or liability claims against our
companies. If these defects occur frequently, our reputation may be impaired permanently. Defects in products
could also result in financial or other damages to customers, for which our companies may be asked or required to
compensate their customers, in the form of substantial monetary judgments or otherwise. While our companies
take the steps deemed necessary to comply with all laws and regulations, there can be no assurance that rapidly
changing safety standards will not render unsaleable products that complied with previously-applicable safety
standards. As a result, these types of claims could have a material adverse effect on our businesses, results of
operations and financial condition.
Some of our businesses are subject to certain risks associated with the movement of businesses offshore.
Some of our businesses are potentially at risk of losing business to competitors operating in lower cost countries.
An additional risk is the movement offshore of some of our businesses’ customers, leading them to procure products
or services from more closely located companies. Either of these factors could negatively impact our financial
condition, business and results of operations.
Loss of key customers of some of our businesses could negatively impact financial condition.
Some of our businesses have significant exposure to certain key customers, the loss of which could negatively
impact our financial condition, business and results of operations.
Our businesses are subject to certain risks associated with their foreign operations or business they conduct in
foreign jurisdictions.
Some of our businesses have and may have operations or conduct business outside the United States. Certain risks
are inherent in operating or conducting business in foreign jurisdictions, including exposure to local economic
conditions; difficulties in enforcing agreements and collecting receivables through certain foreign legal systems;
longer payment cycles for foreign customers; adverse currency exchange controls; exposure to risks associated with
changes in foreign exchange rates; potential adverse changes in political environments; withholding taxes and
78
restrictions on the withdrawal of foreign investments and earnings; export and import restrictions; difficulties in
enforcing intellectual property rights; and required compliance with a variety of foreign laws and regulations.
These risks individually and collectively have the potential to negatively impact our financial condition, business
and results of operations.
New regulations related to conflict minerals may force certain of our businesses to incur additional expenses,
may make the supply chain of such businesses more complex and may result in damage to the customer
relationships of such businesses.
In August 2012, as mandated by the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act of 2010, the
Securities and Exchange Commission promulgated final rules regarding disclosure of the use of certain minerals
and their derivatives, including tin, tantalum, tungsten and gold, known as “conflict minerals,” if these minerals are
necessary to the functionality or production of the company’s products. These regulations require such issuers to
report annually whether or not such minerals originate from the Democratic Republic of Congo (DRC) and
adjoining countries and in some cases to perform extensive due diligence on their supply chains for such minerals.
The implementation of these new requirements could adversely affect the sourcing, availability and pricing of
conflict minerals used in the manufacturing processes for certain products of our businesses. In addition, some of
our businesses may incur additional costs to comply with the disclosure requirements, including costs related to
determining the source of any of the relevant minerals used in the products of certain of our businesses. Since the
supply chain of certain of our businesses is complex, the due diligence procedures implemented may not enable
such businesses to ascertain the origins for these minerals or determine that these minerals are DRC conflict-free,
which may harm the reputation of some of our businesses. Some of our businesses may also face difficulties in
satisfying customers who may require that our products be certified as DRC conflict-free, which could harm
relationships with such customers and lead to a loss of revenue. These new requirements also could have the effect
of limiting the pool of suppliers from which some of our businesses source these minerals, and we may be unable to
obtain conflict-free minerals at competitive prices, which could increase costs and adversely affect the
manufacturing operations and profitability of certain of our businesses. Any one or a combination of these various
factors could negatively impact our financial condition, business and results of operations.
The proposed spending cuts imposed by the Budget Control Act of 2011 (“BCA”) could impact the operating
results and profit of our businesses.
The U.S. government continues to focus on developing and implementing spending, tax, and other initiatives to
stimulate the economy, create jobs, and reduce the deficit. One of these initiatives, the BCA, imposes greater
constraints on government spending. In an attempt to balance decisions regarding defense, homeland security, and
other federal spending priorities, the BCA immediately imposed spending caps that contain approximately $487
billion in reductions to the Department of Defense (“DoD”) base budgets over a ten-year period ending in 2021.
The BCA also provides for an automatic sequestration process, originally slated to commence in January 2013, that
imposes additional cuts of approximately $50 billion per year to the currently proposed DoD budgets for each fiscal
year beginning with 2013 and continuing through 2021. On January 2, 2013, the American Taxpayer Relief Act of
2012 (“ATRA”) was signed into law, which among other things effectively delayed the implementation of the
automatic sequestration process by approximately two months and reduced the spending cuts that were scheduled to
occur during 2013 in proportion to the delay. Although we cannot predict whether the automatic sequestration
process will be allowed to proceed as set forth in ATRA and the BCA, or whether it will be further modified by new
or additional legislation, a significant decline in overall U.S. government or DoD spending, a substantial reduction
or elimination of particular defense-related programs or significant delays in contract or task order awards could
have a material adverse effect on our businesses, result of operations and financial condition.
79
Risks Related to Advanced Circuits
Unless Advanced Circuits is able to respond to technological change at least as quickly as its competitors, its
services could be rendered obsolete, which could materially adversely affect its financial condition, business and
results of operations.
The market for Advanced Circuits’ services is characterized by rapidly changing technology and continuing process
development. The future success of its business will depend in large part upon its ability to maintain and enhance its
technological capabilities, retain qualified engineering and technical personnel, develop and market services that
meet evolving customer needs and successfully anticipate and respond to technological changes on a cost-effective
and timely basis. Advanced Circuits’ core manufacturing capabilities are for 2 to 12 layer printed circuit boards.
Trends towards miniaturization and increased performance of electronic products are dictating the use of printed
circuit boards with increased layer counts. If this trend continues Advanced Circuits may not be able to effectively
respond to the technological requirements of the changing market. If it determines that new technologies and
equipment are required to remain competitive, the development, acquisition and implementation of these
technologies may require significant capital investments. It may be unable to obtain capital for these purposes in the
future, and investments in new technologies may not result in commercially viable technological processes. Any
failure to anticipate and adapt to its customers’ changing technological needs and requirements or retain qualified
engineering and technical personnel could materially adversely affect its financial condition, business and results of
operations.
Advanced Circuits’ customers operate in industries that experience rapid technological change resulting in short
product life cycles and as a result, if the product life cycles of its customers slow materially, and research and
development expenditures are reduced, its financial condition, business and results of operations will be
materially adversely affected.
Advanced Circuits’ customers compete in markets that are characterized by rapidly changing technology, evolving
industry standards and continuous improvement in products and services. These conditions frequently result in short
product life cycles. As professionals operating in research and development departments represent the majority of
Advanced Circuits’ net sales, the rapid development of electronic products is a key driver of Advanced Circuits’
sales and operating performance. Any decline in the development and introduction of new electronic products could
slow the demand for Advanced Circuits’ services and could have a material adverse effect on its financial condition,
business and results of operations.
Electronics manufacturing services corporations are increasingly acting as intermediaries, positioning
themselves between PCB manufacturers and OEMS, which could reduce operating margins.
Advanced Circuits’ OEM customers are increasingly outsourcing the assembly of equipment to third party
manufacturers. These third party manufacturers typically assemble products for multiple customers and often
purchase circuit boards from Advanced Circuits in larger quantities than OEM manufacturers. The ability of
Advanced Circuits to sell products to these customers at margins comparable to historical averages is uncertain.
Any material erosion in margins could have a material adverse effect on Advanced Circuits’ financial condition,
business and results of operations.
Risks Related to American Furniture Manufacturing
Competition from larger furniture manufacturers may adversely affect American Furniture Manufacturing’s
business and operating results.
The residential upholstered furniture industry is highly competitive. Certain of American Furniture Manufacturing’s
competitors are larger, have broader product lines and offer widely-advertised, well-known, branded products. If
such larger competitors introduce additional products in the promotional segment of the upholstered furniture
market, the segment in which American Furniture Manufacturing primarily participates, it may negatively impact
American Furniture Manufacturing’s market share and financial performance.
80
The continued economic downturn has impacted AFM’s ability to meet the financial covenant requirements of
its credit facility pursuant to which we are the lender. We are both the majority shareholder and lender to AFM
and further deterioration in the business environment in which AFM operates could affect our relationship with
AFM.
AFM’s results of operations are affected by many economic factors, including the level of economic activity in the
markets in which AFM operates. The retail promotional furniture business has been impacted by a variety of
factors relating to the recent economic downturn, including high unemployment, lack of consumer credit, increased
fuel costs and the depressed housing market. To ensure on-going compliance with the financial covenants of
AFM’s credit facility, we, in our capacity as the majority shareholder of AFM, contributed equity proceeds of
approximately $3.5 million in 2012. While we continue to be confident in AFM’s ability to execute on its business
strategy as described in Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations
below, if unfavourable economic conditions continue to challenge the furniture industry we may seek strategic
alternatives with respect to our investment in AFM.
Risks Related to Tridien
Certain of Tridien’s products are subject to regulation by the FDA.
Certain of Tridien’s mattress products are Class II devices within Section 201(h) of the Federal FDCA (21 USC
§321(h), and, as such, are subject to the requirements of the FDCA and certain rules and regulations of the FDA.
Prior to our acquisition of Tridien, one of its subsidiaries received a warning letter from the FDA in connection with
certain deficiencies identified during a regular FDA audit, including noncompliance with certain design control
requirements, certain of the good manufacturing practice regulations defined in 21 C.F.R. 820 and certain record
keeping requirements. Tridien’s subsidiary has undertaken corrective measures to address the deficiencies and
continues to fully cooperate with the FDA. Tridien is vulnerable to actions that may be taken by the FDA which
have a material adverse effect on Tridien and/or its business. The FDA has the authority to inspect without notice,
and to take any disciplinary action that it sees fit.
A change in Medicare Reimbursement Guidelines may reduce demand for Tridien’s products.
Certain changes in Medicare Reimbursement Guidelines may reduce demand for medical support surfaces and have
a material effect on Tridien’s operating performance.
Two of Tridien’s largest customers represented approximately 59.4% of its gross sales in 2012.
Tridien has significant exposure to two key customers. The loss of either customer could negatively impact
Tridien’s financial condition, business and results of operations.
Section 4191 of the Internal Revenue Code imposes a 2.3% excise tax on the sale of certain medical devices by
the manufacturer or importer of the device beginning January 1, 2013.
If Tridien is unable to pass the tax on to its customers, such tax may have a material adverse effect on gross profit,
operating income and CAD.
Risks Related to Fox
Growth in popularity of alternative recreational activities may reduce demand for mountain bikes and off road
products which would reduce demand for Fox’s products.
Mountain biking and other off-road sports compete against numerous recreational activities for share of time and
spend of enthusiasts. Any growth in popularity of other outdoor activities at the expense of mountain biking and
off-road sports could lead to a decrease in demand for the company’s products and could materially adversely affect
Fox’s financial condition, business and results of operations.
81
Risks Related to Arnold
Changes in the cost and availability of certain rare earth minerals and magnets could materially harm Arnold’s
business, financial condition and results of operations.
Arnold manufactures precision magnetic assemblies and high-performance rare earth magnets including Samarium
Cobalt magnets. Arnold is especially susceptible to changes in the price and availability of certain rare earth
materials. The price of these materials has fluctuated significantly in recent years and we believe price fluctuations
are likely to occur in the future. Arnold’s need to maintain a continuing supply of rare earth materials makes it
difficult to resist price increases and surcharges imposed by its suppliers. Arnold’s ability to pass increases in costs
for such materials through to its customers by increasing the selling prices of its products is an important factor in
Arnold’s business. We cannot guarantee that Arnold will be able to maintain an appropriate differential at all times.
If costs for rare earth materials increase, and if Arnold is unable to pass along, or is delayed in passing along, those
increases to its customers, Arnold will experience reduced profitability. Rare earth minerals and magnets are
available from a limited number of suppliers, primarily in China. Political and civil instability and unexpected
adverse changes in laws or regulatory requirements, including with respect to export duties, quotas or embargoes,
may affect the market price and availability of rare earth materials, particularly from China. If a substantial
interruption should occur in the supply of rare earth materials, Arnold may not be able to obtain other sources of
supply in a timely fashion, at a reasonable price or as would be necessary to satisfy its requirements. Accordingly, a
change in the supply of, or price for, rare earth minerals and magnets could materially harm Arnold’s business,
financial condition and results of operations
82
ITEM 1B. UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS
NONE
83
ITEM 2. – PROPERTIES
Advanced Circuits
Advanced Circuits operations are located in an 113,000 square foot building in Aurora, Colorado, a 30,000 square
foot building in Tempe, Arizona, and a 50,000 square foot building in Maple Grove, Minnesota. These facilities are
leased and comprise both the factory and office space. The lease terms are for approximately 15 years with a
renewal option at the Aurora, Colorado location for an additional 10 years.
American Furniture
American Furniture operates primarily from a manufacturing and warehousing facility located in Ecru, MS, of
which approximately 750,000 square feet was refurbished in 2008 as a result of damage caused by a fire in 2008.
This 1.1 million square foot facility includes 350,000 square feet of manufacturing space, 750,000 square feet of
warehouse space and 82 shipping docks. AFM can add additional manufacturing lines within its existing footprint
to accommodate demand during peak times. In addition to AFM’s primary manufacturing facility, AFM owns or
leases approximately 250,000 square feet of warehouse and small manufacturing space within the vicinity of its
primary Ecru facility. AFM also leases approximately 12,000 square feet of showroom space in High Point, North
Carolina, allowing it to showcase its products to buyers during trade shows held in the area.
Arnold
Arnold is headquartered in Rochester, New York and has nine manufacturing facilities. The summary below
outlines Arnold’s property locations. Arnold owns the Ogallala, NE location and the others are leased.
Location
Marengo, IL
Marietta, OH
Marietta, OH
Marengo, IL
Norfolk, NE
Rochester, NY
Ogallala, NE
Guangdong Province,
Peoples Republic of China
Sheffield, England
Lupfig, Switzerland
Hanau, Germany
Crolles, France
Sq. Ft.
94,220
81,000
22,646
55,200
109,000
73,000
25,000
154,210
25,000
58,405
1,092
538
Use
Office/ Warehouse
Office/ Warehouse
Warehouse
Office/ Warehouse
Office/ Warehouse
Office/ Warehouse
Office/ Warehouse
Office/ Warehouse
Office/ Warehouse
Office/ Warehouse
Office
Office
CamelBak
CamelBak’s headquarters is located in Petaluma, California where they lease approximately 33,000 square feet of
office space and an additional 1,000 square feet of storage space. CamelBak also leases manufacturing and
warehouse facilities in San Diego, California (124,000 square feet) and Tijuana, Mexico (53,000 square feet), and
office space in Mareveles, Phillipines (6,500 square feet) and in Bassano, Italy (1,400 square feet).
Ergobaby
Ergobaby operates out of five offices. Its corporate headquarters is in Los Angeles, California where it leases 8,800
square feet. Ergobaby’s European headquarters is located in Hamburg, Germany where it leases approximately
2,411 square feet and a sales office in Paris, France. Ergobaby also leases 2,426 square feet of office space in
Pukalani, Hawaii. Orbit Baby leases 41,400 square feet of office, manufacturing and warehouse space in Newark,
California.
Fox
Fox leases its corporate headquarters which is located in a 51,000 square foot facility in Scotts Valley, California
and leases the main manufacturing facility which is located in an 86,000 square foot facility in Watsonville,
California. In addition, Fox leases three other smaller facilities totaling approximately 83,500 square feet in the
surrounding Santa Cruz California area.
84
Liberty Safe
Liberty Safe leases offices and warehouse facilities at two locations in Payson, Utah. The corporate headquarters
and manufacturing facility are located in a 204,000 square foot building. Liberty leases an additional warehouse
facility totaling approximately 7,200 square feet.
Tridien
Tridien leases a 33,000 square foot facility in Coral Springs, Florida, which houses its manufacturing and
distribution operations for the east coast and an 81,000 square foot facility in Corona, California, which houses the
manufacturing and distribution facilities for the west coast. Tridien also leases a 60,000 square foot manufacturing
facility and warehouse facility in Fishers, Indiana.
Our corporate offices are located in Westport, Connecticut, where we lease approximately 1,500 square feet from
our Manager.
We believe that our properties and the terms of their leases at each of our businesses are sufficient to meet our
present needs and we do not anticipate any difficulty in securing additional space, as needed, on acceptable terms.
85
ITEM 3. - LEGAL PROCEEDINGS
In the normal course of business, we are involved in various claims and legal proceedings. While the ultimate
resolution of these matters has yet to be determined, we do not believe that their outcome will have a material
adverse effect on our financial position or results of operations.
86
ITEM 4. - MINE SAFETY DISCLOSURES
Not Applicable.
87
Part II
Item 5. - Market for Registrants’ Common Equity, Related Stockholder Matters and Issuer
Purchases of Equity Securities
Market Information
Our Trust stock trades on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol “CODI” since November 1, 2011.
Previously, our stock was traded on the NASDAQ Global Select Market under the symbol “CODI.” The following
table sets forth the high and low sales prices per share as reported on the NASDAQ Global Select Market until
November 1, 2011, at which time our shares began trading on the NYSE, and thereafter on the NYSE. The highest
and lowest sales prices per share of Trust stock were $11.00 and $18.16, respectively, for the periods presented
below:
Quarter Ended
December 31, 2012
September 30, 2012
June 30, 2012
March 31, 2012
December 31, 2011
September 30, 2011
June 30, 2011
March 31, 2011
High
$ 15.70
15.31
15.16
15.58
18.16
16.30
16.30
16.08
Low
$13.49
13.72
12.12
12.58
15.92
13.03
11.00
11.45
Distribution
Declared
$ 0.36
0.36
0.36
0.36
0.36
0.36
0.36
0.36
88
COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE OF SHARES OF TRUST STOCK
The performance graph shown below compares the change in cumulative total shareholder return on shares of
Trust stock with the NASDAQ Stock Market Index, the NASDAQ Other Finance Index, the NYSE Composite
Index and the NYSE Financial Sector Index from May 16, 2006, when we completed our initial public offering,
through the quarter ended December 31, 2012. The graph sets the beginning value of shares of Trust stock and the
indices at $100, and assumes that all quarterly dividends were reinvested at the time of payment. This graph does
not forecast future performance of shares of Trust stock.
180
160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
5/16/2006
6/30/2006
9/29/2006
12/29/2006
3/31/07
6/29/07
9/28/07
12/31/07
3/31/08
6/30/08
9/30/08
12/31/08
3/31/09
6/30/09
9/30/09
12/31/09
3/31/10
6/30/10
9/30/10
12/31/10
3/31/11
6/30/11
9/30/11
12/30/11
3/30/12
6/29/12
9/28/12
12/31/12
Compass Diversified Holdings
NASDAQ Other Finance Index (US)
NASDAQ Stock Market Index (US)
NYSE Financial Sector Index
NYSE Composite Index
Data
Compass Diversified Holdings
NASDAQ Stock Market Index
NASDAQ Other Finance Index
NYSE Financial Sector Index
NYSE Composite Index
Data
Compass Diversified Holdings
NASDAQ Stock Market Index
NASDAQ Other Finance Index
NYSE Financial Sector Index
NYSE Composite Index
June 30, 2006
$ 94.88
$ 97.44
$ 94.03
$ 96.28
$ 97.39
September 30,
2006
$ 102.73
$ 101.31
$ 104.02
$ 102.56
$ 100.98
December 31,
2006
$ 117.00
$ 108.35
$ 107.59
$ 109.91
$ 108.96
March 31, 2007
$ 116.32
$ 108.64
$ 104.70
$ 108.12
$ 110.42
June 30, 2007
$ 125.83
$ 116.78
$ 112.86
$ 110.18
$ 117.71
September 30,
2007
$ 115.41
$ 121.19
$ 107.18
$ 106.81
$ 119.69
December 31,
2007
$ 109.10
$ 118.98
$ 108.11
$ 95.51
$ 116.13
89
Data
Compass Diversified Holdings
NASDAQ Stock Market Index
NASDAQ Other Finance Index
NYSE Financial Sector Index
NYSE Composite Index
Data
Compass Diversified Holdings
NASDAQ Stock Market Index
NASDAQ Other Finance Index
NYSE Financial Sector Index
NYSE Composite Index
Data
Compass Diversified Holdings
NASDAQ Stock Market Index
NASDAQ Other Finance Index
NYSE Financial Sector Index
NYSE Composite Index
Data
Compass Diversified Holdings
NASDAQ Stock Market Index
NASDAQ Other Finance Index
NYSE Financial Sector Index
NYSE Composite Index
Data
Compass Diversified Holdings
NASDAQ Stock Market Index
NASDAQ Other Finance Index
NYSE Financial Sector Index
NYSE Composite Index
March 31, 2008
$ 98.39
$ 102.24
$ 86.86
$ 83.31
$ 104.88
March 31, 2009
$ 73.55
$ 68.57
$ 55.01
$ 33.01
$ 59.39
March 31, 2010
$ 139.58
$ 107.57
$ 77.58
$ 58.00
$ 88.80
March 31, 2011
$ 143.35
$ 124.76
$ 86.58
$ 59.27
$ 100.21
March 31, 2012
$ 153.56
$ 138.69
$ 83.12
$ 55.18
$ 97.85
June 30, 2008
$ 87.54
$ 102.86
$ 85.52
$ 71.39
$ 103.25
September 30,
2008
$ 109.45
$ 93.84
$ 90.56
$ 69.23
$ 89.81
December 31,
2008
$ 90.41
$ 70.75
$ 57.91
$ 44.28
$ 68.64
June 30, 2009
September 30,
2009
December 31,
2009
$ 68.75
$ 82.32
$ 68.57
$ 44.86
$ 70.40
$ 91.64
$ 95.21
$ 74.63
$ 56.70
$ 82.39
$ 114.42
$ 101.80
$ 75.76
$ 54.32
$ 85.66
June 30, 2010
September 30,
2010
December 31,
2010
$ 124.69
$ 94.62
$ 67.39
$ 49.31
$ 77.13
$ 152.90
$ 106.26
$ 70.23
$ 53.76
$ 86.81
$ 169.77
$ 119.01
$ 84.52
$ 57.05
$ 94.95
June 30, 2011
September 30,
2011
December 31,
2011
$ 163.05
$ 124.42
$ 82.50
$ 56.77
$ 99.18
$ 122.22
$ 108.36
$ 66.10
$ 43.78
$ 80.97
$ 126.56
$ 116.87
$ 71.25
$ 46.75
$ 89.14
June 30, 2012
September 30,
2012
December 31,
2012
$ 147.20
$ 131.67
$ 80.69
$ 51.30
$ 93.02
$ 158.36
$ 139.80
$ 83.59
$ 54.71
$ 98.37
$ 159.96
$ 135.46
$ 83.87
$ 58.85
$ 100.67
90
Distributions
For the years 2012 and 2011 we have declared and paid quarterly cash distributions to holders of record as follows:
Quarter Ended
Declaration Date
Payment Date
Distribution Per Share
December 31, 2012
January 10, 2013
January 31, 2013
$0.36
September 30, 2012
October 9, 2012
October 31, 2012
$0.36
June 30, 2012
July 10, 2012
July 31, 2012
$0.36
March 31, 2012
April 10, 2012
April 30, 2012
$0.36
December 31, 2011
January 5, 2012
January 30, 2012
$0.36
September 30, 2011
October 10, 2011
October 31, 2011
$0.36
June 30, 2011
July 6, 2011
July 28, 2011
$0.36
March 31, 2011
March 10, 2011
April 12, 2011
$0.36
We currently intend to continue to declare and pay regular quarterly cash distributions on all outstanding shares
through fiscal 2013. See “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations
- Liquidity and Capital Resources” in Part II, Item 7.
91
ITEM 6. - SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA
The following table sets forth selected historical and other data of the Company and should be read in conjunction
with the more detailed consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this report. Selected financial data
below includes the results of operations, cash flow and balance sheet data of the Company for the years ended
December 31, 2012, 2011, 2010, 2009 and 2008. We completed our IPO on May 16, 2006 and used the proceeds of
the IPO and separate private placement transactions that closed in conjunction with our IPO, and from our Prior
Credit Agreement, to purchase controlling interests in four of our initial operating subsidiaries. The following table
details our acquisitions and dispositions subsequent to our IPO.
Acquisitions:
Advanced Circuits(1)
Staffmark(1)
Crosman(1)
Silvue(1)
T ridien
Aeroglide
HALO
American Furniture
Fox
Acquisition Date
May 16, 2006
May 16, 2006
May 16, 2006
May 16, 2006
August 1, 2006
February 28, 2007
February 28, 2007
August 31, 2007
January 4, 2008
Liberty
ERGObaby
CamelBak
Arnold Magnetics
(1 ) R e pre s e nt initia l o pe ra ting s ubs idia rie s .
March 31, 2010
September 16, 2010
August 24, 2011
March 5, 2012
Disposition Date
n/a
October 17, 2011
January 5, 2007
June 25, 2008
n/a
June 24, 2008
May 1, 2012
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
92
The operating results for HALO are reflected as discontinued operations in 2012, 2011, 2010, 2009 and 2008 and
are not included in the continuing operations data below. The operating results for Staffmark are reflected as
discontinued operations in 2011, 2010, 2009 and 2008 and are not included in the continuing operations data below.
The operating results for Aeroglide are reflected as discontinued operations in 2008 and are not included in the
continuing operations data below. The operating results for Silvue are reflected as discontinued operations in 2008
and are not included in the continuing operations data below. Data included below only includes activity in our
operating subsidiaries from their respective dates of acquisition.
S t a t e me nt s o f Op e ra t i o ns D a t a :
Ne t s a le s ......................................................................................................................................
C o s t o f s a le s .............................................................................................................................
Gro s s pro fit ................................................................................................................................
Ope ra ting e xpe ns e s :.................................................................................................................
S e lling, ge ne ra l a nd a dm inis tra tive ....................................................................................
S upple m e nta l put e xpe ns e (re ve rs a l)...............................................................................
M a na ge m e nt fe e s ....................................................................................................................
Am o rtiza tio n e xpe ns e ............................................................................................................
Im pa irm e nt e xpe ns e ................................................................................................................
Ope ra ting inc o m e (lo s s ) ........................................................................................................
Inc o m e (lo s s ) fro m c o ntinuing o pe ra tio ns .....................................................................
Inc o m e (lo s s ) a nd ga in (lo s s ) fro m dis c o ntinue d o pe ra tio ns ................................
Ne t inc o m e (lo s s ).....................................................................................................................
Ne t inc o m e fro m c o ntinuing o pe ra tio ns - no nc o ntro lling inte re s t ......................
Ne t inc o m e (lo s s ) fro m dis c o ntinue d o pe ra tio ns - no nc o ntro lling inte re s t ....
Ne t inc o m e (lo s s ) a ttributa ble to Ho ldings
2012
$ 884,721
605,867
278,854
161,141
15,995
17,633
30,268
-
$ 53,817
$ 5,753
(1,413)
4,340
8,508
(226)
$ (3,942)
Ye ar e nde d De ce mbe r 31,
2010
$ 504,659
366,297
138,362
2011
$ 606,644
427,500
179,144
2009
$ 364,083
266,452
97,631
110,031
11,783
16,283
22,072
27,769
$ (8,794)
$ (32,801)
105,613
72,812
5,641
2,212
$ 64,959
81,585
32,516
14,576
17,023
38,835
$ (46,173)
$ (66,324)
21,554
(44,770)
902
3,085
$ (48,757)
51,740
(1,329)
12,066
12,290
-
$ 22,864
$ (657)
(38,988)
(39,645)
2,378
(15,753)
$ (26,270)
2008
$ 372,330
271,361
100,969
58,364
6,382
12,990
12,772
-
$ 10,461
$ (12,558)
94,345
81,787
1,628
1,865
$ 78,294
B a s i c a nd f ul l y d i l ut e d i nc o me ( l o s s ) p e r s ha re a t t ri b ut a b l e t o
Ho l d i ng s :
C o ntinuing o pe ra tio ns ......................................................................................................
Dis c o ntinue d o pe ra tio ns .................................................................................................
B a s ic a nd fully dilute d inc o m e (lo s s ) pe r s ha re a ttributa ble to Ho ldings ............
$ (0.06)
(0.02)
$ (0.08)
$ (0.81)
2.18
$ 1.37
$ (1.64)
0.45
$ (1.19)
$ (0.09)
(0.67)
$ (0.76)
$ (0.45)
2.93
$ 2.48
C a s h F lo w D a t a :
C a s h pro vide d by o pe ra ting a c tivitie s ..............................................................................
C a s h us e d in inve s ting a c tivitie s ........................................................................................
C a s h (us e d in) pro vide d by fina nc ing a c tivitie s ............................................................
Ne t (de c re a s e ) inc re a s e in c a s h a nd c a s h e quiva le nts ..............................................
$ 52,566
(84,426)
(82,232)
(114,129)
$ 91,374
(86,620)
114,080
118,834
$ 44,841
(182,392)
119,592
(17,959)
$ 20,213
(4,982)
(81,209)
(65,978)
$ 40,549
(24,793)
(37,561)
(21,805)
2012
2011
De ce mbe r 31,
2010
2009
2008
B a la n c e S h e e t D a t a :
C urre nt a s s e ts ...........................................................................................................................
$
267,659
$
360,221
$
333,339
$
275,027
$
335,201
To ta l a s s e ts ...............................................................................................................................
C urre nt lia bilitie s .......................................................................................................................
Lo ng-te rm de bt ..........................................................................................................................
To ta l lia bilitie s ............................................................................................................................
No nc o ntro lling inte re s ts .......................................................................................................
S ha re ho lde rs ’ e quity a ttributa ble to Ho ldings ...............................................................
955,201
113,799
267,008
498,989
41,584
414,628
1,029,906
118,162
214,000
433,428
98,969
497,509
984,041
151,404
94,000
408,131
87,840
488,070
831,012
129,887
74,000
322,946
70,905
437,161
984,336
139,370
151,000
440,458
79,431
464,447
93
ITEM 7. - MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND
RESULTS OF OPERATIONS
This item 7 contains forward-looking statements. Forward-looking statements in this Annual Report on Form
10-K are subject to a number of risks and uncertainties, some of which are beyond our control. Our actual
results, performance, prospects or opportunities could differ materially from those expressed in or implied by the
forward-looking statements. Additional risks of which we are not currently aware or which we currently deem
immaterial could also cause our actual results to differ, including those discussed in the sections entitled
“Forward-Looking Statements” and “Risk Factors” included elsewhere in this Annual Report.
Overview
Compass Diversified Holdings, a Delaware statutory trust, was incorporated in Delaware on November 18, 2005.
Compass Group Diversified Holdings, LLC, a Delaware limited liability Company, was also formed on November
18, 2005. In accordance with the Trust Agreement, the Trust is sole owner of 100% of the Trust Interests (as
defined in the LLC Agreement) of the Company and, pursuant to the LLC Agreement, the Company has
outstanding, the identical number of Trust Interests as the number of outstanding shares of the Trust. The Manager
is the sole owner of the Allocation Interests of the Company. The Company is the operating entity with a board of
directors and other corporate governance responsibilities, similar to that of a Delaware corporation.
The Trust and the Company were formed to acquire and manage a group of small and middle-market businesses
headquartered in North America. We characterize small and middle market businesses as those that generate annual
cash flows of up to $60 million. We focus on companies of this size because we believe that these companies are
more able to achieve growth rates above those of their relevant industries and are also frequently more susceptible
to efforts to improve earnings and cash flow.
In pursuing new acquisitions, we seek businesses with the following characteristics:
(cid:120) North American base of operations;
(cid:120)
stable and growing earnings and cash flow;
(cid:120) maintains a significant market share in defensible industry niche (i.e., has a “reason to exist”);
(cid:120)
(cid:120)
(cid:120)
solid and proven management team with meaningful incentives;
low technological and/or product obsolescence risk; and
a diversified customer and supplier base.
Our management team’s strategy for our subsidiaries involves:
•
•
•
•
utilizing structured incentive compensation programs tailored to each business in order to attract, recruit
and retain talented managers to operate our businesses;
regularly monitoring financial and operational performance, instilling consistent financial discipline, and
supporting management in the development and implementation of information systems to effectively
achieve these goals;
assisting management in their analysis and pursuit of prudent organic cash flow growth strategies (both
revenue and cost related);
identifying and working with management to execute attractive external growth and acquisition
opportunities; and
94
•
forming strong subsidiary level boards of directors to supplement management in their development and
implementation of strategic goals and objectives.
Based on the experience of our management team and its ability to identify and negotiate acquisitions, we believe
we are well positioned to acquire additional attractive businesses. Our management team has a large network of
approximately 2,000 deal intermediaries to whom it actively markets and who we expect to expose us to potential
acquisitions. Through this network, as well as our management team’s active proprietary transaction sourcing
efforts, we typically have a substantial pipeline of potential acquisition targets. In consummating transactions, our
management team has, in the past, been able to successfully navigate complex situations surrounding acquisitions,
including corporate spin-offs, transitions of family-owned businesses, management buy-outs and reorganizations.
We believe the flexibility, creativity, experience and expertise of our management team in structuring transactions
provides us with a strategic advantage by allowing us to consider non-traditional and complex transactions tailored
to fit a specific acquisition target.
In addition, because we intend to fund acquisitions through the utilization of our Revolving Credit Facility, we do
not expect to be subject to delays in or conditions by closing acquisitions that would be typically associated with
transaction specific financing, as is typically the case in such acquisitions. We believe this advantage is a powerful
one and is highly unusual in the marketplace for acquisitions in which we operate.
Initial public offering and Company formation
On May 16, 2006, we completed our initial public offering of 13,500,000 shares of the Trust at an offering price of
$15.00 per share (the “IPO”). Subsequent to the IPO the Company’s board of directors engaged our Manager to
externally manage the day-to-day operations and affairs of the Company, oversee the management and operations of
the businesses and to perform those services customarily performed by executive officers of a public company.
From May 16, 2006 through December 31, 2012, we purchased thirteen businesses (each of our businesses is
treated as a separate operating segment) and disposed of five as follows:
Acquisitions
(cid:120) On May 16, 2006, we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in CBS Personnel Holdings for
$55 million and later Staffmark Holdings, Inc., which we refer to as Staffmark, for approximately $129
million.
(cid:120) On May 16, 2006, we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in Crosman for approximately
$73 million.
(cid:120) On May 16, 2006, we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in Advanced Circuits for
approximately $81 million. As of December 31, 2012, we own approximately 69.4% of the common
stock on a primary basis and 69.4% fully diluted basis.
(cid:120) On May 16, 2006, we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in Silvue for approximately $36
million.
(cid:120) On August 1, 2006, we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in Tridien for approximately
$31 million. As of December 31, 2012, we own approximately 81.3% of the common stock on a primary
basis and 67.4% on a fully diluted basis.
(cid:120) On February 28, 2007, we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in Aeroglide for
approximately $58 million.
(cid:120) On February 28, 2007, we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in HALO for approximately
$62 million.
(cid:120) On August 31, 2007, we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in American Furniture for
approximately $97 million. As of December 31, 2012, we own approximately 99.9% of the common
stock on a primary basis and 99.9% on a fully diluted basis.
95
(cid:120) On January 4, 2008, we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in Fox for approximately $80.4
million. As of December 31, 2012, we own approximately 75.8% of the common stock on a primary basis
and 70.6% on a fully diluted basis.
(cid:120) On March 31, 2010, we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in Liberty Safe for
approximately $70.2 million. As of December 31, 2012 we own approximately 96.2% on a primary basis
and 86.7% on a fully diluted basis.
(cid:120) On September 16, 2010, we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in Ergobaby for
approximately $85.2 million. As of December 31, 2012, we own approximately 81.1% on a primary basis
and 77.1% on a fully diluted basis.
(cid:120) On August 24, 2011, we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in CamelBak for
approximately $258.6 million. As of December 31, 2012, we own approximately 89.9% on a primary
basis and 79.7% on a fully diluted basis.
(cid:120) On March 5, 2012, we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in Arnold Magnetics for
approximately $130.5 million. As of December 31, 2012, we own approximately 96.7% on a primary
basis and 87.6% on a fully diluted basis.
Dispositions
(cid:120) On January 5, 2007, we sold all of our interest in Crosman, for approximately $143 million. We recorded
a gain on the sale in the first quarter of 2007 of approximately $36 million.
(cid:120) On June 24, 2008, we sold all of our interest in Aeroglide, for approximately $95 million. We recorded a
gain on the sale in the second quarter of 2008 of approximately $34 million.
(cid:120) On June 25, 2008, we sold all of our interest in Silvue, for approximately $95 million. We recorded a gain
on the sale in the second quarter of 2008 of approximately $39 million.
(cid:120) On October 17, 2011, we sold our interest in Staffmark for approximately $217.2 million. We recorded a
gain on the sale in the fourth quarter of 2011 of approximately $89 million.
(cid:120) On May 1, 2012 we sold our interest in HALO for approximately $66.0 million. We recorded a loss on
the sale of $0.5 million in 2012.
We are dependent on the earnings of, and cash receipts from, the businesses that we own in order to meet our
corporate overhead and management fee expenses and to pay distributions. These earnings and distributions, net of
any non-controlling interest in these businesses, are available to:
(cid:120)
(cid:120)
(cid:120)
meet capital expenditure requirements, management fees and corporate overhead charges;
fund distributions from the businesses to the Company; and
be distributed by the Trust to shareholders.
2012 Highlights
Acquisition of Arnold Magnetics
On March 5, 2012, we purchased a controlling interest in Arnold Magnetics, with headquarters in Rochester, NY.
Arnold Magnetics has an operating history of more than 100 years and is a leading global manufacturer of
engineered magnetic solutions for a wide range of specialty applications and end-markets, including energy,
medical, aerospace and defense, consumer electronics, general industrial and automotive. From its nine
manufacturing facilities located in the United States, the United Kingdom, Switzerland and China, the company
produces high performance permanent magnets, flexible magnets and precision foil products that are mission
critical in motors, generators, sensors and other systems and components. Based on its long-term relationships,
Arnold Magnetics has built a diverse and blue-chip customer base totaling more than 2,000 clients worldwide.
The purchase price, including proceeds from non-controlling interests, was approximately $130.5 million
(excluding acquisition-related costs), was based on a total enterprise value of $124.2 million, and included
approximately $6.3 million in cash and working capital. Acquisition related costs were approximately $4.8 million.
96
We funded the acquisition through available cash on hand and a draw of $25 million on our Revolving Credit
Facility. Arnold’s management and certain other investors invested in the transaction alongside us, collectively
representing approximately 3.4% in initial non-controlling interest on a primary and fully diluted basis. CGM acted
as an advisor to the Company in the transaction and received fees and expense payments totaling approximately
$1.2 million.
Preferred Stock Redemption
On March 6, 2012, we redeemed CamelBak’s 11% convertible preferred stock for $45.3 million plus accrued
dividends of $2.7 million, from an affiliate of CGI Magyar Holdings LLC, CODI’s largest shareholder. The
redemption was funded with available cash on hand.
Debt Re-pricing
On April 2, 2012, we exercised our option for an incremental term loan in the amount of $30 million. The
incremental term loan was issued at 99% of par value and increased the term loans outstanding under the Credit
Facility from approximately $224.4 million to approximately $254.4 million. In addition, in connection with the
option we reduced the margin on Term Loan Facility LIBOR Loans from 6.00% to 5.00%, Base Rate Loans from
5.00% to 4.00% and reduced the LIBOR floor from 1.50% to 1.25%. We paid an amendment fee of approximately
$2.2 million, and incurred additional fees and expenses of approximately $0.6 million. Net proceeds from this
incremental term loan were used to reduce outstanding loans on the Revolving Credit Facility.
Sale of Halo
On May 1, 2012, we sold all of the issued and outstanding capital stock of HALO to Candlelight Investment
Holdings, Inc. The total enterprise value received for HALO was approximately $76.5 million. At the closing, we
received approximately $66.0 million in cash in respect of our debt and equity interests in HALO and for the
payment of accrued interest and fees after payments to non-controlling shareholders and payment of all transaction
expenses. The net proceeds were used to repay outstanding debt under our Revolving Credit Facility. We recorded
a loss on the sale of HALO of $0.5 million.
2012 Distributions
For the 2012 fiscal year we declared distributions to our shareholders totaling $1.44 per share.
Areas of focus in 2012
The areas of focus for 2012, which are generally applicable to each of our businesses, include:
(cid:120) Taking advantage, where possible to increase market share in each of our market niche leading companies at
the expense of less well capitalized competitors;
(cid:120) Achieving sales growth, technological excellence and manufacturing capability through global expansion;
(cid:120) Continuing to grow through disciplined, strategic acquisitions and rigorous integration processes;
(cid:120) Continuing to pursue expense reduction and cost savings through contraction in discretionary spending, and
reductions in workforce and production levels in response to lower production volume; and
(cid:120) Driving free cash flow through increased net income and effective working capital management enabling
continued investment in our businesses, strategic acquisitions, and enabling us to return value to our
shareholders.
Middle market deal flow during 2012 was mixed, with tax-driven transactions increasing offset by the impact that
uncertain macroeconomic and political environments had on potential sellers. Valuation levels for high quality
acquisitions were robust due to well capitalized strategic and financial buyers seeking to deploy equity capital
coupled with the availability of debt financing with attractive terms. Despite current softness, we are cautiously
optimistic that 2013 will reverse this trend of fewer transactions and believe that acquisition opportunities may
increase for us in the latter half of 2013 as the overall acquisition environment improves, as well as due to certain
marketing initiatives we are currently undertaking.
97
Results of Operations
We were formed on November 18, 2005 and acquired our existing businesses (segments) as follows:
May 16, 2006
August 1, 2006
August 31, 2007
January 4, 2008
March 31, 2010
September 16, 2010
Advanced Circuits
Tridien
American Furniture
Fox
Liberty Safe
Ergobaby
August 24, 2011
March 5, 2012
CamelBak
Arnold
Fiscal 2012, 2011 and 2010 each represent a full year of operating results included in our consolidated results of
operations for four of our businesses. The remaining four businesses were acquired during fiscal 2012, 2011 and
2010 (see table above). As a result, we cannot provide a meaningful comparison of our actual historical
consolidated results of operations for the year ended December 31, 2012 with the two prior years. In the following
results of operations, we provide (i) our actual consolidated results of operations for the years ended December 31,
2012, 2011 and 2010, which includes the historical results of operations of each of our businesses (operating
segments) from the date of acquisition and (ii) comparative historical results of operations for each of our
businesses on a stand-alone basis (“Results of Operations – Our Businesses”), for each of the years ended December
31, 2012, 2011 and for the seven businesses purchased prior to January 1, 2012, we include a comparative 2010
fiscal year as well. All years presented include relevant pro-forma adjustments and explanations where
appropriate. The results below do not include the results of HALO, as this operating business was sold in May 2012
and its results of operations for all years is reflected as a component of discontinued operations.
Consolidated Results of Operations — Compass Diversified Holdings
Net sales
Cost of sales (1)
Gross profit
Selling, general and administrative expense (1)
Management fees
Supplemental put expense
Amortization of intangibles
Impairment expense
Operating income (loss)
Years Ended December 31,
2012
$ 884,721
605,867
278,854
161,141
17,633
15,995
30,268
-
$ 53,817
2011
(in thousands)
$ 606,644
427,500
179,144
110,031
16,283
11,783
22,072
27,769
$ (8,794)
2010
$ 504,659
366,297
138,362
81,585
14,576
32,516
17,023
38,835
$ (46,173)
(1) We reclassified certain costs from selling, general and administrative expense to cost of sales totaling $6.6 million in 2011 and 2010
related to AFM’s revaluation of its standard costing system. Refer to AFM’s Results of Operations discussion that follows for more
information.
Net sales
On a consolidated basis, net sales increased $278.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to
2011, and $102.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 compared to 2010. The increases for both years
are due principally to increased revenues (and in the case of Arnold Magnetics and CamelBak, incremental
revenues) at each of our segments with the exception of American Furniture and Tridien. We realized revenues in
the year ended December 31, 2012 totaling approximately $104.2 million and $157.6 million at Arnold Magnetics
and CamelBak, respectively, which we acquired in March 2012 and August 2011, respectively, compared to $42.6
million in revenues recognized at CamelBak over the last four months of 2011. Refer to “Results of Operations –
Our Businesses” for a more detailed analysis of net sales for each business segment.
98
We do not generate any revenues apart from those generated by the businesses we own. We may generate interest
income on the investment of available funds, but expect such earnings to be minimal. Our investment in our
businesses is typically in the form of loans from the Company to such businesses, as well as equity interests in those
businesses. Cash flows coming to the Trust and the Company are the result of interest payments on those loans,
amortization of those loans and, in some cases, dividends on our equity ownership. However, on a consolidated
basis these items will be eliminated.
Cost of sales
On a consolidated basis, cost of sales increased approximately $178.4 million for the year ended December 31,
2012, compared to 2011, and increased approximately $61.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2011
compared to 2010. These increases are due almost entirely to the corresponding increase in net sales. Gross profit
as a percentage of net sales totaled approximately 31.5% and 29.5% for the years ended December 31, 2012 and
2011, respectively. Gross profit as a percentage of net sales totaled approximately 27.4% for the year ended
December 31, 2010. The increase in gross profit as a percentage of sales for both the year ended December 31, 2012
compared to the same period in 2011 and the year ended December 31, 2011 compared to the same period in 2010
is principally attributable to the inclusion of the incremental CamelBak net sales in 2012 and 2011 and the inclusion
of twelve months of Ergobaby net sales in 2011 compared to three months in 2010. CamelBak gross profit margin
during the year ended December 31, 2012 was approximately 46% and ErgoBaby’s gross profit margin in 2011 was
approximately 65%. Refer to “Results of Operations - Our Businesses” for a more detailed analysis of cost of sales
for each business segment.
Selling, general and administrative expense
On a consolidated basis, selling, general and administrative expense increased approximately $51.1 million for the
year ended December 31, 2012, compared to the same period in 2011, and increased approximately $28.4 million
for the year ended December 31, 2011 compared to the same period in 2010. The majority of these increases are
due to increases in costs directly tied to sales, such as commissions and direct customer support services, and
incremental selling, general and administrative costs over the prior year at Ergobaby’s Orbit Baby segment, Arnold
Magnetics and CamelBak during 2012 ($44.6 million) and CamelBak and Ergobaby during 2011 over the prior year
($27.0 million). At the corporate level, general and administrative costs increased approximately $2.3 million for
the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to the same period in 2011 and decreased approximately $1.1 million
for the year ended December 31, 2011 compared to the same period in 2010. The year over year increase in 2012 is
due principally to (i) a non-cash charge totaling approximately $1.2 million related to the decrease in the fair value
of a call option granted to the former CEO of Tridien during 2011; (ii) increased audit fees in connection with the
Arnold acquisition ($0.7 million); and increased salaries and wages ($0.3 million). The year over year decrease in
2011 of approximately $1.1 million is due principally to a non-cash charge totaling approximately $1.2 million
related to the decrease in the fair value of a call option granted to the former CEO of Tridien written down in 2011.
-Refer to “Results of Operations – Our Businesses”, for a more detailed analysis of selling, general and
administrative expense by segment.
Management fees
Pursuant to the Management Services Agreement (“MSA”), we pay CGM a quarterly management fee equal to
0.5% (2.0% annually) of our consolidated adjusted net assets. We accrue for the management fee on a quarterly
basis. For the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010 we incurred approximately $17.6 million,
$16.3 million and $14.6 million respectively, in expense for these fees. The increase in management fees for the
year ended December 31, 2012 compared to the same period in 2011 is due principally to the increase in
consolidated adjusted net assets as of December 31, 2012 in connection with the Arnold Magnetics acquisition in
March 2012. The increase in management fees in 2011 compared to 2010 is due principally to the inclusion of the
2011 acquisition of CamelBak in our consolidated adjusted net assets, offset in part by the $27.8 million impairment
charge at American Furniture. Refer to - “Related Party Transactions and Certain Transactions Involving our
Businesses” for more information about the MSA.
Supplemental put expense
In 2006, we entered into a Supplemental Put Agreement with our Manager pursuant to which our Manager has the
right to cause us to purchase the Allocation Interests then owned by them upon termination of the MSA. The
Company accrued approximately $16.0 million, $11.8 million and $32.5 million in expense during the years ended
December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively. This expense represents that portion of the estimated
99
increase/decrease in the fair value of our businesses over our original basis in those businesses that our Manager is
entitled to if the MSA were terminated or those businesses were sold. The annual charges in each of the years 2012,
2011, and 2010 reflect a net increase in fair value of our majority owned subsidiaries compared to the previous year.
- Please refer to “Related Party Transactions and Certain Transactions Involving our Businesses” and “Critical
Accounting Estimates” for more information about the Supplemental Put Agreement.
Impairment expense
We incurred an impairment charge at American Furniture in the years ended December 31, 2011 and December 31,
2010 totaling approximately $27.8 million and $38.8 million, respectively. American Furniture incurred an
impairment charge to its goodwill ($5.9 million), trade name ($2.4 million), and long-lived assets ($18.4 million)
aggregating $26.7 million during the year ended December 31, 2011, which was triggered based on results of
operations which had deteriorated significantly during the year. In addition, in connection with the cessation and
outsourcing of AFM’s internal trucking operations we reclassified a number of trucks, trailers and a warehouse
from property, plant and equipment to assets held for sale. In connection with this we wrote these assets down
from their net book value to an amount equal to their net realizable value less disposal costs with the difference,
aggregating approximately $1.1 million, being charged to impairment expense. During the year ended 2010 we
wrote down the value of goodwill by $35.5 million and the value of its trade name by $3.3 million. In all cases the
write downs were triggered by a significant deterioration in American Furniture’s operations and profitability
caused by an unprecedented drop in the promotional furniture market and demand for its product. The combination
of increased unemployment, together with significant decreases in home purchases and availability of consumer
credit has created the worst market for promotional furniture sales over the last two years that has been experienced
over the last two decades. The remaining noncurrent asset subject to fair value testing at American Furniture is its
trade name totaling approximately $0.6 million and property and equipment totaling $0.5 million. We do not
anticipate any further write downs to American Furniture’s assets going forward.
We completed our annual impairment analysis of goodwill as of March 31, 2012 and there was no indication of
goodwill impairment at any of our reporting units.
Results of Operations — Our Businesses
As previously discussed, we acquired our businesses on various acquisition dates beginning May 16, 2006 (see table
above). As a result, our consolidated operating results only include the results of operations since the acquisition
date associated with each of our businesses. The following discussion reflects a comparison of the historical results
of operations for each of our initial businesses (segments), the 2007, 2008, 2010 and 2011 acquisitions for the
complete fiscal years ending December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010. For the 2012 acquisition, the following
discussion reflects comparative pro-forma results of operations for the entire fiscal years ending December 31, 2012
and 2011 as if we had acquired the businesses on January 1, 2011. Where appropriate, relevant pro-forma
adjustments are reflected as part of the historical operating results. Adjustments to depreciation and amortization
resulting from purchase allocations that are not “pushed down” to a business are not included as a component of
operating results. We believe this presentation enhances the discussion and provides a more meaningful
comparison of operating results. The following operating results of our businesses are not necessarily indicative of
the results to be expected for a full year, going forward.
Advanced Circuits
Overview
Advanced Circuits is a provider of prototype, quick-turn and volume production PCBs to customers throughout the
United States. Collectively, prototype and quick-turn PCBs represent approximately 60% of Advanced Circuits’
gross revenues. Prototype and quick-turn PCBs typically command higher margins than volume production PCBs
given that customers require high levels of responsiveness, technical support and timely delivery of prototype and
quick-turn PCBs and are willing to pay a premium for them. Advanced Circuits is able to meet its customers’
demands by manufacturing custom PCBs in as little as 24 hours, while maintaining over 98.0% error-free
production rates and real-time customer service and product tracking 24 hours per day.
100
While global demand for PCBs has remained strong in recent years, industry wide domestic production has declined
since 2000. In contrast, Advanced Circuits’ revenues increased steadily through 2008 (2009 saw a slight reduction)
and increased again in 2010 and 2011, as its customers’ prototype and quick-turn PCB requirements, such as small
quantity orders and rapid turnaround, are less able to be met by low cost volume manufacturers in Asia and
elsewhere. Advanced Circuits’ management anticipates that demand for its prototype and quick-turn printed circuit
boards will remain strong and anticipates that demand will be impacted less by current economic conditions than by
its longer lead time production business, which is driven more by consumer purchasing patterns and capital
investments by businesses.
We purchased a controlling interest in Advanced Circuits on May 16, 2006.
On March 11, 2010, Advanced Circuits acquired Circuit Express based in Tempe, Arizona for approximately $16.1
million. Circuit Express focuses on quick-turn manufacturing of prototype and low-volume quantities of rigid
PCBs primarily for aerospace and defense related customers. On May 23, 2012 Advanced Circuits acquired
Universal Circuits for approximately $2.3 million. Universal Circuits supplies PCBs to major military, aerospace,
and medical original equipment manufacturers and contract manufacturers. Universal Circuits’ Minnesota facility
meets certain Department of Defense clearance requirements and is noted for custom and advanced technologies.
Universal Circuits’ sales are primarily in the long-lead sector. For the year ended December 31, 2012, the
consolidated results of operations of Advanced Circuits includes net sales of Universal Circuits aggregating $8.5
million and gross profit of Universal Circuits aggregating $2.0 million, respectively. The following Results of
Operations does not include any operating results from these two acquisitions prior to their respective date of
acquisition.
Results of Operations
The table below summarizes the statement of operations for Advanced Circuits for the fiscal years ending
December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010.
Year Ended December 31,
2012
2011
2010
Net sales ........................................................................................ $ 84,071
42,575
Cost of sales ..................................................................................
41,496
Gross profit ..............................................................................
Selling, general and administrative expenses ...............................
13,975
Management fees .......................................................................... 500
3,054
Amortization of intangibles ..........................................................
Income from operations .......................................................... $ 23,967
(in thousands)
$ 78,506
35,564
42,942
12,855
500
3,026
$ 26,561
$ 74,481
33,396
41,085
17,333
500
2,864
$ 20,388
Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2012 Compared to Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2011
Net sales
Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2012 increased approximately $5.6 million or 7.1%, over the
corresponding year ended December 31, 2011. The increase in net sales is a result of an increase in gross sales of
prototype and quick-turn production PCBs ($2.6 million), long-lead PCBs ($3.5 million) and assembly revenue
($2.0 million) during the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to the same period of 2011, offset in part by an
increase in promotion and discount charges ($2.3 million). The increase in sales in all sectors, with the exception of
assembly sales, is attributable to incremental sales associated with Universal Circuits during the year ended
December 31, 2012. The increase in promotion and discount charges in 2012 compared to the same period of 2011
are principally the result of increased discounting and price promotions incurred during 2012 in response to
competitor’s pricing in the long-lead sector. Assembly sales increased approximately $2.1 million in the year ended
December 31, 2012 compared to the same period in 2011 and represented 9.2% of gross sales in 2012 compared to
7.6% in 2011.
101
Sales of quick-turn and prototype PCBs represented approximately 60.3% of net sales in 2012 compared to 62.9%
in 2011.
Cost of sales
Cost of sales for the year ended December 31, 2012 increased approximately $7.0 million from the comparable
period in 2011 due principally to the increase in sales. Gross profit as a percentage of sales decreased during the
year ended December 31, 2012 (49.4% at December 31, 2012 compared to 54.7% at December 31, 2011). This
decrease in margin is principally the result of: (i) the promotional pricing in long-lead PCB sales during the year
ended December 31, 2012 noted above (1.3% impact); (ii) sales attributable to Universal Circuits (2.8% impact);
and a larger proportion of assembly sales during the year ended December 31, 2012, compared to 2011, each which
carry lower margins.
Selling, general and administrative expense
Selling, general and administrative expense increased approximately $1.1 million during the year ended December
31, 2012 compared to the same period in 2011 due principally to costs incurred at Universal Circuits for the year
ended December 31, 2012. Selling, general and administrative costs were 16.6% of net sales in the year ended
December 31, 2012 compared to 16.4% during the same period in 2011.
Income from operations
Operating income for the year ended December 31, 2012 was approximately $24.0 million compared to $26.6
million earned in the same period in 2011, a decrease of approximately $2.6 million, principally as a result of those
factors described above.
Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2011 Compared to Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2010
Net sales
Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2011 were approximately $78.5 million compared to approximately
$74.5 million for the year ended December 31, 2010, an increase of $4.0 million or 5.4%. The increase in gross
sales is principally due to increased sales in quick-turn ($2.1 million) and prototype ($1.4 million) production PCBs,
offset in part by a decrease in revenues from long-lead ($0.2 million) and sub-contract ($0.5 million) production
PCBs. Quick-turn production PCBs represented approximately 33.6% of gross sales for the year ended December
31, 2011 compared to approximately 32.6% for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2010. Prototype production
represented approximately 29.3% of gross sales for the year ended December 31, 2011 compared to approximately
28.9% for the same period in 2010. Assembly sales which increased approximately $1.1 million represented
approximately 7.6% of gross sales in 2011 compared to approximately 6.6% in 2010.
The increase in gross sales in both the quick turn and prototype production in 2011 when compared to 2010 is
partially the result of sales attributable to ACI-Tempe operations (Circuit Express) for a full twelve month period in
the year ended December 31, 2011. The decrease in sales attributable to sub-contract and assembly production is
principally attributable to the company’s broader service offerings following its acquisition of Circuit Express and
reduced need to sub-contract.
Cost of sales
Cost of sales for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2011 was approximately $35.6 million compared to
approximately $33.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2010, an increase of approximately $2.2 million or
6.5%. The increase in cost of sales was largely due to the increase in net sales. Gross profit as a percentage of net
sales for the year ended December 31, 2011 was 54.7% compared to 55.2% in 2010. The decrease in gross profit as
a percentage of sales in 2011 is principally the result of a larger portion of revenue being driven from the company’s
Tempe operations which carry a lower gross margin.
Selling, general and administrative expenses
Selling, general and administrative expense decreased approximately $4.5 million during the year ended December
31, 2011 compared to the same period in 2010 due principally to non-cash stock compensation issued to
management in January 2010 totaling approximately $3.8 million and $0.3 million in direct acquisition costs
incurred in acquiring ACI-Tempe in 2010. Ignoring these one-time 2010 charges, selling, general and
administrative expense decreased approximately $0.4 million during the year ended December 31, 2011 compared
102
to the same period in 2010. Advertising and marketing costs increased $0.2 million, costs associated with exploring
new business acquisitions increased and employee benefits increased $0.1 million. These increases were more than
offset by lower overhead costs at the Tempe location as the consolidated production in two locations from three in
the latter half of 2011.
Income from operations
Income from operations for the year ended December 31, 2011 was $26.6 million compared to $20.4 million for the
year ended December 31, 2010, an increase of $6.2 million. This increase primarily was the result of increased net
sales and other factors described above.
American Furniture
Overview
Founded in 1998 and headquartered in Ecru, Mississippi, American Furniture is a leading U.S. manufacturer of
upholstered furniture, focused exclusively on the promotional segment of the furniture industry. American
Furniture offers a broad product line of stationary and motion furniture, including sofas, loveseats, sectionals,
recliners and complementary products, sold primarily at retail price points ranging between $199 and $1,399.
American Furniture is a low-cost manufacturer and is able to ship most products in its line to over 800 customers
within 48 hours of receiving an order.
American Furniture’s products are adapted from established designs in the following categories: (i) motion and
recliner; (ii) stationary; (iii) occasional chair and; (iv) accent tables.
American Furniture incurred an impairment charge to its goodwill ($5.9 million), trade name ($2.4 million) and
long-lived assets ($18.4 million) aggregating $26.7 million during the year ended December 31, 2011, which was
triggered based on results of operations which had deteriorated significantly during the year. In addition, in
connection with the cessation and outsourcing of AFM’s internal trucking operations we reclassified a number of
trucks, trailers and a warehouse from property, plant and equipment to assets held for sale. In connection with this,
we wrote these assets down from their net book value to an amount equal to their net realizable value less disposal
costs with the difference, aggregating approximately $1.1 million, being charged to impairment expense. During
the year ended 2010, we wrote down the value of goodwill by $35.5 million and the value of its trade name by $3.3
million. In all cases the write downs were triggered by a significant deterioration in American Furniture’s
operations and profitability caused by an unprecedented drop in the promotional furniture market and demand for its
product. The combination of increased unemployment, together with significant decreases in home purchases and
availability of consumer credit has created the worst market for promotional furniture sales over the last two years
than has been experienced over the last two decades.
American Furniture implemented a revised standard costing system in the year 2011 which required American
Furniture to reclassify certain costs between cost of sales and selling, general and administrative expenses. The
change in format consists of reclassifying the trucking fleet expenses from selling, general and administrative
expenses into cost of sales as well as re-classifying certain manufacturing related expenses including rent,
insurance, utilities and workers compensation from selling, general and administrative costs to cost of sales. The
format of reporting cost of sales going forward together with the revised standard costing system and the
revaluation of standard costs allows management to more timely react to changes in supply costs, product demand
and overall price structure going forward, which in turn has mitigated the accumulation of lower margin product
and has allowed for more advantageous product procurement. The results of operations for the years ended
December 31, 2011 and 2010 includes the $6.6 million reclassification from selling, general and administrative
expenses to cost of sales in order to make them consistent with current presentation.
103
Results of Operations
The table below summarizes the results of operations for American Furniture for the fiscal years ending December
31, 2012, 2011 and 2010. We purchased a controlling interest in American Furniture on August 31, 2007.
Year Ended December 31,
2012
Net sales ................................................................................................. $ 91,455
85,530
Cost of sales ...........................................................................................
5,925
Gross profit .......................................................................................
Selling, general and administrative expenses .........................................
7,393
Management fees ................................................................................... -
Amortization of intangibles ...................................................................
Impairment expense ...............................................................................
-
Loss from operations ........................................................................ $ (1,520)
52
2011
(in thousands)
$ 105,345
101,030
4,315
9,549
125
2,108
27,769
$ (35,236)
2010
$ 136,901
121,558
15,343
10,913
500
2,183
38,835
$ (37,088)
Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2012 Compared to Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2011
Net sales
Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2012 decreased approximately $13.9 million, or 13.2%, over the
corresponding year ended December 31, 2011. Stationary product gross sales decreased approximately $13.4
million, and motion product sales decreased approximately $1.0 million during the year ended December 31, 2012
compared to the same period of 2011. Sales of other products and a reduction in fuel surcharges are responsible for
the remaining decrease in net sales during the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to 2011. Recliner sales
increased approximately $1.7 million during this same period. The decrease in gross sales in the stationary and
motion product categories and other products is principally the result of a continued soft current retail environment
which has caused increasing competition in pricing in the promotional furniture category during the year ended
December 31, 2012. In addition, our inability to ship certain products during the first quarter 2012, due to a delay
in receiving fabric kits that we outsource to China that we were not able to replace, contributed approximately $1.0
million to the decline in sales. Sales to a large national retailer decreased approximately $8.1 million in 2012
compared to 2011. We do not expect to recapture these sales in 2013. The increase in recliner product sales is the
result of supplying product to one of our largest customers for their recliner promotion event.
Cost of sales
Cost of sales decreased approximately $15.5 million in the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to the same
period of 2011 and is due primarily to the corresponding decrease in sales. Gross profit as a percentage of sales was
6.5% in the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to 4.1% in 2011. The increase in gross profit as a percentage
of sales of approximately 2.4% during the year ended December 31, 2012 is principally attributable to (i) a $1.6
million write off to adjust overhead absorption in inventory resulting from adjustments to its standard costs in July
2011; (ii) lower direct labor costs, primarily due to increased efficiencies in stationary and recliner production, and;
(iii) increased selling prices on products and fewer closeout offerings over the course of the year due to the
improvement of our inventory management. A number of cost saving initiatives were implemented throughout
2012, including facility consolidation and outsourcing frame cutting that contributed to the increase in gross profit
margins in 2012 compared to 2011 that we believe will continue to have a positive impact on gross profit margins in
2013.
Selling, general and administrative expense
Selling, general and administrative expense for the year ended December 31, 2012, decreased approximately $2.2
million compared to the same period of 2011. This decrease is primarily due to decreased costs of advertising and
marketing ($0.6 million) and salaries and benefits ($1.3 million) during the year ended December 31, 2012
compared to the same period of 2011.
104
Impairment expense
American Furniture incurred an impairment charges aggregating $27.8 million, during the year ended December 31,
2011. See explanation below.
Loss from operations
Loss from operations totaled approximately $1.5 million for the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to a loss
from operations of approximately $35.2 million in the year ended December 31, 2011. The significant decline in
operating loss was principally due the factors described above, particularly the impairment charge in 2011.
Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2011 Compared to Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2010
Net sales
Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2011 decreased approximately $31.6 million or 23.1% over the
corresponding period in 2010. Stationary product net sales decreased $19.0 million for the period while motion and
recliner sales decreased $11.0 million. Occasional chairs, accent tables and rug sales decreased $1.2 million in
2011 compared to 2010. The decrease in product sales is the result of the softer furniture retail environment,
especially in the more expensive product categories, such as our motion products, and the increasing presence of
Asian import product which often offers a better overall value proposition to customers. The decrease in net sales
of recliners, chairs, tables and rugs in 2011 is due to an overall weaker retail market for promotional furniture
offerings in 2011 than in 2010. The promotional retail furniture market continues to be impacted by downward
pressure from lower consumer spending on new furniture due principally to the limited access to credit available to
new home buyers. Retail furniture sales rely heavily on consumer spending for new furniture when they move into
a new home. In addition, the weak domestic overall economic environment coupled with high unemployment has
had a significant negative effect on the promotional furniture market due to the impact it has had on the consumer
who purchases our product. Sales to American Furniture’s largest customer decreased approximately $20 million in
fiscal 2011 compared to 2010.
Cost of sales
Cost of sales decreased by approximately $20.5 million in the year ended December 31, 2011 compared to the same
period of 2010 due principally to a corresponding decrease in sales. Gross profit as a percentage of sales was 4.1%
in the year ended December 31, 2011 compared to 11.2% in the corresponding period in 2010. The decrease in
gross profit as a percentage of sales of approximately 710 basis points in 2011 is attributable to: (i) a $1.6 million
charge to write-down inventory, reflecting excess overhead absorption based on a revaluation in connection with
revising standard costs, (ii) a $1.7 million charge related to inventory obsolescence for slow moving inventory, (iii)
reduced selling prices on products in the second half of the year due to cost pressures from our customers and
aggressive competitor pricing and (iv) unfavorable overhead absorption rates compared to 2010 due to the
significant decrease in sales and manufacturing volume.
Selling, general and administrative expense
Selling, general and administrative expense for the year ended December 31, 2011, decreased approximately $1.4
million compared to the same period of 2010. This decrease is primarily due to decreases in insurance expense ($0.2
million), bad debt expense ($0.8 million), commission expense ($0.4 million) and other administrative costs ($0.4
million) as a result of decreases in net sales. These decreases were offset in part by increases in professional fees
($0.8 million) due primarily to consulting fees associated with the implementation of a revised standard cost system
and operational directives.
Impairment expense
American Furniture incurred an impairment charge to its goodwill ($5.9 million), trade name ($2.4 million) and
long-lived assets ($18.4 million) aggregating $26.7 million during the year ended December 31, 2011, which was
triggered based on results of operations which had deteriorated significantly during the year. In addition, in
connection with the cessation and outsourcing of AFM’s internal trucking operations, we reclassified a number of
trucks, trailers and a warehouse from property, plant and equipment to assets held for sale. In connection with this,
we wrote these assets down from their net book value to an amount equal to their net realizable value less disposal
costs with the difference, aggregating approximately $1.1 million, being charged to impairment expense. We
105
incurred an impairment charge at American Furniture in 2010 totaling $38.8 million, reflecting a goodwill charge
totaling $35.5 million and a trade name charge totaling $3.3 million.
Income (loss) from operations
Loss from operations totaled approximately $35.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 compared to a loss
from operations of approximately $37.1 million for the same period in 2010 due to the factors described above.
Arnold
Overview
Founded in 1895 and headquartered in Rochester, New York, Arnold Magnetics (or Arnold) is a manufacturer of
engineered, application specific permanent magnets. Arnold products are used in applications such as general
industrial, reprographic systems, aerospace and defense, advertising and promotional, consumer and appliance,
energy, automotive and medical technology. Arnold is the largest U.S. manufacturer of engineered magnets as well
as only one of two domestic producers to design, engineer and manufacture rare earth magnetic solutions. Arnold
operates a 70,000 sq. ft. manufacturing assembly and distribution facility in Rochester, New York with nine
additional facilities worldwide, in countries including the United Kingdom, Switzerland and China. Arnold serves
customers via three primary product sectors:
(cid:120)
(cid:120)
(cid:120)
Permanent Magnet and Assemblies and Reprographics (“PMAG”) (approximately 70% of sales) –
High performance magnets for precision motor/generator sensors as well as beam focusing
applications and reprographic applications;
Flexmag (approximately 20% of net sales) – Flexible bonded magnets for advertising, consumer and
industrial applications; and
Rolled Products (approximately 10% of net sales) – Ultra thin metal foil products utilizing magnetic
and non- magnetic alloys.
Arnold is also a 50% partner in a China rare earth mine-to-magnet joint venture. Arnold accounts for its activity in
the joint venture utilizing the equity method of accounting. Gains and losses from the joint venture are not material
during the year ended December 31, 2012.
Arnold has operating locations Historical Financial Performance
On March 5, 2012, we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in Arnold for approximately $131 million,
representing approximately 96.6% of the equity in Arnold Magnetics.
106
Pro Forma Results of Operations
The table below summarizes the pro-forma results of operations for Arnold for the full fiscal years ended December
31, 2012 and 2011. We acquired Arnold on March 5, 2012. The following operating results are reported as if we
acquired Arnold on January 1, 2011.
(in thousands)
Year ended December 31,
2012
(Pro-forma)
2011
(Pro-forma)
Net sales ................................................................................................. $ 127,433
98,769
Cost of sales (a) ......................................................................................
28,664
Gross profit .......................................................................................
Selling, general and administrative expenses (b) ..................................
15,821
Management fees (c) .............................................................................. 500
3,499
Amortization of intangibles (d) .............................................................
Income from operations .................................................................... $ 8,844
$ 136,348
106,325
30,023
15,943
500
3,498
$ 10,082
Pro-forma results of operations of Arnold for the annual periods ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 include the following pro-
forma adjustments applied to historical results:
(a) Cost of sales for the year ended December 31, 2012 does not include $3.1 million of amortization expense associated
with the inventory fair value step-up recorded in 2012 as a result of and derived from the purchase price allocation in
connection with our purchase of Arnold.
(b) Selling, general and administrative costs were reduced by approximately $12.4 million and $0.4 million in the years
ended December 31, 2012 and 2011, respectively, representing an adjustment for one-time transaction costs incurred
as a result of our purchase.
(c) Represents management fees that would have been payable to the Manager.
(d) An increase in amortization of intangible assets totaling $0.6 million in 2012 and $2.7 million in 2011. This
adjustment is a result of and was derived from the purchase price allocation in connection with our acquisition of
Arnold.
Pro Forma Year Ended December 31, 2012 Compared to the Pro Forma Year Ended December 31, 2011
Net sales
Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2012 were approximately $127.4 million, a decrease of $8.9 million, or
6.5%, compared to the same period in 2011. The decrease in net sales is a result of decreased sales in the PMAG
product sector ($6.2 million) and decreases in sales in the Flexmag ($0.7 million) and Rolled Products ($2.0
million) sectors. PMAG sales represented approximately 73.0% of net sales for the year ended December 31, 2012
compared to 72.8% for the same period in 2011. The decrease in PMAG sales during the year ended December 31,
2012 compared to the same period in 2011 is principally attributable to lower reprographic application sales, a
component of PMAG. The decrease in Rolled Products sales is attributable to market softness in the U.S. defense
market and the European energy market.
International sales were $57.0 million during the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to $62.0 million during
the same period in 2011, a decrease of $5 million or 8.0%.
Cost of sales
Cost of sales for the year ended December 31, 2012 were approximately $98.8 million compared to approximately
$106.3 million in the same period of 2011. The decrease of $7.6 million is due principally to the corresponding
decrease in sales. Gross profit as a percentage of sales increased from 22.0% for the year ended December 31, 2011
to 22.5% in the year ended December 31, 2012. The increase is attributable to increased margins in the PMAG
sector due to a more favorable customer/product sales mix, due in part to the decrease in reprographic application
107
sales during the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to the same period in 2011, offset in part by a decrease in
margins at its Rolled Product sector due to an unfavorable customer/product sales mix.
Selling, general and administrative expense
Selling, general and administrative expense for the year ended December 31, 2012 were approximately $15.8
million or 12.4% of net sales compared to $15.9 million or 11.7% of net sales for the same period in 2011. There
were no significant changes in the components of these costs during the year.
Income from operations
Income from operations for the year ended December 31, 2012 was approximately $8.8 million compared to $10.1
million in income from operations recognized during the year ended December 31, 2011, a decrease of $1.2 million.
CamelBak
Overview
CamelBak, headquartered in Petaluma, California, is a premier designer and manufacturer of personal hydration
products for outdoor, recreation and military applications. CamelBak offers a broad range of recreational and
military personal hydration packs, reusable water bottles, specialty military gloves and performance accessories.
As the leading supplier of hydration products to specialty outdoor, cycling and military retailers, CamelBak
maintains the leading market share position in recreational markets for hands-free hydration packs and the leading
market share position for reusable water bottles in specialty channels. CamelBak is also the dominant supplier of
hydration packs to the military, with a leading market share in post-issue hydration packs. Over its more than 20-
year history, CamelBak has developed a reputation as the preferred supplier for the hydration needs of the most
demanding athletes and warfighters. Across its markets, CamelBak is respected for its innovation, leadership and
authenticity.
Historical Financial Performance
On August 24, 2011, we made loans to, and purchased a controlling interest in, CamelBak for approximately $258.6
million, representing approximately 90% of the equity in CamelBak.
Pro Forma Results of Operations
The table below summarizes the pro-forma results of operations for CamelBak for the full fiscal years ended
December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010. We acquired CamelBak on August 24, 2011. The following operating results
are reported as if we acquired CamelBak on January 1, 2010.
(in thousands)
Year ended December 31,
2012
2011
(Pro-forma)
2010
(Pro-forma)
Net sales ................................................................................................. $ 157,632
85,424
Cost of sales (a) ......................................................................................
72,208
Gross profit .......................................................................................
Selling, general and administrative expenses (b) ..................................
36,829
Management fees (c) .............................................................................. 500
9,378
Amortization of intangibles (d) .............................................................
Income from operations .................................................................... $ 25,501
$ 141,286
82,999
58,287
30,475
500
9,313
$ 17,999
$ 122,214
70,617
51,597
28,144
500
9,512
$ 13,441
108
Pro-forma results of operations of CamelBak for the annual periods ended December 31, 2011 and 2010 include the following
pro-forma adjustments applied to historical results:
(a) Cost of sales for the year ended December 31, 2011 does not include $6.1 million of amortization expense associated
with the inventory fair value step-up recorded in 2011 as a result of and derived from the purchase price allocation in
connection with our purchase of CamelBak.
(b) Selling, general and administrative costs were reduced by approximately $7.0 million in the year ended December 31,
2011, representing an adjustment for one-time transaction costs incurred as a result of our purchase.
(c) Represents management fees that would have been payable to the Manager.
(d) An increase in amortization of intangible assets totaling $5.6 million in 2011 and $7.4 million in 2010. This
adjustment is a result of and was derived from the purchase price allocation in connection with our acquisition of
CamelBak.
Year Ended December 31, 2012 Compared to the Pro Forma Year Ended December 31, 2011
Net sales
Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2012 were approximately $157.6 million, an increase of $16.3 million,
or 11.6%, when compared to the same period in 2011. The increase in net sales is a result of increased gross sales
in Hydration Systems ($17.3 million) and Bottles ($10.7 million) offset in part by a decrease in sales of Gloves
($10.3 million) and Accessories ($0.5 million). The increased Bottle and Hydration Systems sales during the year
ended December 31, 2012 compared to the same period in 2011 is attributable to the continued success of
“Antidote”, CamelBak’s new reservoir for the recreational Hydration Systems line, introduced in 2010, the
expansion of offerings in Bottles, such as eddyTM, the introduction of the Podium line of insulated bottles, and the
continued expansion in its customer base, including new and existing customers, for all product lines. CamelBak
began providing Hydration Systems as a subcontractor as part of the United States Marine Corps pack program
beginning at the end of 2011 which accounted for a substantial portion of the increase in Hydration Systems sales in
the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to the same period in 2011. CamelBak anticipates completion of this
contract during the first quarter of 2013. The decrease in Glove sales during the year ended December 31, 2012
compared to the same period in 2011 is due to decreased demand from the U.S. military, resulting principally from
a drawdown of U.S. combat troops during the period and the absence of sales from a direct contract with the U.S.
Military that was not in effect in 2012 and will not be in effect during 2013.
Sales of Hydration Systems and Bottles represented approximately 84% of gross sales for the year ended December
31, 2012 compared to 75% for the same period in 2011. Military sales represented approximately 38% of gross
sales for the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to 41% for the same period in 2011. International sales
represented approximately 19% of gross sales for each of the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011.
Cost of sales
Cost of sales for the year ended December 31, 2012 were approximately $85.4 million compared to approximately
$83.0 million in the same period of 2011. The increase of $2.4 million is due principally to the corresponding
increase in net sales. Gross profit as a percentage of sales increased to 45.8% for the year ended December 31,
2012 compared to 41.3% for the same period in 2011. The increase is attributable to a favorable sales mix in
Bottles and Hydration Systems during the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to the same period last year,
and the decrease in Glove sales as a percentage of total sales.
Selling, general and administrative expense
Selling, general and administrative expense for the year ended December 31, 2012 increased to approximately $36.8
million or 23.4% of net sales compared to $30.5 million or 21.6% of net sales for the same period of 2011. The
$6.4 million increase in selling, general and administrative expenses incurred is attributable to; (i) increases in sales
commissions ($1.0 million); (ii) increases in marketing and promotion costs ($0.8 million), (iii) increases in
professional fees ($0.8 million); and, (iv) increases in compensation expense ($2.7 million). The balance of the
increase is due principally to increased infrastructure costs and general overhead, which together with the increases
noted above were necessary to support expansion in connection with growth initiatives.
109
Income from operations
Income from operations for the year ended December 31, 2012 was approximately $25.5 million, an increase of
$7.5 million when compared to the same period in 2011, based on the factors described above.
Pro Forma Year Ended December 31, 2011 Compared to the Pro Forma Year Ended December 31, 2010.
Net sales
Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2011 were approximately $141.3 million, an increase of $19.1 million,
or 15.6%, compared to the same period in 2010. The increase in net sales during 2011 is the result of increased
sales (on a gross basis) in Hydration Packs ($10.0 million), Bottles ($13.0 million), and Accessories ($2.2 million).
These increased sales were offset in part by a decrease in Glove sales aggregating $6.0 million during the year
ended December 31, 2011 compared to the same period in 2010. The increased sales of Hydration Packs, Bottles
and Accessories is attributable to the successful launch of CamelBak’s new reservoir “Antidote” in 2011
(CamelBak’s new reservoir included in its 2011 recreational Hydration Pack line), the expansion of offerings in
Bottles and the continued expansion in its customer base, including new and existing customers. The decrease in
Glove sales during the current year is attributable to less direct contract sales to the U.S. military resulting, in part,
from a drawdown of U.S. combat troops overseas. Sales of Hydration Packs and Bottles represented approximately
75% of gross sales for the year ended December 31, 2011 compared to approximately 68% for the same period in
2010. Military sales represented approximately 41% of gross sales for the year ended December 31, 2011
compared to 42% for the same period in 2010.
Cost of sales
Cost of sales for the year ended December 31, 2011 were approximately $83.0 million compared to approximately
$70.6 million in the same period of 2010. The increase of $12.4 million is due principally to the corresponding
increase in sales. Gross profit as a percentage of net sales decreased from 42.2% for the year ended December 31,
2010 to 41.3% for the same period ended December 31, 2011. The decrease is attributable to: (i) increases in duty
charges in 2011 as a result of a one-time benefit, due to a customs ruling on CamelBak’s behalf, received in 2010;
(ii) price increases from suppliers in 2011 for raw materials, particularly resins and fabric, not reflected in customer
pricing, and (iii) expedited freight costs due to a supplier capacity constraint in 2011 not reflected in customer
pricing.
Selling, general and administrative expense
Selling, general and administrative expense for the year ended December 31, 2011 increased to approximately $30.5
million or 21.6% of net sales compared to $28.1 million or 23.0% of net sales for the same period of 2010. The
$2.3 million increase in selling, general and administrative expenses incurred during the year ended December 31,
2011, compared to the same period in 2010 is attributable to: (i) increases in advertising and marketing costs ($0.5
million); (ii) increased research and development costs ($0.4 million), and (iii) increased bad debt expense ($0.4
million), with the balance of the increase due to increased infrastructure costs such as personnel costs and benefits,
and general overhead necessary to support expansion initiatives in connection with current and anticipated increased
sales volume.
Income from operations
Income from operations for the year ended December 31, 2011 increased approximately $4.6 million to $18.0
million compared to the same period in 2010, which reflected income from operations totaling $13.4 million, based
principally on the factors described above.
110
Ergobaby
Overview
Ergobaby, with headquarters in Los Angeles, California, is a premier designer, marketer and distributor of baby
wearing products, strollers and accessories. Ergobaby offers a broad range of wearable baby carriers and related
products that are sold through more than 650 retailers and web shops in the United States and internationally in
approximately 50 countries. Ergobaby has three main product lines: baby carriers, strollers and accessories.
On September 16, 2010, we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in Ergobaby for approximately $85.2
million, representing approximately 84% of the equity in Ergobaby. Ergobaby’s reputation for product innovation,
reliability and safety has led to numerous awards and accolades from consumer surveys and publications, including
Parenting Magazine, Pregnancy magazine and Wired magazine.
On November 18, 2011, Ergobaby acquired all the outstanding stock of Orbit Baby for $17.5 million. Orbit Baby
produces and markets a premium line of stroller travel systems. Orbit Baby’s high-quality products include car
seats, strollers and bassinets that are interchangeable using a patented hub ring.
Pro Forma Results of Operations
The table below summarizes the pro-forma results of operations for Ergobaby for the full fiscal years ended
December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010. We acquired Ergobaby on September 16, 2010. The following operating
results are reported as if we acquired Ergobaby on January 1, 2010.
(in thousands)
Year ended December 31,
2012
2011
(Pro-forma)
2010
(Pro-forma)
Net sales ................................................................................................. $ 64,032
25,091
Cost of sales (a) ......................................................................................
38,941
Gross profit .......................................................................................
Selling, general and administrative expenses (b) ..................................
24,476
Management fees (c) .............................................................................. 500
3,037
Amortization of intangibles (d) .............................................................
Income from operations .................................................................... $ 10,928
$ 44,327
15,645
28,682
17,998
500
1,828
$ 8,356
$ 34,472
10,833
23,639
11,985
500
1,715
$ 9,439
Pro-forma results of operations of Ergobaby for the annual periods ended December 31, 2011 and 2010 include the
following pro-forma adjustments applied to historical results:
(a) Cost of sales for the years ended December 31, 2011 and 2010 do not include $0.5 million and $3.8
million, respectively, of amortization expense recorded in each of those years associated with the inventory
fair value step-ups as a result of and derived from the purchase price allocation in connection with our
purchase of Ergobaby.
(b) Selling, general and administrative costs were reduced by approximately $10.0 million in the year ended
December 31, 2010, representing an adjustment for one-time transaction costs incurred as a result of our
purchase.
(c) Represents the full amount of management fees that would have been payable to the Manager in 2010.
(d) An increase in amortization of intangible assets totaling $1.2 million in 2010 as a result of and derived
from the purchase price allocation in connection with our acquisition of Ergobaby.
111
Year Ended December 31, 2012 Compared to the Pro forma Year Ended December 31, 2011
Net sales
Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2012 were $64.0 million, an increase of $19.7 million or 44.4%
compared to the same period in 2011. The increase is primarily attributable to the increase in Orbit Baby sales
($12.5 million) and international baby carrier and accessory sales ($5.2 million) during the year ended December
31, 2012 compared to the same period in 2011 with the remaining 2012 increase attributable to domestic baby
carrier and accessory sales. We acquired Orbit Baby in November 2011 and recorded approximately $0.8 million in
sales of Orbit Baby products in 2011. Domestic baby carrier sales were approximately $17.6 million in the year
ended December 31, 2012 compared to approximately $15.5 million in the same period for 2011. The increase of
$2.1 million or 13.1% is primarily attributable to increased sales to national retail accounts. International sales of
baby carriers and accessories were approximately $33.2 million in the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to
$28.0 million in 2011, an increase of $5.2 million. The increase of $5.2 million is principally attributable in large
part to increased sales in Japan and Korea. Our market share throughout Asia has grown considerably by means of
enforcing our presence in key department stores through customized products as well as expanding our distribution
into southeast Asia region which has reinforced our overall brand presence.
Excluding Orbit Baby sales of $13.3 million and $0.8 million in 2012 and 2011, respectively, baby carriers
represented 88% of sales in the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to 87% during the same period of 2011.
Cost of sales
Cost of sales for the year ended December 31, 2012 were approximately $25.1 million compared to $15.6 million in
the same period of 2011. The increase of $9.4 million is due principally to the increase in sales in the same period.
Gross profit as a percentage of sales decreased from 64.7% for the year ended December 31, 2011 to 60.8% in
2012. The 3.9% decrease is primarily attributable to lower margin Orbit Baby product sales in the December 31,
2012 period (1.6%) and a larger proportion of international baby carriers in fiscal 2012 compared to 2011.
International baby carrier sales generate a lower gross profit margin on average than domestic baby carrier sales. In
addition, increases in domestic sales promotional discounts to national retail accounts contributed to lower margins
in domestic baby carrier sales.
Selling, general and administrative expense
Selling, general and administrative expense for the year ended December 31, 2012 increased to approximately $24.5
million or 38.2% of net sales compared to $18.0 million or 40.6% of net sales for the same period of 2011. The
increase of $6.5 million is primarily attributable to the selling, general and administrative expenses of Orbit Baby
($5.4 million) and to a lesser extent, an increase in marketing costs ($1.1 million) and personnel costs ($1.1 million)
to support growth initiatives, offset in part by a decrease in bad debt expense ($0.3 million) and professional fees
($0.3 million), all at the baby carrier level, during the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to the same period
in 2011.
Amortization of intangibles
Amortization expense increased $1.2 million in the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to the same period in
2011 as a result of amortizing intangible assets acquired as part of the purchase of Orbit Baby for a full year in
fiscal 2012.
Income from operations
Income from operations for the year ended December 31, 2012 increased approximately $2.6 million to $10.9
million compared to the same period in 2011, due principally to those factors described above.
112
Pro Forma Year Ended December 31, 2011 Compared to the Pro Forma Year Ended December 31, 2010
Net sales
Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2011 were $44.3 million, an increase of $9.9 million or 28.6% compared
to the same period in 2010. Domestic sales were approximately $16.1 million for the year ended December 31,
2011 compared to approximately $15.4 million in the same period for 2010 as the number of domestic retail outlets
for the company’s products increased from 863 in 2010 to over 900 in 2011 and the net sales attributable to Orbit
Baby ($0.8 million) from its date of acquisition were included. International baby carrier sales increased to $28.0
million for the year ended December 31, 2011 compared to $19.0 million in the same period in 2010. The increase
of $9.0 million was primarily attributable to increased sales to distributors in Asia and the addition of twelve new
international distributors in 2011 expanding Ergobaby’s presence into more than 32 additional countries. Baby
carriers represented 87% of total net sales in 2011 and 2010 (excluding Orbit Baby). The remaining net sales in
each of the years ended December 31, 2011 and 2010 reflects accessory sales.
Cost of sales
Cost of sales for the year ended December 31, 2011 increased to $15.6 million from $10.8 million in the same
period in 2010. The increase is due to the increase in sales in the same period. Gross profit as a percentage of sales
decreased from 68.6% for the year ended 2010 to 64.7% for 2011. The decrease is attributable to a change in the
product sales mix, and a shift in customer mix which produced less favorable gross margins. Throughout 2011
there was an increase in the sales of organic and sport baby carriers versus standard baby carriers. The dollar
margins are similar but the non-standard baby carriers have a higher cost and thus an overall 8% lower gross profit
percentage than standard baby carriers. In addition, much of the sales growth in 2011 was in sales to international
distributors which have a lower selling price point than wholesale and online customers, further reducing the 2011
gross profit percentage. Lastly, Ergobaby experienced an increase in production costs from its factories of
approximately 9% on their standard carriers and infant insert line from its factory suppliers during 2011.
Selling, general and administrative expenses
Selling, general and administrative expense for the year ended December 31, 2011 increased $6.0 million to
approximately $18.0 million or 40.6% of sales versus $12.0 million or 34.8% of sales for 2010. Fiscal 2011 marked
the first full year of results reflecting the investment made in brand development and the overhead infrastructure
necessary for Ergobaby to grow. Specifically, substantial increases in costs during the year ended December 31,
2011 were associated with marketing initiatives concentrated in market research and in media and internet
advertising programs ($1.7 million), and increased professional fees ($1.6 million) from consulting fees related to
the ERP implementation, increased legal expenses and costs incurred in recruiting the senior management team.
Lastly, there was a significant increase in personnel expenses for the year ended December 31, 2011 compared to
the same period in 2010 ($2.9 million) associated with hiring 10 new management team members and related stock
option expense, bonuses and benefits. Selling, general and administrative costs directly attributable to Orbit Baby
totaled approximately $0.5 million in 2011.
Amortization of intangibles
Amortization expense increased approximately $0.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 compared to
2010 due to intangible amortization charges recognized in connection with the purchase of Orbit Baby in November
2011.
Income from operations
Income from operations for the year ended December 31, 2011 decreased approximately $1.1 million to $8.4
million compared to the corresponding period in 2010 based principally on a decrease in gross profit margins,
increased selling, general and administrative costs and other factors described above.
113
Fox
Overview
Fox, headquartered in Scotts Valley, California, is a branded action sports company that designs, manufactures and
markets high-performance suspension products for mountain bikes and powered vehicles, which include:
snowmobiles, motorcycles, all-terrain vehicles (ATVs), and other off-road vehicles.
Fox’s products are recognized by manufacturers and consumers as being among the most technically advanced
suspension products currently available in the marketplace. Fox’s technical success is demonstrated by its
dominance of award winning performances by professional athletes across its suspension products. As a result,
Fox’s suspension components are incorporated by OEM customers on their high-performance models at the top of
their product lines in the mountain bike and power sports sector. OEMs capitalize on the strength of Fox’s brand to
maintain and expand their own sales and margins. In the Aftermarket segment, customers seeking higher
performance select Fox’s suspension components to enhance their existing equipment.
Fox sells to over 175 OEM and over 7,800 Aftermarket customers across its market segments. In each of the years
2012, 2011 and 2010, approximately 81%, 80% and 78% of net sales were to OEM customers, respectively. The
remaining net sales were to Aftermarket customers. Sales of suspension components to the bicycle sector represent
a significant majority of both OEM and Aftermarket sales in each of the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and
2010.
Results of Operations
The table below summarizes the results of operations of Fox for the fiscal years ending December 31, 2012, 2011
and 2010. We purchased a controlling interest in Fox on January 4, 2008.
Year Ended December 31,
2012
Net sales ................................................................................................. $ 235,869
173,040
Cost of sales .........................................................................................
62,829
Gross profit .......................................................................................
Selling, general and administrative expenses ........................................
30,862
Management fees .................................................................................. 500
5,315
Amortization of intangibles ...................................................................
Income from operations .................................................................... $ 26,152
2011
(in thousands)
$ 197,740
140,850
56,890
28,587
500
5,217
$ 22,586
2010
$ 170,983
122,373
48,610
23,317
500
5,217
$ 19,576
Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2012 Compared to Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2011
Net sales
Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2012 increased approximately $38.1 million, or 19.3%, compared to the
corresponding period in 2011. Sales growth was driven by sales to OEM which increased $32.0 million to $189.9
million during the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to $157.9 million for the same period in 2011. The
increase in net sales is largely driven by increased spec with our customers and to a lesser degree by increased
demand for carryover product. The remaining increase in net sales totaling $6.1 million reflects increased sales to
Aftermarket customers in the year ended December 31, 2012. The increase in sales to Aftermarket customers is due
to higher end user demand.
Cost of sales
Cost of sales for the year ended December 31, 2012 increased approximately $32.2 million compared to the
corresponding period in 2011. The increase in cost of sales is primarily due to increased net sales during 2012.
Gross profit as a percentage of sales was approximately 26.6% for the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to
114
28.8% for the same period in 2011. The 2.2% decrease in gross profit as a percentage of sales during 2012 is
largely attributable to the increased overhead costs associated with consolidating our Watsonville operations,
increased costs associated with expanding our Taiwanese operations, increased expedited freight due to supply
chain constraints caused by the increase in orders, warranty costs and changes in product / customer mix.
Selling, general and administrative expense
Selling, general and administrative expenses for the year ended December 31, 2012 increased approximately $2.3
million over the corresponding period in 2011. This increase is primarily the result of increases in employee related
expenses principally to support company growth and costs incurred in connection with a an equity distribution and
associated debt recapitalization ($0.8 million) which occurred during June 2012 (see – “Related Party Transactions
and Certain Transactions Involving our Businesses”). Selling, general and administrative costs were 13.1% of net
sales for the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to 14.5% of net sales in 2011.
Income from operations
Income from operations for the year ended December 31, 2012 increased approximately $3.6 million to $26.2
million compared to the corresponding period in 2011, based principally on the increase in net sales, offset in part
by the increases in selling, general and administrative costs, all as described above.
Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2011 Compared to Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2010
Net sales
Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2011 increased approximately $26.8 million, or 15.6%, versus the
corresponding period in 2010. OEM sales increased $23.7 million to $157.9 million for the year ended December
31, 2011 compared to $134.2 million for the same period in 2010. The increase in OEM net sales is attributable to
increases in sales in the mountain biking sector totaling $5.9 million and increases in sales in the powered vehicles
sector totaling approximately $17.8 million. The increase in OEM sales in the mountain biking sector during the
year ended December 31, 2011 is due to strong sales of the new model year product and the impact of inventory
replenishment at the OEMs during the first quarter of 2011 that did not occur during 2010. The significant increase
in OEM sales in the powered vehicle sector during 2011 is principally the result of an increase in sales of
suspension components to the ATV and off-road markets. Aftermarket sales increased approximately $3.1 million
to $39.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 compared to $36.8 million in the same period in 2010. This
increase is attributable to increases in net sales in the mountain biking sector ($2.1 million) and the powered vehicle
sector ($1.0 million).
International OEM and Aftermarket sales were $129.9 million in 2011 compared to $113.6 million in 2010, an
increase of $16.3 million or 14.3%.
Cost of sales
Cost of sales for the year ended December 31, 2011 increased approximately $18.5 million, or 15.1%, compared to
the corresponding period in 2010. The increase in cost of sales is attributable to the increase in net sales for the
same period. Gross profit as a percentage of sales is approximately 28.8% for the year ended December 31, 2011
compared to 28.4% for the same period in 2010. The 0.4% increase in gross profit as a percentage of sales during
the year ended 2011 is attributable to efficiencies achieved in connection with the increased production volume
during 2011. This was offset in part by an unfavorable product and customer mix compared to 2010, increased raw
material commodity costs and unfavorable foreign exchange rates.
Selling, general and administrative expenses
Selling, general and administrative expenses for the year ended December 31, 2011 increased approximately $5.3
million over the corresponding period in 2010. This increase in fiscal 2011 is the result of increases in; (i) sales and
marketing costs ($1.3 million), (ii) engineering costs ($1.7 million), and (iii) other administrative costs, largely
personnel related ($1.8 million), compared to 2010, principally to support the significant growth in the powered
sports and mountain biking sector and associated increase in sales. Selling, general and administrative costs were
14.5% of net sales for the year ended December 31, 2011 compared to 13.6% of net sales in 2010.
115
Income from operations
Income from operations for the year ended December 31, 2011 increased approximately $3.0 million to $22.6
million compared to the corresponding period in 2010, based principally on the significant increase in net sales,
offset in part by the increases in selling, general and administrative costs, as described above.
Liberty Safe
Overview
Based in Payson, Utah and founded in 1988, Liberty Safe is the premier designer, manufacturer and marketer of
home and gun safes in North America. From its over 204,000 square foot manufacturing facility, Liberty Safe
produces a wide range of home and gun safe models in a broad assortment of sizes, features and styles ranging from
an entry level product to good, better and best products. Products are marketed under the Liberty brand, as well as a
portfolio of licensed and private label brands, including Remington, Cabela’s and John Deere. Liberty Safe’s
products are the market share leader and are sold through an independent dealer network (“Dealer sales”) in
addition to various sporting goods, farm and fleet and home improvement retail outlets (“Non-Dealer sales”).
Liberty has the largest independent dealer network in the industry.
Historically, approximately 60% of Liberty Safe’s net sales are Non-Dealer sales and 40% are Dealer sales.
Pro Forma Results of Operations
The table below summarizes the results of operations for Liberty Safe for the full fiscal years ended December 31,
2012, and 2011 and pro-forma results of operations for the year ended December 31, 2010. We acquired Liberty
Safe on March 31, 2010. The following operating results are reported as if we acquired Liberty Safe on January 1,
2010.
(in thousands)
Year ended December 31,
2012
2011
2010
(Pro-forma)
Net sales ................................................................................................. $ 91,622
68,050
Cost of sales (a) ......................................................................................
Gross profit .......................................................................................
23,572
12,103
Selling, general and administrative expenses (b) ..................................
Management fees (c) .............................................................................. 500
4,984
Amortization of intangibles (d) .............................................................
Income from operations .................................................................... $ 5,985
$ 82,222
61,563
20,659
10,646
500
5,177
$ 4,336
$ 64,899
48,404
16,495
8,092
500
5,177
$ 2,726
Pro-forma results of operations of Liberty Safe for the year ended December 31, 2010 includes the following pro-forma
adjustments applied to historical results:
(a) Cost of sales for the year ended December 31, 2010 does not include $0.4 million of amortization expense associated
with the inventory fair value step-up recorded in 2010 as a result of and derived from the purchase price allocation in
connection with our purchase of Liberty.
(b) Selling, general and administrative costs were reduced by approximately $1.6 million in the year ended December 31,
2010, representing an adjustment for one-time transaction costs incurred as a result of our purchase.
(c) Represents the full amount of management fees that would have been payable to the Manager in 2010.
(d) An increase in amortization of intangible assets totaling $1.3 million in 2010. This adjustment is a result of and was
derived from the purchase price allocation in connection with our acquisition of Liberty.
116
Year Ended December 31, 2012 Compared to the Year Ended December 31, 2011
Net sales
Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2012 increased approximately $9.4 million, or 11.4%, over the
corresponding year ended December 31, 2011. Non-Dealer sales were approximately $52.2 million in the year
ended December 31, 2012 compared to $49.9 million in the same period in 2011, representing an increase of $2.3
million or 4.7%. Dealer sales totaled approximately $39.4 million in the year ended December 31, 2012 compared
to $32.3 million in the same period in 2011, representing an increase of $7.1 million or 21.8%. The increase in
Non-Dealer sales in 2012 is due in large part to increased sales to Liberty’s two largest Non-Dealer accounts in
connection with their expansion of new stores in 2012. Liberty is the sole provider of safes to these two accounts.
These increases were offset in part by the absence of sales in the second half of fiscal 2012, in connection with a
large National retail account’s holiday program which generated approximately $5.0 million in sales during 2011.
The significant increase in net sales at both the Dealer and Non-Dealer level is the result of (i) strong demand for
Liberty branded product by many gun owners due to increased gun and ammunition sales resulting from expected
challenges by Federal and state government to the second amendment, (ii) Liberty’s ongoing national radio
advertising campaign in conjunction with those accounts that maintain consistent Liberty Safe product advertising
at the local level through its co-op advertising program and (iii) increased availability of safes manufactured in-
house on Liberty’s new production line. Dealer sales were more favorably impacted by national advertising
campaign due to co-op advertising offered to Dealers. We expect Non-Dealer and Dealer sales to remain strong
through 2013 for these same reasons.
Cost of sales
Cost of sales for the year ended December 31, 2012 increased approximately $6.5 million. The increase in cost of
sales is primarily attributable to the increase in net sales for the same period. Gross profit as a percentage of net
sales totaled approximately 25.7% and 25.1% for the year ended December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011,
respectively. The increase in gross profit as a percentage of sales for the year ended December 31, 2012 compared
to 2011 is principally attributable to Dealer and Non-Dealer price increases enacted during the second and third
quarter of 2012, and a favorable sales mix.
Selling, general and administrative expense
Selling, general and administrative expense for the year ended December 31, 2012, increased approximately
$1.5 million compared to the same period in 2011. This increase is principally the result of increases in costs to
support the significant increase in sales, particularly commission expense and advertising and promotion expense
($0.9 million), and personnel costs ($0.2 million) all to support growth initiatives and the resultant increase in net
sales.
Income from operations
Income from operations was approximately $6.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2012 representing an
increase of $1.7 million compared to the same period in 2011, which reflected operating income of $4.3 million.
The improved operating results are principally due to the factors described above, particularly the increase in net
sales.
Year Ended December 31, 2011 Compared to the Pro Forma Year Ended December 31, 2010
Net sales
Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2011 increased approximately $17.3 million or 26.7% compared to the
corresponding year ended December 31, 2010. Non-Dealer sales were approximately $49.9 million in the year
ended December 31, 2011 compared to $40.3 million in the same period in 2010, representing an increase of $9.6
million or 23.8%. Dealer sales totaled approximately $32.3 million in the twelve months ended December 31, 2011
compared to $24.6 million in the same period in 2010, representing an increase of $7.7 million or 31.3%. The
significant increase in Non-Dealer sales in 2011 is the result of increased sales in the sporting goods channel ($7.4
million) and the farm and fleet channel ($4.0 million), offset in part by the loss of a club account to an import
product line ($2.1 million) and a decline in the home improvement channel ($0.3 million). The sporting goods
channel increases are the result of Liberty Safe being the sole supplier to two major accounts that offered robust
sales promotions during the year ended 2011 resulting in higher retail sales. The farm and fleet channel increase is
attributable to fulfilling a significant number of backorders and increased sell through at retail driven by a robust co-
117
op advertising campaign. The increase in Dealer sales is due, in large part, to sales generated by its national
advertising campaign in conjunction with those accounts that maintain consistent Liberty Safe product advertising
at the local level.
Cost of sales
Cost of sales for the year ended December 31, 2011 increased approximately $13.2 million. The increase in cost of
sales is primarily attributable to the increase in net sales for the same period. Gross profit as a percentage of net
sales totaled approximately 25.1% and 25.4% of net sales for the years ended December 31, 2011 and December 31,
2010, respectively. The slight decrease in gross profit as a percentage of sales of 0.3% for the year ended
December 31, 2011 compared to 2010 is primarily attributable to higher commodity costs (steel) and higher
transportation costs (fuel) which were substantially offset by a price increase by Liberty effective July 1, 2011.
Selling, general and administrative expense
Selling, general and administrative expense for the year ended December 31, 2011, increased approximately
$2.6 million compared to the same period in 2010. This increase is principally the result of increases in the
following costs to support the significant increase in sales: (i) commission expense ($0.7 million), (ii) co-op
advertising ($0.3 million) and the ongoing successful national radio ad campaign ($0.5 million) (iii) costs associated
with increased headcount and rising benefit costs ($0.8 million) to support the increase in net sales and (iv) other
miscellaneous cost increases ($0.3 million).
Income from operations
Income from operations increased $1.6 million in the year ended December 31, 2011 compared to the year ended
December 31, 2010 based on the factors described above, particularly the increase in net sales.
Tridien
Overview
Tridien, headquartered in Coral Springs, Florida, is a leading designer and manufacturer of powered and non-
powered medical therapeutic support services and patient positioning devices serving the acute care, long-term care
and home health care markets. Tridien is one of the nation’s leading designers and manufacturers of specialty
therapeutic support surfaces with manufacturing operations in multiple locations to better serve a national customer
base.
Tridien, together with its subsidiary companies, provides customers the opportunity to source leading surface
technologies from the designer and manufacturer.
Tridien develops products both independently and in partnership with large distribution intermediaries. Medical
distribution companies then sell or rent the therapeutic support surfaces, sometimes in conjunction with bed frames
and accessories to one of three end markets: (i) acute care, (ii) long term care and (iii) home health care. The level
of sophistication largely varies for each product, as some patients require simple foam mattress beds (“non-
powered” support surfaces) while others may require electronically controlled, low air loss, lateral rotation,
pulmonary therapy or alternating pressure surfaces (“powered” support surfaces). The design, engineering and
manufacturing of all products are completed in-house (with the exception of PrimaTech products, which are
manufactured in Taiwan) and are FDA compliant.
118
Results of Operations
The table below summarizes the results of operations for Tridien for the fiscal years ending December 31, 2012,
2011 and 2010.
Year Ended December 31,
2012
2011
2010
(in thousands)
Net sales ......................................................................................... $ 55,855
42,031
Cost of sales ...................................................................................
13,824
Gross profit ...............................................................................
8,502
Selling, general and administrative expenses ................................
Management fees ........................................................................... 350
1,305
Amortization of intangibles ...........................................................
Income from operations ............................................................ $ 3,667
$ 55,854
41,216
14,638
7,958
350
1,315
$ 5,015
$ 61,101
43,183
17,918
7,646
350
1,909
$ 8,013
Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2012 Compared to Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2011
Net sales
Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2012 were unchanged when compared to the corresponding year ended
December 31, 2011. Net sales of non-powered support surfaces and patient positioning devices totaled
approximately $45.5 million in 2012 compared to $44.9 million during the same period in 2011, an increase of $0.6
million or 1.0%. Non-powered sales represented approximately 80% of net sales in 2012 and 2011. Net sales of
powered products totaled $10.4 million during the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to $11.0 million in
2011, a decrease of $0.6 million or 5.5%.
Cost of sales
Cost of sales increased approximately $0.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to the same
period in 2011. Gross profit as a percentage of sales was 24.7% for the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to
26.2% in the corresponding period in 2011. The decrease in gross profit as a percentage of sales was primarily due
to unfavorable product mix in 2012 as compared to 2011 which had a 1.0% unfavorable impact on gross profit
margins. Tridien opened a manufacturing facility in April 2011 which has allowed them to expand capacity while
reducing freight costs and manufacturing lead times. This investment had a net 0.5% unfavorable impact on gross
profit margin in 2012.
Selling, general and administrative expense
Selling, general and administrative expense for the year ended December 31, 2012 increased approximately $0.5
million compared to the same period in 2011. The increase is due to an increase in research and development
spending ($0.3 million) and spending on growth initiatives. Tridien spent $2.1 million on research and
development costs in 2012 compared to $1.8 million in 2011.
Income from operations
Income from operations decreased approximately $1.3 million to $3.7 million for the year ended December 31,
2012 compared to $5.0 million in the year ended December 31, 2011, due principally to those factors described
above. The Medical Device Excise Tax, a 2.3% excise tax included as part of the Affordable Care Act will be
levied on Tridien’s revenue from certain products beginning in 2013. If Tridien is not able to pass these charges
through to its customers it will have an adverse impact on its results of operations in 2013 and beyond.
Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2011 Compared to Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2010
Net sales
Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2011 were approximately $55.9 million compared to approximately
$61.1 million for the same period in 2010, a decrease of $5.2 million or 8.6%. Sales of non-powered products
119
(including patient positioning devices) totaled $44.9 million during the year ended December 31, 2011 representing
a decrease of $3.3 million compared to the same period in 2010. Non-powered sales represented approximately
80% of net sales in 2011; essentially unchanged compared with 2010 (79%). Sales of powered products totaled
$11.0 million during the year ended December 31, 2011, which reflects a $2.0 million decrease when compared to
the same period in 2010. Powered sales represented approximately 20% and 21% of net sales for 2011 and 2010.
The decrease in overall sales in 2011 reflects (i) price concessions made in 2011 in order to secure long-term
commitments from two of our largest customers, and (ii) a large non-recurring order in 2010 not replicated in 2011.
Cost of sales
Cost of sales decreased approximately $2.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 compared to the same
period in 2010. Gross profit as a percentage of sales was 26.2% for the year ended December 31, 2011 compared to
29.3% in the corresponding period in 2010. The decrease in gross profit as a percentage of sales was primarily due
to cost pressures from large key customers resulting in price reductions and lower margins (3.4%). Tridien opened a
manufacturing facility in April 2011 which has allowed them to expand capacity while reducing freight costs and
manufacturing lead times. This investment had a 1.3% unfavorable impact on its margins in 2011. These increases
were offset in part by a favorable product mix in 2011 and positive productivity initiatives realized in 2011, each as
compared to 2010.
Selling, general and administrative expenses
Selling, general and administrative expenses for the year ended December 31, 2011 approximated the fiscal 2010
expense.
Amortization expense
Amortization expense for the year ended December 31, 2011 decreased approximately $0.6 million compared to the
same period in 2010. This decrease is entirely due to a write down of an intangible asset (ongoing favorable
supplier agreement) in 2010 that management did not expect to benefit from in the future.
Income from operations
Income from operations decreased approximately $3.0 million to $5.0 million for the year ended December 31,
2011 compared to the same period in 2010, principally as a result of the decrease in net sales together with the
decreased margin.
120
Liquidity and Capital Resources
For the year ended December 31, 2012, on a consolidated basis, cash flows provided by operating activities totaled
approximately $52.6 million, which reflects the results of operations of all eight of our existing businesses and four
months of Halo activity, during the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to $91.4 million provided by
operating activities for the same period in 2011, a decrease of $38.8 million. The increase in cash provided by
operating income of $13.2 million in 2012 over the prior year was offset by cash used for working capital
investments of $27.0 million during 2012. The major working capital investments include pay down of the
supplemental put liability ($13.9 million) and investment in inventory ($13.7 million) offset in part by increases in
accrued expenses that provided short-term, temporary working capital at December 31, 2012. The investment in
inventory is principally at American Furniture, CamelBak and Fox. The inventory buildup at American Furniture is
for “tax season” sales at AFM which typically occur January through April. The inventory buildup at CamelBak
and Fox is the result of steadily increasing sales compared to a year ago.
Cash flows used in investing activities totaled approximately $84.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2012,
which reflects (i) cash used for both platform and add-on acquisitions made during 2012 ($126.4 million); (ii)
capital expenditures at our businesses ($18.5 million); and, (iii) additional investment made by us in our existing
businesses ($15.4 million) offset in part by proceeds from the sale of our businesses in 2012 ($75.1 million).
Cash flows used in financing activities in 2012 totaled approximately $82.2 million for the year ended December
31, 2012, principally reflecting: (i) net proceeds from our Credit Facility ($51.0 million), and (ii) net proceeds from
non-controlling interests ($12.1 million). These inflows were more than offset by distributions to shareholders
($99.6) million and redemption of CamelBak’s preferred stock ($48.0 million).
At December 31, 2012, we had approximately $18.2 million of cash and cash equivalents on hand. The majority of
our cash is invested in short-term securities and corporate debt securities and is maintained in accordance with the
Company’s investment policy, which identifies allowable investments and specifies credit quality standards. The
primary objective of our investment activities is the preservation of principal and minimizing risk. We do not hold
any investments for trading purposes.
At December 31, 2012 we had the following outstanding loans due from our businesses:
• Advanced Circuits — $101.0 million;
• American Furniture — $17.6 million;
• Arnold — $78.8 million;
• CamelBak — $138.0 million;
• Ergobaby — $51.9 million;
• Fox — $59.3 million; and
• Liberty — $39.5 million.
Each loan has a scheduled maturity and each business is entitled to repay all or a portion of the principal amount of
the outstanding loans, without penalty, prior to maturity. As of December 31, 2012, American Furniture was not in
compliance with its Maintenance Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio requirement included in the amended credit
agreement with us dated December 31, 2010. We are required to fund, in the form of an additional equity
investment, any shortfall in the difference between Adjusted EBITDA and Fixed Charges as defined in American
Furniture’s credit agreement with us. Per the maintenance agreement, the shortfall that we are required to fund,
American Furniture is in turn required to pay down its term debt with us. The amount of the shortfall at December
31, 2012 and December 31, 2011 was approximately $3.5 million and $5.8 million, respectively. All of our
businesses are in compliance with their financial covenants with us as of December 31, 2012.
Our primary source of cash is from the receipt of interest and principal on our outstanding loans to our businesses.
Accordingly, we are dependent upon the earnings and cash flow of these businesses, which are available for (i)
operating expenses; (ii) payment of principal and interest under our Credit Facility; (iii) payments to CGM due or
potentially due pursuant to the MSA, the LLC Agreement, and the Supplemental Put Agreement; (iv) cash
distributions to our shareholders and (v) investments in future acquisitions. Payments made under (iii) above are
121
required to be paid before distributions to shareholders and may be significant and exceed the funds held by us,
which may require us to dispose of assets or incur debt to fund such expenditures.
A liability of approximately $51.6 million is reflected in our consolidated balance sheet, which represents our
estimated liability for this obligation to CGM at December 31, 2012. A portion of the liability is recorded as a
current liability ($5.2 million) which reflects the amount due CGM for the profit allocation due for the fifth
anniversary date of the acquisition of Fox. During the year ended December 31, 2012, we paid CGM $13.9 million
in connection with the profit allocation earned on the sale of Staffmark and HALO.
The following table provides the contribution-based profit for each of the businesses we control at December 31,
2012 and the respective quarter end in which each successive five year anniversary occurs, reconciled to the total
supplemental put liability:
(in thousands)
Advanced Circuits.........................................
American Furniture.......................................
Arnold M agnetics..........................................
CamelBak......................................................
ERGObaby....................................................
FOX..............................................................
Liberty...........................................................
Tridien...........................................................
Total contribution-based profit portion
Estimated gain on sale portion .....................
Total supplemental put liability...................
Contribution-based
profit allocation
accrual at December
31, 2012
Quarter End of
Fifth Anniversary
Date of Acquisition
$ 2,616
June 30, 2016
September 30, 2017
M arch 31, 2017
September 30, 2016
September 30, 2015
M arch 31, 2013
M arch 31, 2015
September 30, 2016
(13,990)
(1,159)
(654)
718
5,185
56
(434)
(7,662)
59,260
51,598
$
$
We recognized a non-cash charge to earnings of approximately $16.0 million during the year ended December 31
2012 in order to reflect an increase in our estimated liability in connection with the Supplemental Put Agreement
between us and CGM.
The Credit Facility provides for (i) a Revolving Credit Facility of $290 million, and (ii) a $255 million Term Loan
Facility. This Term Loan Facility was increased from $235 million during April 2012 as a result of an exercised
option to increase the Term Loan Facility. The term loans were issued at an original issuance discount of 96%. The
incremental term loans of $30 million were issued at an original issuance discount of 99%. The Term Loan Facility
requires quarterly payments of approximately $0.64 million with a final payment of all remaining principal and
interest due in October 2017. All amounts outstanding under the Revolving Credit Facility will become due in
October 2016. The Credit Facility also permits us to increase the Revolving Loan Commitment and/or obtain
additional term loans in an aggregate amount of up to $105 million, subject to certain restrictions, lender approval
and market demand. The proceeds of the Term Loan Facility and advances under the Revolving Credit Facility
were, or will be, as applicable, used; (i) to refinance certain existing indebtedness of the Company pursuant to our
Prior Credit Agreement, originally dated as of November 21, 2006, as amended, (ii) to pay fees and expenses
arising in connection with the Credit Facility, (iii) to fund acquisitions of additional businesses, (iv) to fund
permitted distributions, (v) to fund loans to our subsidiaries and (vi) for other general corporate purposes.
Advances under the Revolving Credit Facility can be either base rate loans or LIBOR loans. Base rate revolving
loans bear interest at a fluctuating rate per annum equal to the greatest of (i) the prime rate of interest, (ii) the sum of
the Federal Funds Rate plus 0.5% for the relevant period and (iii) the sum of the applicable LIBOR rate plus 1.00%,
plus a margin ranging from 2.00% to 3.00% based upon the Total Debt to adjusted consolidated earnings before
interest expense, tax expense, and depreciation and amortization expenses for such period. LIBOR loans bear
interest at a fluctuating rate per annum equal to LIBOR, for the relevant period plus a margin ranging from 3.00% to
4.00% based on the Total Debt to EBITDA Ratio.
122
The Term Loan Facility bears interest at a combination of a variable LIBOR rate for the relevant period plus 5.00%
for the portion of the Term Loan Facility comprised of LIBOR loans and a fluctuating rate per annum equal to the
greatest of (i) the prime rate of interest, (ii) the sum of the Federal Funds Rate plus 0.5% for the relevant period, (iii)
the sum of the applicable LIBOR rate plus 1.00% and (iv) 2.50%, plus 5.00% for the portion of the Term Loan
Facility comprised of base rate loans. The LIBOR rate for term loans is subject to a floor of 1.25%.
We are required to pay (i) commitment fees equal to 1% per annum of the unused portion of the Revolving Credit
Facility, (ii) quarterly letter of credit fees equal to the Applicable LIBOR Margin for loans under the Revolving
Credit Facility multiplied by the sum of the maximum aggregate amount available for drawing under a letter of
credit plus the aggregate amount of all unreimbursed payments and disbursements under such letter of credit, (iii)
letter of credit fronting fees of up to 0.25% per annum and (iv) administrative and agency fees.
The Credit Facility provides for a sub-facility under the Revolving Credit Facility pursuant to which letters of credit
may be issued in an aggregate amount not to exceed $100 million outstanding at any time. At no time may the (i)
aggregate principal amount of all amounts outstanding under the Revolving Credit Facility, plus (ii) the aggregate
amount of all outstanding letters of credit, exceed the Revolving Loan Commitment. At December 31, 2012, we
had $1.8 million in outstanding letters of credit.
The following table reflects required and actual financial ratios as of December 31, 2012 included as part of the
affirmative covenants in our Credit Facility:
Description of Required Covenant Ratio
Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio....................... greater than or equal to 1.5:1.0......................................
Total Debt to EBITDA Ratio...................... less than or equal to 3.5:1.0...........................................
Covenant Ratio Requirement
Actual Ratio
2.79:1.0
1.87:1.0
The Credit Facility requires us to hedge the interest on $126 million of outstanding debt under the Term Loan
Facility. We entered into the following derivative transactions on October 31, 2011:
• On October 31, 2011, we purchased a two-year interest rate cap (“Cap”) with a notional amount of $200
million effective December 31, 2011 through December 31, 2013. The agreement caps three-month
LIBOR at 2.5% in exchange for a fixed payment of $0.3 million. At December 31, 2012, this Cap had a
fair value of $0.0 million and is reflected in other current assets on our consolidated balance sheet, with the
difference between the fixed payment and its mark-to-market value reflected as a component of interest
expense.
• On October 31, 2011, we purchased a three-year interest rate swap (“Swap”) with a notional amount of
$200 million effective January 1, 2014 through December 31, 2016. The agreement requires us to pay
interest on the notional amount at the rate of 2.49% in exchange for the three-month LIBOR rate, with a
floor of 1.5%. At December 31, 2012, this Swap had a fair value of negative $4.0 million and is reflected
in other non-current liabilities with its mark-to-market value reflected as a component of interest expense.
We intend to use the availability under our Revolving Credit Facility to pursue acquisitions of additional platform
and add-on businesses in 2013 and beyond, to the extent permitted under our Credit Facility, and to provide for
working capital needs.
We believe that we currently have sufficient liquidity and capital resources, which include amounts available under
our Revolving Credit Facility, to meet our existing obligations, including quarterly distributions to our shareholders,
as approved by our Board of Directors, over the next twelve months.
123
Interest Expense
We incurred interest expense totaling $25.1 million in the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to $12.6
million for the same period in 2011. The components of interest expense in each of the years ended December 31,
2012 and 2011 are as follows (in thousands):
Ye ars e nde d De ce mbe r 31,
2012
2011
$
$
Interest on credit facilities....................................
Unused fee on revolving credit facility.................
Amortization of original issue discount................
Realized losses on interest rate hedges.................
Unrealized losses on interest rate derivatives.......
Letter of credit fees...............................................
Other.....................................................................
Interest expense..............................................
17,643
2,666
2,312
166
2,175
63
30
25,055
$
$
7,509
2,706
250
143
1,933
60
42
12,643
Average daily balance of debt outstanding...........
$
271,776
$
151,781
Effective interest rate............................................
9.2%
8.3%
Income Taxes
We incurred income tax expense of $21.1 million with an annual effective tax rate of 78.6% during the year ended
2012 compared to $6.9 million with an effective tax rate of 26.4% during the same period in 2011. A portion of the
acquisition costs expensed in the year ended December 31, 2012 in connection with the Arnold and Universal
Circuits acquisitions are not tax deductible, and our losses incurred at the Company, which is an LLC, are not tax
deductible at the corporate level as those costs are passed through to the shareholders. For the year ended 2012,
these two items accounted for 3.0% and 31.1%, respectively, of the increased effective tax rate compared to the
Federal statutory rate at December 31, 2012. Goodwill impairment charges expensed in the year ended December
31, 2011 in connection with the American Furniture write-offs are not tax deductible and our losses incurred at the
Company, which is an LLC, are not tax deductible at the corporate level as those costs are passed through to the
shareholders. For the year ended 2011, these two items accounted for 8.0% and 30.7%, respectively, of the
increased effective tax rate compared to the Federal statutory rate at December 31, 2011. The components of
income tax expense as a percentage of income from continuing operations before income taxes for the years ended
December 31, 2012 and 2011 are as follows:
Year ended December 31,
2012
2011
United States Federal Statutory Rate...........................................
Foreign and State income taxes (net of Federal benefits).............
35.0%
11.7
(35.0%)
3.5
Expenses of Compass Group Diversified Holdings, LLC
representing a pass through to shareholders (1).......................
Impact of subsidiary employee stock options..............................
Domestic production activities deduction....................................
31.1
(1.8)
(4.1)
30.7
1.7
(5.3)
Non-deductible acquisition costs..................................................
3.0
-
Impairment expense...................................................................
-
8.0
Non-recognition of NOL carryforwards at AFM.........................
4.8
24.2
Other..........................................................................................
Effective income tax rate
(1.1)
78.6%
(1.4)
26.4%
124
2012 Acquisition
On March 5, 2012, AMT Acquisition Corp. ("Arnold Acquisition"), a subsidiary of us, entered into a stock purchase
agreement with Arnold Magnetic Technologies, LLC ("Arnold”), and certain management stockholders pursuant to
which Arnold Acquisition acquired all of the issued and outstanding equity of Arnold.
The purchase price for Arnold was $130.5 million, based on a total enterprise value of $124.2 million and $6.3
million of cash and working capital adjustments. Acquisition related costs were approximately $4.8 million. We
funded the acquisition through available cash on our balance sheet and a draw of $25 million on our Revolving
Credit Facility. Our common equity ownership in Arnold as a result of the transaction is approximately 96.7% on a
primary and 87.6% fully diluted basis. CGM acted as an advisor to us in the transaction and received fees and
expense payments totaling approximately $1.2 million.
Repurchase of CamelBak preferred stock
On March 6, 2012, CamelBak redeemed its 11% convertible preferred stock for $45.3 million plus accrued
dividends of $2.7 million, from an affiliate of CGI Magyar Holdings, LLC ($47.7 million), our largest shareholder,
and noncontrolling shareholders ($0.3 million). We funded the redemption with our cash through intercompany
debt and an equity contribution from us of $19.2 million and $25.9 million, respectively. In addition,
noncontrolling shareholders of CamelBak invested $2.9 million of equity in order for us and noncontrolling
shareholders to maintain existing ownership percentages of CamelBak common stock of 89.9% and 10.1%,
respectively.
HALO sale
On May 1, 2012, we sold our majority owned subsidiary HALO, to Candlelight Investment Holdings, Inc., for a
total enterprise value of $76.5 million. At the closing, we received approximately $66.0 million and subsequently
received approximately $0.8 million of proceeds that were held in escrow. In addition, we expect to receive a tax
refund of approximately $1.0 million resulting from the tax benefit of the transaction expenses incurred in
connection with the transaction. The net proceeds were used to repay outstanding debt under our Revolving Credit
Facility. We recognized a loss of $0.5 million for the year ended December 31, 2012 as a result of the sale. CGM’s
profit allocation was $0.2 million and was paid in the fourth quarter of 2012.
Reconciliation of Non-GAAP Financial Measures
From time to time we may publicly disclose certain “non-GAAP” financial measures in the course of our investor
presentations, earnings releases, earnings conference calls or other venues. A non-GAAP financial measure is a
numerical measure of historical or future performance, financial position or cash flow that excludes amounts, or is
subject to adjustments that effectively exclude amounts, included in the most directly comparable measure
calculated and presented in accordance with GAAP in our financial statements, and vice versa for measures that
include amounts, or are subject to adjustments that effectively include amounts, that are excluded from the most
directly comparable measure as calculated and presented. GAAP refers to generally accepted accounting principles
in the United States.
Non-GAAP financial measures are provided as additional information to investors in order to provide them with an
alternative method for assessing our financial condition and operating results. These measures are not meant to be a
substitute for GAAP, and may be different from or otherwise inconsistent with non-GAAP financial measures used
by other companies.
The tables below reconcile the most directly comparable GAAP financial measures to EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA
and Cash Flow Available for Distribution and Reinvestment (”CAD”).
Reconciliation of Net income (loss) to EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA
EBITDA – Earnings before Interest, Income Taxes, Depreciation and Amortization (“EBITDA”) is calculated as
net income (loss) before interest expense, income tax expense (benefit), depreciation expense and amortization
expense. Amortization expenses consist of amortization of intangibles and debt charges, including debt issuance
costs, discounts, etc.
125
Adjusted EBITDA – Is calculated utilizing the same calculation as described above in arriving at EBITDA further
adjusted by: (i) non-controlling stockholder compensation, which generally consists of non-cash stock option
expense; (ii) successful acquisition costs, which consist of transaction costs (legal, accounting , due diligences, etc.)
incurred in connection with the successful acquisition of a business expensed during the period in compliance with
ASC 805; (iii) increases or decreases in supplemental put charges, which reflect the estimated potential liability due
to our Manager that requires us to acquire their Allocation Interests in the Company at a price based on a percentage
of the fair value in our businesses over their original basis plus a hurdle rate. Essentially, when the fair value of our
businesses increases we will incur additional supplemental put charges and vice versa when the fair value of our
businesses decreases; (iv) management fees, which reflect fees due quarterly to our Manager in connection with our
MSA; (v) impairment charges, which reflect write downs to goodwill or other intangible assets and (vi) gains or
losses recorded in connection with the sale of fixed assets.
We believe that EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA provide useful information to investors and reflect important
financial measures as they exclude the effects of items which reflect the impact of long-term investment decisions,
rather than the performance of near term operations. When compared to net income (loss) these financial measures
are limited in that they do not reflect the periodic costs of certain capital assets used in generating revenues of our
businesses or the non-cash charges associated with impairments. This presentation also allows investors to view the
performance of our businesses in a manner similar to the methods used by us and the management of our
businesses, provides additional insight into our operating results and provides a measure for evaluating targeted
businesses for acquisition.
We believe these measurements are also useful in measuring our ability to service debt and other payment
obligations. EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA are not meant to be a substitute for GAAP, and may be different from
or otherwise inconsistent with non-GAAP financial measures used by other companies.
The following table reconciles EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA to net income (loss), which we consider to be the
most comparable GAAP financial measure (in thousands):
126
d
e
t
a
d
i
l
o
s
n
o
C
n
e
i
d
i
r
T
y
t
r
e
b
i
L
x
o
F
y
b
a
b
O
G
R
E
k
a
B
l
e
m
a
C
d
l
o
n
r
A
s
c
i
t
e
n
g
a
M
n
a
c
i
r
e
m
A
e
r
u
t
i
n
r
u
F
d
e
c
n
a
v
d
A
s
t
i
u
c
r
i
C
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
d
e
t
a
d
i
l
o
s
n
o
C
0
4
3
,
4
$
7
1
5
,
2
$
3
2
7
$
8
0
2
,
4
1
$
6
2
6
,
2
$
3
2
8
,
6
$
)
6
5
1
,
5
(
$
)
1
9
3
,
3
(
$
9
6
9
,
1
1
$
)
9
7
9
,
5
2
(
$
0
4
3
,
4
$
A
D
T
I
B
E
d
e
t
s
u
j
d
A
2
1
0
2
,
1
3
r
e
b
m
e
c
e
D
d
e
d
n
e
r
a
e
Y
)
s
s
o
l
(
e
m
o
c
n
i
t
e
N
:
r
o
f
d
e
t
s
u
j
d
A
-
9
6
0
,
1
2
1
0
0
,
5
2
2
5
3
,
0
5
2
6
7
,
0
0
1
3
1
4
,
1
3
9
2
6
3
2
,
4
1
0
2
,
5
5
9
9
,
5
1
3
3
6
,
7
1
3
3
5
,
5
4
1
-
1
6
0
5
0
,
1
5
5
3
,
2
3
8
9
,
5
-
5
1
1
9
-
-
0
5
3
-
8
1
5
3
7
4
,
4
6
8
2
,
7
0
0
0
,
3
1
-
)
9
1
(
1
0
3
-
-
0
0
5
6
1
1
8
1
,
8
0
8
8
,
2
6
8
7
,
7
5
2
8
3
6
,
1
5
9
2
,
6
0
2
6
,
4
1
7
0
,
3
3
4
0
2
,
5
1
-
3
5
2
8
4
1
,
2
-
-
0
0
5
-
-
-
-
5
6
4
0
0
5
2
2
8
3
1
,
5
6
4
0
,
3
1
8
5
5
,
3
1
7
8
5
,
8
3
-
5
1
2
2
9
-
-
0
0
5
)
2
(
)
6
4
9
,
1
(
2
7
2
,
6
3
0
7
,
9
1
7
8
,
8
-
8
1
9
6
-
5
7
3
9
3
5
,
4
5
3
2
6
3
3
8
8
6
,
1
)
9
3
3
,
1
(
-
1
1
6
1
2
-
-
-
)
2
(
4
5
5
,
6
1
8
0
,
5
8
9
2
,
5
0
0
9
,
8
2
-
-
-
4
2
6
6
3
0
0
5
)
7
8
(
7
3
9
,
4
2
)
6
9
7
,
9
3
(
)
0
9
5
(
)
5
1
5
,
1
4
(
-
-
3
1
4
,
1
6
9
2
5
9
9
,
5
1
8
0
4
,
4
1
-
9
6
0
,
1
2
1
0
0
,
5
2
2
5
3
,
0
5
2
6
7
,
0
0
1
3
1
4
,
1
3
9
2
6
3
2
,
4
1
0
2
,
5
5
9
9
,
5
1
3
3
6
,
7
1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s
e
x
a
t
e
m
o
c
n
i
r
o
f
)
t
i
f
e
n
e
b
(
n
o
i
s
i
v
o
r
P
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
t
e
n
,
e
s
n
e
p
x
e
t
s
e
r
e
t
n
I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
t
s
e
r
e
t
n
i
y
n
a
p
m
o
c
r
e
t
n
I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
n
o
i
t
a
z
i
t
r
o
m
a
d
n
a
n
o
i
t
a
i
c
e
r
p
e
D
A
D
T
I
B
E
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s
n
o
i
t
a
r
e
p
o
d
e
u
n
i
t
n
o
c
s
i
d
m
o
r
f
)
s
s
o
l
(
n
i
a
g
,
)
s
s
o
l
(
e
m
o
c
n
I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s
t
e
s
s
a
d
e
x
i
f
f
o
e
l
a
s
n
o
s
s
o
l
)
n
i
a
G
(
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
n
o
i
t
a
s
n
e
p
m
o
c
r
e
d
l
o
h
e
r
a
h
s
g
n
i
l
l
o
r
t
n
o
c
-
n
o
N
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s
e
s
n
e
p
x
e
n
o
i
t
i
s
i
u
q
c
A
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
e
s
n
e
p
x
e
t
u
p
l
a
t
n
e
m
e
l
p
p
u
S
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s
e
e
f
t
n
e
m
e
g
a
n
a
M
$
9
3
4
,
6
$
2
8
7
,
3
1
$
2
7
9
,
5
3
$
9
6
1
,
6
1
$
4
2
0
,
0
4
$
2
7
8
,
3
1
$
)
2
1
1
,
1
(
$
0
9
7
,
9
2
$
)
3
0
4
,
9
(
$
3
3
5
,
5
4
1
$
)
a
(
A
D
T
I
B
E
d
e
t
s
u
j
d
A
d
e
t
a
d
i
l
o
s
n
o
C
n
e
i
d
i
r
T
y
t
r
e
b
i
L
x
o
F
y
b
a
b
O
G
R
E
k
a
B
l
e
m
a
C
d
l
o
n
r
A
s
c
i
t
e
n
g
a
M
n
a
c
i
r
e
m
A
e
r
u
t
i
n
r
u
F
d
e
c
n
a
v
d
A
s
t
i
u
c
r
i
C
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
2
1
8
,
2
7
$
8
1
8
,
2
$
)
5
9
1
(
$
8
3
5
,
3
1
$
0
5
6
,
1
$
)
7
6
1
,
7
(
$
)
0
2
2
,
2
3
(
$
4
1
2
,
3
1
$
4
7
1
,
1
8
$
d
e
t
a
d
i
l
o
s
n
o
C
2
1
8
,
2
7
$
A
D
T
I
B
E
d
e
t
s
u
j
d
A
1
1
0
2
,
1
3
r
e
b
m
e
c
e
D
d
e
d
n
e
r
a
e
Y
)
s
s
o
l
(
e
m
o
c
n
i
t
e
N
:
r
o
f
d
e
t
s
u
j
d
A
-
9
5
8
,
6
0
1
6
,
2
1
6
3
6
,
2
9
4
0
,
8
3
6
6
9
,
2
3
1
4
0
1
0
6
9
)
7
7
1
(
5
3
8
,
4
9
6
7
,
7
2
3
8
7
,
1
1
3
8
2
,
6
1
0
1
9
,
8
8
)
3
1
6
,
5
0
1
(
0
5
3
0
0
5
0
0
5
$
3
7
8
,
7
$
5
1
6
,
1
1
$
5
6
7
,
0
3
$
5
5
6
,
1
1
$
)
6
9
1
,
4
(
$
9
3
7
,
1
3
$
)
1
0
7
,
8
(
$
-
-
7
9
8
,
1
0
0
3
8
1
4
,
2
3
3
4
,
7
-
-
0
9
-
-
-
-
-
)
2
7
1
(
2
0
4
,
4
0
7
7
,
6
-
-
6
1
4
5
0
,
7
9
5
7
,
1
5
0
8
,
6
-
1
6
9
2
0
,
1
4
7
8
,
4
1
6
8
,
2
5
0
8
,
0
1
2
7
1
,
9
2
5
7
4
,
0
1
-
3
2
7
8
2
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
3
6
0
3
0
,
1
-
6
1
-
0
8
3
1
6
4
)
7
7
1
(
-
0
0
5
)
1
8
2
,
4
(
3
4
6
3
,
4
0
8
5
,
0
1
-
9
9
4
,
3
-
-
-
-
-
2
1
1
4
7
3
,
4
5
7
1
0
6
1
,
8
$
Not Applicable
)
9
3
7
,
5
(
-
3
2
7
4
2
,
2
1
8
3
,
3
)
2
(
3
5
1
,
7
8
2
9
,
5
6
2
9
,
4
-
)
8
0
3
,
2
3
(
9
1
2
,
1
3
)
2
8
(
9
0
5
,
2
1
)
4
7
8
,
3
2
(
8
0
3
6
3
6
,
2
1
7
6
,
2
7
-
9
5
8
,
6
0
1
6
,
2
1
6
3
6
,
2
9
4
0
,
8
3
6
6
9
,
2
3
1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s
e
x
a
t
e
m
o
c
n
i
r
o
f
)
t
i
f
e
n
e
b
(
n
o
i
s
i
v
o
r
P
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
t
e
n
,
e
s
n
e
p
x
e
t
s
e
r
e
t
n
I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
t
s
e
r
e
t
n
i
y
n
a
p
m
o
c
r
e
t
n
I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
n
o
i
t
a
z
i
t
r
o
m
a
d
n
a
n
o
i
t
a
i
c
e
r
p
e
D
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
e
g
n
a
h
c
x
e
t
b
e
d
n
o
s
s
o
L
A
D
T
I
B
E
-
2
-
6
1
2
-
-
5
2
1
9
6
7
,
7
2
-
-
0
2
-
-
-
-
0
0
5
)
3
1
6
,
5
0
1
(
)
3
1
6
,
5
0
1
(
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s
n
o
i
t
a
r
e
p
o
d
e
u
n
i
t
n
o
c
s
i
d
m
o
r
f
)
s
s
o
l
(
n
i
a
g
,
)
s
s
o
l
(
e
m
o
c
n
I
-
)
5
7
1
,
1
(
-
-
-
3
8
7
,
1
1
3
3
6
,
3
1
4
0
1
0
6
9
)
7
7
1
(
5
3
8
,
4
9
6
7
,
7
2
3
8
7
,
1
1
3
8
2
,
6
1
0
1
9
,
8
8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s
t
e
s
s
a
d
e
x
i
f
f
o
e
l
a
s
n
o
s
s
o
l
)
n
i
a
G
(
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
n
o
i
t
a
s
n
e
p
m
o
c
r
e
d
l
o
h
e
r
a
h
s
g
n
i
l
l
o
r
t
n
o
c
-
n
o
N
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s
e
s
n
e
p
x
e
n
o
i
t
i
s
i
u
q
c
A
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s
e
g
r
a
h
c
t
n
e
m
r
i
a
p
m
I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
y
t
i
l
i
b
a
b
o
r
p
t
u
o
n
r
a
e
n
i
e
s
a
e
r
c
e
D
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
e
s
n
e
p
x
e
t
u
p
l
a
t
n
e
m
e
l
p
p
u
S
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s
e
e
f
t
n
e
m
e
g
a
n
a
M
$
)
b
(
)
a
(
A
D
T
I
B
E
d
e
t
s
u
j
d
A
7
2
1
.
n
o
i
l
l
i
m
6
.
5
2
$
f
o
1
1
0
2
,
7
1
r
e
b
o
t
c
O
h
g
u
o
r
h
t
1
1
0
2
,
1
y
r
a
u
n
a
J
d
o
i
r
e
p
e
h
t
r
o
f
k
r
a
m
f
f
a
t
S
m
o
r
f
A
D
T
I
B
E
e
d
u
l
c
n
i
t
o
n
s
e
o
d
A
D
T
I
B
E
d
e
t
s
u
j
d
A
,
1
1
0
2
r
e
b
o
t
c
O
n
i
y
r
a
i
d
i
s
b
u
s
k
r
a
m
f
f
a
t
S
r
u
o
f
o
e
l
a
s
e
h
t
f
o
t
l
u
s
e
r
a
s
A
)
b
(
n
o
i
l
l
i
m
2
.
2
$
f
o
2
1
0
2
,
0
3
l
i
r
p
A
h
g
u
o
r
h
t
2
1
0
2
,
1
y
r
a
u
n
a
J
d
o
i
r
e
p
e
h
t
r
o
f
O
L
A
H
m
o
r
f
A
D
T
I
B
E
e
d
u
l
c
n
i
t
o
n
s
e
o
d
A
D
T
I
B
E
d
e
t
s
u
j
d
A
,
2
1
0
2
y
a
M
n
i
y
r
a
i
d
i
s
b
u
s
O
L
A
H
r
u
o
f
o
e
l
a
s
e
h
t
f
o
t
l
u
s
e
r
a
s
A
)
a
(
.
n
o
i
l
l
i
m
9
.
2
1
$
f
o
1
1
0
2
,
1
3
r
e
b
m
e
c
e
D
h
g
u
o
r
h
t
1
1
0
2
,
1
y
r
a
u
n
a
J
f
o
d
o
i
r
e
p
e
h
t
r
o
f
d
n
a
The table below details cash receipts and payments that are not reflected on our income statement in order to provide an
additional measure of management’s estimate of cash CAD. CAD is a non-GAAP measure that we believe provides
additional information to our shareholders in order to enable them to evaluate our ability to make anticipated quarterly
distributions. Because other entities do not necessarily calculate CAD the same way we do, our presentation of CAD may
not be comparable to similarly titled measures provided by other entities. We believe that our historic and future CAD,
together with our cash balances and access to cash via our debt facilities, will be sufficient to meet our anticipated
distributions over the next twelve months. The table below reconciles CAD to net income and to cash flow provided by
operating activities, which we consider to be the most directly comparable financial measure calculated and presented in
accordance with GAAP.
(in thousands, unaudited)
Net income.................................................................................................
Adjustment to reconcile net income to cash provided by
operating activities:
Depreciation and amortization ...........................................................
Impairment expense.............................................................................
Gain on sale of Staffmark....................................................................
Loss on sale of HALO.........................................................................
Loss on debt repayment......................................................................
Supplemental put expense...................................................................
Amortization of original issue discount...............................................
Noncontrolling stockholders charges ..................................................
Amortization of debt issuance costs...................................................
Unrealized loss on interest rate swap..................................................
Deferred taxes ....................................................................................
Other ..................................................................................................
Changes in operating assets and liabilities .........................................
Net cash provided by operating activities.................................................
Plus:
Unused fee on revolving credit facility (1)............................................
Successful acquisition expense (2).........................................................
Sale related expenses (3)........................................................................
Changes in operating assets and liabilities ............................................
Less:
Changes in operating assets and liabilities ............................................
Other ....................................................................................................
M aintenance capital expenditures: (4)
Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC........................................
Advanced Circuits...............................................................................
American Furniture..............................................................................
Arnold..................................................................................................
CamelBak.............................................................................................
ERGObaby..........................................................................................
Fox.......................................................................................................
Halo (divested M ay 2012)..................................................................
Liberty.................................................................................................
Staffmark (divested October 2011).....................................................
Tridien.................................................................................................
Estimated cash flow available for distribution and reinvestment
Distribution paid in April 2012 and M arch 2011.....................................
Distribution paid in July 2012/2011.........................................................
Distribution paid in October 2012/2011...................................................
Distribution paid in January 2013/2012....................................................
Year Ended
December 31, 2012
Year Ended
December 31, 2011
$
4,340
$
72,812
49,450
-
(219)
464
-
15,995
2,312
4,236
1,857
2,175
(2,060)
986
(26,970)
52,566
49,109
27,769
(88,592)
-
2,636
11,783
250
4,270
1,951
1,822
(17,858)
421
25,001
91,374
2,666
5,201
1,976
26,970
-
668
2,706
4,658
6,434
-
25,001
-
-
878
(133)
2,382
1,364
843
4,096
320
441
-
807
$ 77,713
-
3,483
(91)
-
556
996
1,001
971
822
1,957
1,474
$ 69,002
$
$
(17,388)
(17,388)
(17,388)
(17,388)
(69,552)
(16,821)
(16,821)
(17,388)
(17,388)
(68,418)
$
$
(1) Represents the commitment fees on the unused portion of our Prior Revolving Credit Facility and Revolving Credit Facility.
(2) Represents successful acquisition transaction costs.
(3) Represents transaction costs incurred related to the sale of Staffmark and HALO, net of the related income tax benefit.
(4) Represents maintenance capital expenditures that were funded from operating cash flow, net of proceeds from sales of
property, plant and equipment, and excludes growth capital expenditures of approximately $7.5 million and $10.6 million
incurred during the year ended December 31, 2012 and 2011, respectively.
Cash flows of certain of our businesses are seasonal in nature. Cash flows from American Furniture are typically highest
in the months of January through April of each year, coinciding with homeowners’ tax refunds. Revenue and earnings from
Fox are typically highest in the third quarter, coinciding with the delivery of product for the new bike year. Earnings from
CamelBak are typically higher in the spring and summer months than other months as this corresponds with warmer
weather in the Northern Hemisphere and an increase in hydration related activities.
Related Party Transactions and Certain Transactions Involving our Businesses
We have entered into the following related party transactions with our Manager, CGM:
(cid:120) Management Services Agreement
(cid:120)
LLC Agreement
Supplemental Put Agreement
Cost Reimbursement and Fees
Sale of common stock to majority shareholder
(cid:120)
(cid:120)
(cid:120)
Management Services Agreement
We entered into the MSA with CGM effective May 16, 2006. The MSA provides for, among other things, CGM to
perform services for us in exchange for a management fee paid quarterly and equal to 0.5% of our adjusted net assets. The
management fee is required to be paid prior to the payment of any distributions to shareholders. For the year ended
December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, we incurred $17.6 million, $16.3 million and $14.6 million, respectively, in
management fees to CGM (excludes offsetting fees paid by Staffmark and HALO).
Pursuant to the MSA, CGM is entitled to enter into off-setting management service agreements with each of our segments.
The amount of the fee is negotiated between CGM and the operating management of each segment and is based upon the
value of the services to be provided. The fees paid directly to CGM by the segments offset on a dollar for dollar basis the
amount due to CGM by the Company under the MSA.
LLC Agreement
As distinguished from its provision of providing management services to us, pursuant to the MSA, CGM is the owner of
100% of the Allocation Interests in us. CGM paid $0.1 million for these Allocation Interests and has the right to cause us
to purchase the Allocation Interests it owns. The Allocation Interests give CGM the right to distributions pursuant to a
profit allocation formula upon the occurrence of certain events. As a result of the sale of Staffmark in October 2011, we
paid $13.7 million of the supplemental liability to CGM in the first quarter of 2012. As a result of the sale of Halo in May
2012, we paid $0.2 million of supplemental put liability to CGM in the fourth quarter of 2012. CGM can elect to receive
the positive contribution-based profit allocation payment for each of the business acquisitions during the 30-day period
following the fifth anniversary of the date upon which we acquired a controlling interest in that business. During the year
ended December 31, 2011, we paid $6.9 million of the supplemental put liability to CGM related to ACI’s positive
contribution-based profit. In addition, we expect to pay approximately $5.2 million during 2013 of the supplemental put
liability to CGM related to Fox’s positive contribution-based profit. No profit allocations were paid to CGM in 2010.
Supplemental Put Agreement
Concurrent with the IPO, we and CGM entered into a Supplemental Put Agreement, which may require us to acquire the
Allocation Interests, described above, upon termination of the MSA. Essentially, the put rights granted to CGM require us
to acquire CGM’s Allocation Interests in us at a price based on a percentage of the increase in fair value in our businesses
over our original basis in those businesses. Each fiscal quarter we estimate the fair value of our businesses for the purpose
of determining our potential liability associated with the Supplemental Put Agreement. Any change in the potential
liability is accrued currently as a non-cash adjustment to earnings. For the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010
we recognized $16.0 million and $11.8 million and $32.5 million in expense, respectively, related to the Supplemental Put
Agreement.
Cost Reimbursement and Fees
We reimbursed our Manager, CGM, approximately $3.5 million, $3.1 million and $2.8 million, principally for occupancy
and staffing costs incurred by CGM on our behalf during the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.
CGM acted as an advisor for our 2012 acquisition of Arnold, our 2011 acquisition of CamelBak and each of our 2010
acquisitions (Liberty and Ergobaby) for which it received transaction service and expense payments in an aggregate
amount of approximately $1.2 million, $2.4 million and $1.6 million, respectively.
129
We have entered into the following significant related party transactions with our businesses during 2012:
Advanced Circuits
On December 19, 2012, we recapitalized ACI and entered into an ACI Loan Agreement. The ACI Loan Agreement was
amended to provide for additional term loan borrowings and to permit the proceeds thereof to fund cash distributions
totaling $45.0 million by ACI to Compass AC Holdings, Inc. (“ACH”), ACI’s sole shareholder, and by ACH to its
shareholders, including us, and extend the maturity dates of the term loans under the ACI Loan Agreement. Our share of
the cash distribution was approximately $31.3 million with approximately $13.7 million being distributed to ACH’s non-
controlling shareholders. All other material terms and conditions of the ACI Loan Agreement were unchanged.
American Furniture
American Furniture was not in compliance with its Maintenance Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio requirement included in the
amended credit agreement with us dated December 31, 2010. We are required to fund, in the form of an additional equity
investment, any shortfall in the difference between Adjusted EBITDA and Fixed Charges as defined in American
Furniture’s credit agreement with us. Per the maintenance agreement, the shortfall that we are required to fund, American
Furniture is in turn required to pay down its term debt with us. The amount of the shortfall at December 31, 2012 was
approximately $3.5 million.
CamelBak
Refer to the ‘Liquidity and Capital Resources’ section for detail on the CamelBak preferred stock redemption during the
year ended 2012.
Fox
Fox leases a manufacturing facility in Watsonville, California from Robert Fox, a founder and noncontrolling shareholder
of Fox. The term of the lease is through July of 2018 and the rental payments can be adjusted annually for a cost-of-living
increase based upon the consumer price index. Fox is responsible for all real estate taxes, insurance and maintenance
related to this property. The leased facility is 86,000 square feet and Fox paid rent under this lease of approximately $1.1
million for the year ended December 31, 2012.
On June 18, 2012, we recapitalized Fox and entered into a Fox Loan Agreement. The Fox Loan Agreement was amended
to (i) provide for term loan borrowings of $60 million and an increase to the revolving loan commitment of $2.0 million
and to permit the proceeds thereof to fund cash distributions totaling $67.0 million by Fox to us and to its non-controlling
shareholders, (ii) extend the maturity dates of the term loans under the Fox Loan Agreement, and (iii) modify borrowing
rates under the Fox Loan Agreement. Our share of the cash distribution was approximately $50.7 million with
approximately $16.3 million being distributed to Fox’s non-controlling shareholders. All other material terms and
conditions of the Fox Loan Agreement were unchanged.
Tridien
Tridien leased two facilities from noncontrolling shareholders of Tridien during the year ended December 31, 2012. The
terms of the leases are through September of 2013 and February of 2014. Tridien paid rent under these leases of
approximately $0.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2012. A noncontrolling shareholder sold the building being
leased by Tridien in California in July 2012.
On August 28, 2012, we purchased shares of stock of Anodyne from a group of Tridien’s noncontrolling shareholders for
an aggregate purchase price of approximately $1.9 million.
Contractual Obligations and Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements
We have no special purpose entities or off balance sheet arrangements, other than operating leases entered into in the
ordinary course of business.
Long-term contractual obligations, except for our long-term debt obligations, are generally not recognized in our
consolidated balance sheet. Non-cancelable purchase obligations are obligations we incur during the normal course of
business, based on projected needs.
130
The table below summarizes the payment schedule of our contractual obligations at December 31, 2012 (in thousands):
Long-term debt obligations (a)
Operating lease obligations (b)
Purchase obligations (c)
Supplemental put obligation (d)
T otal
More than
T otal
Less than 1 Year
1-3 Years
3-5 Years
5 Years
365,502
64,846
226,738
8,575
665,661
21,998
12,226
151,339
5,185
190,748
43,574
21,950
38,695
774
299,930
13,949
36,704
2,616
-
16,721
-
-
104,993
353,199
16,721
(a) Reflects commitment fees and letter of credit fees under our Revolving Credit Facility and amounts due, together with interest on our Revolving
Credit Facility and Term Loan Facility.
(b) Reflects various operating leases for office space, manufacturing facilities and equipment from third parties.
(c) Reflects non-cancelable commitments as of December 31, 2012, including: (i) shareholder distributions of $69.6 million, (ii) estimated management
fees of $18.0 million per year over the next five years and; (iii) other obligations, including amounts due under employment agreements.
Distributions to our shareholders are approved by our board of directors each fiscal quarter. The amount approved for future quarters may differ
from the amount included in this schedule.
(d) The long term portion of the supplemental put obligation of $46.4 million represents the estimated liability, accrued as if our management services
agreement with CGM had been terminated. This agreement has not been terminated and there is no basis upon which to determine a date in the
future, if any, that the estimated gain on sale portion will be paid, therefore it has been excluded from the table above. The Manager can elect to
receive the positive contribution-based profit allocation payment for each of our business acquisitions during the 30-day period following each fifth
year anniversary of the date upon which we acquired a controlling interest in that business. The positive contribution-based profit allocation
amounts are included in the table above. See Liquidity and Capital Resources.
Critical Accounting Estimates
The following discussion relates to critical accounting estimates for the Company, the Trust and each of our businesses at
December 31, 2012.
The preparation of our financial statements in conformity with GAAP will require management to adopt accounting
policies and make estimates and judgments that affect the amounts reported in the financial statements and accompanying
notes. Actual results could differ from these estimates under different assumptions and judgments and uncertainties, and
potentially could result in materially different results under different conditions. Our critical accounting estimates are
discussed below. These critical accounting estimates are reviewed by our independent auditors and the audit committee of
our board of directors.
Supplemental Put Agreement
In connection with our MSA, we entered into a Supplemental Put Agreement with our Manager pursuant to which our
Manager has the right to cause the Company to purchase the Allocation Interests then owned by our Manager upon
termination of the MSA for a price to be determined in accordance with the Supplemental Put Agreement. The fair value
of the supplemental put is determined using a model that multiplies the trailing twelve-month EBITDA for each reporting
unit by an estimated enterprise value multiple to determine an estimated selling price of that reporting unit. We then
deduct estimated selling and disposal costs in arriving at a net estimated selling price that is then input into an iterative
supplemental put calculation which takes into account, among other things, contractually defined cumulative contribution
based profit in order to arrive at the estimated Manager’s profit allocation accrual required, reflected on the balance sheet
as the supplemental put liability.
We review the model quarterly and make updates to EBITDA and cumulative contribution based profit. When appropriate
we may change the estimated enterprise value multiple if the market for the particular reporting unit has changed. We
review the model and assumptions with our Manager each quarter. Since some of our Manager’s functions are to (i)
identify, evaluate, manage, perform due diligence on, negotiate and oversee the acquisitions of target businesses by us and
(ii) evaluate, manage, negotiate and oversee the disposition of all or any part of our property, assets or investments,
including dispositions of all or any part of our reporting units, we feel that our Manager is particularly skilled at reviewing
and commenting on this data. Annually, we prepare a detailed analysis of the estimated enterprise value multiple for each
of our reporting units, which is one of the primary drivers used to calculate the estimated selling price. In addition,
annually, we engage an independent investment banking firm to review the estimated enterprise value multiple for
reasonableness taking into account comparable company data, comparable transactions and discounted cash flow analyses
(“DCF”).
131
The methodology and results employed in the market approach for goodwill impairment testing for each of our reporting
units is most similar to the methodology and results reflected in calculating the estimated selling price of each of our
reporting units for the purpose of estimating the fair value of the supplemental put.
We typically assign a higher weighting to the market approach as opposed to the DCF in calculating the estimated selling
price of the reporting units for the purpose of estimating the fair value of the supplemental put than we do for estimating
the fair value of our reporting units for the purpose of goodwill impairment testing, which accounts for the major
differences in value. The higher weighting is based on the premise that because the Manager can unilaterally resign, the
Company will be required to remit the profit allocation (supplemental put value) as of a specific point in time. This one-
sided put on behalf of the Manager is the principle reason that we are required to reflect this liability on our balance sheet.
The impact of over-estimating or under-estimating the value of the supplemental put agreement could have a material
effect on operating results. In addition, the value of the supplemental put agreement is subject to the volatility of our
operations which may result in significant fluctuation in the value assigned to this supplemental put agreement.
Revenue Recognition
We recognize revenue when it is realized or realizable and earned. We consider revenue realized or realizable and earned
when it has persuasive evidence of an arrangement, the product has been shipped or the services have been provided to the
customer, the sales price is fixed or determinable and collectability is reasonably assured. Provisions for customer returns
and other allowances based on historical experience are recognized at the time the related sale is recognized.
Business Combinations
The acquisitions of our businesses are accounted for under the acquisition method of accounting. The amounts assigned to
the identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed in connection with acquisitions are based on estimated fair values as
of the date of the acquisition, with the remainder, if any, to be recorded as identifiable intangibles or goodwill. The fair
values are determined by our management team, taking into consideration information supplied by the management of the
acquired entities and other relevant information. Such information typically includes valuations supplied by independent
appraisal experts for significant business combinations. The valuations are generally based upon future cash flow
projections for the acquired assets, discounted to present value. The determination of fair values requires significant
judgment both by our management team and by outside experts engaged to assist in this process. This judgment could
result in either a higher or lower value assigned to amortizable or depreciable assets. The impact could result in either
higher or lower amortization and/or depreciation expense.
Goodwill and Intangible Assets
Goodwill represents the excess of the purchase price over the fair value of the assets acquired. We are required to perform
impairment reviews at least annually and more frequently in certain circumstances.
2012 Annual goodwill impairment testing
Goodwill represents the excess amount of the purchase price over the fair value of the assets acquired. We are required to
perform impairment reviews of goodwill balances at each of our Reporting Units (“RU”) at least annually and more
frequently in certain circumstances. Each of our businesses represents a RU and Arnold is comprised of three RU. Each of
our RU is subject to impairment review at March 31, 2012, which represents our annual date for impairment testing, with
the exception of American Furniture. The balance of American Furniture’s goodwill was completely written off
in 2011.
The Financial Accounting Standards Board issued an accounting Standards Update 2011-08 (“ASU”) in September 2011
that permits companies to make a qualitative assessment of whether it is more likely than not that a RU fair value is less
than it carrying amount before applying the two-step goodwill impairment test. If a company concludes that it is not more
likely than not that the fair value of a reporting unit is less than its carrying amount it is not required to perform the two-
step impairment test for that reporting unit. This ASU is effective for fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2011. At
March 31, 2012 we elected to use the qualitative assessment alternative to test goodwill for impairment for each of our RU
that maintain a goodwill carrying value.
As prescribed by the ASU, factors to consider when making the qualitative assessment prior to performing Step 1 of the
goodwill impairment test are as follows:
132
• Macroeconomic conditions such as deterioration in general economic conditions, limitations on accessing capital,
•
fluctuations in foreign exchange rates, or other developments in equity and credit markets;
Industry and market considerations such as deterioration in the environment in which an entity operates, an
increased competitive environment, a decline (both absolute and relative to its peers) in market-dependent
multiples or metrics, a change in the market for an entity’s products or services, or a regulatory or political
development;
• Cost factor, such as increases in raw materials, labor, or other costs that have a negative effect on earnings and
cash flows;
• Overall financial performance such as negative or declining cash flows or a decline in actual or planned revenue
or earnings compared with actual or planned revenue or earnings compared with actual and projected results of
relevant prior periods;
• Other relevant entity-specific events such as litigation, contemplation of bankruptcy, or changes in management,
key personnel, strategy, or customers;
• Events affecting a RU such as change in the composition or carrying amount of its net assets, a more-likely-than-
not expectation of selling or disposing of all or a portion, of a RU, the testing for recoverability of a significant
asset group within a reporting unit, or a recognition of a goodwill impairment loss in the financial statements of a
subsidiary that is a component of a reporting unit; and
• Sustained decrease (both absolute and relative to its peers) in share price, if applicable.
In addition to considering the above factors we performed the following procedures as of March 31, 2012 for each of our
RU;
• Compared and assessed Trailing Twelve month (“TTM”) net sales as of March 31, 2012 to TTM nets sales as of
March 31, 2012:
• Compared and assessed TTM operating income as of March 31, 2012 to TTM operating income as of March 31,
2011;
• Compared and assessed TTM Adjusted EBITDA as of March 31, 2012 to Adjusted EBITDA as of March 31,
2011;
• Compared and assessed Adjusted EBITDA for the year-ended December 31, 2011 to Budget;
• Compared and assessed Adjusted EBITDA for the three-months ended March 31, 2012 to Budget;
• Compared the fair value of each of our RU to its carrying amount using the same metrics as those used in
determining the value of the supplemental put as of March, 31 2012 and concluded that in each case the fair value
of the RU was in excess of its carrying amount; and
• Performed Market Cap reconciliation for CODI and determined that CODI’s public market cap was significantly
in excess of the fair value of its consolidated equity (as derived from the aforementioned supplemental put
analysis).
Based on our qualitative assessment as outlined above we believe that it is not more likely than not that the fair value of
each of our RU is less than its carrying amount at March 31, 2012. In addition there are no triggering events at any of of
our RU which would lead us to believe that the fair value of the RU is less than its carrying value.
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
The Company records an allowance for doubtful accounts on an entity-by-entity basis with consideration for historical loss
experience, customer payment patterns and current economic trends. The Company reviews the adequacy of the allowance
for doubtful accounts on a periodic basis and adjusts the balance, if necessary. The determination of the adequacy of the
allowance for doubtful accounts requires significant judgment by management. The impact of either over or under
estimating the allowance could have a material effect on future operating results. The consolidated allowance for doubtful
accounts is approximately $3.0 million at December 31, 2012.
Deferred Tax Assets
Several of our majority owned subsidiaries have deferred tax assets recorded at December 31, 2012 which in total amount
to approximately $16.2 million. This deferred tax asset is net of $8.9 million of valuation allowance primarily associated
with AFM’s inability to utilize loss carryforwards associated with impairments in 2010 and 2011 and losses in 2012.
These deferred tax assets are comprised primarily of reserves not currently deductible for tax purposes. The temporary
differences that have resulted in the recording of these tax assets may be used to offset taxable income in future periods,
reducing the amount of taxes we might otherwise be required to pay. Realization of the deferred tax assets is dependent on
generating sufficient future taxable income. Based upon the expected future results of operations, we believe it is more
likely than not that we will generate sufficient future taxable income to realize the benefit of existing temporary
133
differences, although there can be no assurance of this. The impact of not realizing these deferred tax assets would result
in an increase in income tax expense for such period when the determination was made that the assets are not realizable.
(See Note K – “Income taxes in the Notes to consolidated financial statements”)
Recent Accounting Pronouncements
Refer to footnote B to our consolidated financial statements.
134
ITEM 7A. - Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk
Interest Rate Sensitivity
At December 31, 2012, we were exposed to interest rate risk primarily through borrowings under our Credit Facility
because borrowings under this agreement are subject to variable interest rates. We had outstanding $252.5 million under
the Term Loan Facility at December 31, 2012. Our exposure to fluctuation in variable interest on $200 million in
outstanding Term Loan Facility is hedged with an interest rate cap effective December 30, 2011 with a term of two years.
This cap fixes the future LIBOR rate to be incurred by us at a maximum of 2.5%.
We expect to borrow under our Revolving Credit Facility in the future in order to finance our short term working capital
needs and future acquisitions. These borrowings will be subject to variable interest rates.
Exchange Rate Sensitivity
At December 31, 2012, we were not exposed to significant foreign currency exchange rate risks that could have a material
effect on our financial condition or results of operations.
Credit Risk
We are exposed to credit risk associated with cash equivalents, investments, and trade receivables. We do not believe that
our cash equivalents or investments present significant credit risks because the counterparties to the instruments consist of
major financial institutions and we manage the notional amount of contracts entered into with any one counterparty. Our
cash and cash equivalents at December 31, 2012 consists principally of (i) treasury backed securities, (ii) insured prime
money market funds, (iii) FDIC insured Certificates of Deposit, and (iv) cash balances in several non-interest bearing
checking accounts. Substantially all trade receivable balances of our businesses are unsecured. The concentration of credit
risk with respect to trade receivables is limited by the large number of customers in our customer base and their dispersion
across various industries and geographic areas. Although we have a large number of customers who are dispersed across
different industries and geographic areas, a prolonged economic downturn could increase our exposure to credit risk on our
trade receivables. We perform ongoing credit evaluations of our customers and maintain an allowance for potential credit
losses.
135
ITEM 8. – FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DATA
The consolidated financial statements and financial statement schedules referred to in the index contained on page F-1 of
this report are incorporated herein by reference.
136
ITEM 9. – CHANGES AND DISAGREEMENTS WITH ACCOUNTANTS ON ACCOUNTING AND
FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE
NONE
137
ITEM 9A – CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES
Disclosure Controls and Procedures
(a) Management’s Evaluation of Disclosure Controls and Procedures. The Company’s management, with the
participation of the Company’s Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, has evaluated the effectiveness of the
Company’s disclosure controls and procedures (as such term is defined in Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e) under the
Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”)) as of the end of the period covered by this report.
Based on such evaluation, the Company’s Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer have concluded that, as of
December 31, 2012, the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures were effective in recording, processing,
summarizing and reporting, on a timely basis, information required to be disclosed by the Company in the reports that it
files or submits under the Exchange Act and in ensuring that information required to be disclosed by the Company in such
reports is accumulated and communicated to the Company’s management, including the Chief Executive Officer and Chief
Financial Officer, as appropriate to allow timely discussions regarding require disclosure.
(b) Information with respect to Report of Management on Internal Control over Financial Reporting is contained on page
F- 2 of this Annual Report on Form 10-K and is incorporated herein by reference.
(c) Information with respect to Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm on Internal Control over
Financial Reporting is contained on page F- 3 of this Annual Report on Form 10-K and is incorporated herein by
reference.
(d) Changes in Internal Control over Financial Reporting. There have not been any changes in the Company’s internal
control over financial reporting (as such term is defined in Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f) under the Exchange Act) during
our fourth fiscal quarter to which this Annual Report on Form 10-K relates that have materially affected, or are reasonably
likely to materially affect, the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.
138
ITEM 9B. – OTHER INFORMATION
None
139
PART III
ITEM 10. – DIRECTORS, EXECUTIVE OFFICERS AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
Information concerning our executive officers is incorporated herein by reference to information included in the Proxy
Statement for our 2013 Annual Meeting of Shareholders.
Information with respect to our directors and the nomination process is incorporated herein by reference to information
included in the Proxy Statement for our 2013 Annual Meeting of Shareholders.
Information regarding our audit committee and our audit committee financial experts is incorporated herein by reference to
information included in the Proxy Statement for our 2013 Annual Meeting of Shareholders.
Information required by Item 405 of Regulation S-K is incorporated herein by reference to information included in the
Proxy Statement for our 2013 Annual Meeting of Shareholders.
ITEM 11. – EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION
Information with respect to executive compensation is incorporated herein by reference to information included in the
Proxy Statement for our 2013 Annual Meeting of Shareholders.
ITEM 12. - SECURITY OWNERSHIP OF CERTAIN BENEFICIAL OWNERS AND MANAGEMENT
AND RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS
Information with respect to security ownership of certain beneficial owners and management is incorporated herein by
reference to information included in the Proxy Statement for our 2013 Annual Meeting of Shareholders.
ITEM 13. - CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS, AND
DIRECTOR INDEPENDENCE
Information with respect to such contractual relationships and independence is incorporated herein by reference to the
information in the Proxy Statement for our 2013 Annual Meeting of Shareholders.
ITEM 14. – PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES
Information with respect to principal accounting fees and services and pre-approval policies are incorporated herein by
reference to information included in the Proxy Statement for our 2013 Annual Meeting of Shareholders.
140
PART IV
ITEM 15. – EXHIBITS AND FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES
1.
2.
3.
Financial Statements
See “Index to Consolidated Financial Statements and Supplemental Data” set forth on page F-1.
Financial Statement schedule
See “Index to Consolidated Financial Statements and Supplemental Data” set forth on page F-1.
Exhibits
See “Index to Exhibits”. Set forth on Page E-1.
141
Exhibit
Number
Description
INDEX TO EXHIBITS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
4.1
4.2
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
Stock and Note Purchase Agreement dated as of July 31, 2006, among Compass Group Diversified Holdings
LLC, Compass Group Investments, Inc. and Compass Medical Mattress Partners, LP (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 2.1 of the 8-K filed on August 1, 2006)
Stock Purchase Agreement dated June 24, 2008, among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC and the
other shareholders party thereto, Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, as Sellers’ Representative,
Aeroglide Holdings, Inc. and Bühler AG (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 2.1 of the 8-K filed on June 26,
2008)
Stock Purchase Agreement, dated October 17, 2011, by and among Recruit Co., LTD. and RGF Staffing
USA, Inc., as Buyers, the shareholders of Staffmark Holdings, Inc., as Sellers, Staffmark Holdings, Inc. and
Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC as Seller Representative (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 2.1
of the Form 8-K filed on October 18, 2011.
Stock Purchase Agreement dated May 1, 2012, among Candlelight Investment Holdings, Inc., Halo Holding
Corporation, Halo Lee Wayne, LLC and each of the holders of equity interests of Halo Lee Wayne, LLC
listed on Exhibit A thereto (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 2.1 of the Form 8-K filed on May 2, 2012)
Certificate of Trust of Compass Diversified Trust (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.1 of the S-1 filed on
December 14, 2005)
Certificate of Amendment to Certificate of Trust of Compass Diversified Trust (incorporated by reference to
Exhibit 3.1 of the 8-K filed on September 13, 2007)
Certificate of Formation of Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC (incorporated by reference to Exhibit
3.3 of the S-1 filed on December 14, 2005)
Amended and Restated Trust Agreement of Compass Diversified Trust (incorporated by reference to Exhibit
3.5 of the Amendment No. 4 to S-1 filed on April 26, 2006)
Amendment No. 1 to the Amended and Restated Trust Agreement, dated as of April 25, 2006, of Compass
Diversified Trust among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, as Sponsor, The Bank of New York
(Delaware), as Delaware Trustee, and the Regular Trustees named therein (incorporated by reference to
Exhibit 4.1 of the 8-K filed on May 29, 2007)
Second Amendment to the Amended and Restated Trust Agreement, dated as of April 25, 2006, as amended
on May 23, 2007, of Compass Diversified Trust among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, as
Sponsor, The Bank of New York (Delaware), as Delaware Trustee, and the Regular Trustees named therein
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.2 of the 8-K filed on September 13, 2007)
Third Amendment to the Amended and Restated Trust Agreement dated as of April 25, 2006, as amended on
May 25, 2007 and September 14, 2007, of Compass Diversified Holdings among Compass Group Diversified
Holdings LLC, as Sponsor, The Bank of New York (Delaware), as Delaware Trustee, and the Regular
Trustees named therein (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.1 of the 8-K filed on December 21, 2007)
Fourth Amendment dated as of November 1, 2010 to the Amended and Restated Trust Agreement, as
amended effective November 1, 2010, of Compass Diversified Holdings, originally effective as of April 25,
2006, by and among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, as Sponsor, The Bank of New York
(Delaware), as Delaware Trustee, and the Regular Trustees named therein (incorporated by reference to
Exhibit 3.1 of the Form 10-Q filed on November 8, 2010)
Second Amended and Restated Operating Agreement of Compass Group Diversified Holdings, LLC dated
January 9, 2007 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2 of the 8-K filed on January 10, 2007)
Third Amended and Restated Operating Agreement of Compass Group Diversified Holdings, LLC dated
November 1, 2010 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.2 of the Form 10-Q filed on November 8, 2010)
Specimen Certificate evidencing a share of trust of Compass Diversified Holdings (incorporated by reference
to Exhibit 4.1 of the S-3 filed on November 7, 2007)
Specimen LLC Interest Certificate evidencing an interest of Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2 of the 8-K filed on January 10, 2007)
Form of Registration Rights Agreement (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.3 of the Amendment No. 5 to
S-1 filed on May 5, 2006)
Form of Supplemental Put Agreement by and between Compass Group Management LLC and Compass
Group Diversified Holdings LLC (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.4 of the Amendment No. 4 to S-1
filed on April 26, 2006)
Amended and Restated Employment Agreement dated as of December 1, 2008 by and between James J.
Bottiglieri and Compass Group Management LLC (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of the 8-K filed
on December 3, 2008)
Form of Share Purchase Agreement by and between Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, Compass
Diversified Trust and CGI Diversified Holdings, LP (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.6 of the
Amendment No. 5 to S-1 filed on May 5, 2006)
Form of Share Purchase Agreement by and between Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, Compass
142
10.06
10.07
10.08
10.09
10.10
10.11
10.12
10.13
21.1*
23.1*
31.1*
31.2*
32.1*
32.2*
99.1
99.2
99.3
99.4
99.5
99.6
99.7
99.8
99.9
101.INS*
Diversified Trust and Pharos I LLC (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.7 of the Amendment No. 5 to S-1
filed on May 5, 2006)
Amended and Restated Management Services Agreement by and between Compass Group Diversified
Holdings LLC, and Compass Group Management LLC, dated as of December 20, 2011 and originally
effective as of May 16, 2006 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.06 of the Form 10-K filed on March 7,
2012)
Registration Rights Agreement by and among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, Compass
Diversified Trust and CGI Diversified Holdings, LP, dated as of April 3, 2007 (incorporated by reference to
Exhibit 10.3 of the Amendment No. 1 to the S-1 filed on April 20, 2007)
Share Purchase Agreement by and between Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, Compass Diversified
Trust and CGI Diversified Holdings, LP, dated as of April 3, 2007 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.16
of the Amendment No. 1 to the S-1 filed on April 20, 2007)
Subscription Agreement dated August 24, 2011, by and among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC,
Compass Diversified Holdings and CGI Magyar Holdings, LLC (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of
the Form 8-K filed on August 25, 2011)
Registration Rights Agreement dated August 24, 2011, by and among Compass Group Diversified Holdings
LLC, Compass Diversified Holdings and CGI Magyar Holdings, LLC (incorporated by reference to Exhibit
10.2 of the Form 8-K filed on August 25, 2011)
Credit Agreement dated as of October 27, 2011, by and among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC,
the financial institutions party thereto and Toronto Dominion (Texas) LLC (incorporated by reference to
Exhibit 10.1 to the Form 8-K filed on October 27, 2011)
Second Amendment to Credit Agreement among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, the financial
institutions party thereto and Toronto Dominion (Texas) LLC, dated as of April 2, 2012 (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 10.1 to the Form 8-K filed on April 3, 2012)
Incremental Facility Amendment to Credit Agreement among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC and
Toronto Dominion (Texas) LLC, dated as of April 2, 2012 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2 to the
Form 8-K filed on April 3, 2012)
List of Subsidiaries
Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
Rule 13a-14(a)/15d-14(a) Certification of Chief Executive Officer of Registrant
Rule 13a-14(a)/15d-14(a) Certification of Chief Financial Officer of Registrant
Section 1350 Certification of Chief Executive Officer of Registrant
Section 1350 Certification of Chief Financial Officer of Registrant
Note Purchase and Sale Agreement dated as of July 31, 2006 among Compass Group Diversified Holdings
LLC, Compass Group Investments, Inc. and Compass Medical Mattress Partners, LP (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the 8-K filed on August 1, 2006)
Stock Purchase Agreement, dated as of February 28, 2007, by and between HA-LO Holdings, LLC and
HALO Holding Corporation (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 99.3 of the 8-K filed on March 1, 2007)
Purchase Agreement dated December 19, 2007, among CBS Personnel Holdings, Inc. and Staffing Holding
LLC, Staffmark Merger LLC, Staffmark Investment LLC, SF Holding Corp., and Stephens-SM LLC
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the 8-K filed on December 20, 2007)
Share Purchase Agreement dated January 4, 2008, among Fox Factory Holding Corp., Fox Factory, Inc. and
Robert C. Fox, Jr. (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the 8-K filed on January 8, 2008)
Stock Purchase Agreement dated May 8, 2008, among Mitsui Chemicals, Inc., Silvue Technologies Group,
Inc., the stockholders of Silvue Technologies Group, Inc. and the holders of Options listed on the signature
pages thereto, and Compass Group Management LLC, as the Stockholders Representative (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the 8-K filed on May 9, 2008)
Stock Purchase Agreement dated March 31, 2010 by and among Gable 5, Inc., Liberty Safe and Security
Products, LLC and Liberty Safe Holding Corporation (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the 8-K
filed on April 1, 2010)
Stock Purchase Agreement dated September 16, 2010, by and among ERGO Baby Intermediate Holding
Corporation, The ERGO Baby Carrier, Inc., Karin A. Frost, in her individual capacity and as Trustee of the
Revocable Trust of Karin A. Frost dated February 22, 2008 and as Trustee of the Karin A. Frost 2009
Qualified Annuity Trust u/a/d 12/21/2009 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the 8-K filed on
September 17, 2010)
Securities Purchase Agreement dated August 24, 2011, by and among CBK Holdings, LLC, CamelBak
Products, LLC, CamelBak Acquisition Corp., for purposes of Section 6.15 and Articles 10 only, Compass
Group Diversified Holdings LLC, and for purposes of Section 6.13 and Article 10 only, IPC/CamelBak LLC
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the Form 8-K filed on August 25, 2011)
Stock Purchase Agreement dated as of March 5, 2012, by and among Arnold Magnetic Technologies
Holdings Corporation, Arnold Magnetic Technologies, LLC and AMT Acquisition Corp. (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the Form 8-K filed on March 6, 2012)
XBRL Instance Document
143
101.SCH*
101.CAL*
101.DEF*
101.LAB*
101.PRE*
XBRL Taxonomy Extension Schema Document
XBRL Taxonomy Extension Calculation Linkbase Document
XBRL Taxonomy Extension Definition Linkbase Document
XBRL Taxonomy Extension Label Linkbase Document
XBRL Taxonomy Extension Presentation Linkbase Document
*
Filed herewith.
144
Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the Registrant has duly caused
this to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.
SIGNATURE
COMPASS GROUP DIVERSIFIED HOLDINGS LLC
Date: March 6, 2013
By: /s/ Alan B. Offenberg
Alan B. Offenberg
Chief Executive Officer
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this report has been signed below by the following
persons on behalf of the registrant and in the capacities and on the dates indicated.
Signature
Title
Date
/s/ Alan B. Offenberg
Alan B. Offenberg
/s/ James J. Bottiglieri
James J. Bottiglieri
/s/ C. Sean Day
C. Sean Day
/s/ D. Eugene Ewing
D. Eugene Ewing
/s/ Harold S. Edwards
Harold S. Edwards
/s/ Mark H. Lazarus
Mark H. Lazarus
/s/ Gordon Burns
Gordon Burns
Chief Executive Officer
(Principal Executive Officer)
and Director
Chief Financial Officer
(Principal Financial and Accounting
Officer) and Director
March 6, 2013
March 6, 2013
Director
March 6, 2013
Director
March 6, 2013
Director
March 6, 2013
Director
March 6, 2013
Director
March 6, 2013
145
Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the Registrant has duly caused
this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.
SIGNATURE
Date: March 6, 2013
COMPASS DIVERSIFIED HOLDINGS
By: /s/ James J. Bottiglieri
James J. Bottiglieri
Regular Trustee
146
Compass Diversified Holdings
INDEX TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
AND SUPPLEMENTAL FINANCIAL DATA
Historical Financial Statements:
Report of Management on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting
Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting
Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
Consolidated Balance Sheets as of December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011
Consolidated Statements of Operations for the Years Ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010
Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income (Loss) for the Years Ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and
2010
Consolidated Statements of Stockholders’ Equity for the Years Ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for the Years Ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements
Supplemental Financial Data:
The following supplementary financial data of the registrant and its subsidiaries required to be included in
Item 15(a) (2) of Form 10-K are listed below:
Schedule II – Valuation and Qualifying Accounts
All other schedules not listed above have been omitted as not applicable or because the required information
is included in the Consolidated Financial Statements or in the notes thereto.
Page
Numbers
F-2
F-3
F-4
F-5
F-6
F-7
F-8
F-9
F-10
S-1
F-1
REPORT OF MANAGEMENT ON INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING
Management of Compass Diversified Holdings is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control
over financial reporting as defined in Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.
Compass’ internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the
reliability of financial reporting and the preparation and fair presentation of financial statements issued for external
purposes in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America (US GAAP).
Compass’ internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that:
(cid:120)
(cid:120)
(cid:120)
pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the
transactions and dispositions of assets of the company;
provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of
financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP, and that receipts and expenditures of the company
are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company;
and
provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use
or disposition of assets of the company that could have a material effect on the consolidated financial
statements.
Internal control over financial reporting includes the entity level environment, controls activities, monitoring and internal
auditing practices and actions taken by management to correct deficiencies as identified.
Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect all misstatements.
Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become
inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may
deteriorate.
Management assessed the effectiveness of Compass’ internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2012.
In making this assessment, management used the criteria set forth by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the
Treadway Commission (COSO) in Internal Control-Integrated Framework. Based on this assessment, management
determined that Compass maintained effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2012.
The effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting has been audited by Grant Thornton, LLP an
independent registered public accounting firm, as stated in their report which appears on page F-3.
March 6, 2013
F-2
REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
Board of Directors and Shareholders
Compass Diversified Holdings
We have audited the internal control over financial reporting of Compass Diversified Holdings (a Delaware Trust) and
subsidiaries (the “Company”) as of December 31, 2012, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated
Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO). The Company’s
management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the
effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Report of Management on Internal
Control over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company’s internal control over
financial reporting based on our audit.
We conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United
States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective
internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit included obtaining an
understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, testing and
evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk, and performing such other
procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our
opinion.
A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the
reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with
generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and
procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the
transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded
as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and
that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and
directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized
acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.
Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also,
projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate
because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.
In our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of
December 31, 2012, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by COSO.
We also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United
States), the consolidated financial statements of the Company as of and for the year ended December 31, 2012, and our
report dated March 6, 2013 expressed an unqualified opinion on those financial statements.
/s/ GRANT THORNTON LLP
New York, New York
March 6, 2013
F-3
REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
Board of Directors and Shareholders
Compass Diversified Holdings
We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Compass Diversified Holdings (a Delaware Trust) and
subsidiaries (the “Company”) as of December 31, 2012 and 2011, and the related consolidated statements of operations,
comprehensive income, stockholders' equity, and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31,
2012. Our audits of the basic financial statements include the financial statement schedule listed in the index appearing
under Item 15(a)(2). These financial statements and financial schedule are the responsibility of the Company’s
management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements and financial statement schedule
based on our audits.
We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United
States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the
financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the
amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and
significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe
that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.
In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial
position of Compass Diversified Holdings and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2012 and 2011, and the results of their
operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2012 in conformity with
accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. Also in our opinion, the related financial
statement schedule when considered in relation to the basic consolidated financial statements taken as a whole, present
fairly, in all material respects, the information set forth therein.
We also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United
States), the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2012, based on criteria established in
Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway
Commission (COSO), and our report dated March 6, 2013 expressed an unqualified opinion thereon.
/s/ GRANT THORNTON LLP
New York, NY
March 6, 2013
F-4
Compass Diversified Holdings
Consolidated Balance Sheets
(in thousands )
Assets
Current assets:
Cash and cash equivalents...............................................................................................
Accounts receivable, less allowances of $3,049 at December 31, 2012
and $2,420 at December 31, 2011.............................................................................
Inventories.......................................................................................................................
Prepaid expenses and other current assets......................................................................
Current assets of discontinued operations......................................................................
Total current assets......................................................................................................
Property, plant and equipment, net................................................................................
Goodwill..........................................................................................................................
Intangible assets, net........................................................................................................
Deferred debt issuance costs, less accumulated amortization of
December 31,
2012
December 31,
2011
$ 18,241
$ 131,973
100,647
127,283
21,488
-
267,659
68,488
257,527
340,666
69,114
96,312
22,758
40,064
360,221
43,579
205,567
328,070
$2,038 at December 31, 2012 and $227 at December 31, 2011.................................
Other non-current assets.................................................................................................
Non-current assets of discontinued operations...............................................................
Total assets
8,238
12,623
-
$ 955,201
6,942
13,889
71,638
$ 1,029,906
Liabilities and stockholders’ equity
Current liabilities:
Accounts payable............................................................................................................
Accrued expenses............................................................................................................
Due to related party........................................................................................................
Current portion of supplemental put obligation.............................................................
Current portion, long-term debt......................................................................................
Other current liabilities....................................................................................................
Current liabilities of discontinued operations..................................................................
Total current liabilities..................................................................................................
Supplemental put obligation............................................................................................
Deferred income taxes......................................................................................................
Long-term debt, less original issue discount....................................................................
Other non-current liabilities.............................................................................................
Non-current liabilities of discontinued operations..........................................................
Total liabilities
S tockholders’ equity
Trust shares, no par value, 500,000 authorized; 48,300 shares issued and
$ 52,207
48,139
3,765
5,185
2,550
1,953
-
113,799
46,413
63,982
267,008
7,787
-
498,989
$ 36,612
36,386
4,239
13,675
2,250
1,694
23,306
118,162
35,814
49,088
214,000
2,875
13,489
433,428
outstanding at December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011.......................................
Accumulated other comprehensive loss .........................................................................
Accumulated deficit.........................................................................................................
Total stockholders’ equity attributable to Holdings..................................................
Noncontrolling interest....................................................................................................
Noncontrolling interest of discontinued operations........................................................
Total stockholders’ equity..............................................................................................
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
650,043
(132)
(235,283)
414,628
41,584
-
456,212
$ 955,201
658,361
-
(160,852)
497,509
95,257
3,712
596,478
$ 1,029,906
See notes to consolidated financial statements.
F-5
Compass Diversified Holdings
Consolidated Statements of Operations
(in thousands, except per share data)
Net sales......................................................................................................
Cost of sales................................................................................................
Gross profit
Operating expenses:
Selling, general and administrative expense..........................................
Supplemental put expense....................................................................
Management fees.................................................................................
Amortization expense.........................................................................
Impairment expense............................................................................
O pe rating income (loss)
Other income (expense):
Year ended December 31,
2012
2011
2010
$884,721
$606,644
$504,659
605,867
427,500
366,297
278,854
179,144
138,362
161,141
110,031
81,585
15,995
11,783
32,516
17,633
16,283
14,576
30,268
22,072
17,023
-
27,769
38,835
53,817
(8,794)
(46,173)
Interest income...................................................................................
54
33
20
Interest expense..................................................................................
Amortization of debt issuance costs.....................................................
(25,055)
(12,643)
(9,695)
(1,811)
(1,951)
(1,789)
Loss on debt extinguishment................................................................
- (2,636)
-
Other income (expense), net...............................................................
(183)
49
(168)
Income (loss) from continuing ope rations be fore income taxe s
Provision for income taxes..................................................................
Income (loss) from continuing ope rations
Income (loss) from discontinued operations, net of income tax...........
Gain (loss) on sale of discontinued operations, net of income tax........
Ne t income (loss)
Less: Income from continuing operations attributable to
noncontrolling interest
Less: Income (loss) from discontinued operations attributable to
noncontrolling interest
Ne t income (loss) attributable to Holdings
26,822
(25,942)
(57,805)
21,069
6,859
8,519
5,753
(32,801)
(66,324)
(1,168)
17,021
21,554
(245)
88,592
-
4,340
72,812
(44,770)
8,508
5,641
902
(226)
$ (3,942)
2,212
$ 64,959
3,085
$ (48,757)
Amounts attributable to Holdings:
Loss from continuing operations.........................................................
Income (loss) from discontinued operations, net of income tax...........
$ (2,755)
$ (38,442)
$ (67,226)
(942)
14,809
18,469
Gain (loss) on sale of discontinued operations, net of income tax........
(245)
88,592
-
Net income (loss) attributable to Holdings...........................................
$
(3,942)
$
64,959
$
(48,757)
Basic and fully dilute d income (loss) pe r share attributable to
Holdings
Continuing operations.........................................................................
Discontinued operations......................................................................
$
(0.06)
$
(0.81)
$
(1.64)
(0.02)
(0.08)
$
2.18
1.37
$
0.45
(1.19)
$
Weighted average number of shares of trust stock outstanding – basic and
fully diluted
48,300
47,286
40,928
Cash distributions declared per share (refer to Note M)
$
1.44
$
1.44
$
1.36
See notes to consolidated financial statements.
F-6
Compass Diversified Holdings
Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income (Loss)
(in thousands)
Year ended December 31,
2012
2011
2010
Ne t income (loss)...............................................................
$ 4,340
$ 72,812
$ (44,770)
Other comprehensive income (loss)......................................
Cash flow hedge gain, net of tax........................................
-
143
1,858
Foreign currency translation and other.............................
Total compre he nsive income (loss), ne t of tax...............
(132)
$ 4,208
-
-
$ 72,955
$ (42,912)
See notes to consolidated financial statements.
F-7
s
g
n
i
d
l
o
H
d
e
i
f
i
s
r
e
v
i
D
s
s
a
p
m
o
C
y
t
i
u
q
E
’
s
r
e
d
l
o
h
k
c
o
t
S
f
o
s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
S
d
e
t
a
d
i
l
o
s
n
o
C
l
a
t
o
T
g
n
i
l
l
o
r
t
n
o
c
-
n
o
N
-
n
o
N
'
s
r
e
d
l
o
h
k
c
o
t
S
r
e
h
t
O
.
m
u
c
c
A
y
t
i
u
q
E
.
s
p
O
.
c
s
i
D
f
o
t
s
e
r
e
t
n
I
s
g
n
i
d
l
o
H
o
t
s
s
o
L
t
i
c
i
f
e
D
t
n
u
o
m
A
s
e
r
a
h
S
’
s
r
e
d
l
o
h
k
c
o
t
S
t
s
e
r
e
t
n
I
g
n
i
l
l
o
r
t
n
o
C
.
b
i
r
t
t
A
y
t
i
u
q
E
e
v
i
s
n
e
h
e
r
p
m
o
C
d
e
t
a
l
u
m
u
c
c
A
f
o
r
e
b
m
u
N
)
s
d
n
a
s
u
o
h
t
n
i
(
6
6
0
,
8
0
5
$
1
5
3
,
9
4
$
4
5
5
1,
2
$
1
6
1
,
7
3
4
$
1)
0
0
,
2
(
$
)
8
2
6
,
6
4
(
$
0
9
7
,
5
8
4
$
5
2
6
,
6
3
0
1
0
2
,
1
y
r
a
u
n
a
J
—
e
c
n
a
l
a
B
)
0
7
7
,
4
4
(
6
8
0
,
3
8
5
8
1,
3
7
9
,
2
5
1
5
8
4
,
8
0
0
0
1,
3
1
9
,
4
)
4
4
1
,
6
(
4
9
6
,
4
)
5
6
1
,
5
5
(
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
6
3
7
1,
1
0
9
-
-
5
8
4
,
8
0
0
0
1,
7
7
1
,
3
)
4
4
1
,
6
(
4
9
6
,
4
-
-
-
-
-
-
)
5
6
1
,
5
5
(
-
-
-
-
-
-
)
7
5
7
,
8
4
(
8
5
8
1,
3
7
9
,
2
5
1
-
-
8
5
8
1,
)
7
5
7
,
8
4
(
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
)
5
6
1
,
5
5
(
-
-
-
-
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s
s
o
l
t
e
N
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
n
i
a
g
e
g
d
e
h
w
o
l
f
h
s
a
c
–
e
m
o
c
n
i
e
v
i
s
n
e
h
e
r
p
m
o
c
r
e
h
t
O
3
7
9
,
2
5
1
0
0
1
,
0
1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s
t
s
o
c
g
n
i
r
e
f
f
o
f
o
t
e
n
,
s
e
r
a
h
s
t
s
u
r
T
f
o
e
c
n
a
u
s
s
I
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s
r
e
d
l
o
h
e
r
a
h
s
g
n
i
l
l
o
r
t
n
o
c
n
o
n
y
t
r
e
b
i
L
d
n
a
y
b
a
b
o
g
r
E
o
t
k
c
o
t
s
f
o
e
c
n
a
u
s
s
I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s
r
e
d
l
o
h
e
r
a
h
s
g
n
i
l
l
o
r
t
n
o
c
n
o
n
m
o
r
f
n
o
i
t
u
b
i
r
t
n
o
C
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s
r
e
d
l
o
h
e
r
a
h
s
g
n
i
l
l
o
r
t
n
o
c
n
o
n
o
t
e
l
b
a
t
u
b
i
r
t
t
a
y
t
i
v
i
t
c
a
n
o
i
t
p
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
r
e
d
l
o
h
e
r
a
h
s
g
n
i
l
l
o
r
t
n
o
c
n
o
n
o
t
n
o
i
t
u
b
i
r
t
s
i
D
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
r
e
d
l
o
h
e
r
a
h
s
g
n
i
l
l
o
r
t
n
o
c
n
o
n
m
o
r
f
n
a
o
l
f
o
t
n
e
m
y
a
p
e
R
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
d
i
a
p
s
n
o
i
t
u
b
i
r
t
s
i
D
0
1
9
,
5
7
5
$
3
7
1
,
4
5
$
7
6
6
,
3
3
$
0
7
0
,
8
8
4
$
)
3
4
1
(
$
)
0
5
5
,
0
5
1
(
$
3
6
7
,
8
3
6
$
5
2
7
,
6
4
0
1
0
2
,
1
3
r
e
b
m
e
c
e
D
—
e
c
n
a
l
a
B
3
4
1
2
1
8
,
2
7
8
8
6
,
9
1
)
0
9
(
0
0
5
,
4
0
0
0
,
5
4
-
-
)
2
3
0
,
4
(
2
1
0
,
4
)
9
4
5
,
4
5
(
)
6
1
9
,
6
6
(
2
1
2
,
2
1
4
6
,
5
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
6
7
8
1,
)
9
4
5
,
4
5
(
-
-
-
0
0
5
,
4
0
0
0
,
5
4
8
6
5
,
6
7
7
7
1,
)
2
3
0
,
4
(
6
3
1
,
2
-
-
)
0
9
(
9
5
9
,
4
6
3
4
1
8
8
6
,
9
1
-
-
)
8
6
5
,
6
(
)
7
7
7
1,
(
-
-
-
)
6
1
9
,
6
6
(
8
7
4
,
6
9
5
$
2
1
7
,
3
$
7
5
2
,
5
9
$
9
0
5
,
7
9
4
$
)
6
2
2
(
8
0
5
,
8
)
2
4
9
,
3
(
0
4
3
,
4
)
2
3
1
(
3
1
7
1,
6
1
9
,
2
)
9
9
0
,
5
1
(
-
)
9
4
7
,
3
1
(
7
1
2
,
4
)
2
1
4
,
3
(
)
2
2
0
,
8
4
(
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
)
2
5
5
,
9
6
(
2
1
2
,
6
5
4
$
-
-
)
6
8
4
,
3
(
)
6
8
4
,
3
(
)
5
5
5
,
6
(
)
4
4
5
,
8
(
)
9
4
7
,
3
1
(
-
7
3
9
)
8
3
6
,
3
(
)
2
2
0
,
8
4
(
7
1
2
,
4
-
-
)
7
3
9
(
6
2
2
-
-
-
)
2
5
5
,
9
6
(
-
3
1
7
1,
6
1
9
,
2
-
-
)
2
3
1
(
)
2
3
1
(
-
3
4
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
9
5
9
,
4
6
-
-
-
)
8
6
5
,
6
(
)
7
7
7
1,
(
)
6
1
9
,
6
6
(
-
-
)
0
9
(
8
8
6
,
9
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
5
7
5
1,
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
e
m
o
c
n
i
t
e
N
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
n
i
a
g
e
g
d
e
h
w
o
l
f
h
s
a
c
–
e
m
o
c
n
i
e
v
i
s
n
e
h
e
r
p
m
o
c
r
e
h
t
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
)
C
e
t
o
N
e
e
s
(
n
o
i
t
i
s
i
u
q
c
a
k
a
B
l
e
m
a
C
r
o
f
s
e
r
a
h
s
t
s
u
r
T
f
o
e
c
n
a
u
s
s
I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s
e
r
a
h
s
t
s
u
r
T
f
o
e
c
n
a
u
s
s
i
e
h
t
r
o
f
s
t
s
o
c
n
o
i
t
a
r
t
s
i
g
e
r
d
n
a
g
n
i
r
e
f
f
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s
r
e
d
l
o
h
e
r
a
h
s
g
n
i
l
l
o
r
t
n
o
c
n
o
n
o
t
k
c
o
t
s
f
o
e
c
n
a
u
s
s
I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s
r
e
d
l
o
h
e
r
a
h
s
g
n
i
l
l
o
r
t
n
o
c
n
o
n
k
a
B
l
e
m
a
C
o
t
k
c
o
t
s
d
e
r
r
e
f
e
r
p
f
o
e
c
n
a
u
s
s
I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
k
c
o
t
s
d
e
r
r
e
f
e
r
p
k
a
B
l
e
m
a
C
-
e
r
u
t
a
e
f
n
o
i
s
r
e
v
n
o
c
l
a
i
c
i
f
e
n
e
B
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
k
c
o
t
s
d
e
r
r
e
f
e
r
p
k
a
B
l
e
m
a
C
-
n
o
i
t
e
r
c
c
A
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s
r
e
d
l
o
h
t
s
e
r
e
t
n
i
g
n
i
l
l
o
r
t
n
o
c
n
o
n
f
o
n
o
i
t
p
m
e
d
e
R
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s
r
e
d
l
o
h
e
r
a
h
s
g
n
i
l
l
o
r
t
n
o
c
n
o
n
o
t
e
l
b
a
t
u
b
i
r
t
t
a
y
t
i
v
i
t
c
a
n
o
i
t
p
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
n
o
i
t
i
s
o
p
s
i
d
k
r
a
m
f
f
a
t
S
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
d
i
a
p
s
n
o
i
t
u
b
i
r
t
s
i
D
$
)
2
5
8
,
0
6
1
(
$
1
6
3
,
8
5
6
$
0
0
3
,
8
4
1
1
0
2
,
1
3
r
e
b
m
e
c
e
D
—
e
c
n
a
l
a
B
-
-
-
-
-
)
2
4
9
,
3
(
-
-
-
-
)
7
3
9
(
)
2
5
5
,
9
6
(
-
-
-
-
)
4
4
5
,
8
(
-
-
6
2
2
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
)
s
s
o
l
(
e
m
o
c
n
i
t
e
N
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
r
e
h
t
o
d
n
a
n
o
i
t
a
l
s
n
a
r
t
y
c
n
e
r
r
u
c
n
g
i
e
r
o
f
–
s
s
o
l
e
v
i
s
n
e
h
e
r
p
m
o
c
r
e
h
t
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s
r
e
d
l
o
h
e
r
a
h
s
g
n
i
l
l
o
r
t
n
o
c
n
o
n
d
l
o
n
r
A
m
o
r
f
d
e
v
i
e
c
e
r
s
d
e
e
c
o
r
P
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s
r
e
d
l
o
h
e
r
a
h
s
g
n
i
l
l
o
r
t
n
o
c
n
o
n
m
o
r
f
d
e
v
i
e
c
e
r
s
d
e
e
c
o
r
P
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
o
t
d
e
t
a
l
e
r
s
r
e
d
l
o
h
e
r
a
h
s
g
n
i
l
l
o
r
t
n
o
c
n
o
n
o
t
n
o
i
t
u
b
i
r
t
s
i
D
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
)
P
e
t
o
N
o
t
r
e
f
e
r
(
n
o
i
t
a
z
i
l
a
t
i
p
a
c
e
r
x
o
F
e
h
t
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
o
t
d
e
t
a
l
e
r
s
r
e
d
l
o
h
e
r
a
h
s
g
n
i
l
l
o
r
t
n
o
c
n
o
n
o
t
n
o
i
t
u
b
i
r
t
s
i
D
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
)
P
e
t
o
N
o
t
r
e
f
e
r
(
n
o
i
t
a
z
i
l
a
t
i
p
a
c
e
r
I
C
A
e
h
t
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
k
c
o
t
s
d
e
r
r
e
f
e
r
p
k
a
B
l
e
m
a
C
-
n
o
i
t
e
r
c
c
A
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s
r
e
d
l
o
h
t
s
e
r
e
t
n
i
g
n
i
l
l
o
r
t
n
o
c
n
o
n
f
o
n
o
i
t
p
m
e
d
e
R
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
k
c
o
t
s
d
e
r
r
e
f
e
r
p
k
a
B
l
e
m
a
C
f
o
n
o
i
t
p
m
e
d
e
R
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s
r
e
d
l
o
h
e
r
a
h
s
g
n
i
l
l
o
r
t
n
o
c
n
o
n
o
t
e
l
b
a
t
u
b
i
r
t
t
a
y
t
i
v
i
t
c
a
n
o
i
t
p
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
n
o
i
t
i
s
o
p
s
i
d
O
L
A
H
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
d
i
a
p
s
n
o
i
t
u
b
i
r
t
s
i
D
.
s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l
a
i
c
n
a
n
i
f
d
e
t
a
d
i
l
o
s
n
o
c
o
t
s
e
t
o
n
e
e
S
8
-
F
$
4
8
5
1,
4
$
8
2
6
,
4
1
4
$
)
2
3
1
(
$
)
3
8
2
,
5
3
2
(
$
3
4
0
,
0
5
6
$
0
0
3
,
8
4
2
1
0
2
,
1
3
r
e
b
m
e
c
e
D
—
e
c
n
a
l
a
B
Compass Diversified Holdings
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows
(in thousands)
C ash flows from ope rating activitie s:
Year ended December 31,
2012
2011
2010
Net income (loss)........................................................................................
$ 4,340
$ 72,812
$(44,770)
Adjustments to reconcile net income (loss) to net cash provided by
operating activities:
Gain on sale of Staffmark........................................................................
(219)
(88,592)
-
Loss on sale of HALO.............................................................................
464
-
-
Depreciation expense..............................................................................
14,793
10,186
9,025
Amortization expense.............................................................................
34,657
38,923
33,095
Impairment expense................................................................................
-
27,769
38,835
Amortization of debt issuance costs and original issue discount................
4,169
2,201
1,789
Loss on debt extinguishment...................................................................
-
2,636
-
Supplemental put expense.......................................................................
15,995
11,783
32,516
Unrealized loss on interest rate swap.......................................................
2,175
1,822
-
Noncontrolling stockholder charges and other.........................................
4,236
4,270
7,637
Deferred taxes.........................................................................................
(2,060)
(17,858)
(7,146)
Other......................................................................................................
986
421
441
Changes in operating assets and liabilities, net of acquisition:
Increase in accounts receivable................................................................
(2,137)
(7,517)
(22,500)
(Increase) decrease in inventories............................................................
(13,703)
5,056
(13,030)
(Increase) decrease in prepaid expenses and other current assets..............
(1,580)
7,864
(3,812)
Increase in accounts payable and accrued expenses..................................
4,336
26,490
12,761
Payment of supplemental put liability.....................................................
(13,886)
(6,892)
-
Net cash provided by operating activities
52,566
91,374
44,841
C ash flows from inve sting activitie s:
Acquisitions, net of cash acquired................................................................
(126,412)
(277,980)
(173,732)
Purchases of property and equipment..........................................................
(18,546)
(21,868)
(8,668)
Proceeds related to Staffmark sale...............................................................
8,355
217,249
-
Proceeds related to HALO sale....................................................................
66,709
-
-
Purchase of noncontrolling interest.............................................................
(15,423)
(4,032)
-
Other investing activities............................................................................
891
11
8
Net cash used in investing activities
(84,426)
(86,620)
(182,392)
C ash flows from financing activitie s:
Proceeds from the issuance of T rust shares, net...........................................
-
19,598
152,973
Borrowings under credit facility...................................................................
186,000
502,000
202,300
Repayments under credit facility.................................................................
(135,005)
(373,000)
(182,800)
Proceeds from issuance of CamelBak preferred stock..................................
-
45,000
-
Redemption of CamelBak preferred stock...................................................
(48,022)
-
-
Distributions paid........................................................................................
(69,552)
(66,916)
(55,165)
Net proceeds provided by noncontrolling shareholders................................
12,061
4,500
2,671
Net proceeds paid to noncontrolling shareholders........................................
(30,038)
-
-
Debt issuance costs......................................................................................
(3,154)
(16,720)
(259)
Excess tax benefit on stock-based compensation.........................................
5,755
-
-
Other..........................................................................................................
(277)
(382)
(128)
Net cash (used in) provided by financing activities
(82,232)
114,080
119,592
Foreign currency impact on cash.................................................................
(37)
-
-
Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents
(114,129)
118,834
(17,959)
Cash and cash equivalents — beginning of period.........................................
Cash and cash equivalents — end of period..................................................
132,370
$ 18,241
13,536
$132,370
31,495
$ 13,536
See notes to consolidated financial statements.
F-9
Compass Diversified Holdings
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements
December 31, 2012
Note A — Organization and Business Operations
Compass Diversified Holdings, a Delaware statutory trust (“the Trust”), was incorporated in Delaware on November 18,
2005. Compass Group Diversified Holdings, LLC, a Delaware limited liability Company (the “Company”), was also
formed on November 18, 2005. Compass Group Management LLC, a Delaware limited liability Company (“CGM” or the
“Manager”), is the sole owner of 100% of the interests of the Company (as defined in the Company’s operating agreement,
dated as of November 18, 2005), which were subsequently reclassified as the “Allocation Interests” pursuant to the
Company’s amended and restated operating agreement, dated as of April 25, 2006 (as amended and restated, the “LLC
Agreement”) (see Note P - Related Parties).
The Trust and the Company were formed to acquire and manage a group of small and middle-market businesses
headquartered in North America. In accordance with the amended and restated Trust Agreement, dated as of April 25,
2006 (the “Trust Agreement”), the Trust is sole owner of 100% of the Trust Interests (as defined in the LLC Agreement) of
the Company and, pursuant to the LLC Agreement, the Company has, outstanding, the identical number of Trust Interests
as the number of outstanding shares of the Trust. Compass Group Diversified Holdings, LLC, a Delaware limited liability
company is the operating entity with a board of directors and other corporate governance responsibilities, similar to that of
a Delaware corporation.
The Company is a controlling owner of eight businesses, or reportable segments, at December 31, 2012. The segments are
as follows: Compass AC Holdings, Inc. (“ACI” or “Advanced Circuits”), American Furniture Manufacturing, Inc. (“AFM”
or “American Furniture”), AMT Acquisition Corporation (“Arnold” or “Arnold Magnetics”) CamelBak Acquisition Corp.
(“CamelBak”), The Ergo Baby Carrier, Inc. ("Ergobaby”), Fox Factory, Inc. (“Fox”), Liberty Safe and Security Products,
Inc. (“Liberty Safe” or “Liberty”), and Tridien Medical, Inc. (“Tridien”). Refer to Note E for further discussion of the
operating segments.
Note B — Summary of Significant Accounting Policies
Accounting principles
The Company’s consolidated financial statements are prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally
accepted in the United States of America (US GAAP).
Basis of presentation
The results of operations for the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010 represent the results of operations of the
Company’s acquired businesses from the date of their acquisition by the Company, and therefore are not indicative of the
results to be expected for the full year.
Principles of consolidation
The consolidated financial statements include the accounts of the Trust and the Company, as well as the businesses
acquired as of their respective acquisition date. All significant intercompany accounts and transactions have been
eliminated in consolidation. Discontinued operating entities are reflected as discontinued operations in the Company’s
results of operations and statements of financial position.
The acquisition of businesses that the Company owns or controls more than a 50% share of the voting interest are
accounted for under the acquisition method of accounting. The amount assigned to the identifiable assets acquired and the
liabilities assumed is based on the estimated fair values as of the date of acquisition, with the remainder, if any, recorded as
goodwill.
Reclassification
Certain amounts in the historical consolidated financial statements have been reclassified to conform to the current period
presentation. American Furniture implemented a revised standard costing system during 2011 which required American
Furniture to reclassify certain costs between cost of sales and selling, general and administrative expenses. The change in
format consists of reclassifying the trucking fleet expenses from selling, general and administrative expenses into cost of
sales, as well as reclassifying certain manufacturing related expenses including rent, insurance, utilities and workers
compensation from selling, general and administrative costs to cost of sales. Management believes that the format of
reporting cost of sales together with the revised standard costing system and the revaluation of standard costs has allowed
F-10
management to more timely react to changes in supply costs, product demand and overall price structure which in turn has
helped eliminate the accumulation of lower margin product and allow for more advantageous product procurement and the
proper utilization of available assets. The reclassification from selling, general and administrative expense to cost of sales
during both the years ended December 31, 2011 and 2010 was $6.6 million, respectively. This reclassification lowered the
historical gross profit recorded in these periods but had no net impact on operating income (loss) or net income (loss). In
addition, this reclassification had no impact on the financial position or cash flows during these periods.
Discontinued Operations
On May 1, 2012, the Company sold its majority owned subsidiary, HALO. As a result, HALO’s net income for the periods
from January 1, 2012 through the date of sale and the years ended December 31, 2011 and 2010 have been reclassified to
income from discontinued operations for those periods in accordance with accounting guidelines. In addition, HALO’s
assets and liabilities have been reclassified as assets and liabilities of discontinued operations as of December 31, 2011.
On October 17, 2011, the Company sold its majority owned subsidiary, Staffmark. As a result, Staffmark’s net income for
the periods from January 1, 2011 through the date of sale and the year ended December 31, 2010 have been reclassified to
income from discontinued operations for those periods in accordance with accounting guidelines.
Use of estimates
The preparation of financial statements in conformity with US GAAP requires management to make estimates and
assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the
date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. These
estimates are based on management’s best knowledge of current events and actions the Company may undertake in the
future. It is possible that in 2013 actual conditions could be better or worse than anticipated when the Company developed
the estimates and assumptions, which could materially affect the results of operations and financial position. Such changes
could result in future impairment of goodwill, intangibles and long-lived assets, inventory obsolescence, establishment of
valuation allowances on deferred tax assets and increased tax liabilities among other things. Actual results could differ
from those estimates.
Revenue recognition
In accordance with authoritative guidance on revenue recognition, the Company recognizes revenue when persuasive
evidence of an arrangement exists, delivery has occurred, the sellers price to the buyer is fixed and determinable, and
collection is reasonably assured. Shipping and handling costs are charged to operations when incurred and are classified as
a component of cost of sales.
Revenue is recognized upon shipment of product to the customer, net of sales returns and allowances. Appropriate
reserves are established for anticipated returns and allowances based on past experience. Revenue is typically recorded at
F.O.B. shipping point for all our businesses with the exception being American Furniture which reports revenues F.O.B.
destination.
Cash equivalents
The Company considers all highly liquid investments with original maturities of three months or less to be cash
equivalents.
Allowance for doubtful accounts
The Company uses estimates to determine the amount of the allowance for doubtful accounts in order to reduce accounts
receivable to their estimated net realizable value. The Company estimates the amount of the required allowance by
reviewing the status of past-due receivables and analyzing historical bad debt trends. The Company’s estimate also
includes analyzing existing economic conditions. When the Company becomes aware of circumstances that may impair a
specific customer’s ability to meet its financial obligations subsequent to the original sale, the Company will record an
allowance against amounts due, and thereby reduce the net receivable to the amount it reasonably believes will be
collectible.
Inventories
Inventories consist of raw materials, WIP, manufactured goods and purchased goods acquired for resale. Inventories are
stated at the lower of cost or market, determined on the first-in, first-out method. Cost includes raw materials, direct labor,
manufacturing overhead and indirect overhead. Market value is based on current replacement cost for raw materials and
supplies and on net realizable value for finished goods.
F-11
Inventory is comprised of the following (in thousands):
Raw materials and supplies......................................................
Finished goods..........................................................................
Less: obsolescence reserve.......................................................
Total
December 31,
2012
December 31,
2011
$ 75,894
60,565
(9,176)
$ 127,283
$ 53,659
48,596
(5,943)
$ 96,312
Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment is recorded at cost. The cost of major additions or betterments is capitalized, while
maintenance and repairs that do not improve or extend the useful lives of the related assets are expensed as incurred.
Depreciation is provided principally on the straight-line method over estimated useful lives. Leasehold improvements are
amortized over the life of the lease or the life of the improvement, whichever is shorter.
The ranges of useful lives are as follows:
M achinery and equipment...................................................... 2 to 25 years
Office furniture, computers and software............................... 2 to 8 years
Leasehold improvements......................................................... Shorter of useful life or lease term
Property, plant and equipment and other long-lived assets, that have definitive lives, are evaluated for impairment when
events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value of the assets may not be recoverable (‘triggering
event’). Upon the occurrence of a triggering event, the asset is reviewed to assess whether the estimated undiscounted cash
flows expected from the use of the asset plus residual value from the ultimate disposal exceeds the carrying value of the
asset. If the carrying value exceeds the estimated recoverable amounts, the asset is written down to its fair value. Refer to
Note G for a discussion of an impairment of long-lived assets at the AFM operating segment in 2011.
Property, plant and equipment is comprised of the following (in thousands):
December 31,
2012
December 31,
2011
$ 79,088
M achinery and equipment......................................................
6,548
Office furniture, computers and software...............................
Leasehold improvements......................................................... 11,915
4,517
Buildings and land...................................................................
102,068
(33,580)
$ 68,488
Less: accumulated depreciation...............................................
Total
$ 49,340
4,030
9,541
-
62,911
(19,332)
$ 43,579
Depreciation expense was approximately $14.8 million, $7.3 million and $5.5 million for the years ended December 31,
2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.
Fair value of financial instruments
The carrying value of the Company’s financial instruments, including cash, accounts receivable and accounts payable
approximate their fair value due to their short term nature. Term Debt with a carrying value of $245.6 million, net of
original issue discount, at December 31, 2012 approximated fair value. The fair value is based on interest rates that are
currently available to the Company for issuance of debt with similar terms and remaining maturities.
Business combinations
The Company allocates the amount it pays for each acquisition to the assets acquired and liabilities assumed based on their
fair values at the date of acquisition, including identifiable intangible assets which arise from a contractual or legal right or
are separable from goodwill. The Company bases the fair value of identifiable intangible assets acquired in a business
combination on detailed valuations that use information and assumptions provided by management, which consider
management’s best estimates of inputs and assumptions that a market participant would use. The Company allocates any
excess purchase price that exceeds the fair value of the net tangible and identifiable intangible assets acquired to goodwill.
F-12
The use of alternative valuation assumptions, including estimated growth rates, cash flows, discount rates and estimated
useful lives could result in different purchase price allocations and amortization expense in current and future periods.
Transaction costs associated with these acquisitions are expensed as incurred through selling, general and administrative
expense on the consolidated statement of operations. In those circumstances where an acquisition involves a contingent
consideration arrangement, the Company recognizes a liability equal to the fair value of the contingent payments expected
to be made as of the acquisition date. The Company re-measures this liability each reporting period and records changes in
the fair value through a separate line item within the consolidated statements of operations.
Goodwill
Goodwill represents the excess of the purchase price over the fair value of the assets acquired and liabilities assumed. The
Company is required to perform impairment reviews at each of its reporting units annually and more frequently in certain
circumstances.
In accordance with accounting guidelines, the Company is able to make a qualitative assessment of whether it is more
likely than not that a reporting unit’s fair value is less than its carrying amount before applying the two-step goodwill
impairment test. If a company concludes that it is more likely than not that the fair value of a reporting unit is not less than
its carrying amount it is not required to perform the two-step impairment test for that reporting unit.
The first step of the process after the qualitative assessment fails is estimating the fair value of each of its reporting units
based on a discounted cash flow (“DCF”) model using revenue and profit forecast and a market approach which compares
peer data and earnings multiples. The Company then compares those estimated fair values with the carrying values, which
include allocated goodwill. If the estimated fair value is less than the carrying value, a second step is performed to
compute the amount of the impairment by determining an “implied fair value” of goodwill. The determination of a
reporting unit’s “implied fair value” of goodwill requires the allocation of the estimated fair value of the reporting unit to
the assets and liabilities of the reporting unit. Any unallocated fair value represents the “implied fair value” of goodwill,
which is then compared to its corresponding carrying value. The Company cannot predict the occurrence of certain future
events that might adversely affect the implied value of goodwill and/or the fair value of intangible assets. Such events
include, but are not limited to, strategic decisions made in response to economic and competitive conditions, the impact of
the economic environment on its customer base, and material adverse effects in relationships with significant customers.
The impact of over-estimating or under-estimating the implied fair value of goodwill at any of the reporting units could
have a material effect on the results of operations and financial position. In addition, the value of the implied goodwill is
subject to the volatility of the Company’s operations which may result in significant fluctuation in the value assigned at
any point in time.
Refer to Note G for the results of the annual impairment tests.
Deferred debt issuance costs
Deferred debt issuance costs represent the costs associated with the issuance of debt instruments and are amortized over the
life of the related debt instrument.
Warranties
The Company’s CamelBak, Ergobaby, Fox, Liberty and Tridien operating segments estimate the exposure to warranty
claims based on both current and historical product sales data and warranty costs incurred. The Company assesses the
adequacy of its recorded warranty liability quarterly and adjusts the amount as necessary.
Supplemental put
In connection with the Management Services Agreement (“MSA’), the Company entered into a supplemental put
agreement with the Manager pursuant to which the Manager has the right to cause the Company to purchase the Allocation
Interests then owned by the Manager upon termination of the MSA for a price to be determined in accordance with the
supplemental put agreement. Essentially, the put right granted to CGM requires the Company to acquire CGM’s
Allocation Interests in the Company at a price based on 20% of the company’s profits upon clearance of a 7% annualized
hurdle rate. Each fiscal quarter the Company estimates the fair value of this potential liability associated with the
Supplemental Put Agreement. Any change in the potential liability is accrued currently as a non-cash adjustment to
earnings.
For the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, the Company recognized approximately $16.0 million, $11.8
million and $32.5 million, respectively, in expense related to the Supplemental Put Agreement. Upon the sale of any of the
majority owned subsidiaries, the Company will be obligated to pay CGM the amount of the supplemental put liability
allocated to the sold subsidiary. As a result of the sale of Staffmark in October 2011, the Company paid $13.7 million of
F-13
the supplemental liability to CGM in the first quarter of 2012. As a result of the sale of Halo in May 2012, the Company
paid $0.2 million of supplemental put liability to CGM in the fourth quarter of 2012. CGM can elect to receive the positive
contribution-based profit allocation payment for each of the business acquisitions during the 30-day period following the
fifth anniversary of the date upon which the Company acquired a controlling interest in that business. During the year
ended December 31, 2011, the Company paid $6.9 million of the supplemental put liability to CGM related to ACI’s
positive contribution-based profit. In addition, the Company expects to pay approximately $5.2 million during 2013 of the
supplemental put liability to CGM related to Fox’s positive contribution-based profit. No profit allocations were paid to
CGM in 2010.
Foreign currency
For the Company’s segments with certain operations outside the United States, the local currency is the functional
currency, and the financial statements are translated into U.S. dollars using exchange rates in effect at year-end for assets
and liabilities and average exchange rates during the year for results of operations. The resulting translation gain or loss is
included in stockholder's equity as other comprehensive income or loss.
Derivatives and hedging
The Company had utilized an interest rate swap (derivative) to manage risks related to interest rates on the last $70.0
million of its Prior Term Loan Facility (“swap”) under the Prior Credit Agreement. The Company had elected hedge
accounting treatment to account for its swap and had designated the swap as a cash flow hedge and as a result, unrealized
changes in fair value of the hedge were reflected in comprehensive income (loss). The swap expired January 22, 2011.
The Company has not elected hedge accounting treatment for its most recent interest rate derivatives entered into as part of
the new Credit Facility. Refer to Note I for more information on the Company’s Credit Facility.
Noncontrolling interest
Noncontrolling interest represents the portion of a majority-owned subsidiary’s net income that is owned by noncontrolling
shareholders. Noncontrolling interest on the balance sheet represents the portion of equity in a consolidated subsidiary
owned by noncontrolling shareholders.
Deferred income taxes
Deferred income taxes are calculated under the liability method. Deferred income taxes are provided for the differences
between the basis of assets and liabilities for financial reporting and income tax purposes at the enacted tax rates. A
valuation allowance is established when necessary to reduce deferred tax assets to the amount that is expected to more
likely than not be realized. Several of the Company’s majority owned subsidiaries have deferred tax assets recorded at
December 31, 2012 which in total amount to approximately $16.2 million. This deferred tax asset is net of $8.9 million of
valuation allowance primarily associated with AFM’s inability to utilize loss carryforwards associated with impairments in
2010 and 2011 and losses in 2012. These deferred tax assets are comprised primarily of reserves not currently deductible
for tax purposes. The temporary differences that have resulted in the recording of these tax assets may be used to offset
taxable income in future periods, reducing the amount of taxes required to be paid. Realization of the deferred tax assets is
dependent on generating sufficient future taxable income at those subsidiaries with deferred tax assets. Based upon the
expected future results of operations, the Company believes it is more likely than not that those subsidiaries with deferred
tax assets will generate sufficient future taxable income to realize the benefit of existing temporary differences, although
there can be no assurance of this. The impact of not realizing these deferred tax assets would result in an increase in
income tax expense for such period when the determination was made that the assets are not realizable.
Earnings per share
Basic and fully diluted income (loss) per share attributable to Holdings is computed on a weighted average basis.
2012
The weighted average number of Trust shares outstanding for fiscal 2012 was computed based on 48,300,000
shares outstanding for the period from January 1, 2012 through December 31, 2012.
2011
The weighted average number of Trust shares outstanding for fiscal 2011 was computed based on 46,725,000
shares outstanding for the period from January 1, 2011 through December 31, 2011 and 1,575,000 shares issued in
connection with the acquisition of CamelBak outstanding for the period from August 24, 2011 through December
31, 2011.
2010
The weighted average number of Trust shares outstanding for fiscal 2010 was computed based on 36,625,000
shares outstanding for the period from January 1, 2010 through December 31, 2010 and 5,100,000 additional
shares outstanding issued in connection with the Company’s secondary offering for the period from April 16,
F-14
2010 through December 31, 2010, and 150,000 shares outstanding issued in connection with the over-allotment
for the period from April 23, 2010 through December 31, 2010. Further, the weighted average number of Trust
shares outstanding for fiscal 2010 included 4,300,000 additional shares outstanding issued in connection with the
Company’s secondary offering for the period from November 17, 2010 through December 31, 2010, and 550,000
shares issued in connection with the over-allotment outstanding for the period from December 8, 2010 through
December 31, 2010.
The Company did not have any stock option plan or any other potentially dilutive securities outstanding during the years
ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010.
Advertising costs
Advertising costs are expensed as incurred and included in selling, general and administrative expense in the consolidated
statements of operations. Advertising costs were $12.9 million, $8.4 million and $4.6 million during the years ended
December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.
Research and development
Research and development costs are expensed as incurred and included in selling, general and administrative expense in
the consolidated statements of operations. The Company incurred research and development expense of $11.8 million,
$8.4 million and $5.5 million during the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.
Employee retirement plans
The Company and many of its segments sponsor defined contribution retirement plans, such as 401(k) plans. Employee
contributions to the plan are subject to regulatory limitations and the specific plan provisions. The Company and its
segments may match these contributions up to levels specified in the plans and may make additional discretionary
contributions as determined by management. The total employer contributions to these plans were $1.2 million, $0.8
million and $0.6 million for the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.
The Company’s Arnold Magnetics subsidiary maintains a defined benefit plan which is more fully described in Note Q.
Accounting guidelines require employers to recognize the overfunded or underfunded status of defined benefit pension and
postretirement plans as assets or liabilities in their consolidated balance sheets and to recognize changes in that funded
status in the year in which the changes occur as a component of comprehensive income.
Seasonality
Earnings of certain of the Company’s operating segments are seasonal in nature. Earnings from AFM are typically highest
in the months of January through April of each year, coinciding with homeowners’ tax refunds. Revenue and earnings
from Fox are typically highest in the third quarter, coinciding with the delivery of product for the new bike year. Earnings
from Liberty are typically lowest in the second quarter due to lower demand for safes at the onset of summer. Earnings
from CamelBak are typically higher in the spring and summer months as this corresponds with warmer weather in the
Northern Hemisphere and an increase in hydration related activities.
Stock based compensation
The Company does not have a stock based compensation plan; however, certain of the Company’s subsidiaries maintain
stock based compensation plans. During the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, $4.2 million, $2.1 million
and $1.1 million of stock based compensation expense was recorded to each expense category that included related salary
expense in the consolidated statements of operations. As of December 31, 2012, the amount to be recorded for stock
compensation expense in future years for unvested options ranges from approximately $9 million to $11 million.
Recent accounting pronouncements
In July 2012, the Financial Accounting Standards Board ("FASB") issued amended guidance for performing indefinite-
lived intangible impairment tests, which was effective for the Company January 1, 2013. It allows the Company to
perform a qualitative assessment to determine whether further impairment testing of indefinite-lived intangible assets is
necessary. The adoption of the amended guidance did not have a significant impact on the consolidated financial
statements.
In September 2011, the FASB issued amended guidance for performing goodwill impairment tests, which was effective for
the Company beginning January 1, 2012. The guidance amended the two-step goodwill impairment test by permitting an
entity to first assess qualitative factors in determining whether the fair value of a reporting unit is less than its carrying
amount. The adoption of the amended guidance did not have a significant impact on the consolidated financial statements.
In June 2011, the FASB issued amended guidance for presenting comprehensive income, which was effective for the
Company beginning January 1, 2012. The amended guidance eliminated the option to present other comprehensive income
F-15
and its components in the statement of stockholders' equity. The Company elected to present the items of net income and
other comprehensive income in two separate, but consecutive statements. The adoption of the amended guidance did not
have a significant impact on the consolidated financial statements.
In May 2011, the FASB issued amended guidance for measuring fair value and required disclosure information about such
measures, which was effective for the Company beginning January 1, 2012, and applied prospectively. The amended
guidance requires an entity to disclose all transfers between Level 1 and Level 2 of the fair value hierarchy as well as
provide quantitative and qualitative disclosures related to Level 3 fair value measurements. Additionally, the amended
guidance requires an entity to disclose the fair value hierarchy level which was used to determine the fair value of financial
instruments that are not measured at fair value, but for which fair value information must be disclosed. The adoption of the
amended guidance did not have a significant impact on the consolidated financial statements.
Note C - Acquisition of Businesses
2012 Acquisition
Acquisition of Arnold Magnetics
On March 5, 2012, AMT Acquisition Corp. ("Arnold Acquisition"), a subsidiary of the Company, entered into a stock
purchase agreement with Arnold Magnetic Technologies, LLC, and Arnold Magnetics pursuant to which Arnold
Acquisition acquired all of the issued and outstanding equity of Arnold Magnetics.
Based in Rochester, NY with an operating history of more than 100 years, Arnold is a leading global manufacturer of
engineered magnetic solutions for a wide range of specialty applications and end-markets, including energy, medical,
aerospace and defense, consumer electronics, general industrial and automotive. From its nine manufacturing facilities
located in the United States, the United Kingdom, Switzerland and China, Arnold produces high performance permanent
magnets, flexible magnets and precision foil products that are mission critical in motors, generators, sensors and other
systems and components. Based on its long-term relationships, Arnold has built a diverse and blue-chip customer base
totaling more than 2,000 clients worldwide.
The Company made loans to and purchased a 96.6% controlling interest in Arnold on a primary and fully diluted basis.
The purchase price, including proceeds from noncontrolling interests, was approximately $130.5 million (excluding
acquisition-related costs). Acquisition related costs were approximately $4.8 million and were recorded to selling, general
and administrative expense during the year ended December 31, 2012. The Company funded the acquisition through
available cash on its balance sheet and a draw of $25 million on its Revolving Credit Facility. Arnold’s management and
certain other investors invested in the transaction alongside the Company, collectively representing 3.4% initial
noncontrolling interest on a primary and fully diluted basis. CGM acted as an advisor to the Company in the transaction
and received fees and expense payments totaling approximately $1.2 million.
The results of operations of Arnold have been included in the consolidated statements of operations from the date of
acquisition. Arnold’s results of operations are reported as a separate operating segment.
F-16
The table below includes the assets and liabilities assumed as of the acquisition date.
Arnold
(in thousands)
Assets:
Cash...........................................................................................
Accounts receivable, net (1).......................................................
Inventory (2).............................................................................
Other current assets....................................................................
Property, plant and equipment (3)..............................................
Intangible assets..........................................................................
Goodwill (4)................................................................................
Other assets................................................................................
T otal assets
Liabilities and noncontrolling interests:
Current liabilities........................................................................
Other liabilities...........................................................................
Noncontrolling interest (5).........................................................
T otal liabilities and noncontrolling interest
Net assets acquired......................................................................
Noncontrolling interest..............................................................
Intercompany loans to businesses...............................................
Amounts
Recognized as
of Acquisition
Date
$ 6,965
18,728
20,550
3,391
20,805
41,700
51,441
6,478
$ 170,058
$ 24,374
98,417
1,713
$ 124,504
$ 45,554
1,713
85,500
$ 132,767
(1) Includes $19.1 million of gross contractual accounts receivable, of which $0.4
million was not expected to be collected. T he fair value of accounts receivable
approximated book value acquired.
(2) Includes $3.0 million of inventory fair value step up. T his balance was fully
amortized during the year ended December 31, 2012.
(3) Includes $13.8 million of property, plant and equipment fair value step up.
(4) Goodwill is not deductible for tax purposes.
(5) Fair value of noncontrolling interest approximates book value.
The intangible assets recorded in connection with the Arnold Magnetics acquisition are as follows (in thousands):
Intangible asse ts
Customer relationships.................................................
T echnology .................................................................
T echnology..................................................................
Other............................................................................
T rade name..................................................................
T rade name..................................................................
Amount
$
22,770
11,790
1,260
90
5,370
420
41,700
$
Estimate d
Use ful Life
15
10
7
less than one year
10
5
Joint Venture
Arnold Magnetics is a 50% partner in a China rare earth mine-to-magnet joint venture. Arnold Magnetics accounts for its
activity in the joint venture utilizing the equity method of accounting. Gains and losses from the joint venture are not
material for the year ended December 31, 2012.
Unaudited pro-forma information
The following unaudited pro-forma data for the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 gives effect to the acquisition of
Arnold Magnetics, as described above, as if the acquisition had been completed as of January 1, 2011. The pro forma data
gives effect to historical operating results with adjustments to interest expense, amortization and depreciation expense,
management fees and related tax effects. The information is provided for illustrative purposes only and is not necessarily
indicative of the operating results that would have occurred if the transaction had been consummated on the date indicated,
nor is it necessarily indicative of future operating results of the consolidated companies, and should not be construed as
representing results for any future period.
F-17
(in thousands)
Year ended December 31,
2012
2011
Net sales.............................................................................................
Operating income (loss)......................................................................
Net income.........................................................................................
Net income attributable to Holdings....................................................
Basic and diluted net income (loss) per share attributable to Holdings..
$907,970
$742,992
55,600
(712)
5,608
(2,674)
$ (0.06)
73,221
65,368
$ 1.38
Other acquisition
On May 23, 2012, the Company’s subsidiary, Advanced Circuits, completed the acquisition of Universal Circuits, Inc. a
manufacturer of printed circuit boards, for approximately $2.3 million. The manufacturing facility is located in Maple
Grove, Minnesota. This acquisition expands ACI’s capabilities and provides immediate access to manufacturing
capabilities of more advanced higher tech PCBs. The following is a summary of the assets and liabilities recorded in
connection with this acquisition (in thousands):
Assets:
Accounts receivable....................................................................
Inventory...................................................................................
Property, plant and equipment...................................................
Goodwill.....................................................................................
Intangible asset, non-compete....................................................
Intangible asset, customer relationships......................................
T otal assets
Liabilities:
Accounts payable and accrued expenses......................................
$ 2,304
747
937
-
19
393
$ 4,400
$ 2,120
$
2,280
2011 Acquisition
Acquisition of CamelBak Products, LLC
On August 24, 2011, CamelBak Acquisition Corp. ("CamelBak Acquisition"), a subsidiary of the Company, entered into a
stock purchase agreement with CamelBak Products LLC ("CamelBak”), and certain management stockholders pursuant to
which CamelBak Acquisition acquired all of the membership interests of CamelBak.
Based in Petaluma, California and founded in 1989, CamelBak invented the hands-free hydration category and is the global
leader in personal hydration gear. The company offers a complete line of technical hydration packs, reusable BPA-free
water bottles, performance hydration accessories, specialized military gloves and performance accessories for outdoor,
recreation and military use. CamelBak's reputation as an innovator of best-in-class personal hydration products has enabled
the company to establish partnerships with leading national retailers, sporting goods stores, independent and chain
specialty retailers and the U.S. military. Through its global distribution network, CamelBak products are available in more
than 50 countries worldwide.
The Company made loans to and purchased an 89.9% controlling interest in CamelBak. The purchase price, including
proceeds from noncontrolling interests, was approximately $258.6 million (excluding acquisition-related costs). The
Company funded its portion of the acquisition through drawings on its Prior Revolving Credit Facility, as well as through
funds provided by a private placement of 1,575,000 of its common shares at the closing price of $12.50 per share on
August 23, 2011, to CGI Magyar Holdings LLC (“CMH”), the Company’s largest shareholder. In addition, an affiliate of
CMH purchased $45.0 million of 11% convertible preferred stock in CamelBak Acquisition Corp and CamelBak’s
management and certain other investors invested in the transaction alongside the Company, collectively representing an
approximate 10.1% initial noncontrolling interest on both a primary and fully diluted basis. Acquisition-related costs were
approximately $4.4 million and were recorded in selling, general and administrative expense on the Company’s
consolidated statement of operations. CGM acted as an advisor to the Company in the transaction and received fees and
expense payments totaling approximately $2.4 million.
F-18
Repurchase of CamelBak preferred stock
On March 6, 2012, CamelBak redeemed its 11% convertible preferred stock for $45.3 million plus accrued dividends of
$2.7 million, from an affiliate of CGI Magyar Holdings, LLC ($47.7 million), the Company’s largest shareholder, and
noncontrolling shareholders ($0.3 million). The Company funded the redemption with its cash through intercompany debt
and an equity contribution from the Company of $19.2 million and $25.9 million, respectively. In addition, noncontrolling
shareholders of CamelBak invested $2.9 million of equity in order for the Company and noncontrolling shareholders to
maintain existing ownership percentages of CamelBak common stock of 89.9% and 10.1%, respectively.
2011 Other acquisitions
On November 18, 2011, the Company’s subsidiary Ergobaby completed an acquisition of Orbit Baby, Inc. (“Orbit Baby”)
for approximately $15.0 million in cash and $2.5 million in Ergobaby common stock. Orbit Baby produces and markets a
premium line of stroller travel systems. In connection with this acquisition, goodwill of $6.1 million was recorded and was
not tax deductible. In addition to goodwill, the Company recorded $2.9 million related to customer relationships with an
estimated useful life of 15 years, $6.3 million related to patents with an estimated useful life of 10 years, $0.8 million
related to non-compete agreements with an estimated useful life of 3 years and an indefinite useful lived tradename asset of
$0.5 million. Further, Ergobaby recorded approximately $1.0 million of inventory, approximately $0.4 million in gross
accounts receivable, $0.2 million of fixed assets and approximately $(0.6) million in other working capital items.
Note D – Discontinued Operations
HALO sale
On May 1, 2012, the Company sold its majority owned subsidiary HALO, to Candlelight Investment Holdings, Inc., for a
total enterprise value of $76.5 million. The transaction is subject to customary escrow requirements and adjustment for
certain changes in the working capital of HALO. The HALO purchase agreement contains customary representations,
warranties, covenants and indemnification provisions.
At the closing, the Company received approximately $66.0 million in cash in respect of its debt and equity interests in
HALO and for the payment of accrued interest and fees after payments to non-controlling shareholders and payment of all
transaction expenses. The Company also subsequently received approximately $0.8 million of proceeds that were held in
escrow. In addition, the Company expects to receive a tax refund of approximately $1.0 million resulting from the tax
benefit of the transaction expenses incurred in connection with the transaction. The net proceeds were used to repay
outstanding debt under the Company’s Revolving Credit Facility. The Company recognized a loss of $0.5 million for the
year ended December 31, 2012 as a result of the sale of HALO. CGM’s profit allocation was $0.2 million and was paid in
the fourth quarter of 2012.
Summarized operating results for HALO for the years ended December 31, 2010 and 2011, and the period from January 1,
2012 through the date of disposition were as follows (in thousands):
For the period
Jan. 1, 2012
Year
Year
through
ended Dec. 31,
ended Dec. 31,
disposition
2011
2010
Ne t s a le s ....................................................................................................................
$
51,253
$
170,894
$
159,940
Ope ra ting inc o m e (lo s s )......................................................................................
Inc o m e (lo s s ) fro m c o ntinuing o pe ra tio ns be fo re inc o m e ta xe s .......
P ro vis io n (be ne fit) fo r inc o m e ta xe s ..............................................................
(2,141)
(2,141)
(973)
9,034
9,091
2,264
4,870
4,853
881
Inc o m e (lo s s ) fro m dis c o ntinue d o pe ra tio ns (1)........................................
$
(1,168)
$
6,827
$
3,972
(1) T he results for the periods from January 1, 2012 through disposition, the year
ended December 31, 2011 and the year ended December 31, 2010, exclude $0.7 million,
$2.2 million and $2.5 million of intercompany interest expense, respectively.
F-19
The following table presents summary balance sheet information of HALO as of December 31, 2011 (in thousands):
December 31,
2011
Asse ts:
Cash.........................................................................
$
397
Accounts receivable, net...........................................
Inventories...............................................................
Prepaid expenses and other current assets.................
30,275
4,709
4,683
Current assets of discontinued operations..................
$
40,064
Property, plant and equipment, net..........................
Goodwill...................................................................
Intangible assets, net.................................................
Other non-current assets...........................................
1,656
39,773
30,034
175
Non-current assets of discontinued operations..........
$
71,638
Liabilitie s:
Accounts payable......................................................
Accrued expenses and other current liabilities...........
14,014
9,292
Current liabilities of discontinued operations.............
$
23,306
Deferred income taxes..............................................
Other non-current liabilities......................................
13,396
93
Non-current liabilities of discontinued operations.....
$
13,489
Noncontrolling interest of discontinued operations...
$
3,712
Staffmark Sale
On October 17, 2011, the Company sold its majority owned subsidiary, Staffmark, for a total enterprise value of $295
million. The Company’s share of the net proceeds, received at closing, after accounting for the redemption of Staffmark’s
noncontrolling holders and the payment of transaction expenses totaled approximately $217.2 million. The Company has
subsequently received approximately $8.4 million of various escrow proceeds during 2012 and expects to receive an
additional $4.1 million. The remaining escrowed funds have been discounted for the time-value-of-money by $0.6 million
and are expected to be released at different dates during 2013 and 2014. The Company in total expects to have received
funds of $229.7 million for the sale of Staffmark. CGM’s profit allocation was $13.7 million and was paid in the first
quarter of 2012. The Company recorded a gain on the sale of Staffmark of $88.6 million during the quarter ended
December 31, 2011. The Company recorded additional gain on the sale of Staffmark during 2012 of $0.2 million.
Summarized operating results for Staffmark through the date of disposition were as follows (in thousands):
F o r the pe rio d
J a nua ry 1, 2011
F o r the ye a r e nde d
thro ugh dis po s itio n
De c e m be r 31, 2010
Net sales.............................................................................
$
831,028
$
993,010
Operating income...............................................................
Income from operations before income taxes.....................
Provision (benefit) for income taxes..................................
4,503
3,853
(6,341)
20,262
19,317
1,735
Income from discontinued operations (1)...........................
$
10,194
$
17,582
(1) T he results for the periods from January 1, 2011 through disposition, the year ended December 31, 2010
exclude $3.0 million and $5.2 million of intercompany interest expense, respectively.
F-20
Note E – Operating Segment Data
At December 31, 2012, the Company had eight reportable operating segments. Each operating segment represents a
platform acquisition. The Company’s operating segments are strategic business units that offer different products and
services. They are managed separately because each business requires different technology and marketing strategies. A
description of each of the reportable segments and the types of products from which each segment derives its revenues is as
follows:
(cid:120) Advanced Circuits, an electronic components manufacturing company, is a provider of prototype, quick-turn and
volume production rigid printed circuit boards. ACI manufactures and delivers custom printed circuit boards to
customers primarily in North America. ACI is headquartered in Aurora, Colorado.
(cid:120) American Furniture is a leading domestic manufacturer of upholstered furniture for the promotional segment of
the marketplace. AFM offers a broad product line of stationary and motion furniture, including sofas, loveseats,
sectionals, recliners and complementary products, sold primarily at retail price points ranging between $199 and
$1,399. AFM is a low-cost manufacturer and is able to ship most products in its line within 48 hours of receiving
an order. AFM is headquartered in Ecru, Mississippi and its products are sold in the United States.
(cid:120) Arnold Magnetics is a leading global manufacturer of engineered magnetic solutions for a wide range of specialty
applications and end-markets, including energy, medical, aerospace and defense, consumer electronics, general
industrial and automotive. Arnold Magnetics produces high performance permanent magnets (PMAG), flexible
magnets (FlexMag) and precision foil products (Rolled Products) that are mission critical in motors, generators,
sensors and other systems and components. Based on its long-term relationships, the company has built a diverse
and blue-chip customer base totaling more than 2,000 clients worldwide. Arnold Magnetics is headquartered in
Rochester, New York.
(cid:120) CamelBak is a designer and manufacturer of personal hydration products for outdoor, recreation and military use.
CamelBak offers a complete line of technical hydration packs, reusable BPA-free water bottles, performance
hydration accessories, specialized military gloves and performance accessories. Through its global distribution
network, CamelBak products are available in more than 50 countries worldwide. CamelBak is headquartered in
Petaluma, California.
(cid:120) Ergobaby is a premier designer, marketer and distributor of babywearing products and accessories, and a premium
line of stroller travel systems. Ergobaby's reputation for product innovation, reliability and safety has led to
numerous awards and accolades from consumer surveys and publications. Ergobaby offers a broad range of
wearable baby carriers and related products that are sold through more than 650 retailers and web shops in the
United States and internationally. Ergobaby is headquartered in Los Angeles, California.
(cid:120) Fox is a designer, manufacturer and marketer of high end suspension products for mountain bikes, all-terrain
vehicles, snowmobiles and other off-road vehicles. Fox acts as both a tier one supplier to leading action sport
original equipment manufacturers and provides after-market products to retailers and distributors. Fox is
headquartered in Scotts Valley, California and its products are sold worldwide.
(cid:120) Liberty Safe is a designer, manufacturer and marketer of premium home and gun safes in North America. From
it’s over 200,000 square foot manufacturing facility, Liberty produces a wide range of home and gun safe models
in a broad assortment of sizes, features and styles. Liberty is headquartered in Payson, Utah.
(cid:120) Tridien is a leading designer and manufacturer of powered and non-powered medical therapeutic support surfaces
and patient positioning devices serving the acute care, long-term care and home health care markets. Tridien is
headquartered in Coral Springs, Florida and its products are sold primarily in North America.
The tabular information that follows shows data for each of the operating segments reconciled to amounts reflected in the
consolidated financial statements. The operations of each of the operating segments are included in consolidated operating
results as of their date of acquisition. Segment profit is determined based on internal performance measures used by the
Chief Executive Officer to assess the performance of each business. All our operating segments are deemed reporting units
for purposes of annual or event-driven goodwill impairment testing, with the exception of Arnold Magnetics which has
three reporting units (PMAG, FlexMag and Rolled Products). Segment profit excludes certain charges from the
acquisitions of the Company’s initial businesses not pushed down to the segments which are reflected in the Corporate and
other line item. There were no significant inter-segment transactions.
F-21
A disaggregation of the Company’s consolidated revenue and other financial data for the years ended December 31, 2012,
2011 and 2010 is presented below (in thousands):
Net sales of operating segments
Year ended December 31,
2012
2011
2010
ACI............................................................................
$ 84,071
$ 78,506
$ 74,481
American Furniture....................................................
91,455
105,345
136,901
Arnold Magnetics.......................................................
104,184
-
-
CamelBak..................................................................
157,633
42,650
-
ERGObaby.................................................................
64,032
44,327
12,227
Fox............................................................................
235,869
197,740
170,983
Liberty.......................................................................
91,622
82,222
48,966
T ridien.......................................................................
55,855
55,854
61,101
T otal
884,721
606,644
504,659
Re conciliation of se gme nt re ve nue s to
consolidate d re ve nue s:
Corporate and other...................................................
-
-
-
T otal consolidated revenues
$ 884,721
$ 606,644
$ 504,659
International Revenues
Revenues from geographic locations outside the United States were not material for any operating segment, except Fox,
Ergobaby, CamelBak and Arnold, in each of the periods presented. Fox recorded net sales to locations outside the United
States, principally Europe and Asia, of $149.6 million, $129.9 million and $113.6 million for the years ended December
31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively. Ergobaby recorded net sales to locations outside the United States of $37.6 million
and $28.2 million for the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011, respectively. CamelBak recorded net sales to
locations outside the United States of $30.1 million and $8.5 million for the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011.
Arnold Magnetics recorded net sales to locations outside the United States of $45.8 million for the year ended December
31, 2012. There were no significant inter-segment transactions.
Profit (loss) of operating segments (1)
Year ended December 31,
2012
2011
2010
ACI (2)......................................................................
$ 23,967
$ 26,561
$ 20,388
American Furniture (3)..............................................
(1,520)
(35,236)
(37,088)
Arnold Magnetics (4).................................................
(518)
-
-
CamelBak (5).............................................................
25,501
(6,801)
-
ERGObaby (6)...........................................................
10,928
7,856
(2,388)
Fox............................................................................
26,152
22,586
19,576
Liberty (7).................................................................
5,985
4,336
(811)
T ridien.......................................................................
3,667
5,015
8,013
T otal
94,162
24,317
7,690
Re conciliation of se gme nt profit to
consolidate d income (loss) from continuing
ope rations be fore income taxe s:
Interest expense, net..................................................
(25,001)
(12,610)
(9,675)
Other income (expense), net......................................
(183)
49
(168)
Corporate and other (8).............................................
(42,156)
(37,698)
(55,652)
T otal consolidated income (loss) from continuing
operations before income taxes
$ 26,822
$ (25,942)
$ (57,805)
(1) Segment profit (loss) represents operating income (loss).
(2) The year ended December 31, 2012 includes $0.4 million of acquisition-related costs incurred as a result of the acquisition of Universal Circuits.
(3) Includes $26.6 million of goodwill, intangible assets and fixed asset impairment charges and a $1.1 million write down of assets held for sale during
the year ended December 31, 2011. Includes $38.8 million of goodwill and intangible asset impairment charges during the year ended December 31,
2010. See Note G.
(4) The year ended December 31, 2012 results include $4.8 million of acquisition-related costs incurred in connection with the acquisition of Arnold.
(5) The year ended December 31, 2011 results include $4.4 million of acquisition-related costs incurred in connection with the acquisition of CamelBak.
(6) The years ended December 31, 2011 and 2010 results include $0.3 million and $2.2 million of acquisition-related costs incurred in connection with the
acquisition of Ergobaby.
(7) The year ended December 31, 2010 results include $1.6 million of acquisition-related costs incurred in connection with the acquisition of Liberty.
(8) Primarily relates to fair value adjustments to the supplemental put liability and management fees expensed and payable to CGM.
F-22
Accounts
Accounts
Accounts receivable
ACI......................................................................................................
American Furniture..............................................................................
Arnold Magnetics..................................................................................
Receivable
December 31, 2012
$ 6,045
8,840
15,850
23,665
CamelBak.............................................................................................
6,262
ERGObaby..........................................................................................
25,664
Fox.......................................................................................................
Liberty.................................................................................................
11,914
Tridien.................................................................................................. 5,456
Receivable
December 31, 2011
$ 5,102
10,306
-
17,111
2,867
18,635
13,331
4,182
Total
Reconciliation of segment to consolidated totals:
103,696
71,534
Corporate and other.............................................................................
Total
Allowance for doubtful accounts.........................................................
-
103,696
(3,049)
-
71,534
(2,420)
Total consolidated net accounts receivable
$ 100,647
$ 69,114
Goodwill
Dec. 31,
2012
Goodwill
Dec. 31,
2011
Identifiable
Assets
Dec. 31,
2012(1)
Identifiable
Assets
Dec. 31,
2011(1)
Depreciation and Amortization
Year ended December 31,
2012
2011
2010
Goodwill and identifiable assets of operating segments
ACI................................................................................
$ 57,615
$ 57,615
$ 28,044
$ 26,329
$ 4,865
$ 4,556
$ 4,279
American Furniture........................................................
-
-
23,827
20,306
139
2,931
3,082
Arnold Magnetics (2).....................................................
51,767
-
90,877
-
9,373
-
-
CamelBak......................................................................
5,546
5,546
231,102
239,905
12,973
10,376
-
ERGObaby.....................................................................
41,664
41,471
70,002
74,457
4,215
2,553
4,342
Fox................................................................................
31,372
31,372
86,188
80,392
7,204
6,598
6,150
Liberty...........................................................................
32,684
32,684
38,265
40,064
7,023
6,485
5,161
T ridien...........................................................................
19,555
19,555
18,934
19,139
2,330
2,376
2,891
T otal
240,203
188,243
587,239
500,592
48,122
35,875
25,905
Reconciliation of segment to consolidated total:
Corporate and other identifiable assets (3).....................
Amortization of debt issuance costs and original
issue discount.................................................................
Goodwill carried at Corporate level (4)...........................
T otal
-
-
9,788
142,931
228
224
451
17,324
17,324
-
-
$ 257,527
$ 205,567
$ 597,027
$ 643,523
$ 52,519
$ 38,300
$ 28,145
4,169
2,201
1,789
(1) Does not include accounts receivable balances per schedule above.
(2) Arnold Magnetics has three reporting units PMAG, FlexMag and Rolled Products with good will balances of $40.4 million, $4.8 million and $6.5
million, respectively.
(3) Corporate assets were reduced during the year ended December 31, 2012 primarily as a result of cash at December 31, 2011 utilized to fund the
acquisition of Arnold Magnetics.
(4) Represents goodwill resulting from purchase accounting adjustments not “pushed down” to the segments. This amount is allocated back to the
respective segments for purposes of goodwill impairment testing.
Note F - Commitments and Contingencies
Leases
The Company and its subsidiaries lease office and manufacturing facilities, computer equipment and software under
various operating arrangements. Certain of the leases are subject to escalation clauses and renewal periods.
F-23
The future minimum rental commitments at December 31, 2012 under operating leases having an initial or remaining non-
cancelable term of one year or more are as follows (in thousands):
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
Thereafter
$
$
12,226
11,825
10,125
7,892
6,057
16,721
64,846
The Company’s rent expense for the fiscal years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010 totaled $11.6 million, $7.2
million and $5.7 million, respectively.
Legal Proceedings
In the normal course of business, the Company and its subsidiaries are involved in various claims and legal proceedings.
While the ultimate resolution of these matters has yet to be determined, the Company does not believe that any unfavorable
outcomes will have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated financial position or results of operations.
Note G - Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets
Goodwill represents the difference between purchase cost and the fair value of net assets acquired in business acquisitions.
Indefinite lived intangible assets, representing trademarks and trade names, are not amortized unless their useful life is
determined to be finite. Long-lived intangible assets are subject to amortization using the straight-line method. Goodwill
and indefinite lived intangible assets are tested for impairment annually as of March 31, and more often if a triggering
event occurs, by comparing the fair value of each reporting unit to its carrying value.
2010 annual impairment test
The Company completed its analysis of the 2010 annual goodwill impairment testing in accordance with guidelines issued
by the FASB as of March 31, 2010. For each reporting unit, the analysis indicated that the implied fair value of goodwill
of each reporting unit exceeded its carrying value and as a result the carrying value of goodwill was not impaired as of
March 31, 2010.
2010 interim goodwill and indefinite-lived impairment
The Company conducted an interim test for impairment at American Furniture based on results of operations which had
deteriorated significantly during the second and third quarter of 2010. Accordingly, the Company adjusted its forecast for
American Furniture to reflect a revised outlook assuming continued pressure on sales and gross margins in the furniture
industry. The revised forecast, which is used to populate a discounted cash flow (‘DCF’) analysis, led to the conclusion
that it was more likely than not that the fair value of American Furniture was below its carrying amount. Based on the
results of the second step of the impairment test, the Company estimated that the carrying value of American Furniture’s
goodwill exceeded its implied fair value by approximately $35.5 million. As a result of this shortfall, the Company
recorded a $35.5 million goodwill impairment charge during the year ended December 31, 2010. Further, the results of
this analysis indicated that the carrying value of American Furniture’s trade name exceeded its fair value by approximately
$3.3 million. The fair value of the American Furniture trade name was determined by applying the relief from royalty
technique to forecasted revenues at the American Furniture reporting unit.
2011 annual impairment test
The Company conducted its annual goodwill impairment testing in accordance with guidelines issued by the FASB as of
March 31, 2011. At each of the reporting units tested, the units’ implied fair value of goodwill exceeded its carrying value
with the exception of American Furniture. The carrying amount of American Furniture’s goodwill exceeded its implied
fair value due to the significant decrease in revenue and operating profit at American Furniture resulting from the negative
impact on the promotional furniture market due to the significant decline in the U.S. housing market, high unemployment
rates and aggressive pricing engaged by its competitors. As a result of the carrying amount of goodwill exceeding its
implied fair value, the Company recorded a $5.9 million impairment charge for the year ended December 31, 2011 which
represented the remaining balance of goodwill on American Furniture’s balance sheet. This charge was recorded in
Impairment expense on the consolidated statement of operations.
Further, the Company tests other indefinite-lived intangible assets (trade names) at its reporting units. In each case the
Company determined that the fair value exceeded the carrying value with the exception of American Furniture. The results
F-24
of this analysis indicated that the carrying value of American Furniture’s trade name exceeded its fair value by
approximately $1.8 million. The fair value of the American Furniture trade name was determined by applying the relief
from royalty technique to forecasted revenues at the American Furniture reporting unit. This charge of $1.8 million was
recorded in Impairment expense on the consolidated statement of operations.
2011 long-lived asset impairment
Long-lived intangible assets and fixed assets subject to amortization and depreciation, including customer relationships,
non-compete agreements, technology and fixed assets are amortized or depreciated using the straight-line method over the
estimated useful lives of the assets, which the Company determines based on the consideration of several factors including
the period of time the asset is expected to remain in service. The Company evaluates long-lived assets for potential
impairment whenever events occur or circumstances indicate that the carrying amount of the assets may not be
recoverable. The carrying amount of a long-lived asset is not recoverable if it exceeds the sum of the undiscounted cash
flows expected to result from the use and eventual disposition of the asset. If the carrying amount of a long-lived asset is
not recoverable and is greater than its fair value, the asset is impaired and must be written down to its fair
value. Accordingly, the Company recorded an impairment charge related to AFM of $19.4 million as of December 31,
2011, which eliminated 100% of the book value of its customer lists and wrote down property, plant and equipment to $0.5
million.
In connection with this interim impairment analysis, the results indicated that the carrying value of American Furniture’s
trade name exceeded its fair value by approximately $0.7 million. The fair value of the American Furniture trade name
was determined by applying the relief from royalty technique to forecasted revenues at the American Furniture reporting
unit. This charge of $0.7 million during the year ended December 31, 2011 was recorded in Impairment expense in the
consolidated statement of operations.
2012 annual goodwill impairment testing
The Company conducted its annual goodwill impairment testing in accordance with guidelines issued by the FASB as of
March 31, 2012. Each of the Company’s businesses represent a reporting unit, except at Arnold, which comprises three
reporting units. Each of the reporting units is subject to impairment review at March 31, 2012, which represents the annual
date for impairment testing, with the exception of American Furniture. The entire balance of American Furniture’s
goodwill was impaired in 2010 and 2011.
At March 31, 2012, the Company elected to use the qualitative assessment alternative to test goodwill for impairment for
each of the reporting units that maintain a goodwill carrying value.
As prescribed by accounting guidelines, factors to consider when making the qualitative assessment prior to performing
Step 1 of the goodwill impairment test are as follows:
• Macroeconomic conditions such as deterioration in general economic conditions, limitations on accessing capital,
•
fluctuations in foreign exchange rates, or other developments in equity and credit markets;
Industry and market considerations such as deterioration in the environment in which an entity operates, an
increased competitive environment, a decline (both absolute and relative to its peers) in market-dependent
multiples or metrics, a change in the market for an entity’s products or services, or a regulatory or political
development;
• Cost factor, such as increases in raw materials, labor, or other costs that have a negative effect on earnings and
cash flows;
• Overall financial performance such as negative or declining cash flows or a decline in actual or planned revenue
or earnings compared with relevant prior periods;
• Other relevant entity-specific events such as litigation, contemplation of bankruptcy, or changes in management,
key personnel, strategy, or customers;
• Events affecting a reporting unit such as a change in the composition or carrying amount of its net assets, a more-
likely-than-not expectation of selling or disposing of all or a portion, of a reporting unit, the testing for
recoverability of a significant asset group within a reporting unit, or a recognition of a goodwill impairment loss
in the financial statements of a subsidiary that is a component of a reporting unit; and
• Sustained decrease (both absolute and relative to its peers) in share price, if applicable.
In addition to considering the above factors the Company performed the following procedures as of March 31, 2012 for
each of the reporting units:
• Compared and assessed trailing twelve month (“TTM”) net sales as of March 31, 2012 to TTM net sales as of
March 31, 2011:
F-25
• Compared and assessed TTM operating income as of March 31, 2012 to TTM operating income as of March 31,
2011;
• Compared and assessed TTM Adjusted earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortization (‘EBITDA’)
as of March 31, 2012 to TTM Adjusted EBITDA as of March 31, 2011;
• Compared and assessed Adjusted EBITDA for the year-ended December 31, 2011 to budget;
• Compared and assessed Adjusted EBITDA for the three-months ended March 31, 2012 to budget;
• Compared the fair value of each of the reporting units to its carrying amount using the same metrics as those used
in determining the value of the supplemental put as of March 31, 2012 and concluded that in each case the fair
value of the reporting unit was in excess of its carrying amount; and
• Performed market capitalization reconciliation for the Company and determined that the public market
capitalization was significantly in excess of the fair value of the Company’s consolidated equity (as derived from
the quarterly supplemental put analysis as of March 31, 2012).
Based on the qualitative assessment as outlined, the Company believed that it was more likely than not that the fair value of
each of our reporting units was not less than its carrying amount at March 31, 2012.
2012 indefinite-lived asset impairment testing
The Company completed its 2012 annual impairment testing on indefinite lived intangible assets as of March 31, 2012 and
the results of the testing did not require impairment.
A reconciliation of the change in the carrying value of goodwill for the periods ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 are as
follows (in thousands):
Beginning balance:
Goodwill................................................................................................
Accumulated impairment losses ............................................................
Year ended
December 31,
2012
Year ended
December 31,
2011
$ 247,002
(41,435)
205,567
$ 233,568
(35,535)
198,033
Impairment losses..................................................................................
-
Acquisition of businesses (1)..................................................................
Adjustment to purchase accounting........................................................
T otal adjustments.............................................................................
51,441
519
51,960
(5,900)
13,620
(186)
7,534
Ending balance:
Goodwill................................................................................................
Accumulated impairment losses.............................................................
298,962
(41,435)
$ 257,527
247,002
(41,435)
$ 205,567
(1) Relates to the purchase of Arnold Magnetics in 2012 and CamelBak and Orbit Baby in 2011. Refer to Note C.
Approximately $69.6 million of goodwill is deductible for income tax purposes at December 31, 2012.
F-26
Other intangible assets subject to amortization are comprised of the following at December 31, 2012 and 2011 (in
thousands):
December 31,
2012
December 31,
2011
Weighted
Average
Useful Lives
Customer relationships.............................................................................
Technology and patents............................................................................
Trade names, subject to amortization.......................................................
Licensing and non-compete agreements....................................................
Distributor relations and other..................................................................
$
191,878
89,541
7,595
7,736
606
$
169,105
75,679
1,305
7,417
516
12
8
10
4
5
Accumulated amortization:
Customer relationships.............................................................................
Technology and patents............................................................................
Trade names, subject to amortization.......................................................
Licensing and non-compete agreements....................................................
Distributor relations and other..................................................................
Total accumulated amortization................................................................
Trade names, not subject to amortization ................................................
Total intangibles, net..............................................................................
297,356
254,022
(48,316)
(33,808)
(977)
(5,503)
(516)
(89,120)
132,430
340,666
$
(32,182)
(23,188)
(143)
(2,917)
(452)
(58,882)
132,930
328,070
$
Estimated charges to amortization expense of intangible assets over the next five years, is as follows, (in thousands):
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
$
29,005
28,431
24,805
18,531
17,253
118,025
$
The Company’s amortization expense of intangible assets for the fiscal years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010
totaled $30.3 million, $22.1 million and $17.0 million, respectively.
Note H — Fair Value Measurement
The following table provides the assets and liabilities carried at fair value measured on a recurring basis as of December
31, 2012 and 2011 (in thousands):
Fair Value Me asure me nts at De ce mbe r 31, 2012
Carrying
Value
Le ve l 2
Le ve l 1
Le ve l 3
Assets:
Interest rate cap........................................................................
$ -
$ -
$ -
$ -
Liabilities:
Supplemental put obligation....................................................
Call option of noncontrolling shareholder (1)..........................
Put option of noncontrolling shareholders (2).........................
Interest rate swap.....................................................................
$ 51,598
$ -
$ -
$ 51,598
25
-
-
25
50
-
-
50
3,997
-
3,997
-
(1) Represents a noncontrolling shareholder’s call option to purchase additional common stock in Tridien.
(2) Represents put options issued to noncontrolling shareholders in connection with the Liberty acquisition.
F-27
Assets:
Interest rate cap........................................................................
Liabilities:
Supplemental put obligation....................................................
Call option of noncontrolling shareholder ...............................
Put option of noncontrolling shareholders ..............................
Interest rate swap.....................................................................
Fair Value Me asure me nts at De ce mbe r 31, 2011
Carrying
Value
Le ve l 1
Le ve l 2
Le ve l 3
$ 166
$ -
$ 166
$ -
$
49,489
$
-
$
-
$
49,489
25
50
1,822
-
-
-
-
-
1,822
25
50
-
A reconciliation of the change in the carrying value of the Company’s level 3 supplemental put liability for the year ended
December 31, 2012 and 2011 is as follows (in thousands):
Balance at January 1..................................................................
Payment of supplemental put liability.......................................
Supplemental put expense..........................................................
2012
2011
$
49,489
$
44,598
(13,886)
15,995
(6,892)
11,783
Balance at December 31............................................................
$
51,598
$
49,489
Valuation Techniques
Supplemental put:
The fair value of the supplemental put is determined using a model that multiplies the TTM EBITDA for each segment by
an estimated enterprise value earnings multiple to determine an estimated selling price of that segment. The Company then
deducts estimated selling and disposal costs in arriving at a net estimated selling price that is then input into an iterative
supplemental put calculation which takes into account, among other things, contractually defined cumulative contribution-
based profit in order to arrive at the estimated manager’s profit allocation accrual required, reflected on the balance sheet as
the supplemental put liability.
The Company reviews the model quarterly and makes updates to EBITDA and cumulative contribution based profit.
When appropriate the Company may change the estimated enterprise value earnings multiple if the market or industry for
the particular segment has changed. The Company reviews the model and assumptions with the Manager each quarter.
Since some of the Manager’s functions are to (i) identify, evaluate, manage, perform due diligence on, negotiate and
oversee the acquisitions of target businesses by the Company and (ii) evaluate, manage, negotiate and oversee the
disposition of all or any part of property, assets or investments, including dispositions of all or any part of the segments, the
Company believes the Manager to be particularly skilled at reviewing and commenting on this data. Annually, the
Company prepares a detailed analysis of the estimated enterprise value earnings multiple for each of the segments, which is
one of the primary drivers used to calculate the estimated selling price. In addition, annually, the Company engages an
independent investment banking firm to review the estimated enterprise value earnings multiples for reasonableness taking
into account comparable company data, comparable transaction data and DCF analyses.
The methodology and results employed in the market approach for goodwill impairment testing for each of the reporting
units is most similar to the methodology and results reflected in calculating the estimated selling price of each of the
segments for the purpose of estimating the fair value of the supplemental put.
The Company typically assigns a higher weighting to the market approach as opposed to the DCF in calculating the
estimated selling price of the segments for the purpose of estimating the fair value of the supplemental put than the
Company does for estimating the fair value of the reporting units for the purpose of goodwill impairment testing, which
accounts for the major differences in value. The higher weighting on the market approach is based on the premise that
because the Manager can unilaterally resign, the Company may be required to remit the profit allocation (supplemental put
value) as of a specific point in time. This one-sided put on behalf of the Manager is the principle reason that the Company
is required to reflect this liability on the balance sheet.
The impact of over-estimating or under-estimating the value of the supplemental put agreement could have a material
effect on the results of operations and financial position. In addition, the value of the supplemental put agreement is
subject to the volatility of the Company’s operations which may result in significant fluctuation in the value assigned to
this supplemental put agreement at any point in time. An estimated enterprise value earnings multiple increase or decrease
F-28
of one times TTM EBITDA, for each segment as calculated, at December 31, 2012, would increase or decrease the value
of the supplemental put liability, and related supplemental put expense, by approximately $20 million. This increase or
decrease in the estimated enterprise value earnings multiples would have no impact on the contribution-based profit
allocation amount of $5.2 million to be paid related to Fox’s fifth anniversary upon which we acquired Fox.
The change in the supplemental put liability during the year ended December 31, 2012, was primarily related to a payment
of approximately $13.7 million to CGM due to the profit allocation payment related to the sale of Staffmark offset by an
increase in the estimated fair value of the Fox operating segment.
Options of noncontrolling shareholders:
The call option of the noncontrolling shareholder was determined based on inputs that were not readily available in public
markets or able to be derived from information available in publicly quoted markets. As such, the Company categorized
the call option of the noncontrolling shareholder as Level 3. The primary inputs associated with this valuation utilizing a
Black-Scholes model are volatility of 30%, an estimated term of 5 years and a discount rate of 45%. An increase or
decrease in these primary inputs would not have a material impact on the determination of the fair value of this call option.
The put options of noncontrolling shareholders were determined based on inputs that were not readily available in public
markets or able to be derived from information available in publicly quoted markets. As such, the Company categorized
the put options of the noncontrolling shareholders as Level 3. The primary inputs associated with this valuation utilizing a
Black-Scholes model are volatility of 44%, an estimated term of 5 years and the underlying price equal to the exercise
price at the time of issuance. An increase or decrease in these primary inputs would not have a material impact on the
determination of the fair value of these put options.
Interest rate cap – asset:
The Company’s derivative instrument at December 31, 2012 consisted of an over-the-counter (OTC) interest rate cap
contract which is not traded on a public exchange. The fair value of the Company’s interest rate cap contract was
determined based on inputs that were readily available in public markets or could be derived from information available in
publicly quoted markets. As such, the Company categorized the cap as Level 2. The reduction in the interest rate cap asset
of $0.2 million during the year ended December 31, 2012 was expensed to interest expense on the consolidated statement
of operations. Refer to Note J.
Interest rate swap - liability:
The Company’s derivative instrument at December 31, 2012 consisted of an OTC interest rate swap contract which is not
traded on a public exchange. The fair value of the Company’s interest rate swap contract was determined based on inputs
that were readily available in public markets or could be derived from information available in publicly quoted markets.
As such, the Company categorized the swap as Level 2. The increase in the interest rate swap liability of $2.2 million
during the year ended December 31, 2012 was expensed to interest expense on the consolidated statement of operations.
Refer to Note J.
The following table provides the assets and liabilities carried at fair value measured on a non-recurring basis as of
December 31, 2011 (in thousands). There were no assets and liabilities carried at fair value measured on a non-recurring
basis as of December 31, 2012.
Fair Value Me asure me nts at De c. 31, 2011
C a rryin g
Lo s s e s
Ye a r e n d e d
D e c e m b e r 3 1,
A s s e ts :
Va lu e
Le v e l 1
Le v e l 2
Le v e l 3
2 0 11
2 0 10
Go o dwill (1)..............................................
Tra de na m e (1).......................................
C us to m e r re la tio ns hips (1)...............
P ro pe rty, pla nt a nd e quipm e nt (1)...
As s e ts he ld fo r s a le (2)......................
To ta l..........................................................
$ -
$ -
$ -
$ -
$ (5,900)
$ (35,535)
525
-
-
525
(2,475)
(3,300)
-
-
-
-
(15,939)
-
500
-
500
-
(2,305)
-
820
-
820
-
(1,150)
-
$ (27,769)
$ (38,835)
(1) Represents the fair value of the respective assets at the AFM business segment subsequent to the goodwill impairment, indefinite-lived and
long-lived asset impairment charges recognized during the years ended December 31, 2011 and 2010. See Note G for further discussion
regarding impairments and valuation techniques applied.
(2) Represents the fair value of assets held for sale at the AFM business segment subsequent to the write down of property, plant and
equipment during the year ended December 31, 2011. See Note G.
F-29
Note I – Debt
On October 27, 2011, the Company obtained a $515 million credit facility, with an optional $135 million increase, from a
group of lenders (the “Credit Facility”) led by TD Securities. This Credit Facility replaced a prior credit facility. The
Credit Facility provides for (i) a revolving line of credit of $290 million (the “Revolving Credit Facility”), and (ii) a $225
million term loan (the “Term Loan Facility”). The Term Loan Facility was issued at an original issuance discount of 96%.
The Credit Agreement is secured by a first priority lien on all the assets of the Company, including, but not limited to, the
capital stock of the businesses, loan receivables from the Company’s businesses, cash and other assets. The Revolving
Credit Facility also requires that the loan agreements between the Company and its businesses be secured by a first priority
lien on the assets of the businesses subject to the letters of credit issued by third party lenders on behalf of such businesses.
Refer to ‘Incremental term loan’ section below for certain amendments to its Credit Facility.
Revolving Credit Facility
Advances under the Revolving Credit Facility can be either base rate loans or LIBOR loans. Base rate revolving loans bear
interest at a fluctuating rate per annum equal to the greatest of (i) the prime rate of interest, (ii) the sum of the Federal
Funds Rate plus 0.5% for the relevant period and (iii) the sum of the applicable LIBOR rate plus 1.00%, plus a margin
ranging from 2.00% to 3.00% based upon the Total Debt to EBITDA Ratio. LIBOR loans bear interest at a fluctuating rate
per annum equal to LIBOR, for the relevant period plus a margin ranging from 3.00% to 4.00% based on the Total Debt to
EBITDA Ratio. The Revolving Credit Facility will become due in October 2016. The Credit Facility permits the
Company to increase the Revolving Credit Facility commitment and/or obtain additional term loans in an aggregate
amount of up to $135 million. Refer to ‘Incremental term loan’ section below for certain amendments to its Credit Facility.
The borrowing availability under the Revolving Credit Facility at December 31, 2012 was approximately $264.2 million.
Term Loan Facility
The Term Loan Facility bears interest at a combination of a variable LIBOR rate for the relevant period plus 6.00% for the
portion of the Term Loan Facility comprised of LIBOR loans and a fluctuating rate per annum equal to the greatest of (i)
the prime rate of interest, (ii) the sum of the Federal Funds Rate plus 0.5% for the relevant period, (iii) the sum of the
applicable LIBOR rate plus 1.00% and (iv) 2.50%, plus 5.00% for the portion of the Term Loan Facility comprised of base
rate loans. The LIBOR rate for term loans is subject to a minimum rate of 1.5%. The Term Loan Facility requires
quarterly payments of approximately $0.56 million that commenced March 31, 2012 with a final payment of all remaining
principal and interest due in October 2017. Refer to ‘Incremental term loan’ section below for certain amendments to its
Credit Facility.
Use of Proceeds
The proceeds of the Term Loan Facility and advances under the Revolving Credit Facility were, and will be used, as
applicable, (i) to refinance existing indebtedness of the Company, (ii) to pay fees and expenses, (iii) to fund acquisitions of
additional businesses, (iv) to fund permitted distributions, (v) to fund loans by the Company to its subsidiaries and (vi) for
other general corporate purposes of the Company.
Other
The Company pays (i) commitment fees equal to 1% per annum of the unused portion of the Revolving Credit Facility, (ii)
quarterly letter of credit fees, (iii) letter of credit fronting fees of up to 0.25% per annum and (iv) administrative and agency
fees. In addition, the Company paid approximately $6.6 million for administrative and closing fees. The Company
recorded commitment fees related to this facility of $2.7 million and $0.5 million during 2012 and 2011, respectively, to
interest expense.
Incremental term loan
On April 2, 2012, the Company exercised its option for an incremental term loan in the amount of $30 million. The
incremental term loan was issued at 99% of par value and increased the term loans outstanding under the Credit Facility
from approximately $224.4 million to approximately $254.4 million. The Company is now permitted to increase the
Revolving Credit Facility commitment and/or obtain additional term loans in an aggregate amount of up to $105 million.
The quarterly amortization payments increased to approximately $0.64 million as a result of this incremental term loan. In
addition, the Company amended its Credit Facility to reduce the margin on its LIBOR Loans from 6.00% to 5.00% and on
its Base Rate Loans from 5.00% to 4.00% and reduce the LIBOR floor from 1.50% to 1.25%. All other terms of the Credit
Facility remained unchanged. The Company paid an amendment fee in connection with this amendment of approximately
$2.2 million, and incurred additional fees and expenses of approximately $0.6 million in the aggregate. Net proceeds from
this incremental term loan were used to reduce the Revolving Credit Facility.
F-30
Convenants
The Company is subject to certain customary affirmative and restrictive covenants arising under the Credit Facility. In
addition, the Company is required to maintain certain financial ratios under the Revolving Credit Facility. The following
table reflects required and actual financial ratios as of December 31, 2012 included as part of the affirmative covenants in
the Credit Facility:
Description of Required Covenant Ratio
Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio....................... greater than or equal to 1.5:1.0......................................
Total Debt to EBITDA Ratio...................... less than or equal to 3.5:1.0...........................................
Covenant Ratio Requirement
Actual Ratio
2.79:1.0
1.87:1.0
A breach of any of these covenants will be an event of default under the Credit Facility. Upon the occurrence of an
event of default under the Credit Facility, the Revolving Credit Facility may be terminated, the Term Loan Facility and all
outstanding loans and other obligations under the Credit Facility may become immediately due and payable and any letters
of credit then outstanding may be required to be cash collateralized, and the Agent and the Lenders may exercise any
rights or remedies available to them under the Credit Facility. Any such event would materially impair the Company’s
ability to conduct its business.
Letters of credit
The Credit Facility allows for letters of credit in an aggregate face amount of up to $100.0 million. Letters of credit
outstanding at December 31, 2012 totaled approximately $1.8 million and at December 31, 2011 totaled approximately
$2.9 million. Letter of credit fees recorded to interest expense was $0.1 million in each of the years ended December 31,
2012, 2011 and 2010.
Interest hedge
The Credit Facility requires the Company to hedge the interest on $126 million of outstanding debt under the Term Loan
Facility. Refer to Note J for further information on the interest rate derivatives entered into as part of the Term Loan
Facility.
The following table provides the Company’s debt holdings at December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011 (in thousands):
December 31,
2012
December 31,
2011
Revolving Credit Facility .............................................
Term Loan Facility........................................................
Original issue discount..................................................
Total debt...................................................................
$ 24,000
252,525
(6,967)
$ 269,558
$ -
225,000
(8,750)
$ 216,250
Less: Current portion, term loan facilities..................... (2,550)
$ 267,008
Long term debt...........................................................
(2,250)
$ 214,000
(1) The Company recorded $9.0 million in original issue discount upon issuance of the Term Loan Facility in October of 2011. This discount will
be amortized over the life of the Term Loan Facility.
Annual maturities of the Term Loan Facility and Revolving Credit Facility are as follows (in thousands):
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
Thereafter
$
$
$
$
$
2,550
2,550
2,550
26,550
242,325
-
276,525
$
F-31
The following details the components of interest expense in each of the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010 (in
thousands):
Ye ars e nde d De ce mbe r 31,
2012
2011
2010
$
$
Interest on credit facilities....................................
Unused fee on revolving credit facility.................
Amortization of original issue discount................
Realized losses on interest rate hedges.................
Unrealized losses on interest rate derivatives.......
Letter of credit fees...............................................
Other.....................................................................
Interest expense..............................................
17,643
2,666
2,312
166
2,175
63
30
25,055
$
$
7,509
2,706
250
143
1,933
60
42
12,643
$
4,496
3,025
-
2,135
-
12
27
9,695
$
Average daily balance of debt outstanding...........
$
271,776
$
151,781
$
108,761
Effective interest rate............................................
9.2%
8.3%
8.9%
Note J - Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities
On January 22, 2008, the Company entered into a three-year interest rate swap agreement with a bank, fixing the rate of its
Term Loan Facility borrowings in its prior credit agreement at 7.35%. The Company’s objective for entering into the
interest rate swap was to manage the interest rate exposure on a portion of its Term Loan Facility in its prior credit
agreement by fixing its interest rate at 7.35% and avoiding the potential variability of interest rate fluctuations. The
interest rate swap was designated as a cash flow hedge and expired in January 2011.
The Credit Facility requires the Company to hedge the interest on $126 million of outstanding debt under the Term Loan
Facility. The Company purchased the following derivatives on October 31, 2011:
• A two-year interest rate cap (“Cap”) with a notional amount of $200 million effective December 31, 2011 through
December 31, 2013. The agreement caps the three-month LIBOR rate at 2.5% in exchange for a fixed payment of
$0.3 million. At December 31, 2012 this Cap had a fair value of $0.0 million and is reflected in other current
assets on the consolidated balance sheet. The difference between the fixed payment and its mark-to-market value
is reflected as a component of interest expense; and
• A three-year interest rate swap (“Swap”) with a notional amount of $200 million effective January 1, 2014
through December 31, 2016. The agreement requires the Company to pay interest on the notional amount at the
rate of 2.49% in exchange for the three-month LIBOR rate, with a floor of 1.5%. At December 31, 2012, this
Swap had a fair value loss of $4.0 million and is reflected in other non-current liabilities with its mark-to-market
value reflected as a component of interest expense.
The Company did not elect hedge accounting for the above derivative transactions associated with the Credit Facility and
changes in fair value are included in interest expense on the consolidated statement of operations.
Note K – Income Taxes
Compass Diversified Holdings and Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC are classified as partnerships for U.S.
Federal income tax purposes and are not subject to income taxes. Each of the Company’s majority owned subsidiaries are
subject to Federal and state income taxes.
F-32
Components of the Company’s income tax provision (benefit) are as follows (in thousands):
Current taxes
2012
Federal.......................................................................................... $ 18,306
3,926
State.............................................................................................
1,054
Foreign.........................................................................................
23,286
Total current taxes
Deferred taxes:
Years ended December 31,
2011
$ 14,083
3,156
36
17,275
2010
$ 11,238
2,731
-
13,969
Federal.......................................................................................... (1,767)
107
State.............................................................................................
(557)
Foreign.........................................................................................
(2,217)
$ 21,069
Total deferred taxes
Total tax provision
(8,556)
(1,860)
-
(10,416)
$ 6,859
(4,940)
(229)
(281)
(5,450)
$ 8,519
The tax effects of temporary differences that have resulted in the creation of deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities
at December 31, 2012 and 2011 are as follows (in thousands):
December 31,
2012
2011
Deferred tax assets:
Tax credits.........................................................................................
Accounts receivable and allowances.................................................
Net operating loss carryforwards.....................................................
Accrued expenses..............................................................................
Other.................................................................................................
Total deferred tax assets
$ 270
757
10,304
7,790
5,983
$ 25,104
Valuation allowance (1)................................................................ (8,912)
16,192
Net deferred tax assets
Deferred tax liabilities:
$ 71
710
9,734
4,436
4,698
$ 19,649
(6,269)
13,380
Intangible assets................................................................................
Property and equipment...................................................................
Prepaid and other expenses...............................................................
Total deferred tax liabilities
$ (49,791)
(13,362)
(829)
$ (63,982)
$ (38,835)
(9,636)
(617)
$ (49,088)
Total net deferred tax liability
$ (47,790)
$ (35,708)
(1) Primarily relates to the AFM operating segment
For the years ending December 31, 2012 and 2011, the Company recognized approximately $64.0 million and $49.1
million, respectively in deferred tax liabilities. A significant portion of the balance in deferred tax liabilities reflects
temporary differences in the basis of property and equipment and intangible assets related to the Company’s purchase
accounting adjustments in connection with the acquisition of certain of its businesses. For financial accounting purposes
the Company has recognized a significant increase in the fair values of the intangible assets and property and equipment in
certain of the businesses it acquired. For income tax purposes the existing, pre-acquisition tax basis of the intangible assets
and property and equipment is utilized. In order to reflect the increase in the financial accounting basis over the existing
tax basis, a deferred tax liability was recorded. This liability will decrease in future periods as these temporary differences
reverse but may be replaced by deferred tax liabilities generated as a result of future acquisitions.
A valuation allowance relating to the realization of foreign tax credits and net operating losses of $8.9 million was
provided at December 31, 2012 and $6.3 million was provided at December 31, 2011. A valuation allowance is provided
whenever it is more likely than not that some or all of deferred assets recorded may not be realized.
F-33
The reconciliation between the Federal Statutory Rate and the effective income tax rate for 2012, 2011 and 2010 are as
follows:
2012
Year ended December 31,
2011
2010
United States Federal Statutory Rate...................................................
Foreign and State income taxes (net of Federal benefits)....................
35.0%
11.7
(35.0%)
3.5
(35.0%)
2.3
Expenses of Compass Group Diversified Holdings, LLC
representing a pass through to shareholders (1).............................
Impact of subsidiary employee stock options.....................................
Domestic production activities deduction...........................................
31.1
(1.8)
(4.1)
30.7
1.7
(5.3)
26.4
0.3
(2.2)
Non-deductible acquisition costs.........................................................
3.0
-
1.0
Impairment expense...........................................................................
-
8.0
21.5
Non-recognition of NOL carryforwards at subsidiaries........................
4.8
24.2
-
Other.................................................................................................
Effective income tax rate
(1.1)
78.6%
(1.4)
26.4%
0.4
14.7%
(1) T he effective income tax rate for all periods includes a significant loss at the Company's parent which is taxed
as a partnership.
A reconciliation of the amount of unrecognized tax benefits for 2012, 2011 and 2010 are as follows (in thousands):
Balance at January 1, 2010
$ 1,676
Additions for current years’ tax positions............................... 3,589
752
Additions for prior years’ tax positions..................................
(8)
Reductions for prior years’ tax positions................................
Balance at December 31, 2010
$ 6,009
Additions for current years’ tax positions............................... 1,831
28
Additions for prior years’ tax positions..................................
(416)
Reductions for prior years’ tax positions................................
(483)
Reductions for settlements......................................................
Reductions for expiration of statute of limitations..................
(284)
$ 6,685
Balance at December 31, 2011
Additions for current years’ tax positions............................... 1,803
158
Additions for prior years’ tax positions..................................
(29)
Reductions for prior years’ tax positions................................
-
Reductions for settlements......................................................
(835)
Reductions for expiration of statute of limitations..................
$ 7,782
Balance at December 31, 2012
Included in the unrecognized tax benefits at December 31, 2012 and 2011 is $7.6 million and $6.7 million, respectively, of
tax benefits that, if recognized, would affect the Company’s effective tax rate. The Company accrues interest and penalties
related to uncertain tax positions and at December 31, 2012 and 2011, there is $0.3 million and $0.3 million accrued,
respectively. Such amounts are included in the Provision (benefit) for income taxes in the accompanying consolidated
statements of operations. The Company has an indemnification arrangement that offsets $0.5 million and $1.3 million of
the unrecognized tax benefits at December 31, 2012 and 2011, respectively. The change in the unrecognized tax benefits
during 2012 and 2011 is primarily due to the uncertainty of the deductibility of amortization and depreciation established
as part of initial purchase price allocations in 2008. It is expected that the amount of unrecognized tax benefits will change
in the next twelve months. However, we do not expect the change to have a significant impact on the consolidated results
of operations or financial position.
Each of the Company’s businesses file U.S. federal, state and foreign income tax returns in multiple jurisdictions with
varying statutes of limitations. The 2008 through 2012 tax years generally remain subject to examinations by the taxing
authorities.
F-34
Note L- Noncontrolling interest
Noncontrolling interest represents the portion of a majority-owned subsidiary’s net income and equity that is owned by
noncontrolling shareholders.
The following tables reflect the Company’s percentage ownership of its businesses, as of December 31, 2012, 2011 and
2010 and related noncontrolling interest balances as of December 31, 2012 and 2011:
% Ownership (1)
December 31, 2012
Primary
% Ownership (1)
December 31, 2011
Primary
% Ownership (1)
December 31, 2010
Primary
Fully
Diluted
69.4
99.9
87.6
79.7
77.1
70.6
86.7
67.4
Fully
Diluted
69.4
99.9
n/a
76.7
74.6
67.9
87.6
60.0
69.6
99.9
n/a
89.9
81.1
78.0
96.2
73.9
Fully
Diluted
69.4
91.4
n/a
n/a
79.9
68.1
87.7
61.8
69.6
99.9
n/a
n/a
83.9
75.7
96.2
73.9
ACI............................
American Furniture....
Arnold Magnetics.......
CamelBak...................
ERGObaby..................
FOX...........................
Liberty.......................
T ridien.......................
69.4
99.9
96.7
89.9
81.1
75.8
96.2
81.3
(1)
The principal difference between primary and fully diluted percentages of our operating segments is due to stock option issuances of
operating segment stock to management of the respective operating segment.
(in thousands)
ACI............................
American Furniture.....
Arnold Magnetics.......
CamelBak...................
ERGObaby..................
FOX...........................
Liberty.......................
T ridien.......................
CGM...........................
Noncontrolling Interest Balances
December 30,
December 31,
2011
2012
$
$
(5,359)
260
1,610
12,173
11,195
12,530
1,752
7,323
100
41,584
4,475
46
-
54,729
10,233
13,661
1,436
10,577
100
95,257
$
$
FOX
As discussed in Note P, on June 18, 2012, the Company recapitalized Fox. As a result of this recapitalization, the
Company’s ownership was 75.8% on a primary basis and 70.6% on a fully diluted basis as of December 31, 2012.
Tridien
On August 28, 2012, the Company purchased shares of stock of Anodyne from a group of Tridien’s noncontrolling
shareholders for an aggregate purchase price of approximately $1.9 million. As a result of this transaction the Company’s
ownership interest in Tridien was 81.3% on a primary basis and 67.4% on a fully diluted basis as of December 31, 2012.
Note M- Stockholder’s Equity
Trust Shares
The Trust is authorized to issue 500,000,000 Trust shares and the Company is authorized to issue a corresponding number
of LLC interests. The Company will, at all times, have the identical number of LLC interests outstanding as Trust shares.
Each Trust share represents an undivided beneficial interest in the Trust, and each Trust share is entitled to one vote per
share on any matter with respect to which members of the Company are entitled to vote.
Secondary offerings
On April 13, 2010, the Company completed an offering of 5,250,000 Trust shares (including the underwriter’s over-
allotment completed April 23, 2010) at an offering price of $15.10 per share. The net proceeds to the Company, after
F-35
deducting underwriter’s discount and offering costs totaled approximately $75.0 million. The Company used $70.0 million
of the net proceeds to pay down its Prior Revolving Credit Facility.
On November 12, 2010, the Company completed an offering of 4,850,000 Trust shares (including the underwriter’s over-
allotment completed December 8, 2010) at an offering price of $16.90 per share. The net proceeds to the Company, after
deducting underwriter’s discount and offering costs totaled approximately $78.0 million. The Company used $70.0 million
of the net proceeds to pay down its Prior Revolving Credit Facility.
CamelBak acquisition issuance
On August 23, 2011, in connection with funding of the acquisition of CamelBak, the Company sold 1,575,000 of its
common shares in a private placement to CMH. Refer to Note C for additional information on the share issuance.
Distributions
During the year ended December 31, 2011, the Company paid the following distributions:
(cid:120) On January 28, 2011, the Company paid a distribution of $0.34 per share to holders of record as of January 21,
2011. This distribution was declared on January 5, 2011.
(cid:120) On April 12, 2011, the Company paid a distribution of $0.36 per share to holders of record as of March 29, 2011.
This distribution was declared on March 10, 2011.
(cid:120) On July 28, 2011, the Company paid a distribution of $0.36 per share to holders of record as of July 21, 2011.
This distribution was declared on July 6, 2011.
(cid:120) On October 31, 2011, the Company paid a distribution of $0.36 per share to holders of record as of October 25,
2011. This distribution was declared on October 10, 2011.
During the year ended December 31, 2012, the Company paid the following distributions:
(cid:120) On January 30, 2012, the Company paid a distribution of $0.36 per share to holders of record as of January 23,
2012. This distribution was declared on January 5, 2012.
(cid:120) On April 30, 2012, the Company paid a distribution of $0.36 per share to holders of record as of April 24, 2012.
This distribution was declared on April 10, 2012.
(cid:120) On July 31, 2012, the Company paid a distribution of $0.36 per share to holders of record as of July 24, 2012.
This distribution was declared on July 10, 2012.
(cid:120) On October 31, 2012, the Company paid a distribution of $0.36 per share to holders of record as of October 24,
2012. This distribution was declared on October 9, 2012.
On January 31, 2013, the Company paid a distribution of $0.36 per share to holders of record as of January 25, 2013. This
distribution was declared on January 10, 2013.
F-36
Note N – Unaudited Quarterly Financial Data
The following table presents the unaudited quarterly financial data. This information has been prepared on a basis
consistent with that of the audited consolidated financial statements and all necessary material adjustments, consisting of
normal recurring accruals and adjustments, have been included to present fairly the unaudited quarterly financial data. The
quarterly results of operations for these periods are not necessarily indicative of future results of operations. The per share
calculations for each of the quarters are based on the weighted average number of shares for each period; therefore, the
sum of the quarters may not necessarily be equal to the full year per share amount.
(in tho us ands )
December 31,
2012
September 30,
2012
June 30,
2012
March 31,
2012
To ta l re ve nue s ..............................................................................................................................
Gro s s pro fit....................................................................................................................................
Ope ra ting inc o m e .......................................................................................................................
Inc o m e (lo s s ) fro m c o ntinuing o pe ra tio ns .......................................................................
Inc o m e (lo s s ) fro m dis c o ntinue d o pe ra tio ns , ne t o f inc o m e ta xe s .......................
Ga in (lo s s ) o n s a le o f dis c o ntinue d o pe ra tio ns , ne t o f inc o m e ta x........................
Ne t inc o m e (lo s s ) a ttributa ble to Ho ldings .......................................................................
$
218,150
67,319
4,362
(5,425)
-
219
(6,718)
$
241,228
76,947
20,368
6,779
-
(334)
3,486
$
230,016
72,901
18,001
4,032
(1,690)
(130)
76
$
195,327
61,687
11,086
367
522
-
(786)
B a s ic a n d f u lly d ilu t e d in c o m e ( lo s s ) p e r s h a re
a t t rib u t a b le t o H o ld in g s :
C o ntinuing o pe ra tio ns ...............................................................................................................
Dis c o ntinue d o pe ra tio ns ..........................................................................................................
B a s ic a nd fully dilute d inc o m e (lo s s ) pe r s ha re a ttributa ble to Ho ldings ..............
$
$
(0.14)
0.00
(0.14)
0.08
(0.01)
0.07
$
0.03
(0.03)
$
-
$
$
(0.03)
0.01
(0.02)
$
$
(in tho us ands )
December 31,
2011
September 30,
2011
June 30,
2011
March 31,
2011
To ta l re ve nue s ..............................................................................................................................
Gro s s pro fit....................................................................................................................................
Ope ra ting inc o m e (lo s s )...........................................................................................................
Inc o m e (lo s s ) fro m c o ntinuing o pe ra tio ns .......................................................................
Inc o m e (lo s s ) fro m dis c o ntinue d o pe ra tio ns , ne t o f inc o m e ta xe s ........................
Ga in o n s a le o f dis c o ntinue d o pe ra tio ns , ne t o f inc o m e ta x.....................................
Ne t inc o m e (lo s s ) a ttributa ble to Ho ldings .......................................................................
$
160,193
43,861
(26,285)
(33,190)
3,241
88,592
57,459
$
168,667
50,830
8,934
3,070
9,400
-
8,096
$
133,144
41,099
7,923
2,602
5,664
-
6,378
$
144,640
43,354
634
(5,283)
(1,284)
-
(6,974)
$
$
$
$
0.01
0.16
0.17
0.03
0.11
0.14
(0.13)
(0.02)
(0.15)
$
$
$
$
(0.71)
1.90
1.19
B a s ic a n d f u lly d ilu t e d in c o m e ( lo s s ) p e r s h a re
a t t rib u t a b le t o H o ld in g s :
C o ntinuing o pe ra tio ns ...............................................................................................................
Dis c o ntinue d o pe ra tio ns ..........................................................................................................
B a s ic a nd fully dilute d inc o m e (lo s s ) pe r s ha re a ttributa ble to Ho ldings ..............
F-37
During the quarter ended June 30, 2012, the Company sold HALO and thus reclassified its historical operations to
discontinued operations. The following summarizes HALO’s results that were reclassified to income (loss) from
discontinued operations for the quarterly periods during 2012 and 2011 (in thousands):
To ta l re ve nue s ..............................................................................................................................
Gro s s pro fit....................................................................................................................................
Ope ra ting inc o m e (lo s s )...........................................................................................................
Inc o m e (lo s s ) fro m c o ntinuing o pe ra tio ns .......................................................................
To ta l re ve nue s ..............................................................................................................................
Gro s s pro fit....................................................................................................................................
Ope ra ting inc o m e (lo s s )...........................................................................................................
Inc o m e (lo s s ) fro m c o ntinuing o pe ra tio ns .......................................................................
December 31,
2012
n/a
September 30,
2012
n/a
December 31,
2011
September 30,
2011
$
55,261
22,341
4,115
2,822
$
43,651
17,106
2,489
1,769
$
June 30,
2012
14,177
5,610
(2,680)
(1,691)
$
June 30,
2011
39,296
15,613
2,883
2,414
March 31,
2012
$
37,076
14,906
539
522
March 31,
2011
$
32,686
12,739
(453)
(178)
During the quarter ended December 31, 2011, the Company sold Staffmark and thus reclassified its historical operations to
discontinued operations. The following summarizes Staffmark’s results that were reclassified to income (loss) from
discontinued operations for the quarterly periods during 2011 (in thousands).
To ta l re ve nue s ..............................................................................................................................
Gro s s pro fit....................................................................................................................................
Ope ra ting inc o m e (lo s s )...........................................................................................................
Inc o m e (lo s s ) fro m c o ntinuing o pe ra tio ns .......................................................................
December 31,
2011
September 30,
2011
$
50,948
7,279
(6,230)
419
$
277,637
41,728
8,515
7,631
$
June 30,
2011
255,644
35,988
3,796
3,250
$
March 31,
2011
246,799
31,949
(1,578)
(1,106)
During 2011, AFM revalued its standard costing system and thus reclassified certain selling, general and administrative
expenses to cost of sales for prior periods. The impact of this reclassification on gross profit for the quarterly periods
during 2011 is detailed below. This reclassification had no impact on the Company’s operating income (loss), net income
(loss), financial position or its cash flows for any of the periods presented (in thousands).
R e duc tio n o f gro s s pro fit.........................................................................................................
December 31,
2011
$
1,981
September 30,
2011
$
1,536
June 30,
2011
March 31,
2011
$
1,565
$
1,546
Note O – Supplemental Data
Supplemental Balance Sheet Data (in thousands):
S ummary of accrued expenses:
Accrued payroll and fringes..............
Accrued taxes....................................
Income taxes payable........................
Accrued interest................................
Warranty payable.............................
Other accrued expenses.....................
Total
December 31,
2012
$ 21,300
2,308
8,480
156
6,410
9,485
$ 48,139
December 31,
2011
$ 14,520
2,445
5,530
1,453
4,311
8,127
$ 36,386
F-38
Warranty liability:
Beginning balance..............................
Accrual..............................................
Warranty payments..........................
Other (1)...........................................
Ending balance...................................
Year Ended
December 31,
2012
4,311
$
5,903
(3,804)
-
$ 6,410
Year Ended
December 31,
2011
$
3,237
3,556
(2,769)
287
$ 4,311
(1) Represents warranty liabilities acquired in 2011 related to CamelBak.
Supplemental Cash Flow Statement Data (in thousands):
Non-cash investing activity:
In connection with the acquisition of Orbit Baby in November 2011, Ergobaby issued Ergobaby common stock valued at
$2.5 million. See Note C.
Other (in thousands):
December 31,
2012
December 31,
2011
December 31,
2010
Interest paid......................................
Taxes paid.........................................
$ 19,024
14,257
$ 12,576
14,473
$ 12,017
14,710
Note P – Related Party Transactions
The Company has entered into the following related party transactions with its Manager, CGM:
(cid:120) Management Services Agreement
(cid:120)
LLC Agreement
Supplemental put agreement
Cost reimbursement and fees
Sale of common stock to majority shareholder
(cid:120)
(cid:120)
(cid:120)
Management Services Agreement - The Company entered into a management services agreement (“MSA”) with CGM
effective May 16, 2006, as amended. The MSA provides for, among other things, CGM to perform services for the
Company in exchange for a management fee paid quarterly and equal to 0.5% of the Company’s adjusted net assets, as
defined in the MSA. The Company amended the MSA on November 8, 2006, to clarify that adjusted net assets are not
reduced by non-cash charges associated with the Supplemental Put Agreement, which amendment was unanimously
approved by the Compensation Committee and the Board of Directors. The management fee is required to be paid prior to
the payment of any distributions to shareholders.
Pursuant to the MSA, CGM is entitled to enter into off-setting management service agreements with each of the operating
segments. The amount of the fee is negotiated between CGM and the operating management of each segment and is based
upon the value of the services to be provided. The fees paid directly to CGM by the segments offset on a dollar for dollar
basis the amount due CGM by the Company under the MSA.
F-39
For the year ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, the Company incurred the following management fees to CGM, by
entity (in thousands):
Advanced Circuits......................
American Furniture.....................
Arnold M agnetics.......................
CamelBak....................................
ERGObaby.................................
FOX............................................
Liberty........................................
Tridien........................................
Corporate....................................
December 31,
2012
$ 500
-
375
500
500
500
500
350
14,408
17,633
$
December 31,
2011
$ 500
125
n/a
176
500
500
500
350
13,632
16,283
$
December 31,
2010
$ 500
500
n/a
n/a
125
500
375
350
12,226
14,576
$
NOTE: Not included in the table above are management fees paid to CGM by HALO of $0.2 million, $0.5 million and $0.5 million for the
years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively. These amounts are included in income (loss) from discontinued operations on
the consolidated statements of operations.
Approximately $3.8 million and $4.2 million of the management fees incurred were unpaid as of December 31, 2012 and
2011, respectively, and are reflected in Due to related party on the consolidated balance sheets.
LLC Agreement
In addition to providing management services to the Company, pursuant to the MSA, CGM owns 100% of the Allocation
Interests in the Company. CGM paid $0.1 million for these Allocation Interests and has the right to cause the Company to
purchase the Allocation Interests it owns. The Allocation Interests give CGM the right to distributions pursuant to a profit
allocation formula upon the occurrence of certain events. Certain events include, but are not limited to, the dispositions of
subsidiaries.
Supplemental Put Agreement
Concurrent with the IPO, CGM and the Company entered into a Supplemental Put Agreement, which may require the
Company to acquire these Allocation Interests upon termination of the MSA. Essentially, the put rights granted to CGM
require the Company to acquire CGM’s Allocation Interests in the Company at a price based on a percentage of the
increase in fair value in the Company’s businesses over its basis in those businesses. Each fiscal quarter the Company
estimates the fair value of its businesses for the purpose of determining its potential liability associated with the
Supplemental Put Agreement. Any change in the potential liability is accrued currently as an adjustment to earnings.
Refer to Note B for the financial statement impact. Refer to Note H for a description of the calculation of the supplemental
put liability.
Cost Reimbursement and Fees
The Company reimbursed its Manager, CGM, approximately $3.5 million, $3.1 million and $2.8 million, principally for
occupancy and staffing costs incurred by CGM on the Company’s behalf during the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011
and 2010, respectively.
CGM acted as an advisor for the 2012 acquisition and the 2011 acquisition for which it received transaction service and
expense payments totaling approximately $1.2 million and $2.4 million, respectively. CGM acted as an advisor for each of
the 2010 acquisitions for which it received transaction service and expense payments totaling approximately $1.6 million.
Sale of common stock to majority shareholder
In connection with the acquisition of CamelBak, the Company issued 1,575,000 of its common shares in a private
placement at the closing price of $12.50 per share on August 23, 2011, to CMH, the Company’s largest shareholder. In
addition, an affiliate of CMH purchased $45 million in 11% convertible preferred stock of CamelBak to facilitate the
acquisition for which the affiliate received 652 shares of common stock of CamelBak. On March 6, 2012, CamelBak
redeemed its 11% convertible preferred stock for $45.3 million plus accrued dividends of $2.7 million, from an affiliate of
CMH ($47.7 million), the Company’s largest shareholder, and noncontrolling shareholders ($0.3 million). The redemption
was funded by intercompany debt and an equity contribution from the Company of $19.2 million and $25.9 million,
respectively. In addition, noncontrolling shareholders of CamelBak invested $2.9 million of equity in order for the
Company and noncontrolling shareholders to maintain existing ownership percentages of CamelBak common stock.
F-40
The Company has entered into the following significant related party transactions with its businesses:
Advanced Circuits
In connection with the acquisition of Advanced Circuits by CGI, Advanced Circuits loaned certain officers and members of
management of Advanced Circuits $8.2 million for the purchase of shares of Advanced Circuit’s common stock in late
2005 and early 2006. The notes bore interest at 6% and interest was added to the notes. Advanced Circuits implemented a
performance incentive program whereby the notes could either be partially or completely forgiven based upon the
achievement of certain pre-defined financial performance targets. The original measurement date for determination of any
potential loan forgiveness was based on the financial performance of Advanced Circuits for the fiscal year ended
December 31, 2010. Advanced Circuits had been accruing loan forgiveness over the service period measured from the
issuance of the notes until the original measurement date of December 31, 2010. However, the Company accelerated the
loan forgiveness to January 2010 and as a result, forgave a portion of the loan balance as described below.
On January 12, 2010, in connection with a 2009 loan forgiveness arrangement referred to above, a portion of the
outstanding loan between the Company and certain members of Advanced Circuits management was repaid with Class A
common stock of Advanced Circuits valued at $47.50 per share ($4.75 million). These same members of Advanced
Circuits management were granted 0.1 million stock options in Advanced Circuits common stock. These options were
fully vested on grant date and as a result Advanced Circuits recorded a $3.8 million non-cash expense during the year
ended December 31, 2010 to selling, general and administrative expense in the consolidated statement of operations.
On December 19, 2012, the Company entered into an amendment to the intercompany loan agreement with Advanced
Circuits (the “ACI Loan Agreement”). The ACI Loan Agreement was amended to provide for additional term loan
borrowings and to permit the proceeds thereof to fund cash distributions totaling $45.0 million by ACI to Compass AC
Holdings, Inc. (“ACH”), ACI’s sole shareholder, and by ACH to its shareholders, including the Company and extend the
maturity dates of the term loans under the ACI Loan Agreement. The Company’s share of the cash distribution was
approximately $31.3 million with approximately $13.7 million being distributed to ACH’s non-controlling shareholders.
All other material terms and conditions of the ACI Loan Agreement were unchanged.
American Furniture
AFM’s largest supplier, Independent Furniture Supply (“Independent”), is 50% owned by Mike Thomas, AFM's previous
CEO who retired in 2012. AFM purchases polyfoam from Independent and AFM performs regular audits to verify market
pricing. AFM does not have any long-term supply contracts with Independent. Total purchases from Independent during
2012, 2011 and 2010 totaled approximately $12.7 million, $14.2 million and $17.6 million, respectively. The Company
had unpaid balances due to Independent of $0.3 million and $1.0 million as of December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011,
respectively.
American Furniture was not in compliance with its Maintenance Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio requirement included in the
amended credit agreement with the Company dated December 31, 2010. The Company is required to fund, in the form of
an additional equity investment, any shortfall in the difference between Adjusted EBITDA and Fixed Charges as defined in
American Furniture’s credit agreement with the Company. Per the maintenance agreement, the shortfall that the Company
is required to fund, American Furniture is in turn required to pay down its term debt with the Company. The amount of the
shortfall at December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011 was approximately $3.5 million and $5.8 million, respectively.
CamelBak
Refer to Note C for discussion of CamelBak preferred stock issuance in 2011 and subsequent redemption in 2012.
Fox
The Company leases manufacturing facilities in Watsonville, California from Robert Fox, a founder and noncontrolling
shareholder of Fox. The term of the lease is through July of 2018 and the rental payments can be adjusted annually for a
cost-of-living increase based upon the consumer price index. Fox is responsible for all real estate taxes, insurance and
maintenance related to this property. The leased facilities are 86,000 square feet and Fox paid rent under this lease of
approximately $1.1 million for each of the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010.
F-41
On December 7, 2011, the Company bought 10,000 shares of Fox common stock from the former CEO and 4,500 shares of
common stock from a former employee of FOX at a price per share equal to $278.10, aggregating approximately $2.8
million and $1.3 million, respectively.
On June 18, 2012, the Company entered into an amendment to the inter-company loan agreement with Fox (the “Fox Loan
Agreement”). The Fox Loan Agreement was amended to (i) provide for term loan borrowings of $60.0 million and an
increase to the revolving loan commitment of $2.0 million and to permit the proceeds thereof to fund cash distributions
totaling $67.0 million by Fox to the Company and to its non-controlling shareholders, (ii) extend the maturity dates of the
term loans under the Fox Loan Agreement, and (iii) modify borrowing rates under the Fox Loan Agreement. The
Company’s share of the cash distribution was approximately $50.7 million with approximately $16.3 million being
distributed to Fox’s non-controlling shareholders. All other material terms and conditions of the Fox Loan Agreement
were unchanged. The table below summarizes the stockholders’ equity impact as a result of the transaction.
Recapitalization proceeds to existing shareholders.......................
Shares purchased from noncontrolling holders..............................
Recapitalization proceeds to option holders.................................
Shares purchased by noncontrolling holders.................................
Tax benefit on options..................................................................
$
$
(13,252)
(10,969)
(3,036)
7,204
4,954
(15,099)
Tridien
On August 8, 2009, the Company exchanged a note due August 15, 2009, totaling approximately $6.9 million (including
accrued interest) due from Mark Bidner, the former CEO of Tridien in exchange for shares of common stock of Tridien
held by the Mr. Bidner. In addition, Mr. Bidner was granted an option to purchase approximately 10% of the outstanding
shares of common stock of Tridien, at a strike price exceeding the exchange price, from the Company in the future for
which Mr. Bidner exchanged Tridien common stock valued at $0.2 million (the fair value of the option at the date of grant)
as consideration.
The Company leases two facilities from noncontrolling shareholders of Tridien. The term of the leases are through
September of 2013 and February of 2014. Tridien paid rent under these leases of approximately $0.7 million for the year
ended December 31, 2012. Tridien paid rent under these leases of approximately $0.9 million for each of the years ended
December 31, 2011 and 2010. A noncontrolling shareholder sold the building being leased by Tridien in California in July
2012.
On August 28, 2012, the Company purchased shares of stock of Tridien from a group of Tridien’s noncontrolling
shareholders for an aggregate purchase price of approximately $1.9 million.
F-42
Note Q – Defined Benefit Plan
In connection with the acquisition of Arnold, the Company has a defined benefit plan covering substantially all of Arnold’s
employees at its Lupfig, Switzerland location. The benefits are based on years of service and the employees’ highest
average compensation during the specific period. The following table sets forth the plan's funded status and amounts
recognized in the Company's consolidated balance sheets at December 31, 2012.
Change in benefit obligation:
Benefit obligation, acquisition date
Service cost
Interest cost
Actuarial loss
Employee contributions and transfer
Benefits paid
Foreign currency translation
Benefit obligation
Change in plan assets:
Fair value of assets, acquisition date
Actual return on plan assets
Company contribution
Employee contributions and transfer
Benefits paid
Foreign currency translation
Fair value of assets
Date of acquisition
through
December 31, 2012
$
15,586
391
316
47
342
(2,110)
(177)
14,395
$
14,309
88
414
342
(2,110)
(162)
12,881
Funded status
$
(1,514)
The unfunded liability of $1.5 million is recognized in the consolidated balance sheet within other non-current liabilities at
December 31, 2012. Net periodic benefit cost consists of the following at December 31, 2012:
Date of acquisition
through
December 31, 2012
Service cost
Interest cost
Expected return on plan assets
Net periodic benefit cost
$
$
391
316
(180)
527
Assumptions used to determine the benefit obligations and components of the net periodic benefit cost at December 31,
2012:
Discount rate
Expected return on plan assets
Rate of compensation increase
December 31, 2012
2.00%
2.00%
1.00%
The Company considers the historical level of long-term returns and the current level of expected long-term returns for the
plan assets, as well as the current and expected allocation of assets when developing its expected long-term rate of return
on assets assumption. The assumptions used for the plan are based upon customary rates and practices for the location of
the Company.
The Company, for 2013, will be contributing per the terms of the agreement, and the expected contribution to the plan will
be approximately $0.5 million.
The following presents the benefit payments which are expected to be paid for the plan:
F-43
Jan. 1, 2013 through Dec. 31, 2013
Jan. 1, 2014 through Dec. 31, 2014
Jan. 1, 2015 through Dec. 31, 2015
Jan. 1, 2016 through Dec. 31, 2016
Jan. 1, 2017 through Dec. 31, 2017
Jan. 1, 2018 and thereafter
$
735
590
505
560
1,142
3,779
Asset management objectives include maintaining an adequate level of diversification to reduce interest rate and market
risk and providing adequate liquidity to meet immediate and future benefit payment requirements.
The assets of the plan are reinsured in their entirety with Swiss Life Ltd. (“Swiss Life”) within the framework of the
corresponding contracts with Swiss Life Collective BVG Foundation and Swiss Life Complementary Foundation. The
assets are guaranteed by the insurance company and pooled with the assets of other participating employers. The
breakdown of the allocation of assets in Swiss Life’s group life portfolio is as follows at the date of acquisition:
Certificates of deposit and cash and cash equivalents.....................
Fixed income bonds and securities...................................................
Private equity and hedge funds........................................................
Real estate........................................................................................
Equity and other investments..........................................................
Acquisition Date
Allocation
78%
7%
1%
11%
3%
100%
The plan assets are pooled with assets of other participating employers and are not separable; therefore the fair values of
the pension plan assets at December 31, 2012 were considered Level 3.
F-44
SCHEDULE II –Valuation and Qualifying Accounts
(in thousands)
Balance at
beginning
of year
Additions
Charge to costs
and expense
Other
Deductions
Balance at
end of Year
Allowance for doubtful accounts - 2010
$ 1,572
$ 1,193
$ 400 (1) $ 1,037
$ 2,128
Allowance for doubtful accounts - 2011
$ 2,128
$ 1,021
$ 557 (1) $ 1,286
$ 2,420
Allowance for doubtful accounts - 2012
$ 2,420
$ 1,796
$ 365 (1) $ 1,532
$ 3,049
Valuation allowance for deferred tax assets - 2010
$ -
$ -
$ -
$ -
$ -
Valuation allowance for deferred tax assets - 2011
$ -
$ 6,269
$ -
$ -
$ 6,269
Valuation allowance for deferred tax assets - 2012
$ 6,269
$ 1,293
$ 1,350 (1) $ -
$ 8,912
(1) Represents opening allowance balances related to current year acquisitions.
S-1
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
Exhibit
Number
Description
INDEX TO EXHIBITS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
4.1
4.2
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
Stock and Note Purchase Agreement dated as of July 31, 2006, among Compass Group Diversified Holdings
LLC, Compass Group Investments, Inc. and Compass Medical Mattress Partners, LP (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 2.1 of the 8-K filed on August 1, 2006)
Stock Purchase Agreement dated June 24, 2008, among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC and the
other shareholders party thereto, Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, as Sellers’ Representative,
Aeroglide Holdings, Inc. and Bühler AG (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 2.1 of the 8-K filed on June 26,
2008)
Stock Purchase Agreement, dated October 17, 2011, by and among Recruit Co., LTD. and RGF Staffing
USA, Inc., as Buyers, the shareholders of Staffmark Holdings, Inc., as Sellers, Staffmark Holdings, Inc. and
Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC as Seller Representative (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 2.1
of the Form 8-K filed on October 18, 2011.
Stock Purchase Agreement dated May 1, 2012, among Candlelight Investment Holdings, Inc., Halo Holding
Corporation, Halo Lee Wayne, LLC and each of the holders of equity interests of Halo Lee Wayne, LLC
listed on Exhibit A thereto (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 2.1 of the Form 8-K filed on May 2, 2012)
Certificate of Trust of Compass Diversified Trust (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.1 of the S-1 filed on
December 14, 2005)
Certificate of Amendment to Certificate of Trust of Compass Diversified Trust (incorporated by reference to
Exhibit 3.1 of the 8-K filed on September 13, 2007)
Certificate of Formation of Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC (incorporated by reference to Exhibit
3.3 of the S-1 filed on December 14, 2005)
Amended and Restated Trust Agreement of Compass Diversified Trust (incorporated by reference to Exhibit
3.5 of the Amendment No. 4 to S-1 filed on April 26, 2006)
Amendment No. 1 to the Amended and Restated Trust Agreement, dated as of April 25, 2006, of Compass
Diversified Trust among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, as Sponsor, The Bank of New York
(Delaware), as Delaware Trustee, and the Regular Trustees named therein (incorporated by reference to
Exhibit 4.1 of the 8-K filed on May 29, 2007)
Second Amendment to the Amended and Restated Trust Agreement, dated as of April 25, 2006, as amended
on May 23, 2007, of Compass Diversified Trust among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, as
Sponsor, The Bank of New York (Delaware), as Delaware Trustee, and the Regular Trustees named therein
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.2 of the 8-K filed on September 13, 2007)
Third Amendment to the Amended and Restated Trust Agreement dated as of April 25, 2006, as amended on
May 25, 2007 and September 14, 2007, of Compass Diversified Holdings among Compass Group Diversified
Holdings LLC, as Sponsor, The Bank of New York (Delaware), as Delaware Trustee, and the Regular
Trustees named therein (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.1 of the 8-K filed on December 21, 2007)
Fourth Amendment dated as of November 1, 2010 to the Amended and Restated Trust Agreement, as
amended effective November 1, 2010, of Compass Diversified Holdings, originally effective as of April 25,
2006, by and among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, as Sponsor, The Bank of New York
(Delaware), as Delaware Trustee, and the Regular Trustees named therein (incorporated by reference to
Exhibit 3.1 of the Form 10-Q filed on November 8, 2010)
Second Amended and Restated Operating Agreement of Compass Group Diversified Holdings, LLC dated
January 9, 2007 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2 of the 8-K filed on January 10, 2007)
Third Amended and Restated Operating Agreement of Compass Group Diversified Holdings, LLC dated
November 1, 2010 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.2 of the Form 10-Q filed on November 8, 2010)
Specimen Certificate evidencing a share of trust of Compass Diversified Holdings (incorporated by reference
to Exhibit 4.1 of the S-3 filed on November 7, 2007)
Specimen LLC Interest Certificate evidencing an interest of Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2 of the 8-K filed on January 10, 2007)
Form of Registration Rights Agreement (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.3 of the Amendment No. 5 to
S-1 filed on May 5, 2006)
Form of Supplemental Put Agreement by and between Compass Group Management LLC and Compass
Group Diversified Holdings LLC (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.4 of the Amendment No. 4 to S-1
filed on April 26, 2006)
Amended and Restated Employment Agreement dated as of December 1, 2008 by and between James J.
Bottiglieri and Compass Group Management LLC (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of the 8-K filed
on December 3, 2008)
Form of Share Purchase Agreement by and between Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, Compass
Diversified Trust and CGI Diversified Holdings, LP (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.6 of the
E-1
10.5
10.06
10.07
10.08
10.09
10.10
10.11
10.12
10.13
21.1*
23.1*
31.1*
31.2*
32.1*
32.2*
99.1
99.2
99.3
99.4
99.5
99.6
99.7
99.8
Amendment No. 5 to S-1 filed on May 5, 2006)
Form of Share Purchase Agreement by and between Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, Compass
Diversified Trust and Pharos I LLC (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.7 of the Amendment No. 5 to S-1
filed on May 5, 2006)
Amended and Restated Management Services Agreement by and between Compass Group Diversified
Holdings LLC, and Compass Group Management LLC, dated as of December 20, 2011 and originally
effective as of May 16, 2006 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.06 of the Form 10-K filed on March 7,
2012)
Registration Rights Agreement by and among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, Compass
Diversified Trust and CGI Diversified Holdings, LP, dated as of April 3, 2007 (incorporated by reference to
Exhibit 10.3 of the Amendment No. 1 to the S-1 filed on April 20, 2007)
Share Purchase Agreement by and between Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, Compass Diversified
Trust and CGI Diversified Holdings, LP, dated as of April 3, 2007 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.16
of the Amendment No. 1 to the S-1 filed on April 20, 2007)
Subscription Agreement dated August 24, 2011, by and among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC,
Compass Diversified Holdings and CGI Magyar Holdings, LLC (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of
the Form 8-K filed on August 25, 2011)
Registration Rights Agreement dated August 24, 2011, by and among Compass Group Diversified Holdings
LLC, Compass Diversified Holdings and CGI Magyar Holdings, LLC (incorporated by reference to Exhibit
10.2 of the Form 8-K filed on August 25, 2011)
Credit Agreement dated as of October 27, 2011, by and among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC,
the financial institutions party thereto and Toronto Dominion (Texas) LLC (incorporated by reference to
Exhibit 10.1 to the Form 8-K filed on October 27, 2011)
Second Amendment to Credit Agreement among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, the financial
institutions party thereto and Toronto Dominion (Texas) LLC, dated as of April 2, 2012 (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 10.1 to the Form 8-K filed on April 3, 2012)
Incremental Facility Amendment to Credit Agreement among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC and
Toronto Dominion (Texas) LLC, dated as of April 2, 2012 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2 to the
Form 8-K filed on April 3, 2012)
List of Subsidiaries
Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
Rule 13a-14(a)/15d-14(a) Certification of Chief Executive Officer of Registrant
Rule 13a-14(a)/15d-14(a) Certification of Chief Financial Officer of Registrant
Section 1350 Certification of Chief Executive Officer of Registrant
Section 1350 Certification of Chief Financial Officer of Registrant
Note Purchase and Sale Agreement dated as of July 31, 2006 among Compass Group Diversified Holdings
LLC, Compass Group Investments, Inc. and Compass Medical Mattress Partners, LP (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the 8-K filed on August 1, 2006)
Stock Purchase Agreement, dated as of February 28, 2007, by and between HA-LO Holdings, LLC and
HALO Holding Corporation (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 99.3 of the 8-K filed on March 1, 2007)
Purchase Agreement dated December 19, 2007, among CBS Personnel Holdings, Inc. and Staffing Holding
LLC, Staffmark Merger LLC, Staffmark Investment LLC, SF Holding Corp., and Stephens-SM LLC
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the 8-K filed on December 20, 2007)
Share Purchase Agreement dated January 4, 2008, among Fox Factory Holding Corp., Fox Factory, Inc. and
Robert C. Fox, Jr. (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the 8-K filed on January 8, 2008)
Stock Purchase Agreement dated May 8, 2008, among Mitsui Chemicals, Inc., Silvue Technologies Group,
Inc., the stockholders of Silvue Technologies Group, Inc. and the holders of Options listed on the signature
pages thereto, and Compass Group Management LLC, as the Stockholders Representative (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the 8-K filed on May 9, 2008)
Stock Purchase Agreement dated March 31, 2010 by and among Gable 5, Inc., Liberty Safe and Security
Products, LLC and Liberty Safe Holding Corporation (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the 8-K
filed on April 1, 2010)
Stock Purchase Agreement dated September 16, 2010, by and among ERGO Baby Intermediate Holding
Corporation, The ERGO Baby Carrier, Inc., Karin A. Frost, in her individual capacity and as Trustee of the
Revocable Trust of Karin A. Frost dated February 22, 2008 and as Trustee of the Karin A. Frost 2009
Qualified Annuity Trust u/a/d 12/21/2009 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the 8-K filed on
September 17, 2010)
Securities Purchase Agreement dated August 24, 2011, by and among CBK Holdings, LLC, CamelBak
Products, LLC, CamelBak Acquisition Corp., for purposes of Section 6.15 and Articles 10 only, Compass
Group Diversified Holdings LLC, and for purposes of Section 6.13 and Article 10 only, IPC/CamelBak LLC
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the Form 8-K filed on August 25, 2011)
E-2
99.9
101.INS*
101.SCH*
101.CAL*
101.DEF*
101.LAB*
101.PRE*
Stock Purchase Agreement dated as of March 5, 2012, by and among Arnold Magnetic Technologies
Holdings Corporation, Arnold Magnetic Technologies, LLC and AMT Acquisition Corp. (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the Form 8-K filed on March 6, 2012)
XBRL Instance Document
XBRL Taxonomy Extension Schema Document
XBRL Taxonomy Extension Calculation Linkbase Document
XBRL Taxonomy Extension Definition Linkbase Document
XBRL Taxonomy Extension Label Linkbase Document
XBRL Taxonomy Extension Presentation Linkbase Document
*
Filed herewith.
E-3
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
COmpany HeaDquaRTeRS
61 WILTOn ROaD, SeCOnD FLOOR
WeSTpORT, CT 06880, (203) 221-1703
InDepenDenT auDITORS
GRanT THORnTOn LLp, neW yORk, ny
COmmOn STOCk LISTInG
nySe TICkeR: CODI
TRanSFeR aGenT
COmpuTeRSHaRe
480 WaSHInGTOn BOuLevaRD
JeRSey CITy, nJ 07310
InveSTOR ReLaTIOnS COnTaCT
LeOn BeRman, THe IGB GROup
(212) 477-8438, LBeRman@IGBIR.COm
annuaL meeTInG OF SHaReHOLDeRS
may 29, 2013, 9:00 a.m., eST
DeLamaR SOuTHpORT
275 OLD pOST ROaD, SOuTHpORT, COnneCTICuT 06890
WeBSITe
WWW.COmpaSSDIveRSIFIeDHOLDInGS.COm
C O M P A S S D I V E R S I F I E D H O L D I N G S
61 Wilton Road Westport, CT 06880
www.compassdiversifiedholdings.com